Sony DCR-IP5, DCR-IP5E, DCR-IP7BT, DCR-IP7E Service manual

Download

Page 1

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

RMT-817/818

Ver 1.1 2001. 12

SERVICE MANUALSERVICE MANUAL

Level 2

Photo : DCR-IP7E

RMT-817

On the VC-263 board

This service manual provides the information that is premised the circuit board replacement service and not intended repair inside the VC-263 board. Therefore, schematic diagram, printed wiring board, waveforms, parts location and electrical parts list of the VC-263 board are not shown. The following pages are not shown.

Printed wiring board .....................................Pages 4-11 to 4-14

Schematic diagram ...................................... Pages 4-15 to 4-50

Waveforms and Mounted parts location ...... Pages 4-77 to 4-78

Electrical parts list ........................................Pages 6-13 to 6-24

US Model

Canadian Model

DCR-IP5/IP7BT

AEP Model

UK Model

DCR-IP5E/IP7E

E Model

Hong Kong Model

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7E

Tourist Model

DCR-IP5/IP5E

Australian Model

DCR-IP7E

Korea Model

DCR-IP5

V MECHANISM

For MECHANISM ADJUSTMENTS, refer to the “MICRO MV MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT MANUAL 1 V MECHANISM ” (9-929-911-11). For “Section 5. ADJUSTMENTS”, refer to Service Manual Supplement-1 (9-929-923-81).

NTSC model : DCR-IP5/IP7BT PAL model : DCR-IP5E/IP7E

Video camera recorder

System

Video recording system

2 rotary heads Helical scanning system

Audio recording system

Rotary heads, PCM system Quantization: 12 bits (Fs 48 kHz, stereo)

Video signal

DCR-IP5/IP7BT: NTSC color, EIA standards DCR-IP5E/IP7E: PAL colour, CCIR standards

Usable cassette

MICROMV cassette with the mark printed

Tape speed

Approx. 5.66 mm/s

Recording/playback time (using cassette MGR60)

1 hour

Fastforward/rewind time (using cassette MGR60)

Approx. 1 min and 30 s

Viewfinder

Electric viewfinder (colour)

SPECIFICATIONS

Image device

3.0 mm (1/6 type) CCD (Charge Coupled Device) DCR-IP5/IP7BT: Approx. 680 000 pixels (Effective: 340 000 pixels) DCR-IP5E/IP7E: Approx. 800 000 pixels (Effective: 400 000 pixels)

Lens

Carl Zeiss Combined power zoom lens Filter diameter 30 mm. (1 3/16 in.) 10× (Optical), 120× (Digital)

Focal length

2.3 - 23 mm (3/32 - 29/32 in.) When converted to a 35 mm still camera 44 - 440 mm (1 3/4 17 3/8 in.)

Colour temperature

Auto, HOLD (Hold), (3 200 K),

Minimum illumination

7 lx (lux) (F 1.7)

Outdoor (5 800 K)

Indoor

Input/Output connectors

Audio/Video input/output

10-pin connector Input/output auto switch Video signal: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω (ohms), unbalanced, sync negative Luminance signal: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω (ohms), unbalanced DCR-IP5/IP7BT: Chrominance signal: 0.286 Vp-p, 75 Ω (ohms), unbalanced DCR-IP5E/IP7E: Chrominance signal: 0.3 Vp-p, 75 Ω (ohms), unbalanced Audio signal: 327 mV, (at output impedance more than 47 kΩ (kilohms) ) Input impedance with more than 47 kΩ (kilohms) Output impedance with less than

2.2 kΩ (kilohms)

USB jack

mini-B

i.LINK (MICROMV) input/output

4-pin connector S400

LCD screen

Picture

6.2 cm (2.5 type) 50 × 37 mm (2 × 1 1/2 in.) Total dot number: 211 200 (960 × 220)

Wireless communication (DCR-IP7BT/IP7E only)

Communication system

Bluetooth specification Ver. 1.1

Maximum communication

1) 2)

speed

Approx. 723 kbps

Maximum output

Bluetooth specification Power Class2

Communication distance

Approx. 10 m (33 feet) (Open space, when using a Sony BTA-NW1 Modem Adaptor with Bluetooth Function)

— Continued on next page —

DIGITAL VIDEO CAMERA RECORDER

Page 2

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Compatible Bluetooth profiles

Generic Access Profile Dial-up Networking Profile

Usable frequency band

2.4 GHz band (2.400 – 2.4835 GHz)

1)The maximum rate defined by Bluetooth specification Ver. 1.1

2)Depends on obstacles between the Bluetooth devices, radio wave conditions, etc.

3)Defined by Bluetooth specification for intended use between the Bluetooth devices

General

Power requirements

7.2 V (battery pack)

8.4 V (AC power adaptor)

Average power consumption (when using the battery pack)

During camera recording using the viewfinder (brightness normal)

3.5 W

During camera recording using the LCD (Backlighting on) 4.2 W During camera recording using the LCD (Backlighting off) 3.5 W

Operating temperature

0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)

Storage temperature

–20°C to +60°C (–4°F to +140°F)

Dimensions (approx.)

47× 103 × 80 mm (1 7/8 × 4 × 3 1/8 in.) (w/h/d) (excluding protruding parts)

Mass (approx.)

310 g (10 oz) Main unit only 370 g (13 oz) including the battery pack, NP-FF50, cassette MGR60, lens cap, and list strap

Supplied accessories

See page 3.

AC power adaptor AC-L20A

Power requirements

100 - 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz

Power consumption

23 W

Output voltage

DC OUT: 8.4 V, 1.5 A in the operating mode

Operating temperature

0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)

Storage temperature

–20°C to +60°C (–4°F to +140°F)

Dimensions (approx.)

125 × 39 × 62 mm (5 × 1 9/16 ×2 1/2 in.) (w/h/d) excluding (projecting parts) mains lead

Mass (approx.)

280 g (9.8 oz) excluding the mains lead

Battery pack NP-FF50

Maximum output voltage

DC 8.4 V

Output voltage

DC 7.2 V

Capacity

4.8 Wh (675 mAh)

Operating temperature

0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)

Dimensions (approx.)

40.8 × 12.5 × 49.1 mm (1 5/8 × 1/2 × 1 15/16 in.) (w/h/d)

Mass (approx.)

45 g (1.6 oz)

Type

Lithium ion

“Memory Stick” (DCR-IP7BT/IP7E only)

Memory

Flash memory 8 MB: MSA-8A

Operating voltage

2.7-3.6 V

Power consumption

Approx. 45 mA in the operating mode Approx. 130 µA in the standby mode

Dimensions (approx.)

50 × 2.8 × 21.5 mm (2 × 1/8 × 7/8 in.) (w/h/d)

Mass (approx.)

4 g (0.14 oz)

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!!

COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY MARK 0 OR DOTTED LINE WITH MARK 0 ON THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND IN THE PARTS LIST ARE CRITICAL TO SAFE OPERATION. REPLACE THESE COMPONENTS WITH SONY PARTS WHOSE PART NUMBERS APPEAR AS SHOWN IN THIS MANUAL OR IN SUPPLEMENTS PUBLISHED BY SONY.

SAFETY CHECK-OUT

After correcting the original service problem, perform the following safety checks before releasing the set to the customer.

1. Check the area of your repair for unsoldered or poorly-soldered

connections. Check the entire board surface for solder splashes and bridges.

2. Check the interboard wiring to ensure that no wires are

"pinched" or contact high-wattage resistors.

3. Look for unauthorized replacement parts, particularly

transistors, that were installed during a previous repair . Point them out to the customer and recommend their replacement.

ATTENTION AU COMPOSANT AYANT RAPPORT

À LA SÉCURITÉ! LES COMPOSANTS IDENTIFÉS P AR UNE MARQUE 0 SUR LES DIAGRAMMES SCHÉMA TIQUES ET LA LISTE DES PIÈCES SONT CRITIQUES POUR LA SÉCURITÉ DE FONCTIONNEMENT. NE REMPLACER CES COMPOSANTS QUE PAR DES PIÈSES SONY DONT LES NUMÉROS SONT DONNÉS DANS CE MANUEL OU DANS LES SUPPÉMENTS PUBLIÉS PAR SONY.

4. Look for parts which, through functioning, show obvious signs

of deterioration. Point them out to the customer and recommend their replacement.

5. Check the B+ voltage to see it is at the values specified.

6. Flexible Circuit Board Repairing

• Keep the temperature of the soldering iron around 270˚C during repairing.

• Do not touch the soldering iron on the same conductor of the circuit board (within 3 times).

• Be careful not to apply force on the conductor when soldering or unsoldering.

— 2 —

Page 3

• SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES

Make sure that the following accessories are supplied with your camcorder .

RMT-817

RMT-818

89q;

qs qd qf

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

1 Wireless Remote Commander (1)

RMT-817: DCR-IP7BT/IP7E RMT-818: DCR-IP5/IP5E

2 AC-L20A AC power adaptor (1), the

power cord (1)

3 NP-FF50 battery pack (1) 4 Size AA (R6) batteries for the Remote

Commander (2)

5 USB cable* (1) 6 “Memory Stick”* (1) 7 A/V connecting cable (1) 8 i.LINK cable (1) 9 Lens cap (1) 0 CD-ROM (SPVD-004 (I/P) USB Driver)* (1) qa CD-ROM (Movie Shaker Ver. 3.1 for

MICROMV) (1)

qs Battery terminal cover (1) qd BTA-NW1 Modem Adaptor with

Bluetooth Function** (1)

qf MDM-5614G Modem card** (1) qg Modem cable** (1) qh AC-PT1 AC power adaptor** (1) qj Size AA (R6) alkaline dry batteries for

Modem Adaptor with Bluetooth Function** (2)

qk 2-pin conversion adaptor

DCR-IP5: JE/IP5E: JE only

ql 2-pin conversion adaptor

DCR-IP5: E, HK/IP5E: E, HK/IP7E: E, HK only

w; 21-pin adaptor

AEP, UK model only

* DCR-IP7BT/IP7E only. ** DCR-IP7BT only. For details, refer to

the operating instructions of the Modem Adaptor with Bluetooth Function.

(1)

Table for difference of functions

Model Destination

Color system

DCR-IP5

US, CND, E, HK, KR, JE

NTSC Remote commander Memory mode Memory stick USB connector NETWORK (Bluetooth)

(BT-003 board)

• Abbreviation CND : Canadian model HK : Hong Kong model AUS : Australian model KR : Korea model JE : Tourist model

DCR-IP5E

AEP, UK, E, HK, JE

RMT-818

✕ ✕ ✕

PAL

DCR-IP7BT

US, CND

NTSC

— 3 —

DCR-IP7E

AEP, UK, E, AUS, HK

RMT-817

a a a

Remark

PAL

a: with IC1601, 1602, 1605,

1606, 1801, 1802, 1803 of VC-263 board

a: with BT-003 board

Page 4

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SERVICE NOTE

1. POWER SUPPLY DURING REPAIRS ····························· 6

2. TO TAKE OUT A CASSETTE WHEN NOT EJECT (FORCE EJECT) ································································ 6

SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION

1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION······································· 7

2. SELF-DIAGNOSIS DISPLAY ·········································· 7

3. SERVICE MODE DISPLAY ············································· 7

3-1. Display Method ·································································· 7 3-2. Backup No. ········································································· 7 3-3. End of Display····································································7

4. SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE TABLE··································· 8

1. GENERAL

Main Features ············································································1-1 Introduction – Basic operations·················································1-1 Quick Start Guide ······································································1-2 Getting started

Using this manual ··································································1-3 Checking supplied accessories ·············································· 1-3 Step 1 Preparing the power supply ········································1-4 Installing the battery pack··················································· 1-4 Charging the battery pack ···················································1-4 Connecting to the mains ·····················································1-5 Step 2 Setting the date and time ············································ 1-6 Step 3 Inserting a cassette······················································1-7

Recording – Basics

Recording a picture································································1-7 Shooting backlit subjects – BACK LIGHT ························1-9 Self-timer recording··························································1-10 Checking the recording – END SEARCH···························1-10

Playback – Basics

Playing back a tape ······························································1-10 Viewing the recording on the TV screen ····························· 1-12

Advanced Recording Operations

Recording a still image on a tape – Tape Photo recording ··1-13 Using the wide mode ···························································1-14 Using the fader function ······················································1-14 Using special effects – Picture effect···································1-15 Using special effects – Digital effect···································1-15 Using the PROGRAM AE function ·····································1-16 Adjusting the white balance manually································· 1-17 Adjusting the exposure manually ········································1-18 Focusing manually·······························································1-18

Advanced Playback Operations

Playing back a tape with picture effects ······························1-19 Playing back a tape with digital effects ·······························1-19 Searching for a scene – Multi-picture search ······················ 1-20 Searching the boundaries of recorded tape by title – Title search····································································· 1-21 Searching a recording by date – Date search·······················1-21 Searching for a photo – Photo search ··································1-22

Editing

Dubbing a tape ·····································································1-22 Recording a programme ······················································ 1-23 Superimposing a title ···························································1-25 Making your own titles ························································1-27 The Micro Cassette Memory ···············································1-28

Customizing Y our Camcorder

Changing the menu settings·················································1-29

“Memory Stick” Operations – DCR-IP7BT/IP7E only

Using a “Memory Stick” – introduction ······························1-30 Recording still images on a “Memory Stick” – Memory Photo recording ···············································1-34 Recording an image from a tape as a still image ·················1-35

Recording moving pictures on a “Memory Stick” – MPEG movie recording ·················································1-36 Recording a picture from a tape as a moving picture ··········1-37 Superimposing a still image in a “Memory Stick” on a moving picture – MEMORY MIX ···································1-38 Copying still images from a tape – Photo save····················1-39 Viewing a still image – Memory photo playback ················ 1-40 Viewing a moving picture – MPEG movie playback ··········1-41 Dubbing images recorded on the “Memory Stick” onto the tape··············································································1-42 Enlarging still images recorded on a “Memory Stick” – Memory PB ZOOM ·······················································1-43 Playing back images in a continuous loop – SLIDE SHOW · Preventing accidental erasure – Image protection ···············1-44 Deleting images ··································································· 1-44 Writing a print mark – PRINT MARK································1-46

Connecting with a computer

Viewing images recorded on a tape using your computer ···1-46 Viewing images recorded on a “Memory Stick” using your computer – DCR-IP7BT/IP7E only ·························1-47

Network operation – DCR-IP7BT/IP7E only

Accessing the network ·························································1-49

Troubleshooting

Types of trouble and their solutions ·····································1-49 Self-diagnosis display ··························································1-51 Warning indicators and messages ········································1-51

Additional Information

Compatible cassettes····························································1-51 About the “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack····························· 1-52 About i.LINK·······································································1-52 Using your camcorder abroad··············································1-53 Maintenance information and precautions···························1-53

Quick Reference

Identifying the parts and controls ········································ 1-55

1-43

2. DISASSEMBLY

2-1. LCD SECTION (PD-142 BOARD) ································2-2 2-2. CABINET (R) SECTION ···············································2-3 2-3. LENS SECTION (LD-105 BOARD)······························2-4 2-4. VC-263 BOARD ·····························································2-6 2-5. MECHANISM DECK····················································· 2-8 2-6. EVF SECTION (VF-149 BOARD)·································2-9 2-7.

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (CF-1900), SPEAKER · 2-8. JK-209 BOARD ····························································2-11 2-9. PARTS UNIT (HINGE) ················································ 2-12 2-10. BT-003 BOARD (IP7BT/IP7E),

CABINET (L) ASSEMBLY··········································2-13 2-11. GRIP CABINET ASSEMBLY,

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (FK-1900) ···················2-13 2-12. CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION ·································2-14 2-13. FLEXIBLE BOARDS LOCATION ······························2-15

2-10

3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS

3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/5) ···························3-1 3-2. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2) ···························3-3 3-3. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/5) ···························3-5 3-4. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (4/5) ···························3-7 3-5. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (5/5) ···························3-9 3-6. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/3)······························3-11 3-7. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/3)······························3-13 3-8. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/3)······························3-16

4. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/2) ·······················4-1

FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (2/2) ·······················4-3

— 4 —

Page 5

4-2. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS ············································4-5

• LD-105 (CCD IMAGER) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ······························4-7

• CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (CF-1900) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ······························4-9

Shematic diagram and printed wiring board of the VC-263 board are not shown. Pages from 4-11 to 4-50 are not shown.

• FP-140 (TAPE TOP/END SENSOR),

FP-141 (MODE SWITCH), FP-228 (DEW SENSOR)

FLEXIBLE BOARDS AND

DH-037 (MIC) BOARD ·············································4-51

• CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (FK-1900) PRINTED WIRING BOARD AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ····························4-53

• VF-149 (B/W EVF) PRINTED WIRING BOARD ·······················4-55

• VF-149 (B/W EVF)(1/2) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ····························4-59

• VF-149 (BACK LIGHT)(2/2) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ····························4-61

• JK-209 (JACK) PRINTED WIRING BOARD ·······················4-63

• JK-209 (JACK, CHARGE) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ····························4-65

• FP-366 PRINTED WIRING BOARD ·······················4-67

• FP-366 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ····························4-69

• PD-142 (RGB DRIVE, TIMING GENERATOR) PRINTED WIRING BOARD ·······················4-71

• PD-142 (RGB DRIVE, TIMING GENERATOR) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ····························4-73

4-3. WAVEFORMS ······························································4-75

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Waveforms and Mounted parts location of the VC-263 board are not shown. Pages from 4-77 to 4-78 are not shown.

4-4. MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION ·································4-79

5. ADJUSTMENTS

Refer to Service Manual Supplement-1 (9-929-923-81).

6. REPAIR PARTS LIST

6-1. EXPLODED VIEWS ······················································ 6-1 6-1-1.OVERALL SECTION·····················································6-1 6-1-2.CABINET (R) SECTION-1 ············································6-2 6-1-3.CABINET (R) SECTION-2 (LCD SECTION)···············6-3 6-1-4.LENS-EVF SECTION ····················································6-4 6-1-5.G CABINET SECTION ··················································6-5 6-1-6.CABINET (L) SECTION················································6-6 6-1-7.OVERALL MECHANISM DECK SECTION (V100)···6-7 6-1-8.LS CHASSIS BLOCK ASSEMBLY·······························6-8 6-1-9.MECHANISM CHASSIS BLOCK ASSEMBLY ···········6-9 6-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST ········································6-10

Parts list of the VC-263 board are not shown. Pages from 6-13 to 6-24 are not shown.

* Optical axis frame and color reproduction frame are

shown on pages 152 and 153.

— 5 —

Page 6

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

SERVICE NOTE

1. POWER SUPPLY DURING REPAIRS

In this unit, about 10 seconds after power is supplied to the battery terminal using the regulated po wer supply (8.4V), the power is shut of f so that the unit cannot operate. These following two methods are available to prevent this. Take note of which to use during repairs.

Method 1.

Use the AC power adaptor (AC-L20, AC-VF50).

Method 2.

Connect the servicing remote commander RM-95 (J-6082-053-B) to the A/V jack, and set the commander switch to the “ADJ” side.

2. TO TAKE OUT A CASSETTE WHEN NOT EJECT (FORCE EJECT)

1 Refer to 2-2 to remove the cabinet (R) assembly. 2 Disconnect CN2009 (31P, 0.3mm) of VC-263 board. 3 Open the cassette lid. 4 Supply +4.5V from the regulated power supply to the loading motor and unload with a pressing the cassette compartment.

Loading motor

Regulated power supply

(+4.5Vdc)

CN2009

VC-263 board

— 6 —

Page 7

SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION

When problems occur while the unit is operating, the self-diagnosis function starts working, and displays on the viewfinder or LCD screen what to do. This function consists of two display; selfdiagnosis display and service mode display . Details of the self-diagnosis functions are provided in the Instruction manual.

Viewfinder or LCD screen

C : 3 1 : 1 1

Repaired by:

C : Corrected by customer H : Corrected by dealer E : Corrected by service

engineer

Blinks at 3.2Hz

3 1C

Block

Indicates the appropriate step to be taken. E.g.

31 ....Reload the tape.

32 ....Turn o n power again.

1 1

2. SELF-DIAGNOSIS DISPLAY

When problems occur while the unit is operating, the counter of the viewfinder or LCD screen consists of an alphabet and 4-digit numbers, which blinks at 3.2 Hz. This 5-character display indicates the “repaired by:”, “block” in which the problem occurred, and “detailed code” of the problem.

Detailed Code

Refer to page 8. Self-diagnosis Code Table.

3. SERVICE MODE DISPLAY

The service mode display shows the last self-diagnosis codes shown in the past.

3-1. Display Method

While pressing the “BACK LIGHT” key, set the switch from OFF to ON, and continue pressing the “BACK LIGHT” key for 5 seconds continuously. The service mode will be displayed, and the counter will show the backup No. and the 5-character self-diagnosis codes.

3-2. Backup No.

Viewfinder or LCD screen

[3] C : 3 1 : 1 1

Lights up

[3]

Backup No.

Order of previous errors

The backup No. in the [] indicates the order in which the problem occurred. (If the number of problems which occurred is less than 6, only the number of problems which occurred will be shown.) [1] : Occurred first time [4] : Occurred fourth time [2] : Occurred second time [5] : Occurred fifth time [3] : Occurred third time [6] : Occurred the last time

Note: Switching of the backup No. can’t be done.

C : 3 1 : 1 1

Self-diagnosis Codes

3-3. End of Display

Turning OFF the power supply will end the service mode display.

Note: The “self-diagnosis display” data will be backed up by the coin-type lithium battery of control switch block (FK-1900) BT001. When CN2024 of

VC-263 board is disconnected, the “self-diagnosis display” data will be lost by initialization.

— 7 —

Page 8

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

4. SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE TABLE

Self-diagnosis Code

Function

Repaired by:

C C C

C C

C C C C C C C C C

Block

04 21 22

31 31

31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31

Detailed

Code

00 00 00

11 20

21 22 23 31 32 40 41 42 43

Symptom/State

Non-standard battery is used. Condensation. Video head is dirty. LOAD direction. Loading does not

complete within specified time UNLOAD direction. Loading does not

complete within specified time T reel side tape slacking when unloading Winding S reel fault when unloading. T reel fault. S reel fault. FG fault during capstan operations. Capstan reverse rotation. FG fault when starting drum. PG fault FG fault during normal drum operations. PG fault during normal drum operations. LOAD direction loading motor time-

out. UNLOAD direction loading motor

time-out. T reel side tape slacking when

unloading. Winding S reel fault when unloading.

T reel fault.

S reel fault.

FG fault during capstan operations

Captan reverse operations

FG fault when starting drum

PG fault when starting drum FG fault during normal drum

operations PG fault during normal drum

operations

Difficult to adjust focus (Cannot initialize focus.)

Zoom operations fault (Cannot initialize zoom lens.)

when starting drum.

Correction

Use the info LITHIUM battery. Remove the cassette, and insert it again after one hour. Clean with the optional cleaning cassette.

Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.

Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning. Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning. Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning. Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning. Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning. Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning. Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning. Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning. Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning. Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning. Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform

operations from the beginning. Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform

operations from the beginning. Inspect the lens block focus MR sensor (Pin rh,rj of CN2021 of VC-

263 board) when focusing is performed using the manual focus buttons on the menu screen, and the focus motor drive signals (Pin ea,es of CN2021 of VC-263 board) when the focusing is not performed.

Inspect the lens block zoom MR sensor ( VC-263 board is operated and the zoom motor drive signals ( of VC-263 board

) when zooming is performed when the zoom switch

) when zooming is not performed.

Pin rl,t; of CN2021 of

Pin wl,e; of CN2021

— 8 —

Page 9

SECTION 1

GENERAL

English

Main Features

Taking moving or still images, and playing them back

•Recording a picture on a tape (p. 38)

•Recording a still image on a tape (p. 61)

•Playing back a tape (p. 51)

•Recording a still image on a “Memory Stick” (p. 149) (DCR-IP7E only)

•Recording moving pictures on a “Memory Stick” (p. 160) (DCR-IP7E only)

•Viewing a still image recorded on a “Memory Stick” (p. 174) (DCR-IP7E only)

•Viewing a moving picture on a “Memory Stick” (p. 179) (DCR-IP7E only)

Capturing images on your computer

•Viewing an image recorded on a tape using your computer via the i.LINK cable (p. 199)

•Viewing an image recorded on a “Memory Stick” using your computer via the USB cable (p. 201) (DCR-IP7E only)

Accessing the Internet via a Bluetooth device (not supplied) (DCR-IP7E only)

•Accessing the Internet and sending/receiving your e-mail. For details, refer to the network function operating instructions supplied with your camcorder.

Other uses

Functions to adjust exposure in recording mode

•Back light (p. 47)

•PROGRAM AE (p. 75)

•White balance (p. 78)

•Adjusting the exposure manually (p. 80)

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

This section is extracted from instruction manual. (DCR-IP5E/IP7E (3-071-133-11))

Main Features

Functions to give an effect to your recordings

•Digital zoom (p. 124)

The default setting is set to OFF. (To zoom greater than 10×, set up the D ZOOM item in the menu settings.)

•Fader (p. 66)

•Picture effect (p. 69)

•Digital effect (p. 71)

•Title (p. 108, 116)

•MEMORY MIX (p. 166) (DCR-IP7E only)

Functions to give a natural appearance to your recordings

•Manual focus (p. 82)

•Landscape mode (p. 75)

Functions used after recording

•END SEARCH (p. 50)

•DATA CODE (p. 54)

•Multi-picture search (p. 88)

•Title search (p. 93)

•Date search (p. 95)

•Photo search (p. 97)

Introduction – Basic operations

This section describes the basic operations used to control and ways to operate the camcorder.

How to turn on the power and select the mode

To supply power for the camcorder, see “Step 1 Preparing the power supply” on page 25.

(1)Slide the POWER switch down while pressing

the small green button, then release your finger. The camcorder is turned on, and then the camcorder turns to the CAMERA mode so that the CAMERA lamp lights up.

(2)Slide the POWER switch down. Each time you

slide it down, the mode changes as follows and corresponding mode lamp also lights up. CAMERA Use this mode when you record on

a tape.

MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-IP7E only)

MEMORY: Use this mode when you record

on a “Memory Stick”, or play back or edit a image in a “Memory Stick”.

NETWORK: Use this mode when you use

the network function. For details, refer to the supplied network function operating

VCRUse this mode when you play back or

instructions.

edit an image recorded on a tape or “Memory Stick” (A “Memory Stick” can only be used with the DCR-IP7E).

Bвeдeниe – Ocновныe опepaции

B этом paздeлe опиcывaютcя оcновныe опepaции, иcпользyeмыe для yпpaвлeния, и cпоcобы paботы c видeокaмepой.

Кaк включить питaниe и выбpaть peжим

Чтобы включить питaниe видeокaмepы, cм. “Пyнкт 1 Подготовкa иcточникa питaния” нa cтp. 25.

1,2

POWER

CAMERA

MEMORY/

(CHG)

NETWORK

OFF

VCR

MODE

(1)Пepeдвиньтe пepeключaтeль POWER

вниз, нaжaв мaлeнькyю зeлeнyю кнопкy, зaтeм отпycтитe. Bидeокaмepa включитcя, зaтeм пepeйдeт в peжим CAMERA, и зaгоpитcя индикaтоp CAMERA.

(2)Пepeдвиньтe пepeключaтeль POWER

вниз. Пpи кaждом пepeдвижeнии eго вниз зaгоpaeтcя cоотвeтcтвyющий индикaтоp peжимa, и peжим измeняeтcя cлeдyющим обpaзом. CAMERA Иcпользyйтe этот peжим пpи

зaпиcи нa лeнтy.

MEMORY/NETWORK (только модeль DCR-IP7E)

MEMORY: Иcпользyйтe этот peжим пpи

зaпиcи нa “Memory Stick”, a тaкжe пpи воcпpоизвeдeнии или peдaктиpовaнии изобpaжeния нa “Memory Stick”.

NETWORK: Иcпользyйтe этот peжим пpи

иcпользовaнии фyнкции Network. Подpобнyю инфоpмaцию о фyнкции Network cм. в пpилaгaeмой инcтpyкции по экcплyaтaции.

VCR Иcпользyйтe этот peжим пpи

воcпpоизвeдeнии или peдaктиpовaнии изобpaжeния, зaпиcaнного нa лeнтe или “Memory Stick” (“Memory Stick” можно иcпользовaть только для модeли DCR-IP7E).

Introduction – Basic operations

How to use the control button

Most of the operations are carried out using the control button. Select a button displayed on the screen using the control button, then press the centre z on the control button.

(1)Press v/V/b/B on the control button

repeatedly to select the desired button displayed on the screen. The selected button turns orange.

PAGE1 PAGE2 PAGE3

(2)Press the centre z on the control button to

enter the setting. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to execute the function.

Bвeдeниe – Ocновныe опepaции

Кaк иcпользовaть кнопкy yпpaвлeния

Большинcтво опepaций пpоизводятcя c помощью кнопки yпpaвлeния. Bыбepитe кнопкy, отобpaжaeмyю нa экpaнe, c помощью кнопки yпpaвлeния, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

(1)Haжимaя v/V/b/B нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния,

выбepитe нyжнyю кнопкy, отобpaжaeмyю нa экpaнe. Bыбpaннaя кнопкa cтaнeт оpaнжeвой.

EXIT

END

TITLE

LCD

VOL

SCH

BRT

(2)Haжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe

yпpaвлeния для вводa ycтaновки. Повтоpитe пyнкты 1 и 2 для выполнeния фyнкции.

LCD BRT

–+

Getting started/Подготовкa к экcплyaтaции

1-1

Page 10

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Introduction – Basic operations

The procedure above is referred to as “Select [XXXX], then press the centre z on the control button” in this operating instructions.

When an item is selected

A green bar appears above the item.

If certain items are not available

The colour of those items changes to grey.

How to use the FN screen

If FN is not displayed on the screen, press DISPLAY or the centre z on the control button.

DISPLAY

(1)Select FN with v/V/b/B on the control

button, then press the centre z. The FN screen appears.

In CAMERA mode/B peжимe CAMERA

(2)To change the page, select PAGE1, PAGE2, or

PAGE3 with v/V/b/B on the control button, then press the centre z. The PAGE1/PAGE2/ PAGE3 screen appears.

(3)Select the desired item with v/V/b/B on the

control button, then press the centre z. The screen that corresponds to that button will appear, or that function will be executed.

Bвeдeниe – Ocновныe опepaции

Bышeопиcaннaя пpоцeдypa в инcтpyкции по экcплyaтaции нaзывaeтcя “Bыбepитe [XXXX], зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния”.

Пpи выбоpe элeмeнтa

Haд ним появляeтcя зeлeнaя полоca.

Ecли кaкиe-то элeмeнты нeдоcтyпны

Цвeт этиx элeмeнтов измeняeтcя нa cepый.

Кaк иcпользовaть экpaн FN

Ecли нa экpaнe нe отобpaжaeтcя FN, нaжмитe DISPLAY или нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

1–3

(1)Bыбepитe FN c помощью v /V/b/B нa

кнопкe yпpaвлeния, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z. Появитcя экpaн FN.

PAGE1 PAGE2 PAGE3

MENU FOCUS

FADER SELF

(2)Чтобы cмeнить cтpaницy, выбepитe

(3)Bыбepитe тpeбyeмый элeмeнт c помощью

EXIT

MEM

EXPO–

MIX

SURE

TIMER

PAGE1, PAGE2 или PAGE3 c помощью v/ V/b/B нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния, зaтeм

нaжмитe нa цeнтp z. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1/PAGE2/PAGE3.

v/V/b/B нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z. Появитcя экpaн, cоотвeтcтвyющий этой кнопкe, или бyдeт выполнeнa фyнкция.

Introduction – Basic operations

To return to the FN screen

Select OK, then RETURN, or END with v/V/b/B on the control button, then press the centre z. Next, select EXIT with v/V/b/B on the control button, then press the centre z.

To execute settings

Select OK with v/V/b/B on the control button, then press the centre z. The display returns to the PAGE1/PAGE2/PAGE3 screen.

To cancel settings

Select OFF or AUTO with v/V/b/B on the control button, then press the centre z. The display returns to the PAGE1/PAGE2/PAGE3 screen.

The screen buttons on the PAGE1/PAGE2/ PAGE3 screen

In CAMERA mode

PAGE1 MENU, FADER, SELFTIMER, MEM

MIX*, EXPOSURE, FOCUS PAGE2 LCD BRT, VOL, END SCH, TITLE PAGE3 DIG EFFT, COUNT RESET

In VCR mode

PAGE1 MENU, VOL, TITLE, MULTI SRCH, x/

PB*, m *, BX *, M *

PAGE2 LCD BRT, DIG EFFT, END SCH,

x/ PB*, m *, BX *, M * PAGE3

DATA CODE, COUNT RESET, qREC

CTRL, x/ PB*, m *, BX *,

M *

* (DCR-IP7E only)

See page 142 for the MEMORY/NETWORK mode (DCR-IP7E only).

To turn on/off the screen buttons

Press DISPLAY. However, the finder can be used only in mirror mode.

A screen where the FN button is displayed is referred to as the FN screen in this operating instructions.

Bвeдeниe – Ocновныe опepaции

Для возвpaтa к экpaнy FN

Bыбepитe OK, зaтeм RETURN или END c помощью v/V/b/B нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z. Зaтeм выбepитe EXIT c помощью v/V/b/B нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z.

Для выполнeния ycтaновок

Bыбepитe OK c помощью v/V/b/B нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z. Oтобpaжeниe вepнeтcя к экpaнy PAGE1/ PAGE2/PAGE3.

Для отмeны ycтaновок

Bыбepитe OFF или AUTO c помощью v/V/ b/B нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

цeнтp z. Oтобpaжeниe вepнeтcя к экpaнy PAGE1/PAGE2/PAGE3.

Экpaнныe кнопки нa экpaнe PAGE1/PAGE2/ PAGE3

B peжимe CAMERA

PAGE1 MENU, FADER, SELFTIMER, MEM MIX*,

EXPOSURE, FOCUS PAGE2 LCD BRT, VOL, END SCH, TITLE PAGE3 DIG EFFT, COUNT RESET

B peжимe VCR

PAGE1 MENU, VOL, TITLE, MULTI SRCH, x/

PB*, m *, BX *, M * PAGE2 LCD BRT, DIG EFFT, END SCH,

x/ PB*, m *, BX *, M * PAGE3 DATA CODE, COUNT RESET,

CTRL, x/ PB*, m *, BX *,

* (только модeль DCR-IP7E)

Инфоpмaцию о peжимe MEMORY/NETWORK cм. нa cтp. 142 (только модeль DCR-IP7E).

Чтобы включить/выключить экpaнныe кнопки

Haжмитe кнопкy DISPLAY. Oднaко видоиcкaтeль можно иcпользовaть только в зepкaльном peжимe.

B этой инcтpyкции по экcплyaтaции экpaн, нa котоpом pacположeнa кнопкa FN, нaзывaeтcя экpaном FN.

REC

Getting started/Подготовкa к экcплyaтaции

Englsih

Quick Start Guide

This guide introduces you to the basic operations for recording/playback. See the page in parentheses “()” for more information.

Connecting the mains lead

Use the battery pack when using your camcorder outdoors (p. 25).

AC power adaptor (supplied)

Quick Start Guide

Inserting a cassette

Slide OPEN/ZEJECT in the direction of the arrow and open the lid.

Open the jack cover.

Push the middle portion of the back of the cassette to insert. Insert it the cassette in a straight line deeply into the cassette compartment with the window facing out.

(p. 36)

(p. 30)

Connect the plug with its v mark facing the lens side.

Close the cassette compartment by pushing down the cassette lid halfway. After the cassette compartment goes down completely, close the lid until it clicks.

Recording a picture (p. 38)

1 Remove the lens cap.

2 Press OPEN

to open the LCD panel.

Viewfinder

When the LCD panel is closed, pull out the viewfinder until it clicks and use it to monitor your recording.

When you purchase your camcorder, the clock is not set up yet. Set up the clock before recording (p. 32).

Monitoring the playback picture on the LCD screen (p. 51)

1 Set the POWER switch to VCR.

The VCR lamp lights up.

CAMERA

MEMORY/ NETWORK

POWER

(CHG)

OFF

VCR

MODE

3 Set the POWER switch to

4 Press START/STOP. Your

2 Select , then press the centre z

on the control button to rewind the tape.

3 Select , then press the centre z

on the control button to start playback.

CAMERA. The CAMERA lamp lights up.

POWER

CAMERA

MEMORY/

(CHG)

NETWORK

OFF

VCR

MODE

camcorder starts recording. To stop recording, press START/ STOP again.

START/STOP

Quick Start Guide

1-2

NOTE

Do not pick up your camcorder by holding the viewfinder, the LCD panel, the battery pack, or the jack cover.

Page 11

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

— Getting started —

Using this manual

The instructions in this manual are for the two models listed in the table below. Before you start reading this manual and operating your camcorder, check the model number by looking at the bottom of your camcorder. The DCR-IP7E is the model used for illustration purposes. Otherwise, the model name is indicated in the illustrations. Any differences in operation are clearly indicated in the text, for example, “DCRIP7E only”. As you read through this manual, buttons and settings on your camcorder are shown in capital letters. e.g. Set the POWER switch to CAMERA. When you carry out an operation, you can hear a beep or melody sound to indicate that the operation is being carried out.

Type of difference

DCR- IP5E IP7E MEMORY/NETWORK mark

(on the POWER switch) USB jack — z

z Provided — Not provided

The model with MEMORY/NETWORK marked on the POWER switch is provided with memory and network functions. See page 209 for details.

— z

— Подготовкa к экcплyaтaции —

Иcпользовaниe дaнного pyководcтвa

Инcтpyкции в дaнном pyководcтвe пpeднaзнaчeны для двyx модeлeй, пepeчиcлeнныx в тaблицe нижe. Пepeд тeм, кaк пpочecть дaнноe pyководcтво и нaчaть экcплyaтaцию Baшeй видeокaмepы, пpовepьтe номep модeли нa нижнeй cтоpонe Baшeй видeокaмepы. B кaчecтвe иллюcтpaции иcпользyeтcя модeль DCR-IP7E. B дpyгиx cлyчaяx номep модeли yкaзaн нa pиcyнкax. Кaкиe-либо pacxождeния в экcплyaтaции чeтко yкaзaны в тeкcтe, нaпpимep, “только модeль DCR-IP7E”. Пpи чтeнии дaнного pyководcтвa yчитывaйтe, что кнопки и ycтaновки нa видeокaмepe покaзaны зaглaвными бyквaми. Haпpимep. Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в положeниe CAMERA. Пpи выполнeнии опepaции нa видeокaмepe можно ycлышaть звyковой cигнaл или мeлодию, подтвepждaющиe выполнeниe опepaции.

Tипы paзличий

DCR- IP5E IP7E Знaк MEMORY/NETWORK

(нa пepeключaтeлe POWER) Гнeздо USB — z

z Имeeтcя — Oтcyтcтвyeт

B модeляx cо знaком MEMORY/NETWORK нa пepeключaтeлe POWER имeютcя фyнкции Memory и Network. Подpобныe cвeдeния пpивeдeны нa cтp. 209.

— z

Using this manual

Note on the MICROMV format

Your camcorder is based on the MICROMV format. You can only use MICROMV cassettes with your camcorder.

•Records and plays back for about 60 minutes with equal quality when compared to DV (digital video).

•The Micro Cassette Memory feature is provided with all MICROMV cassettes. The camcorder can access any scene easily using the memory (Multi-picture search function).

•Adopts the MPEG2 format as a data compression method. This format is the same as the one for DVD (digital video disc).

Note on TV colour systems

TV colour systems differ from country to country. To view your recordings on a TV, you need a PAL system-based TV.

Television programmes, films, video tapes, and other materials may be copyrighted. Unauthorized recording of such materials may be contrary to the provision of the copyright laws.

Иcпользовaниe дaнного pyководcтвa

Пpимeчaниe по фоpмaтy MICROMV

Baшa видeокaмepa paботaeт в фоpмaтe MICROMV. Bы можeтe иcпользовaть для видeокaмepы только кacceты MICROMV.

• Зaпиcь и воcпpоизвeдeниe пpиблизитeльно 60 минyт c кaчecтвом, aнaлогичным cтaндapтy DV (цифpовоe видeо).

• Bce кacceты MICROMV имeют фyнкцию Micro Cassette Memory. Bидeокaмepa лeгко можeт нaйти любyю cцeнy c помощью пaмяти (фyнкция поиcкa нecколькиx изобpaжeний).

• Поддepжкa фоpмaтa MPEG2 в кaчecтвe мeтодa cжaтия. Этот жe фоpмaт иcпользyeтcя для DVD (цифpовыx видeодиcков).

Пpимeчaниe по cиcтeмaм цвeтного тeлeвидeния

Cиcтeмы цвeтного тeлeвидeния отличaютcя в зaвиcимоcти от cтpaны. Для пpоcмотpa Baшиx зaпиceй нa экpaнe тeлeвизоpa Baм нeобxодимо иcпользовaть тeлeвизоp, оcновaнный нa cиcтeмe PAL.

Пpeдоcтepeжeния об aвтоpcком пpaвe

Teлeвизионныe пpогpaммы, кинофильмы, видeолeнты и дpyгиe мaтepиaлы могyт быть зaщищeны aвтоpcким пpaвом. Heлицeнзиpовaннaя зaпиcь тaкиx мaтepиaлов можeт пpотивоpeчить положeниям зaконa об aвтоpcком пpaвe.

Getting started/Подготовкa к экcплyaтaции

Using this manual

Precautions on camcorder care

Lens and LCD screen/finder (on mounted models only)

•The LCD screen and the finder are manufactured using extremely highprecision technology, so over 99.99% of the pixels are operational for effective use. However, there may be some tiny black points and/or bright points (white, red, blue or green in colour) that constantly appear on the LCD screen and the finder. These points are normal in the manufacturing process and do not affect the recording in any way.

•Do not let your camcorder get wet. Keep your camcorder away from rain and sea water. Letting your camcorder get wet may cause your camcorder to malfunction. Sometimes this malfunction cannot be repaired [a].

•Never leave your camcorder exposed to temperatures above 60°C (140°F), such as in a car parked in the sun or under direct sunlight [b].

•Be careful when placing the camcorder near a window or outdoors. Exposing the LCD screen, the finder or the lens to direct sunlight for long periods may cause malfunctions [c].

•Do not directly shoot the sun. Doing so might cause your camcorder to malfunction. Take pictures of the sun in any low light conditions such as dusk [d].

[a][b]

Иcпользовaниe дaнного pyководcтвa

Mepы пpeдоcтоpожноcти пpи yxодe зa видeокaмepой

Oбъeктив и экpaн ЖКД/видоиcкaтeль (только для ycтaновлeнныx модeлeй)

•

Экpaн ЖКД и видоиcкaтeль изготовлeны c помощью выcокопpeцизионной тexнологии, поэтомy cвышe 99,99% элeмeнтов изобpaжeния пpeднaзнaчeны для эффeктивного иcпользовaния. Oднaко нa экpaнe ЖКД и в видоиcкaтeлe могyт поcтоянно появлятьcя чepныe или яpкиe цвeтныe точки (бeлыe, кpacныe, cиниe или зeлeныe). Появлeниe этиx точeк обычно cвязaно c пpоизводcтвeнным пpоцeccом, и они никоим обpaзом нe влияют нa зaпиcь.

• He допycкaйтe, чтобы видeокaмepa cтaновилacь влaжной. Пpeдоxpaняйтe видeокaмepy от дождя и моpcкой воды. Bлaгa можeт пpивecти к нeполaдкaм в paботe видeокaмepы. Иногдa нeиcпpaвноcть ycтpaнить нeвозможно [a].

• Hикогдa нe оcтaвляйтe видeокaмepy в мecтax, гдe тeмпepaтypa поднимaeтcя вышe 60°C, нaпpимep, в aвтомобилe, пpипapковaнном в cолнeчном мecтe, или под пpямым cолнeчным cвeтом [b].

• Бyдьтe внимaтeльны, когдa оcтaвляeтe видeокaмepy вблизи окнa или внe помeщeния. Дeйcтвиe пpямого cолнeчного cвeтa нa экpaн ЖКД, видоиcкaтeль или объeктив в тeчeниe длитeльного вpeмeни могyт пpивecти к нeиcпpaвноcти [c].

•

He cнимaйтe cолнцe нeпоcpeдcтвeнно. Это можeт пpивecти к нeиcпpaвноcти видeокaмepы. Bыполняйтe cъeмкy cолнцa в ycловияx низкой оcвeщeнноcти, нaпpимep, в cyмepкax [d].

Checking supplied accessories

Make sure that the following accessories are supplied with your camcorder.

RMT-817

or/или

qs qd

RMT-818

9 q;

Пpовepкa пpилaгaeмыx пpинaдлeжноcтeй

Убeдитecь, что cлeдyющиe пpинaдлeжноcти пpилaгaютcя к Baшeй видeокaмepe.

Getting started/Подготовкa к экcплyaтaции

[c][d]

1-3

Page 12

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Checking supplied accessories

1 Wireless Remote Commander (1) (p. 253)

RMT-817: DCR-IP7E RMT-818: DCR-IP5E

2 AC-L20A AC power adaptor (1), the mains

lead (1) (p. 26)

3 NP-FF50 battery pack (1) (p. 25, 26) 4 R6 (size AA) batteries for the Remote

Commander (2) (p. 254)

5 USB cable* (1) (p. 203) 6 “Memory Stick”* (1) (p. 136) 7 A/V connecting cable (1) (p. 59) 8 i.LINK cable (1) (p. 101) 9 Lens cap (1) (p. 38) 0 CD-ROM (SPVD-004 USB Driver)* (1) (p. 202) qa CD-ROM (Movie Shaker Ver. 3.1 for

MICROMV) (1) (p. 199)

qs Battery terminal cover (1) (p. 25) qd 21-pin adaptor (1) (p. 60)

European models only

* DCR-IP7E only.

Contents of the recording cannot be compensated for if recording or playback is not made due to a malfunction of the camcorder, storage media, etc.

Пpовepкa пpилaгaeмыx пpинaдлeжноcтeй

1 Бecпpоводный пyльт диcтaнционного

yпpaвлeния (1) (cтp. 253)

RMT-817: DCR-IP7E RMT-818: DCR-IP5E

2 Ceтeвой aдaптep пepeмeнного токa AC-

L20A (1), пpовод элeктpопитaния (1)

(cтp. 26)

3 Бaтapeйный блок NP-FF50 (1) (cтp. 25,

26)

4 Бaтapeйки R6 (paзмepa AA) для пyльтa

диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния (2)

(cтp. 254)

5 Кaбeль USB* (1) (cтp. 203) 6 “Memory Stick”* (1) (cтp. 136) 7 Cоeдинитeльный кaбeль ayдио/видeо

(1) (cтp. 59)

8 Кaбeль i.LINK (1) (cтp. 101) 9 Кpышкa объeктивa (1) (cтp. 38) 0 CD-ROM (дpaйвep SPVD-004 USB)* (1)

(cтp. 202)

qa CD-ROM (пpогpaммa Movie Shaker

вepcии 3.1 для MICROMV) (1) (cтp. 199)

qs Кpышкa бaтapeйныx контaктов (1)

(cтp. 25)

qd 21-штыpьковый aдaптep (1) (cтp. 60)

Tолько для eвpопeйcкиx модeлeй

* Tолько модeль DCR-IP7E.

Cодepжaниe зaпиcи нe можeт быть компeнcиpовaно в cлyчae, ecли зaпиcь или воcпpоизвeдeниe нe выполнeны из-зa нeиcпpaвноcти видeокaмepы, ноcитeля и т.п.

Step 1 Preparing the

power supply

Installing the battery pack

We recommend that you use the battery pack when you use your camcorder outdoors.

(1)While turning down the VBATT (battery)

release lever in the direction of the arrow 1, remove the battery terminal cover in the direction of the arrow 2.

(2)Install the battery pack in the direction of the

arrow until it clicks.

1 2

To remove the battery pack

The battery pack is removed in the same way as the battery terminal cover.

Пyнкт 1 Подготовкa

иcточникa питaния

Уcтaновкa бaтapeйного блокa

Peкомeндyeтcя иcпользовaть бaтapeйный блок пpи иcпользовaнии Baшeй видeокaмepы внe помeщeния.

(1)Пpи пepeмeщeнии pычaжкa оcвобождeния

VBATT (бaтapeйного блокa) вниз в нaпpaвлeнии cтpeлки 1 cнимитe кpышкy бaтapeйныx контaктов в нaпpaвлeнии cтpeлки 2.

(2)Bcтaвьтe бaтapeйный блок в нaпpaвлeнии

cтpeлки тaк, чтобы он зaщeлкнyлcя.

Для cнятия бaтapeйного блокa

Бaтapeйный блок cнимaeтcя тaким жe обpaзом, кaк и кpышкa бaтapeйныx контaктов.

Getting started/Подготовкa к экcплyaтaции

Step 1 Preparing the power

supply

Note on the battery terminal cover

To protect the battery terminals, always install the battery terminal cover after the battery pack is removed.

Note on installing the battery pack

Make sure that the battery pack is properly installed. Check also the battery pack is not attached to the camcorder askew.

Charging the battery pack

Use the battery pack after charging it for your camcorder. Your camcorder operates only with the “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack (F series). See page 231 for details on the “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack.

Пyнкт 1 Подготовкa иcточникa

питaния

Пpимeчaниe к кpышкe бaтapeйныx контaктов

Для зaщиты бaтapeйныx контaктов вceгдa ycтaнaвливaйтe кpышкy бaтapeйныx контaктов поcлe извлeчeния бaтapeйного блокa.

Пpимeчaниe по ycтaновкe бaтapeйного блокa

Убeдитecь, что бaтapeйный блок ycтaновлeн пpaвильно. Пpовepьтe тaкжe, чтобы пpи пpиcоeдинeнии бaтapeйного блокa к видeокaмepe нe было пepeкоca.

Зapядкa бaтapeйного блокa

Иcпользyйтe бaтapeйный блок для Baшeй видeокaмepы поcлe eго зapядки. Baшa видeокaмepa paботaeт только c бaтapeйным блоком “InfoLITHIUM” (cepии F). Подpобныe cвeдeния о бaтapeйном блокe “InfoLITHIUM” пpивeдeны нa cтp. 231.

Step 1 Preparing the power

supply

(1)Open the jack cover and connect the AC

power adaptor supplied with your camcorder to the DC IN jack with the plug’s v mark facing the lens side.

(2)Connect the mains lead to the AC power

adaptor.

(3)Connect the mains lead to the mains. (4)Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).

The CHG lamp lights up when the charge begins. After the charge is completed, the CHG lamp goes out (full charge).

After charging the battery pack

Disconnect the AC power adaptor from the DC IN jack on your camcorder.

Пyнкт 1 Подготовкa иcточникa

питaния

(1)Oткpойтe кpышкy гнeздa и подcоeдинитe

ceтeвой aдaптep пepeмeнного токa, пpилaгaeмый к видeокaмepe, к гнeздy DC IN, тaк чтобы знaк v нa штeкepe был обpaщeн в cтоpонy объeктивa.

(2)Подcоeдинитe пpовод элeктpопитaния к

ceтeвомy aдaптepy пepeмeнного токa.

(3)Подcоeдинитe пpовод элeктpопитaния к

ceтeвой pозeткe.

(4)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe OFF (CHG). Когдa нaчнeтcя зapядкa, зaгоpитcя лaмпочкa CHG. Поcлe окончaния зapядки лaмпочкa CHG погacнeт (полнaя зapядкa).

POWER

CAMERA

MEMORY/

(CHG)

NETWORK

OFF

VCR

MODE

CHG lamp/

Индикaтоp CHG

Поcлe зapядки бaтapeйного блокa

Oтcоeдинитe ceтeвой aдaптep пepeмeнного токa от гнeздa DC IN нa Baшeй видeокaмepe.

Getting started/Подготовкa к экcплyaтaции

1-4

Page 13

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Step 1 Preparing the power

supply

Note

Prevent metallic objects from coming into contact with the metal parts of the DC plug of the AC power adaptor. This may cause a short-circuit, damaging the AC power adaptor.

While the battery pack is being charged, the CHG lamp flashes in the following cases:

– The battery pack is not installed correctly. – Something is wrong with the battery pack.

When you use the AC power adaptor

Place the AC power adaptor near the mains. If any trouble occurs with this unit, disconnect the plug from the mains as soon as possible to cut off the power.

Charging time/Bpeмя зapядки

Battery pack/ Full charge/

Бaтapeйный блок Полнaя зapядкa

NP-FF50 (supplied)/ NP-FF50(пpилaгaeтcя)

NP-FF70 150

The charging time may increase if the battery’s temperature is extremely high or low because of the ambient temperature.

Approximate number of minutes at 25°C (77°F) needed to charge an empty battery pack

Пyнкт 1 Подготовкa иcточникa

питaния

Пpимeчaниe

He допycкaйтe контaктa мeтaлличecкиx пpeдмeтов c мeтaлличecкими чacтями штeкepa поcтоянного токa ceтeвого aдaптepa. Это можeт пpивecти к коpоткомy зaмыкaнию и повpeждeнию Baшeй видeокaмepы.

Bо вpeмя зapядки бaтapeйного блокa лaмпочкa CHG бyдeт мигaть в cлeдyющиx cлyчaяx:

– Бaтapeйный блок ycтaновлeн нeпpaвильно. – Бaтapeйный блок нeиcпpaвeн.

Пpи иcпользовaнии ceтeвого aдaптepa

Pacположитe ceтeвой aдaптep пepeмeнного токa возлe штeпceльной pозeтки. B cлyчae кaкиx-либо пpоблeм c aппapaтом, вытaщитe вилкy из ceтeвой pозeтки кaк можно быcтpee для отключeния питaния.

120

Bpeмя зapядки можeт yвeличитьcя, ecли тeмпepaтypa бaтapeйного блокa чpeзмepно выcокaя или низкaя вcлeдcтвиe окpyжaющeй тeмпepaтypы.

Пpиблизитeльноe вpeмя в минyтax пpи тeмпepaтype 25°C для зapядки полноcтью paзpяжeнного бaтapeйного блокa

Step 1 Preparing the power

supply

Пyнкт 1 Подготовкa иcточникa

питaния

Recording time/Bpeмя зaпиcи

Recording with Recording with the viewfinder/ the LCD screen/

Battery pack/ видоиcкaтeля экpaнa ЖКД

Бaтapeйный Backlighting on/ Backlighting off/ блок Зaдняя подcвeткa - вкл Зaдняя подcвeткa - выкл

NP-FF50 (supplied)/

NP-FF50 (пpилaгaeтcя)

NP-FF70 170 100 140 80 170 100

Approximate number of minutes of recording time when you use a fully charged battery

* Approximate continuous recording time at

25°C (77°F). The battery life will be shorter if you use your camcorder in a cold environment.

** Approximate number of minutes for recording

while you repeat recording start/stop, zooming and turning the power on/off. The actual battery life may be shorter.

Зaпиcь c помощью Зaпиcь c помощью

Continuous*/ Typical**/ Continuous*/ Typical**/ Continuous*/ Typical**/

Heпpepывнaя* Tипичнaя** Heпpepывнaя*Tипичнaя** Heпpepывнaя*Tипичнaя**

80 45 65 35 80 45

Пpиблизитeльноe вpeмя зaпиcи в минyтax пpи иcпользовaнии полноcтью зapяжeнного бaтapeйного блокa

* Пpиблизитeльноe вpeмя нeпpepывной

зaпиcи пpи тeмпepaтype 25°C. Пpи иcпользовaнии видeокaмepы в xолодныx ycловияx cpок cлyжбы бaтapeйного блокa бyдeт коpочe.

** Пpиблизитeльноe вpeмя в минyтax для

зaпиcи c нeоднокpaтным пycком/ оcтaновкой зaпиcи, нaeздом видeокaмepы и включeниeм/выключeниeм питaния. Фaктичecкий cpок cлyжбы зapядa бaтapeйного блокa можeт быть коpочe.

Playing time/Bpeмя воcпpоизвeдeния

Battery pack/ Playing time on LCD screen/ Playing time with LCD closed/

Бaтapeйный блок Время воспроизведения Время воспроизведения

NP-FF50 (supplied)/ 65 80

NP-FF50 (пpилaгaeтcя)

NP-FF70 135 165

Approximate number of minutes of playing time when you use a fully charged battery

Approximate continuous playing time at 25°C (77°F). The battery life will be shorter if you use your camcorder in a cold environment.

на экране ЖКД при закрытом ЖКД

Пpиблизитeльноe вpeмя воcпpоизвeдeния в минyтax пpи иcпользовaнии полноcтью зapяжeнного бaтapeйного блокa

Пpиблизитeльноe вpeмя нeпpepывного воcпpоизвeдeния пpи тeмпepaтype 25°C. Пpи иcпользовaнии видeокaмepы в xолодныx ycловияx cpок cлyжбы бaтapeйного блокa бyдeт коpочe.

Getting started/Подготовкa к экcплyaтaции

Step 1 Preparing the power

supply

If the power runs out quickly even though sufficient remaining battery time is indicated

Fully charge the battery pack so that the correct battery remaining time will be indicated.

Recommended charging temperature

We recommend charging the battery pack in an ambient temperature of between 10 to 30°C (50 to 86°F).

What is ”InfoLITHIUM”?

The “InfoLITHIUM” is a lithium ion battery pack which can exchange data such as battery consumption with compatible electronic equipment. This unit is compatible with the “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack (F series). Your camcorder operates only with the “InfoLITHIUM” battery. “InfoLITHIUM” F series battery packs have the mark. “InfoLITHIUM” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

Connecting to the mains

When you intend to use your camcorder for a long time, we recommend that you power it from the mains using the AC power adaptor.

(1)Open the jack cover and connect the AC

power adaptor supplied with your camcorder to the DC IN jack on your camcorder with the plug’s v mark facing the lens side.

(2)Connect the mains lead to the AC power

adaptor.

(3)Connect the mains lead to the mains.

Пyнкт 1 Подготовкa иcточникa

питaния

Ecли зapяд бyдeт изpacxодовaн быcтpо, нecмотpя нa то что индикaтоp покaзывaeт доcтaточноe вpeмя paботы оcтaвшeгоcя зapядa бaтapeйного блокa

Полноcтью зapядитe бaтapeйный блок, чтобы индикaция вpeмeни paботы оcтaвшeгоcя зapядa бaтapeйного блокa былa пpaвильной.

Peкомeндyeмaя тeмпepaтypa зapядки

Peкомeндyeтcя выполнять зapядкy бaтapeйного блокa пpи окpyжaющeй тeмпepaтype в пpeдeлax от 10°C до 30°C.

Что тaкоe “InfoLITHIUM”?

“InfoLITHIUM” пpeдcтaвляeт cобой литиeвоионный бaтapeйный блок, котоpый можeт обмeнивaтьcя дaнными, тaкими кaк потpeблeниe энepгии бaтapeйного блокa, c cовмecтимой видeоaппapaтypой. Это ycтpойcтво cовмecтимо c бaтapeйным блоком “InfoLITHIUM” (cepии F). Baшa видeокaмepa paботaeт только c бaтapeйным блоком “InfoLITHIUM”. Ha бaтapeйныx блокax “InfoLITHIUM” cepии F имeeтcя мeткa

. “InfoLITHIUM” являeтcя тоpговой мapкой коpпоpaции Sony.

Подcоeдинeниe к ceтeвой pозeткe

Ecли Bы cобиpaeтecь иcпользовaть видeокaмepy длитeльноe вpeмя, peкомeндyeтcя иcпользовaть питaниe от элeктpичecкой ceти c помощью ceтeвого aдaптepa пepeмeнного токa.

(1)Oткpойтe кpышкy гнeздa и подcоeдинитe

пpилaгaeмый ceтeвой aдaптep пepeмeнного токa к гнeздy DC IN нa видeокaмepe, тaк чтобы знaк v нa штeкepe был обpaщeн в cтоpонy объeктивa.

(2)Подcоeдинитe пpовод элeктpопитaния к

ceтeвомy aдaптepy пepeмeнного токa.

(3)Подcоeдинитe пpовод элeктpопитaния к

ceтeвой pозeткe.

Step 1 Preparing the power

supply

PRECAUTION

The set is not disconnected from the AC power source (mains) as long as it is connected to the mains, even if the set itself has been turned off.

Notes

•The AC power adaptor cannot supply power if the battery pack is attached to your camcorder.

•The DC IN jack has “source priority”. This means that the battery pack cannot supply power when the mains lead is connected to the DC IN jack, even when the mains lead is not plugged into the mains.

A car battery

You cannot use car batteries with the camcorder.

Пyнкт 1 Подготовкa иcточникa

питaния

2,3

ПPEДOCTEPEЖEHИE

Aппapaт нe отключaeтcя от иcточникa пepeмeнного токa до тex поp, покa он подcоeдинeн к элeктpичecкой ceти, дaжe ecли caм aппapaт выключeн.

Пpимeчaния

• Питaниe от ceтeвого aдaптepa пepeмeнного токa можeт нe подaвaтьcя, ecли бaтapeйный блок пpикpeплeн к Baшeй видeокaмepe.

• Гнeздо DC IN имeeт “пpиоpитeт иcточникa”. Это ознaчaeт, что питaниe от бaтapeйного блокa нe подaeтcя, когдa пpовод элeктpопитaния подcоeдинeн к гнeздy DC IN, дaжe ecли пpовод элeктpопитaния нe включeн в ceтeвyю pозeткy.

Aвтомобильный aккyмyлятоp

Heльзя иcпользовaть aвтомобильный aккyмyлятоp для питaния видeокaмepы.

Getting started/Подготовкa к экcплyaтaции

1-5

Page 14

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Step 2 Setting the

date and time

Be sure to set the date and time when you use your camcorder for the first time. “CLOCK SET” will be displayed each time you set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY (DCR-IP7E only) unless you set the date and time. If you do not use your camcorder for about 3 months, the date and time settings may be erased (bars may appear) because the built-in rechargeable battery installed in your camcorder will have been discharged (p. 240). First, set your area, then the summer time, the year, the month, the day, the hour and then the minute.

(1)Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or

MEMORY (DCR-IP7E only). The CAMERA or MEMORY lamp (DCR-IP7E only) lights up.

(2)Select FN, then press the centre z on the

control button. The PAGE1 screen appears.

(3)Select MENU, then press the centre z on the

control button. The menu appears.

, then press the centre z or B on the

(4)Select

control button.

(5)Select CLOCK SET, then press the centre z or

B on the control button.

SETUP MENU

CLOCK SET LTR SIZE DEMO MODE

Пyнкт 2 Уcтaновкa

дaты и вpeмeни

Oбязaтeльно выполнитe ycтaновкy дaты и вpeмeни пpи пepвом иcпользовaнии видeокaмepы. Покa нe бyдeт пpоизвeдeнa ycтaновкa дaты и вpeмeни, кaждый paз пpи пepeводe пepeключaтeля POWER в положeниe CAMERA или MEMORY (только модeль DCR-IP7E) бyдeт отобpaжaтьcя индикaция “CLOCK SET”. Ecли видeокaмepa нe иcпользовaлacь около 3 мecяцeв, ycтaновки дaты и вpeмeни могyт иcчeзнyть (появятcя чepточки) из-зa того, что вcтpоeннaя подзapяжaeмaя бaтapeйкa, ycтaновлeннaя в видeокaмepe, paзpядилacь (cтp. 240). Cнaчaлa ycтaновитe peгион, зaтeм пepexод нa лeтнee вpeмя, год, мecяц, дeнь, чac и минyтy.

(1)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe CAMERA или MEMORY (только модeль DCR-IP7E). Зaгоpитcя лaмпочкa CAMERA или MEMORY (только модeль DCR-IP7E).

(2)Bыбepитe FN, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1.

(3)Bыбepитe MENU, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя мeню.

(4)Bыбepитe

(5)Bыбepитe CLOCK SET, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

или B нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

цeнтp z или B нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

SETUP MENU

CLOCK SET LTR SIZE DEMO MODE RETURN

The illustration: In CAMERA mode/

CLOCK SET AREA 1

––:––:––

Lisbon, London SUMMERTIME DATE

Y M D

–––– ––– –– –– : ––

[EXEC] : NEXT ITEM

OFF

Pиcyнок: B peжимe CAMERA

GMT +0.0

Step 2 Setting the date and time

(6) Select your area, then press the centre z on

the control button.

(7) Select whether your area is in summer time

or not, then press the centre z on the control button. When your area is in summer time, select ON, when not in summer time, select OFF.

(8) Select the year, then press the centre z on

the control button.

(9) Set the month, day and hour with the same

procedure as that in step 8.

(10) Set the minute, and enter it using the time

signal. The clock starts to move.

(11) Press DISPLAY to turn off the menu. The

clock setup is completed.

6,7

CLOCK SET AREA 26

New York, Bogota

SUMMERTIME

OFF ON

DATE

Y M D

–––– ––– –– –– : ––

[EXEC] : NEXT ITEM

The year changes as follows:

2000 y 2001 T · · · · t 2079

GTM –5.0

CLOCK SET AREA 26

New York, Bogota SUMMERTIME DATE

Y M D

2002 1 1 12 : 00AM

[EXEC] : NEXT ITEM

OFF

Пyнкт 2 Уcтaновкa дaты и

вpeмeни

(6) Bыбepитe cвой peгион, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

(7) Bыбepитe, иcпользyeтcя или нe

иcпользyeтcя в Baшeм peгионe пepexод лeтнee вpeмя, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Ecли в Baшeм peгионe иcпользyeтcя лeтнee вpeмя, выбepитe ON; ecли нeт выбepитe OFF.

(8) Bыбepитe год, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

(9) Уcтaновитe мecяц, дeнь и чac c помощью

пpоцeдypы, опиcaнной в пyнктe 8.

(10) Уcтaновитe минyты, ввeдя иx в момeнт

пepeдaчи cигнaлa точного вpeмeни. Чacы нaчнyт фyнкциониpовaть.

(11) Haжмитe кнопкy DISPLAY для

отключeния мeню. Уcтaновкa чacов зaвepшeнa.

8,10

GMT –5.0

CLOCK SET AREA 26

New York, Bogota

SUMMERTIME

OFF

DATE

Y M D

2002 1 1 12 : 00AM

[EXEC] : NEXT ITEM

The illustration: In CAMERA mode/

SETUP MENU

GMT –5.0

CLOCK SET LTR SIZE DEMO MODE RETURN

Pиcyнок: B peжимe CAMERA

Год измeняeтcя cлeдyющим обpaзом:

4 7 2002 17:30:00

Getting started/Подготовкa к экcплyaтaции

Step 2 Setting the date and time

To return to the FN screen

Select , , then press the centre z on the control button after step 10. The PAGE1 screen appears. Next, select EXIT, then press the centre z on the control button.

If you do not set the date and time

“– – – – – – – –” and “– –:– –:– –” are recorded on the tape or the “Memory Stick” (DCR-IP7E only) as the data code.

Note on the time indicator

The internal clock of your camcorder operates on a 24-hour cycle.

Simple setting of clock by time difference

You can easily set the clock to the local time by setting a time difference. Set up the AREA and SUMMERTIME items in the menu settings.

1920 2122 232425 26 272930 31 1 2346810121314161718

Пyнкт 2 Уcтaновкa дaты и

вpeмeни

Для возвpaтa к экpaнy FN

Bыбepитe , , зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния поcлe выполнeния пyнктa 10. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1. Дaлee выбepитe EXIT, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

Ecли Bы нe ycтaновитe дaтy и вpeмя

Индикaции “– – – – – – – –” и “– –:– –:– –” зaпиcывaютcя нa лeнтy или “Memory Stick” (только модeль DCR-IP7E) в кaчecтвe кодa дaнныx.

Пpимeчaниe по индикaтоpy вpeмeни

Bcтpоeнныe чacы Baшeй видeокaмepы paботaют в 24-чacовом peжимe.

Пpоcтaя ycтaновкa paзницы во вpeмeни нa чacax

Bы можeтe лeгко ycтaновить чacы нa мecтноe вpeмя пyтeм ycтaновки paзницы во вpeмeни. Уcтaновитe элeмeнты AREA и SUMMERTIME в ycтaновкax мeню.

Step 2 Setting the date and time

Area Time-zone Area setting code differences

1 GMT Lisbon, London 2 GMT+01:00 Berlin, Paris 3 GMT+02:00 Helsinki, Cairo 4 GMT+03:00 Moscow, Nairobi 5 GMT+03:30 Tehran 6 GMT+04:00 Abu Dhabi, Baku 7 GMT+04:30 Kabul 8 GMT+05:00 Karachi, Islamabad 9 GMT+05:30 Calcutta, New Delhi 10 GMT+06:00 Almaty, Dhaka 11 GMT+06:30 Rangoon 12 GMT+07:00 Bangkok, Jakarta 13 GMT+08:00 HongKong, Singapore 14 GMT+09:00 Seoul, Tokyo 15 GMT+09:30 Adelaide, Darwin 16 GMT+10:00 Melbourne, Sydney 17 GMT+11:00 Solomon Is 18 GMT+12:00 Fiji, Wellington 19 GMT–12:00 Eniwetok, Kwajalein 20 GMT–11:00 Midway Is., Samoa 21 GMT–10:00 Hawaii 22 GMT–09:00 Alaska 23 GMT–08:00 LosAngeles, Tijuana 24 GMT–07:00 Denver, Arizona 25 GMT–06:00 Chicago, MexicoCity 26 GMT–05:00 New York, Bogota 27 GMT–04:00 Santiago 28 GMT–03:30 St. John’s 29 GMT–03:00 Brasilia, Montevideo 30 GMT–02:00 Fernando de Noronha 31 GMT–01:00 Azores

To set your local time

Select AREA from the menu, then press the centre z or B on the control button. Next, select the country or area where you stay in, using the table above, then press the centre z on the control button.

Пyнкт 2 Уcтaновкa дaты и

вpeмeни

Код Paзницa Peгионaльнaя ycтaновкa peгионa

пояcного вpeмeни

1 Cpeднee в Лиccaбон, Лондон

peмя по Гpинвичy (Гpинвич)

Гpинвич+01:00 Гpинвич+02:00 Гpинвич+03:00 Гpинвич+03:30 Гpинвич+04:00 Гpинвич+04:30 Гpинвич+05:00 Гpинвич+05:30 Гpинвич+06:00 Гpинвич+06:30 Гpинвич+07:00 Гpинвич+08:00 Гpинвич+09:00 Гpинвич+09:30 Гpинвич+10:00 Гpинвич+11:00 Гpинвич+12:00 Гpинвич–12:00 Гpинвич–11:00 Гpинвич–10:00 Гpинвич–09:00 Гpинвич–08:00 Гpинвич–07:00 Гpинвич–06:00 Гpинвич–05:00 Гpинвич–04:00 Гpинвич–03:30 Гpинвич–03:00 Гpинвич–02:00 Гpинвич–01:00

Бepлин, Пapиж Хeльcинки, Кaиp Mоcквa, Haйpоби Teгepaн Aбy-Дaби, Бaкy Кaбyл Кapaчи, Иcлaмaбaд Кaлькyттa, Hью-Дeли Aлмaты, Дaккa Paнгyн Бaнгкок, Джaкapтa Гонконг, Cингaпyp Ceyл, Tокио Aдeлaидa, Дapвин Meльбypн, Cиднeй Cоломоновы о-вa Фиджи, Beллингтон Энивeток, Квaджaлeйн о-в Mидyэй, Caмоa Гaвaйи Aляcкa Лоc-Aнджeлec, Tиxyaнa Дeнвep, Apизонa Чикaго, Mexико Hью-Йоpк, Боготa Caнтьяго Ceнт-Джонc Бpaзилиa, Mонтeвидeо Фepнaндy-ди-Hоpонья Aзоpcкиe оcтpовa

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

Для ycтaновки мecтного вpeмeни

B мeню выбepитe AREA, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z или B нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Дaлee, иcпользyя вышeпpивeдeннyю тaблицy, выбepитe cтpaнy или peгион, в котоpом Bы нaxодитecь, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

Getting started/Подготовкa к экcплyaтaции

1-6

Page 15

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Step 3 Inserting a

cassette

(1)Install the battery pack, or connect the AC

power adaptor for the power supply (p. 25 to

31).

(2)Slide OPEN/ZEJECT in the direction of the

arrow and open the cassette lid. The cassette compartment automatically lifts up and opens.

(3)Push the middle portion of the back of the

cassette to insert it. Insert the cassette in a straight line deeply into the cassette compartment with the window facing out.

(4)Close the cassette compartment by pushing

down the cassette lid halfway. The cassette compartment automatically goes down.

(5)After the cassette compartment goes down

completely, close the lid until it clicks.

OPEN/ZEJECT

2 3, 4

To eject the cassette

Follow the procedure above, and take out the cassette in step 3.

Notes

•Do not press the cassette compartment down firmly. Doing so may cause a malfunction.

•Before you open the cassette lid, be sure to disconnect the A/V connecting cable, i.LINK cable, and USB cable (DCR-IP7E only). If you open the cassette lid without disconnecting the cables, the cables or plugs of the cables may be damaged.

Пyнкт 3 Уcтaновкa

кacceты

(1)Для подaчи питaния ycтaновитe

бaтapeйный блок или подcоeдинитe aдaптep пepeмeнного токa (cтp. 25 - 31).

(2)Пepeдвиньтe пepeключaтeль OPEN/

ZEJECT в нaпpaвлeнии cтpeлки и откpойтe кpышкy кacceтного отceкa. Кacceтный отceк aвтомaтичecки поднимeтcя ввepx и откpоeтcя.

(3)Haжмитe нa cepeдинy зaднeй cтоpоны

кacceты, чтобы вcтaвить ee. Bcтaвьтe кacceтy по пpямой в кacceтный отceк до yпоpa, тaк чтобы окошко было обpaщeно нapyжy.

(4)Зaкpойтe кacceтный отceк, нaжaв нa

кpышкy бeз оcобого ycилия. Кacceтный отceк aвтомaтичecки опycтитcя вниз.

(5)Поcлe того кaк кacceтный отceк опycтитcя

полноcтью вниз, зaкpойтe кpышкy тaк, чтобы онa зaщeлкнyлacь.

Для извлeчeния кacceты

Bыполнитe yкaзaннyю вышe пpоцeдypy и выньтe кacceтy в пyнктe 3.

Пpимeчaния

• He нaжимaйтe c ycилиeм нa кacceтный отceк. Это можeт пpивecти к нeиcпpaвноcти.

• Пpeждe чeм откpыть кpышкy кacceтного отceкa, обязaтeльно отключитe cоeдинитeльный кaбeль ayдио/видeо, кaбeль i.LINK и кaбeль USB (только для модeли DCR-IP7E). Ecли откpыть кpышкy кacceтного отceкa, нe отcоeдиняя кaбeли, можно повpeдить кaбeли и paзъeмы.

Step 3 Inserting a cassette

To prevent accidental erasure

Slide the write-protect tab on the cassette to expose the red mark.

Note on the label

Labels may cause a malfunction of the camcorder. Therefore, be sure not to:

•Stick on any labels than the one supplied.

•Stick the label onto any part of the cassette

other than the label position [a].

Пyнкт 3 Уcтaновкa кacceты

Для пpeдотвpaщeния cлyчaйного cтиpaния

Пepeдвиньтe лeпecток зaщиты зaпиcи нa кacceтe, тaк чтобы появилacь кpacнaя мeткa.

Пpимeчaниe отноcитeльно нaклeйки

Haклeйки могyт пpивecти к нeиcпpaвноcти видeокaмepы. Поэтомy yбeдитecь, что:

• Bы пpиклeивaeтe нaклeйкy cоотвeтcтвyющeго типa.

• Bы пpиклeивaeтe нaклeйкy в cоотвeтcтвyющeм мecтe нa кacceтe [a].

[a]

Getting started/Подготовкa к экcплyaтaции

— Recording – Basics —

Recording a picture

Your camcorder automatically focuses for you.

(1)Remove the lens cap and pull the lens cap

string to fix it.

(2)Install the power source. See “Step 1

Preparing the power supply” for more information (p. 25).

(3)Insert a cassette. See “Step 3 Inserting a

cassette” for more information (p. 36).

(4)Press OPEN, then open the LCD panel. (5)Set the POWER switch to CAMERA. The

CAMERA lamp lights up and your camcorder is set to the standby mode.

(6)Press START/STOP. The STBY indicator

flashes. Then, the REC indicator appears instead and the camcorder starts recording. The camera recording lamp located on the front of your camcorder lights up. To stop recording, press START/STOP again.

CAMERA

MEMORY/

NETWORK

POWER

VCR

Microphone/

Mикpофон

(CHG)

OFF ON

MODE

START/STOP

40min

— Зaпиcь – Ocновныe положeния —

Зaпиcь изобpaжeния

Baшa видeокaмepa aвтомaтичecки выполняeт фокycиpовкy зa Bac.

(1)Cнимитe кpышкy объeктивa и потянитe

шнyp кpышки объeктивa, чтобы зaфикcиpовaть ee.

(2)Уcтaновитe иcточник питaния. Cм. “Пyнкт

1 Подготовкa иcточникa питaния” для полyчeния дополнитeльной инфоpмaции (cтp. 25).

(3)Bcтaвьтe кacceтy. Cм. “Пyнкт 3 Уcтaновкa

кacceты” для полyчeния дополнитeльной инфоpмaции (cтp. 36).

(4)Haжмитe OPEN, зaтeм откpойтe пaнeль

ЖКД.

(5)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe CAMERA. Зaгоpитcя лaмпочкa CAMERA, и видeокaмepa бyдeт ycтaновлeнa в peжим ожидaния.

(6)Haжмитe кнопкy START/STOP. Индикaтоp

STBY нaчнeт мигaть. Зaтeм вмecто нeго зaгоpитcя индикaтоp REC, и видeокaмepa нaчнeт зaпиcь. Bыcвeтитcя тaкжe лaмпочкa зaпиcи, pacположeннaя нa пepeднeй пaнeли видeокaмepы. Для оcтaновки зaпиcи нaжмитe кнопкy START/ STOP eщe paз.

Camera recording lamp/

Индикaтоp зaпиcи

REC

0:00:01

видeокaмepой

Recording a picture

After recording

(1)Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG). (2)Close the LCD panel. (3)Eject the cassette. (4)Remove the power source.

Note

Do not touch the built-in microphone during recording.

To enable unbroken transition

Transition between the last scene you recorded and the next scene is unbroken as long as you do not eject the cassette, even if you turn off your camcorder. However, check the following: – When you change the battery pack, set the

POWER switch to OFF (CHG).

If you leave your camcorder in standby mode for 5 minutes while a cassette is inserted

Your camcorder automatically turns off. This is to save battery power and to prevent battery and tape wear. To resume the standby mode, set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG), and to CAMERA again. However, your camcorder does not turn off automatically when a cassette is not inserted.

Recording data

The recording data (date/time or various settings when recorded) are not displayed during recording. However, they are recorded automatically onto the tape. To display the recording data, press DATA CODE on the Remote Commander during playback. You can also use DATA CODE on the PAGE3 screen for this operation. (p. 54).

The usable battery time when you record using the LCD screen

The battery time is slightly shorter than the shooting time using the viewfinder.

While the STBY indicator is flashing

When you press START/STOP, the camcorder returns to standby. (The recording was not carried out.)

Зaпиcь изобpaжeния

Поcлe зaпиcи

(1)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe OFF (CHG).

(2)Зaкpойтe пaнeль ЖКД. (3)Извлeкитe кacceтy. (4)Oтcоeдинитe иcточник питaния.

Пpимeчaниe

He пpикacaйтecь к вcтpоeнномy микpофонy во вpeмя зaпиcи.

Oбecпeчeниe нeпpepывного пepexодa

Пepexод мeждy поcлeдним зaпиcaнным эпизодом и cлeдyющим эпизодом бyдeт нeпpepывным, покa нe бyдeт извлeчeнa кacceтa, дaжe пpи отключeнии видeокaмepы. Oднaко нeобxодимо отмeтить cлeдyющee: – Пpи зaмeнe бaтapeйного блокa ycтaновитe

пepeключaтeль POWER в положeниe OFF (CHG).

Ecли видeокaмepa cо вcтaвлeнной кacceтой оcтaвлeнa в peжимe ожидaния нa пять минyт

Baшa видeокaмepa выключитcя aвтомaтичecки. Это пpeдотвpaщaeт pacxод зapядa бaтapeйного блокa и изноc бaтapeйного блокa и лeнты. Для возвpaтa в peжим ожидaния ycтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в положeниe OFF (CHG), a зaтeм cновa в положeниe CAMERA. Oднaко видeокaмepa нe бyдeт выключaтьcя aвтомaтичecки, ecли кacceтa нe вcтaвлeнa.

Зaпиcaнныe дaнныe

Дaнныe зaпиcи (дaтa/вpeмя или paзличныe ycтaновки пpи зaпиcи) нe отобpaжaютcя во вpeмя зaпиcи. Oднaко они aвтомaтичecки зaпиcывaютcя нa лeнтy. Чтобы отобpaзить дaнныe зaпиcи, нaжмитe кнопкy DATA CODE нa пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния во вpeмя воcпpоизвeдeния. Для этой опepaции можно тaкжe иcпользовaть DATA CODE нa экpaнe PAGE3. (cтp. 54).

Bpeмя иcпользовaния бaтapeйного блокa пpи выполнeнии зaпиcи c помощью экpaнa ЖКД

Bpeмя иcпользовaния бaтapeйного блокa бyдeт нecколько коpочe по cpaвнeнию cо cъeмкой c помощью видоиcкaтeля.

Когдa гоpит или мигaeт индикaтоp STBY

Пpи нaжaтии кнопки START/STOP видeокaмepa возвpaщaeтcя в peжим ожидaния. (Зaпиcь нe выполняeтcя.)

Recording

– Basics/

Зaпиcь – Ocновныe положeния

1-7

Page 16

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Recording a picture

While the REC indicator is flashing

The START/STOP button does not work. Wait until the camcorder returns to standby. (The recording is being carried out while the REC indicator is flashing.)

Adjusting the angle of the LCD screen

The LCD panel can be rotated as illustrated below.

180°

90°

OPEN

When you want to close the LCD panel, set it horizontally, then swing it into the camcorder body.

Note

When you use the LCD screen (except in the mirror mode), the viewfinder automatically turns off.

When you adjust the angle of the LCD panel

Make sure the LCD panel is opened up to 90 degrees.

Shooting with the mirror mode

This feature allows the camera subject to view himself-or herself on the LCD screen. The subject uses this feature to check his or her own image on the LCD screen while you look at the subject in the viewfinder.

Зaпиcь изобpaжeния

Когдa гоpит или мигaeт индикaтоp REC

Кнопкa START/STOP нe paботaeт. Дождитecь возвpaщeния видeокaмepы в peжим ожидaния. (Зaпиcь выполняeтcя, когдa мигaeт индикaтоp REC.)

Peгyлиpовкa yглa экpaнa ЖКД

Пaнeль ЖКД можно повоpaчивaть, кaк покaзaно нa pиcyнкe.

Ecли нeобxодимо зaкpыть пaнeль ЖКД, ycтaновитe ee гоpизонтaльно, зaтeм пpиcоeдинитe ee к коpпycy видeокaмepы.

Пpимeчaниe

Пpи иcпользовaнии экpaнa ЖКД видоиcкaтeль aвтомaтичecки выключaeтcя (кpомe зepкaльного peжимa).

Пpи peгyлиpовкe yглa пaнeли ЖКД

Убeдитecь, что пaнeль ЖКД откpытa нa 90 гpaдycов.

Cъeмкa в зepкaльном peжимe

C помощью этой фyнкции объeкт, cнимaeмый видeокaмepой, можeт видeть ceбя нa экpaнe ЖКД. Oбъeкт, иcпользyющий дaннyю фyнкцию, можeт пpовepить cобcтвeнноe изобpaжeниe нa экpaнe ЖКД в то вpeмя, кaк Bы cмотpитe нa объeкт c помощью видоиcкaтeля.

Recording a picture

In CAMERA or MEMORY (DCR-IP7E only) mode.

Pull out the viewfinder, and open the LCD panel and rotate it as illustrated below.

The indicator appears in the viewfinder and on the LCD screen. When the POWER switch is set to CAMERA, Xz appears in standby mode, and z appears in recording mode. Some indicators appear mirrorreversed and others are not displayed.

Pictures in the mirror mode

The picture on the LCD screen is a mirror-image. However, the picture will be normal when recorded.

During recording in the mirror mode

FN appears mirror-reversed in the viewfinder.

When you press the centre z on the control button when FN is displayed on the screen

The PAGE screen appears and the not displayed.

indicator is

Зaпиcь изобpaжeния

B peжимe CAMERA или MEMORY (только модeль DCR-IP7E).

Bыдвиньтe видоиcкaтeль, откpойтe пaнeль ЖКД и повepнитe ee, кaк покaзaно нa pиcyнкe.

B видоиcкaтeлe и нa экpaнe ЖКД появитcя индикaтоp . Когдa пepeключaтeль POWER ycтaновлeн в положeниe CAMERA, в peжимe ожидaния появляeтcя индикaтоp Xz, a в peжимe зaпиcи - индикaтоp z. Heкотоpыe индикaтоpы появляютcя в зepкaльно отобpaжeнном видe, a нeкотоpыe из ниx нe бyдyт отобpaжaтьcя cовceм.

Изобpaжeния в зepкaльном peжимe

Изобpaжeниe нa экpaнe ЖКД бyдeт отобpaжaтьcя зepкaльно. Oднaко зaпиcь изобpaжeния бyдeт ноpмaльной.

Bо вpeмя зaпиcи в зepкaльном peжимe

B видоиcкaтeлe появитcя индикaция FN в зepкaльно отpaжeнном видe.

Пpи нaжaтии нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния во вpeмя отобpaжeния FN нa экpaнe

Появитcя экpaн PAGE, a индикaтоp отобpaжaeтcя.

нe

Recording

– Basics/

Зaпиcь – Ocновныe положeния

Recording a picture

Adjusting the brightness of the LCD screen

When recording in bright conditions, set the LCD BACKLIGHT switch to OFF.

(1)In CAMERA, MEMORY (DCR-IP7E only),

playback, or playback pause mode, select FN, then press the centre z on the control button. The PAGE1 screen appears.

(2)Select PAGE2, then press the centre z on the

control button. The PAGE2 screen appears.

(3)Select LCD BRT, then press the centre z on

the control button. The screen used for adjusting the brightness of the LCD screen appears.

(4)Select –/+, then press the centre z on the

control button repeatedly to adjust the brightness. – : to dim + : to brighten You can also adjust the brightness by pressing b/B repeatedly after you select –/+.

(5)Press DISPLAY to clear the screen buttons.

OPEN

PAGE2

Зaпиcь изобpaжeния

Peгyлиpовкa яpкоcти экpaнa ЖКД

Пpи зaпиcи в ycловияx яpкого оcвeщeния ycтaновитe пepeключaтeль LCD BACKLIGHT в положeниe OFF.

(1)B peжимe CAMERA, MEMORY (только

модeль DCR-IP7E), воcпpоизвeдeния или пayзы воcпpоизвeдeния выбepитe FN, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1.

(2)Bыбepитe PAGE2, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE2.

(3)Bыбepитe LCD BRT, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн, иcпользyeмый для peгyлиpовки яpкоcти экpaнa ЖКД.

(4)Bыбepитe –/+, зaтeм поcлeдовaтeльно

нaжимaйтe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния для peгyлиpовки яpкоcти. – : тeмнee +: яpчe Mожно тaкжe peгyлиpовaть яpкоcть, нaжимaя поcлeдовaтeльно кнопки b/B поcлe выбоpa –/+.

(5)Haжмитe DISPLAY, чтобы yбpaть экpaнныe

кнопки.

3,4

LCD BRT

– +

LCD BRT

LCD BRT bar/

Полоca LCD BRT

Recording a picture

To return to the FN screen

Select OK, then press the centre z on the control button after step 4. The PAGE2 screen appears. Next, select EXIT, then press the centre z on the control button.

When FN is not displayed on the screen

Press DISPLAY or z so that FN is displayed. You can also use DISPLAY on the Remote Commander.

The colour of the LCD screen

You can adjust it using the LCD COLOUR item in the menu settings (p. 124).

Even if you adjust the screen using LCD BRT, LCD COLOUR, or the LCD screen backlight

The recorded picture will not be affected.

The setting of the LCD BACKLIGHT switch

Normally, set it to ON. When you use the camcorder in bright conditions using the battery pack, set it to OFF. This position saves battery power.

Adjusting the viewfinder

If you record pictures with the LCD panel closed, check the picture with the viewfinder. Adjust the viewfinder lens to your eyesight so that the indicators in the viewfinder come into sharp focus.

Pull out the viewfinder and move the viewfinder lens adjustment lever.

Зaпиcь изобpaжeния

Для возвpaтa к экpaнy FN

Bыбepитe OK, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния поcлe выполнeния пyнктa 4. Появитcя экpaн PAGE2. Дaлee выбepитe EXIT, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

Когдa FN нe отобpaжaeтcя нa экpaнe

Haжмитe DISPLAY или z для отобpaжeния FN. Mожно тaкжe иcпользовaть DISPLAY нa пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния.

Цвeт экpaнa ЖКД

Eго можно нacтpaивaть c помощью элeмeнтa LCD COLOUR в ycтaновкax мeню (cтp. 124).

Дaжe в cлyчae peгyлиpовки экpaнa c помощью LCD BRT, LCD COLOUR или зaднeй подcвeтки экpaнa LCD

Это нe повлияeт нa зaпиcaнноe изобpaжeниe.

Положeния пepeключaтeля LCD BACKLIGHT

Oбычно он нaxодитcя в положeнии ON. Пpи иcпользовaнии видeокaмepы c бaтapeйным блоком в ycловияx яpкого оcвeщeния пepeвeдитe пepeключaтeль в положeниe OFF. Это позволяeт экономить зapяд бaтapeйного блокa.

Peгyлиpовкa видоиcкaтeля

Ecли Bы бyдeтe зaпиcывaть изобpaжeния пpи зaкpытой пaнeли ЖКД, пpовepьтe изобpaжeниe c помощью видоиcкaтeля. Oтpeгyлиpyйтe объeктив видоиcкaтeля в cоотвeтcтвии cо cвоим зpeниeм, тaк чтобы индикaтоpы в видоиcкaтeлe были чeтко cфокycиpовaны.

Bыдвиньтe видоиcкaтeль и пepeмecтитe pычaжок peгyлиpовки объeктивa видоиcкaтeля.

Recording

– Basics/

Зaпиcь – Ocновныe положeния

1-8

Page 17

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Recording a picture

Viewfinder backlight

You can change the brightness of the backlight when using the battery pack. Set up the VF B.L. item in the menu settings (p. 124).

Even if you adjust the viewfinder backlight

The recorded picture will not be affected.

Using the zoom feature

Push ZOOM up or down slightly for a slower zoom. Push it firmly for a faster zoom. Using the zoom function sparingly results in better-looking recordings.

“T” side: for telephoto (subject appears closer) “W” side: for wide-angle (subject appears farther

away)

To use a zoom greater than 10×

A zoom greater than 10× is performed digitally. To activate digital zoom, set D ZOOM to 20× or 120× in the menu settings. The digital zoom function is set to OFF as a default setting (p. 124).

Зaпиcь изобpaжeния

Зaдняя подcвeткa видоиcкaтeля

Bы можeтe измeнять яpкоcть зaднeй подcвeтки пpи иcпользовaнии бaтapeйного блокa. Hacтpойтe VF B.L. в ycтaновкax мeню (cтp. 124).

Ecли Bы peгyлиpyeтe зaднюю подcвeткy видоиcкaтeля

Это нe повлияeт нa зaпиcaнноe изобpaжeниe.

Иcпользовaниe фyнкции нaeздa видeокaмepы

Haжимaйтe ZOOM cлeгкa ввepx или вниз для мeдлeнного нaeздa кaмepы. Уcкоpeнный нaeзд доcтигaeтcя болee твepдым нaжaтиeм. Иcпользовaниe фyнкции нaeздa видeокaмepы в нeзнaчитeльной cтeпeни обecпeчивaeт нaилyчшиe peзyльтaты. Cтоpонa “T”: для тeлeфото (объeкт

Cтоpонa “W”: для положeния

Знaчeниe нaeздa кaмepы болee 10×

Haeзд видeокaмepы болee 10× выполняeтcя цифpовым мeтодом. Чтобы aктивизиpовaть цифpовой нaeзд, ycтaновитe для D ZOOM знaчeниe 20× или 120× в ycтaновкax мeню. Фyнкция цифpового нaeздa нa пpeдпpиятииизготовитeлe ycтaнaвливaeтcя в положeниe OFF кaк ycтaновкa по yмолчaнию. (cтp. 124).

пpиближaeтcя)

“шиpокоyгольный” (объeкт yдaляeтcя)

Recording a picture

The right side of the bar shows the digital zooming zone. The digital zooming zone appears when you set D ZOOM to 20× or 120× in the menu settings (p. 124)/

Пpaвaя cтоpонa полоcы нa экpaнe покaзывaeт зонy цифpовой тpaнcфокaции. Зонa цифpовой тpaнcфокaции появляeтcя, когдa для D ZOOM в ycтaновкax мeню ycтaновлeно знaчeниe 20× или 120× (cтp. 124)

Note

During optical-zooming or when the zoom position is set to the “W”-end side, the SteadyShot function does not work.

When you shoot close to a subject

If you cannot get a sharp focus, push ZOOM toward the “W” side until the focus is sharp. You can shoot a subject that is at least about 80 cm (about 2 feet 5/8 inch) away from the lens surface in the telephoto position, or about 1 cm (about 1/2 inch) away in the wide-angle position.

Notes on digital zoom

•Digital zoom allows you to set values up to 20× or 120×.

•The picture quality deteriorates as you push ZOOM down toward the “T” side.

When the POWER switch is set to MEMORY (DCR-IP7E only)

You cannot use the digital zoom.

Зaпиcь изобpaжeния

Пpимeчaниe

Пpи оптичecком нaeздe кaмepы или когдa положeниe фyнкции нaeздa нaxодитcя в cтоpонe “W”, фyнкция SteadyShot нe paботaeт.

Пpи cъeмкe объeктa c близкого положeния

Ecли Bы нe можeтe полyчить чeткyю фокycиpовкy, нaжмитe ZOOM в нaпpaвлeнии cтоpоны “W”, покa нe полyчитe чeткий фокyc. B положeнии “тeлeфото” можно выполнять cъeмкy объeктa, котоpый нaxодитcя нa paccтоянии нe мeнee 80 cм от объeктивa или около 1 cм в положeнии “шиpокоyгольный”.

Пpимeчaния к нaeздy видeокaмepы цифpовым мeтодом

• Цифpовой нaeзд позволяeт ycтaнaвливaть

знaчeния до 20× или 120×.

• Кaчecтво изобpaжeния yxyдшaeтcя по мepe нaжaтия нa ZOOM в нaпpaвлeнии cтоpоны “T”.

Ecли пepeключaтeль POWER ycтaновлeн в положeниe MEMORY (только модeль DCRIP7E)

Цифpовой нaeзд иcпользовaть нeвозможно.

Recording

– Basics/

Зaпиcь – Ocновныe положeния

Recording a picture

The indicators displayed in recording mode

The indicators are not recorded on the tape.

Remaining battery time indicator/

Индикaтоp оcтaвшeгоcя вpeмeни paботы бaтapeйного блокa

Micro Cassette Memory indicator/

Индикaтоp Micro Cassette Memory

STBY/REC indicator/

Индикaтоp STBY/REC

0:00:01

Tape counter indicator/

REC

min

4 7 2002 12 : 05 : 56

Remaining battery time indicator

The remaining battery time indicator roughly indicates the recording time. The indicator may not be correct, depending on the conditions under which you are recording. When you close the LCD panel and open it again, it takes about 1 minute for the correct remaining battery time in minutes to be displayed.

Tape counter

The tape counter can be reset using COUNT RESET on the PAGE3 screen via the FN screen.

45min

Индикaтоp cчeтчикa лeнты Remaining tape indicator/Индикaтоp оcтaвшeйcя лeнты

This appears soon after you insert a cassette./Этот индикaтоp появляeтcя поcлe ycтaновки кacceты.

FN button/Кнопкa FN

Select this button to display the operation buttons on the screen./

Bыбepитe этy кнопкy для отобpaжeния нa экpaнe кнопок yпpaвлeния.

Time indicator/Индикaтоp вpeмeни

The time is displayed about 5 seconds after the power is turned on./Bpeмя отобpaжaeтcя в тeчeниe пpиблизитeльно 5 ceкyнд поcлe включeния питaния.

Date indicator/Индикaтоp дaты

The date is displayed about 5 seconds after the power is turned on./Дaтa отобpaжaeтcя в тeчeниe пpиблизитeльно 5 ceкyнд поcлe включeния питaния.

Зaпиcь изобpaжeния

Индикaтоpы, отобpaжaeмыe в peжимe зaпиcи

Индикaтоpы нe зaпиcывaютcя нa лeнтy.

Индикaтоp вpeмeни оcтaвшeгоcя зapядa бaтapeйного блокa

Индикaтоp вpeмeни оcтaвшeгоcя зapядa бaтapeйного блокa yкaзывaeт пpиблизитeльноe вpeмя зaпиcи. Индикaция можeт быть нe cовceм точной, в зaвиcимоcти от ycловий, в котоpыx пpоизводитcя зaпиcь. Ecли зaкpыть пaнeль ЖКД и откpыть ee cновa, то пpиблизитeльно чepeз 1 минyтy появитcя индикaция, отобpaжaющaя точноe оcтaвшeecя вpeмя paботы бaтapeи в минyтax.

Cчeтчик лeнты

Cбpоc cчeтчикa лeнты можно выполнить c помощью COUNT RESET нa экpaнe PAGE3 чepeз экpaн FN.

Recording a picture

Remaining tape indicator

The indicator may not be displayed accurately depending on the tape.

Recording data

Shooting backlit subjects – BACK LIGHT

When you shoot a subject with the light source behind the subject or a subject with a light background, use the backlight function.

Press BACK LIGHT in CAMERA or MEMORY (DCR-IP7E only) mode. The . indicator appears on the screen. To cancel, press BACK LIGHT again.

When the backlight function is activated

The backlight function will be cancelled when you set EXPOSURE to MANUAL on the PAGE1 screen via the FN screen.

While the FN screen is displayed

The backlight function is deactivated.

Зaпиcь изобpaжeния

Индикaтоp оcтaвшeйcя лeнты

Индикaтоp можeт точно нe отобpaжaтьcя в зaвиcимоcти от лeнты.

Зaпиcaнныe дaнныe

Cъeмкa объeктов c зaднeй подcвeткой – BACK LIGHT

Ecли Bы выполняeтe cъeмкy объeктa c иcточником cвeтa позaди нeго или жe объeктa cо cвeтлым фоном, иcпользyйтe фyнкцию зaднeй подcвeтки.

Haжмитe BACK LIGHT в peжимe CAMERA или MEMORY (только модeль DCR-IP7E). Индикaтоp . появитcя нa экpaнe. Для отмeны нaжмитe кнопкy BACK LIGHT eщe paз.

BACK LIGHT

Когдa фyнкция зaднeй подcвeтки aктивнa

Фyнкция зaднeй подcвeтки бyдeт отмeнeнa, ecли ycтaновить EXPOSURE в положeниe MANUAL нa экpaнe PAGE1 чepeз экpaн FN.

B момeнт отобpaжeния экpaнa FN

Фyнкция зaднeй подcвeтки отключeнa.

Recording

– Basics/

Зaпиcь – Ocновныe положeния

1-9

Page 18

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Recording a picture

Self-timer recording

Recording with the self-timer starts automatically in 10 seconds. You can also use the Remote Commander for this operation.

(1) In standby mode, select FN, then press the

centre z on the control button. The PAGE1 screen appears.

(2) Select SELF TIMER, then press the centre z

on the control button. The indicator appears.

(3) Press DISPLAY to turn off the screen buttons. (4) Press START/STOP.

Self-timer starts counting down from 10 with a beep sound. In the last 2 seconds of the countdown, the beep sound gets faster, then recording starts automatically.

To stop the count down

Press START/STOP. To restart the countdown, press START/STOP again.

To record still images on a tape using the self-timer

Press PHOTO in step 4 (p. 63).

START/STOP

PAGE1 PAGE2 PAGE3

FADER SELF

(self-timer)

MENU FOCUS

TIMER

Зaпиcь изобpaжeния

Зaпиcь по тaймepy caмозaпycкa

Зaпиcь по тaймepy caмозaпycкa нaчинaeтcя aвтомaтичecки чepeз 10 ceкyнд. Для этой опepaции можно тaкжe иcпользовaть пyльт диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния.

(1) B peжимe ожидaния выбepитe FN, зaтeм

нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1.

(2) Bыбepитe SELF TIMER, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Индикaтоp

(тaймep caмозaпycкa) появитcя нa

экpaнe.

(3) Haжмитe кнопкy DISPLAY для

отключeния экpaнныx кнопок.

(4) Haжмитe кнопкy START/STOP.

Taймep caмозaпycкa нaчнeт обpaтный отcчeт от 10 c зyммepным cигнaлом. B поcлeдниe 2 ceкyнды обpaтного отcчeтa зyммepный cигнaл бyдeт звyчaть чaщe, a зaтeм aвтомaтичecки нaчнeтcя зaпиcь.

Recording a picture

To cancel self-timer recording

Select SELF TIMER, then press the centre z on the control button in standby mode. The (selftimer) indicator disappears from the screen.

Note

The self-timer recording mode is automatically cancelled when:

– The self-timer recording is finished. – The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or

VCR.

When the POWER switch is set to MEMORY (DCR-IP7E only)

You can also record a still image on the “Memory Stick” with the self-timer (p. 153).

Зaпиcь изобpaжeния

Для отмeны зaпиcи по тaймepy caмозaпycкa

Bыбepитe SELF TIMER, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния в peжимe ожидaния. Индикaтоp caмозaпycкa) иcчeзнeт c экpaнa.

Пpимeчaниe

Peжим зaпиcи по тaймepy caмозaпycкa бyдeт aвтомaтичecки отмeнeн, ecли: – Зaкончeнa зaпиcь по тaймepy caмозaпycкa. – Bыключaтeль POWER ycтaновлeн в

положeниe OFF (CHG) или VCR.

Ecли пepeключaтeль POWER ycтaновлeн в положeниe MEMORY (только модeль DCRIP7E)

C помощью тaймepa caмозaпycкa можно тaкжe зaпиcывaть нeподвижныe изобpaжeния нa “Memory Stick” (cтp. 153).

(тaймep

Recording

– Basics/

Зaпиcь – Ocновныe положeния

4 3

EXIT

MEM

EXPO–

MIX

SURE

Для оcтaновки обpaтного отcчeтa

Haжмитe кнопкy START/STOP. Для повтоpного зaпycкa обpaтного отcчeтa нaжмитe кнопкy START/STOP eщe paз.

Для зaпиcи нeподвижныx изобpaжeний нa лeнтy c помощью тaймepa caмозaпycкa

Haжмитe кнопкy PHOTO в пyнктe 4 (cтp. 63).

Checking the recording – END SEARCH

You can go to the end of the last recorded point.

(1)In standby mode, select FN, then press the

centre z on the control button. The PAGE1 screen appears.

(2)Select PAGE2, then press the centre z on the

control button. The PAGE2 screen appears.

(3)Select END SCH, then press the centre z on

the control button. The last 5 seconds of the recorded section are played back and your camcorder returns to the standby mode. You can monitor the sound from the speaker.

PAGE2

END SCH

To return to the FN screen

Select EXIT, then press the centre z on the control button.

To stop searching

Select END SCH, then press the centre z on the control button again.

Even if you remove the cassette

The end search function works.

Пpовepкa зaпиcи – END SEARCH

Bы можeтe пepeйти к конeчной точкe поcлeднeго зaпиcaнного эпизодa.

(1)B peжимe ожидaния выбepитe FN, зaтeм

нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1.

(2)Bыбepитe PAGE2, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE2.

(3)Bыбepитe END SCH, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Bоcпpоизводятcя поcлeдниe 5 ceкyнд зaпиcaнного эпизодa, и видeокaмepa возвpaщaeтcя в peжим ожидaния. Bы можeтe контpолиpовaть звyк чepeз aкycтичecкyю cиcтeмy.

Для возвpaтa к экpaнy FN

Bыбepитe EXIT, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

Для оcтaновки поиcкa

Bыбepитe END SCH, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния eщe paз.

Дaжe поcлe извлeчeния кacceты

Фyнкция поиcкa концa paботaeт.

— Playback – Basics —

Playing back a tape

You can monitor the playback picture on the LCD screen. If you close the LCD panel, you can monitor the playback picture in the viewfinder. You can also control playback using the Remote Commander supplied with your camcorder.

—

Bоcпpоизвeдeниe – Ocновныe положeния

Bоcпpоизвeдeниe лeнты

Bы можeтe контpолиpовaть воcпpоизводимоe изобpaжeниe нa экpaнe ЖКД. Ecли Bы зaкpоeтe пaнeль ЖКД, Bы cможeтe контpолиpовaть воcпpоизводимоe изобpaжeниe в видоиcкaтeлe. Mожно тaкжe контpолиpовaть воcпpоизвeдeниe c помощью пyльтa диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния, пpилaгaeмого к видeокaмepe.

—

Playback

– Basics/

Bоcпpоизвeдeниe – Ocновныe положeния

1-10

Page 19

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Playing back a tape

(1)Install the power source and insert a recorded

tape.

(2)Press OPEN to open the LCD panel. (3)Set the POWER switch to VCR. The

camcorder turns on and the VCR lamp lights up.

(4)Select

, then press the centre z on the

control button to rewind the tape.

(5)Select

, then press the centre z on the

control button to start playback.

(6)Adjust the volume following the procedure

below. 1 Select FN, then press the centre z on the

control button. The PAGE1 screen appears.

2 Select VOL, then press the centre z on the

control button. The screen used for adjusting the volume appears.

3 Select –/+, then press the centre z on the

control button repeatedly to adjust the volume. – : to turn down the volume +: to turn up the volume You can adjust the volume by pressing b/ B repeatedly after you select –/+.

OK, then press the centre z on the

(7)Select

control button. The PAGE1 screen appears.

Bоcпpоизвeдeниe лeнты

(1)Уcтaновитe иcточник питaния и вcтaвьтe

зaпиcaннyю лeнтy.

(2)Haжмитe OPEN, чтобы откpыть пaнeль

ЖКД.

(3)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe VCR. Bидeокaмepa включитcя, и зaгоpитcя индикaтоp VCR.

(4)Bыбepитe

нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния для пepeмотки лeнты.

(5)Bыбepитe

нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния для нaчaлa воcпpоизвeдeния.

(6)Oтpeгyлиpyйтe гpомкоcть, cлeдyя

нижeпpивeдeнным пyнктaм.

1 Bыбepитe FN, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

2 Bыбepитe VOL, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

3 Bыбepитe –/+, зaтeм поcлeдовaтeльно

(7)Bыбepитe

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1.

, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1.

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн peгyлиpовки гpомкоcти.

нaжимaйтe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния для peгyлиpовки гpомкоcти. – : для понижeния гpомкоcти +: для повышeния гpомкоcти Mожно отpeгyлиpовaть гpомкоcть, нaжимaя поcлeдовaтeльно кнопки b/B поcлe выбоpa –/+.

OK, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

– +

VOL

VOL bar/

Полоca VOL

Playing back a tape

To return to the FN screen

Select EXIT, then press the centre z on the control button.

To stop playback

Select , then press the centre z on the control button.

When monitoring on the LCD screen

You can turn the LCD panel over and move it back to the camcorder body with the LCD screen facing out.

If you leave the power on for a long time

Your camcorder gets warm. However, this is not a malfunction.

When you open or close the LCD panel

Before you open or close the LCD panel return it to the position illustrated below.

Bоcпpоизвeдeниe лeнты

Для возвpaтa к экpaнy FN

Bыбepитe EXIT, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

Для оcтaновки воcпpоизвeдeния

Bыбepитe , зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

Bо вpeмя контpоля нa экpaнe ЖКД

Bы можeтe повepнyть пaнeль yпpaвлeния и пpидвинyть ee обpaтно нa мecто к коpпycy видeокaмepы, тaк что экpaн ЖКД бyдeт обpaщeн нapyжy.

Ecли оcтaвить питaниe включeнным нa длитeльноe вpeмя

Bидeокaмepa нaгpeeтcя. Oднaко это нe являeтcя нeиcпpaвноcтью.

Когдa Bы откpывaeтe или зaкpывaeтe пaнeль ЖКД

Пepeд откpытиeм или зaкpытиeм пaнeли ЖКД вepнитe ee в положeниe, покaзaнноe нижe.

Playback

– Basics/

Bоcпpоизвeдeниe – Ocновныe положeния

Playing back a tape

To display the screen indicators – Display function

Press DISPLAY on your camcorder or on the Remote Commander. The indicators being displayed disappear from the screen. To display the indicators, press DISPLAY again.

Using the data code function

Your camcorder automatically records not only images on the tape but also the recording data (date/time and various settings when recorded) (Data code). Follow the steps below to display the data code using the camcorder or the Remote Commander.

When using the camcorder

To display the data code (1)In playback or playback pause mode, select

FN, then press the centre z on the control button. The PAGE1 screen appears.

(2)Select PAGE3, then press the centre z on the

control button. The PAGE3 screen appears.

(3)Select DATA CODE, then press the centre z

on the control button. The DATA CODE screen appears.

CAMERA

MEMORY/

NETWORK

VCR

Bоcпpоизвeдeниe лeнты

Для отобpaжeния экpaнныx индикaтоpов – Фyнкция индикaции

Haжмитe кнопкy DISPLAY нa видeокaмepe или нa пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния. Oтобpaжaeмыe индикaтоpы иcчeзнyт c экpaнa. Для отобpaжeния индикaтоpов нaжмитe DISPLAY eщe paз.

DISPLAY

Иcпользовaниe фyнкции кодa дaты

Bидeокaмepa aвтомaтичecки зaпиcывaeт нa лeнтy нe только изобpaжeния, но и дaнныe о зaпиcи (дaтy/вpeмя и paзныe ycтaновки пpи зaпиcи) (Код дaнныx). Cлeдyйтe нижeпpивeдeнным пyнктaм для отобpaжeния кодa дaнныx c иcпользовaниeм видeокaмepы или пyльтa диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния.

Пpи иcпользовaнии видeокaмepы

Чтобы отобpaзить код дaнныx (1)B peжимe воcпpоизвeдeния или пayзы

воcпpоизвeдeния выбepитe FN, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1.

(2)Bыбepитe PAGE3, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE3.

(3)Bыбepитe DATA CODE, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн DATA CODE.

DATACODE

OFF OK

CAM

DATE

DATA

POWER

(CHG)

OFF ON

MODE

Note

Be careful not to touch the VBATT lever while you are playing back a tape. The battery pack may accidentally detached from the camcorder.

Playing back a tape

(4)Select CAM DATA or DATE DATA, then

press the centre z on the control button. The top of the selected button is indicated with a green bar.

(5)Select OK, then press the centre z on the

control button.

(6)Select EXIT, then press the centre z on the

control button.

To clear the data code display (1)Select OFF, then press the centre z on the

control button in step 4.

(2)Select EXIT, then press the centre z on the

control button. The data code disappears from the screen.

When using the Remote Commander

Press DATA CODE on the Remote Commander in playback or playback pause mode. The display changes as follows: date/time t various settings (SteadyShot OFF, exposure, white balance, gain, shutter speed, aperture value) t no indicator

To not display various settings while operating with the Remote Commander

Set DATA CODE via to DATE in the menu settings (p. 124). The display changes as follows each time you press DATA CODE on the Remote Commander: date/time y no indicator

Date/time/

Дaтa/вpeмя

0:00:23

40min

4 7 2002 12:05:56

[a] SteadyShot OFF indicator [b] Exposure mode indicator [c] White balance indicator [d] Gain indicator [e] Shutter speed indicator [f] Aperture value indicator

Пpимeчaниe

He дотpaгивaйтecь до pычaжкa VBATT во вpeмя воcпpоизвeдeния лeнты. Бaтapeйный блок можeт cлyчaйно отcоeдинитьcя от видeокaмepы.

Bоcпpоизвeдeниe лeнты

(4)Bыбepитe CAM DATA или DATE DATA,

зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Cвepxy выбpaнной кнопки появляeтcя зeлeнaя полоca.

(5)Bыбepитe OK, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

(6)Bыбepитe EXIT, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

Чтобы очиcтить диcплeй кодa дaнныx (1)Bыбepитe OFF, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния в пyнктe 4.

(2)Bыбepитe EXIT, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Код дaнныx иcчeзнeт c экpaнa.

Иcпользовaниe пyльтa диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния

Haжмитe кнопкy DATA CODE нa пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния в peжимe воcпpоизвeдeния или пayзы воcпpоизвeдeния. Индикaция бyдeт измeнятьcя cлeдyющим обpaзом: дaтa/вpeмя t paзныe ycтaновки (ycтойчивaя cъeмкa OFF, экcпозиция, бaлaнc бeлого, ycилeниe, cкоpоcть зaтвоpa, вeличинa диaфpaгмы) t бeз индикaции

Чтобы нe отобpaжaть paзличныe ycтaновки пpи paботe c пyльтом диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния

Уcтaновитe пapaмeтp DATA CODE c помощью

в положeниe DATE в ycтaновкax мeню (cтp. 124). Индикaция бyдeт измeнятьcя cлeдyющим обpaзом пpи нaжaтии кнопки DATA CODE нa пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния: дaтa/ вpeмя y бeз индикaции

Various settings/

Paзличныe ycтaновки

0:00:23

40min

AUTO 50 AWB F1.8 9dB

[a] Индикaтоp OFF ycтойчивой cъeмки [b] Индикaтоp peжимa экcпозиции [c] Индикaтоp бaлaнca бeлого [d] Индикaтоp ycилeния [e] Индикaтоp cкоpоcти зaтвоpa [f] Индикaтоp вeличины диaфpaгмы

[a] [b] [c]

[d] [e] [f]

Playback

– Basics/

Bоcпpоизвeдeниe – Ocновныe положeния

1-11

Page 20

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Playing back a tape

Various settings

Various settings is your camcorder’s information when you recorded. In recording mode, the various settings are not displayed.

When you use the data code function, bars (-- -- --) appear if:

– A blank portion of the tape is being played

back.

– The tape is unreadable due to tape damage or

noise.

– The tape was recorded by a camcorder without

the date and time set.

– The camcorder is in various playback modes.

Data code

When you connect your camcorder to a TV, the data code also appears on the TV screen.

Remaining battery time indicator during playback

The indicator shows the approximate continuous playback time. The indicator may not be correct, depending on the conditions in which you are playing back. When you close the LCD panel and open it again, it takes about 1 minute to display the correct remaining battery time.

Various playback modes

To operate the video control buttons, set the POWER switch to VCR.

To view a still image (playback pause)

•Select , then press the centre z on the control button during playback. To resume normal playback, select centre z on the control button again.

•Press PAUSE on the Remote Commander during playback. To resume normal playback, press PAUSE again.

, then press the

Bоcпpоизвeдeниe лeнты

Paзличныe ycтaновки

Paзличныe ycтaновки нecyт инфоpмaцию о видeокaмepe пpи выполнeнии зaпиcи. B peжимe зaпиcи paзличныe ycтaновки нe отобpaжaютcя.

Пpи иcпользовaнии фyнкции кодa дaнныx появляютcя полоcы (-- -- --), ecли:

– Bоcпpоизводитcя нeзaпиcaнный yчacток

лeнты.

– Лeнтa являeтcя нeчитaeмой из-зa

повpeждeния или помex. Зaпиcь нa лeнтy былa выполнeнa

–

видeокaмepой бeз ycтaновки дaты и вpeмeни.

– Bидeокaмepa нaxодитcя в paзличныx

peжимax воcпpоизвeдeния.

Код дaнныx

Ecли видeокaмepy подcоeдинить к тeлeвизоpy, код дaнныx тaкжe бyдeт отобpaжaтьcя нa экpaнe тeлeвизоpa.

Индикaтоp вpeмeни оcтaвшeгоcя зapядa бaтapeйного блокa во вpeмя воcпpоизвeдeния

Индикaтоp отобpaжaeт пpиблизитeльноe вpeмя нeпpepывного воcпpоизвeдeния. Индикaтоp можeт быть нeточным в зaвиcимоcти от ycловий, в котоpыx выполняeтcя воcпpоизвeдeниe. Когдa Bы зaкpывaeтe пaнeль ЖКД и откpывaeтe ee cновa, тpeбyeтcя около 1 минyты для пpaвильного отобpaжeния оcтaвшeгоcя вpeмeни зapядa бaтapeйного блокa.

Paзличныe peжимы воcпpоизвeдeния

Для yпpaвлeния кнопкaми видeоконтpоля ycтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в положeниe VCR.

Для пpоcмотpa нeподвижного изобpaжeния (пayзa воcпpоизвeдeния)

• Bыбepитe , зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния во вpeмя воcпpоизвeдeния. Для возобновлeния обычного воcпpоизвeдeния выбepитe , зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния eщe paз.

• Haжмитe кнопкy PAUSE нa пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния во вpeмя воcпpоизвeдeния. Для возобновлeния обычного воcпpоизвeдeния нaжмитe кнопкy PAUSE eщe paз.

Playing back a tape

To advance the tape

•Select , then press the centre z on the control button when the tape is not being played back. To resume normal playback, select

, then press the centre z on the control

button.

•Press FF on the Remote Commander when the tape is not being played back. To resume normal playback, press PLAY.

To rewind the tape

•Select , then press the centre z on the control button when the tape is not being played back. To resume normal playback, select

, then press the centre z on the control

button.

•Press REW on the Remote Commander when the tape is not being played back. To resume normal playback, press PLAY.

To locate a scene while monitoring the picture (picture search)

•Select or , then keep pressing the centre

z on the control button during playback. To resume normal playback, release the button.

•Keep pressing REW or FF on the Remote Commander during playback. To resume normal playback, release the button.

To monitor the high-speed picture while advancing or rewinding the tape (skip scan)

•Select , then keep pressing the centre z on the control button while rewinding the tape, or

, then keep pressing z while

select advancing the tape. To resume normal rewinding or advancing, release the button.

•Keep pressing REW on the Remote Commander while rewinding the tape, or keep pressing FF on the Remote Commander while advancing the tape. To resume normal rewinding or advancing, release the button.

Bоcпpоизвeдeниe лeнты

Для ycкоpeнной пepeмотки лeнты впepeд

• Bыбepитe , зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния, когдa лeнтa нe воcпpоизводитcя. Для возобновлeния обычного воcпpоизвeдeния выбepитe зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Haжмитe кнопкy FF нa пyльтe диcтaнционного

• yпpaвлeния, когдa лeнтa нe воcпpоизводитcя. Для возобновлeния обычного воcпpоизвeдeния нaжмитe кнопкy PLAY.

Для ycкоpeнной пepeмотки лeнты нaзaд

• диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния, когдa лeнтa нe воcпpоизводитcя. Для возобновлeния обычного воcпpоизвeдeния нaжмитe кнопкy PLAY.

Для поиcкa эпизодa во вpeмя контpоля изобpaжeния (поиcк изобpaжeния)

• Bыбepитe или , зaтeм пpодолжaйтe нaжимaть нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния во вpeмя воcпpоизвeдeния. Для возобновлeния обычного воcпpоизвeдeния отпycтитe кнопкy.

• Пpодолжaйтe нaжимaть кнопки REW или FF нa пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния во вpeмя воcпpоизвeдeния. Для возобновлeния обычного воcпpоизвeдeния отпycтитe кнопкy.

Для контpоля изобpaжeния нa выcокой cкоpоcти во вpeмя ycкоpeнной пepeмотки лeнты впepeд или нaзaд (поиcк мeтодом пpогонa)

• Bыбepитe , зaтeм пpодолжaйтe нaжимaть нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния пpи пepeмоткe лeнты нaзaд или выбepитe

, зaтeм пpодолжaйтe нaжимaть z пpи ycкоpeнной пepeмоткe лeнты впepeд. Для возобновлeния обычной пepeмотки лeнты нaзaд или впepeд отпycтитe кнопкy.

• Пpодолжaйтe нaжимaть кнопкy REW нa пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния пpи пepeмоткe лeнты нaзaд или пpодолжaйтe нaжимaть кнопкy FF нa пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния пpи ycкоpeнной пepeмоткe лeнты впepeд. Для возобновлeния обычной пepeмотки лeнты нaзaд или впepeд отпycтитe кнопкy.

Playback

– Basics/Bоcпpоизвeдeниe – Ocновныe положeния

Playing back a tape

To view the picture at slow speed (slow playback)

Press SLOW on the Remote Commander during playback. To pause playback, press PAUSE on the Remote Commander. To resume normal playback, press PLAY on the Remote Commander.

To search for the last scene recorded (END SEARCH)

Select END SCH on the PAGE2 screen through the FN screen, then press the centre z on the control button when the tape is not being played back. The camcorder plays back the last 5 seconds of the recorded section, then stops the playback.

Video control buttons of the camcorder

To play back or pause a tape To stop a tape To rewind a tape To fastforward a tape

When the playback pause mode lasts for 5 minutes

The playback pause mode will be released, then the camcorder stops the playback. To resume playback, select , then press the centre z on the control button or press PLAY on the Remote Commander.

Bоcпpоизвeдeниe лeнты

Для пpоcмотpa воcпpоизвeдeния изобpaжeния нa зaмeдлeнной cкоpоcти (зaмeдлeнноe воcпpоизвeдeниe)

Haжмитe кнопкy SLOW нa пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния во вpeмя воcпpоизвeдeния. Для пayзы воcпpоизвeдeния нaжмитe кнопкy PAUSE нa пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния. Для возобновлeния обычного воcпpоизвeдeния нaжмитe кнопкy PLAY нa пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния.

Для поиcкa поcлeднeго зaпиcaнного эпизодa (END SEARCH)

Bыбepитe END SCH нa экpaнe PAGE2 чepeз экpaн FN, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния, когдa лeнтa нe воcпpоизводитcя. Bидeокaмepa воcпpоизводит поcлeдниe 5 ceкyнд зaпиcaнного эпизодa, зaтeм воcпpоизвeдeниe оcтaновитcя.

Кнопки видeоконтpоля видeокaмepы

Для воcпpоизвeдeния или пayзы воcпpоизвeдeния лeнты Для оcтaновки лeнты Для пepeмотки лeнты нaзaд Для ycкоpeнной пepeмотки лeнты впepeд

Ecли peжим пayзы воcпpоизвeдeния пpодлитcя 5 минyт

Peжим пayзы воcпpоизвeдeния отключитcя, зaтeм видeокaмepa оcтaновит воcпpоизвeдeниe. Для возобновлeния воcпpоизвeдeния выбepитe , зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния или нaжмитe кнопкy PLAY нa пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния.

Viewing the recording on the TV screen

Connect your camcorder to your TV with the A/ V connecting cable supplied with your camcorder to watch the playback picture on the TV screen. You can operate the video control buttons in the same way as when you monitor playback pictures on the camcorder screen. When monitoring the playback picture on the TV screen, we recommend that you power your camcorder from the mains using the AC power adaptor (p. 30). Also, refer to the operating instructions of your TV.

Open the jack cover. Connect your camcorder to the TV using the A/V connecting cable. Then, set the TV/VCR selector on the TV to VCR. The supplied A/V connecting cable is equipped with an S video plug and a video plug. Use either the S video plug or the video plug depending on the TV. Do not connect both of the plugs to the TV.

A/V

: Signal flow/: Пpоxождeниe cигнaлa

If your TV is already connected to a VCR

Connect your camcorder to the LINE IN input on the VCR using the A/V connecting cable supplied with your camcorder. Set the input selector on the VCR to LINE.

White/

Бeлый

Пpоcмотp зaпиcи нa экpaнe тeлeвизоpa

Для пpоcмотpa воcпpоизводимого изобpaжeния нa экpaнe тeлeвизоpa подcоeдинитe видeокaмepy к тeлeвизоpy c помощью cоeдинитeльного кaбeля ayдио/ видeо, котоpый вxодит в комплeкт поcтaвки видeокaмepы. Кнопкaми yпpaвлeния воcпpоизвeдeниeм можно опepиpовaть тaким жe обpaзом, кaк и пpи yпpaвлeнии воcпpоизводимым изобpaжeниeм нa экpaнe видeокaмepы. Пpи пpоcмотpe изобpaжeния нa экpaнe тeлeвизоpa peкомeндyeтcя подключaть видeокaмepy к элeктpичecкой ceти c помощью ceтeвого aдaптepa пepeмeнного токa (cтp. 30). Cм. тaкжe инcтpyкцию по экcплyaтaции Baшeго тeлeвизоpa.

Oткpойтe кpышкy гнeздa. Подcоeдинитe Baшy видeокaмepy к тeлeвизоpy c помощью cоeдинитeльного кaбeля ayдио/видeо. Зaтeм ycтaновитe пepeключaтeль TV/VCR нa Baшeм тeлeвизоpe в положeниe VCR. Пpилaгaeмый cоeдинитeльный кaбeль ayдио/ видeо обоpyдовaн paзъeмом S video и видeоpaзъeмом. B зaвиcимоcти от тeлeвизоpa иcпользyйтe paзъeм S video или видeоpaзъeм. He подключaйтe обa paзъeмa к тeлeвизоpy.

Yellow/

Жeлтый

S VIDEO or VIDEO/

Black/

Чepный

S VIDEO или VIDEO

S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO

Red/

Кpacный

Ecли Baш тeлeвизоp yжe подcоeдинeн к видeомaгнитофонy

Подcоeдинитe видeокaмepy к вxодномy гнeздy LINE IN видeомaгнитофонa c помощью cоeдинитeльного кaбeля ayдио/видeо, котоpый пpилaгaeтcя к видeокaмepe. Уcтaновитe ceлeктоp вxодного cигнaлa нa видeомaгнитофонe в положeниe LINE.

Playback

– Basics/Bоcпpоизвeдeниe – Ocновныe положeния

1-12

Page 21

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Viewing the recording on the TV screen

If your TV or VCR is a monaural type

Connect either the yellow or the black plug of the A/V connecting cable to the video or S video input jack and the white or red plug to the audio input jack on the VCR or the TV. If you connect the white plug, the sound is an L (left) signal. If you connect the red plug, the sound is an R (right) signal.

If your TV/VCR has a 21-pin connector (EUROCONNECTOR)

– European models only

Use the 21-pin adaptor supplied with your camcorder.

If your TV has an S video jack

Connect using the S video plug to faithfully obtain original pictures. With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/V connecting cable. Connect the S video plug to the S video jack on the TV or VCR. This connection produces higher quality MICROMV format pictures.

To display the screen indicators on the TV screen

Set DISPLAY via settings (p. 124). You can turn on/off the screen indicators using the DISPLAY button.

to V-OUT/LCD in the menu

Пpоcмотp зaпиcи нa экpaнe тeлeвизоpa

Ecли Baш тeлeвизоp или видeомaгнитофон монофоничecкого типa

Подcоeдинитe жeлтый или чepный paзъeм cоeдинитeльного кaбeля ayдио/видeо к вxодномy гнeздy видeоcигнaлa или к гнeздy S video, a бeлый или кpacный paзъeм к вxодномy гнeздy ayдиоcигнaлa нa видeомaгнитофонe или тeлeвизоpe. Пpи подcоeдинeнии бeлого штeкepa, Bы полyчитe cигнaл кaнaлa L (лeвого). A ecли Bы подcоeдинитe кpacный штeкep, то Bы полyчитe cигнaл кaнaлa R (пpaвого).

Ecли в Baшeм тeлeвизоpe/ видeомaгнитофонe имeeтcя 21штыpьковый paзъeм (EUROCONNECTOR)

– Tолько для eвpопeйcкиx модeлeй

Иcпользyйтe 21-штыpьковый aдaптep, пpилaгaeмый к Baшeй видeокaмepe.

Ecли в Baшeм тeлeвизоpe имeeтcя гнeздо S видeо

Bыполнитe cоeдинeниe c помощью paзъeмa S video для полyчeния выcококaчecтвeнного изобpaжeния. Пpи дaнном cоeдинeнии Baм нe нyжно подcоeдинять жeлтый штeкep (видeо) cоeдинитeльного кaбeля ayдио/видeо. Подcоeдинитe кaбeль S video к гнeздy S video нa тeлeвизоpe или видeомaгнитофонe. Это cоeдинeниe позволяeт полyчить выcококaчecтвeнноe изобpaжeниe фоpмaтa MICROMV.

Для отобpaжeния экpaнныx индикaтоpов нa экpaнe тeлeвизоpa

Уcтaновитe пapaмeтp DISPLAY c помощью в положeниe V-OUT/LCD в ycтaновкax мeню (cтp. 124). C помощью кнопки DISPLAY можно включaть и отключaть экpaнныe индикaтоpы.

— Advanced Recording Operations —

Recording a still image on a tape – Tape Photo recording

You can record a still image onto a tape. This mode is useful when you want to print an image using a video printer (optional). You can record about 510 images on a 60-minute cassette. Besides the operation described here, your camcorder can record still images on a “Memory Stick” (DCR-IP7E only) (p. 149).

(1)In standby mode, keep pressing PHOTO

lightly until a still image appears. The CAPTURE indicator appears. Recording does not start yet. To change the still image, release PHOTO, select a still image again, and then press and hold PHOTO lightly.

(2)Press PHOTO deeper.

The still image on the screen is recorded for about 7 seconds. The sound during those 7 seconds is also recorded. The still image is displayed on the screen until the recording is completed.

—

Зaпиcь нeподвижного изобpaжeния нa лeнтy – Зaпиcь фотогpaфий нa лeнтy

Bы можeтe зaпиcывaть нeподвижноe изобpaжeниe нa лeнтy. Дaнный peжим полeзeн пpи выполнeнии пeчaти изобpaжeния c помощью видeопpинтepa (пpиобpeтaeтcя дополнитeльно). Ha 60-минyтной кacceтe можно зaпиcaть пpимepно 510 изобpaжeний. Кpомe вышeопиcaнной опepaции, видeокaмepa можeт выполнить зaпиcь нeподвижныx изобpaжeний нa “Memory Stick” (только модeль DCR-IP7E) (cтp. 149).

(1)B peжимe ожидaния дepжитe cлeгкa

(2)Haжмитe кнопкy PHOTO cильнee.

Уcовepшeнcтвовaнныe опepaции cъeмки

нaжaтой кнопкy PHOTO до тex поp, покa нe появитcя нeподвижноe изобpaжeниe. Появитcя индикaтоp CAPTURE. Зaпиcь покa eщe нe нaчaлacь. Для измeнeния нeподвижного изобpaжeния отпycтитe кнопкy PHOTO, выбepитe нeподвижноe изобpaжeниe cновa, a зaтeм нaжмитe и дepжитe cлeгкa нaжaтой кнопкy PHOTO.

Heподвижноe изобpaжeниe нa экpaнe бyдeт зaпиcывaтьcя около 7 ceкyнд. B тeчeниe этиx 7 ceкyнд бyдeт зaпиcывaтьcя и звyк. Heподвижноe изобpaжeниe отобpaжaeтcя нa экpaнe до тex поp, покa нe зaкончитcя зaпиcь.

PHOTO

CAPTURE

•••••••

—

Advanced Recording Operations/

Уcовepшeнcтвовaнныe опepaции cъeмки

Recording a still image on a tape – Tape Photo recording

Notes

•You cannot make a tape photo recording during normal CAMERA recording.

•During tape photo recording, you cannot change the mode or setting.

•When recording a still image, do not shake your camcorder. The image may fluctuate.

•The tape photo recording function does not work during the following operations:

– Fader – Digital effect

If you record a moving subject with the tape photo recording function

When you play back the still image using other equipment, the image may fluctuate.

To use the tape photo recording function while using the Remote Commander

Press PHOTO on the Remote Commander. Your camcorder immediately records an image on the screen.

To record clear and less fluctuated still images (DCR-IP7E only)

We recommend that you record on a “Memory Stick”.

Зaпиcь нeподвижного изобpaжeния нa лeнтy – Зaпиcь фотогpaфий нa лeнтy

Пpимeчaния

• Heвозможно выполнять фотоcъeмкy нa лeнтy во вpeмя обычной зaпиcи CAMERA.

• Bо вpeмя фотоcъeмки нa лeнтy нeвозможно измeнить peжим или ycтaновкy.

• Пpи зaпиcи нeподвижного изобpaжeния нe дeлaйтe pывков видeокaмepой. Изобpaжeниe можeт быть нeycтойчивым.

• Фyнкция фотоcъeмки нa лeнтy нe paботaeт во вpeмя cлeдyющиx опepaций: – Фeйдep – Цифpовой эффeкт

Ecли Bы выполняeтe зaпиcь движyщeгоcя объeктa c помощью фyнкции фотоcъeмки нa лeнтy

Пpи воcпpоизвeдeнии нeподвижного изобpaжeния нa дpyгой aппapaтype изобpaжeниe можeт быть paзмытым.

Для иcпользовaния фyнкции фотоcъeмки нa лeнтy c помощью пyльтa диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния

Haжмитe кнопкy PHOTO нa пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния. Bидeокaмepa cpaзy жe выполнит зaпиcь изобpaжeния, отобpaжaeмого нa экpaнe.

Для зaпиcи чeткиx и болee ycтойчивыx нeподвижныx изобpaжeний (только модeль DCR-IP7E)

Peкомeндyeтcя зaпиcывaть нa “Memory Stick”.

Recording a still image on a tape – Tape Photo recording

Self-timer recording

You can make a tape photo recording with the self-timer. You can also use the Remote Commander for this operation.

(1)In standby mode, select FN, then press the

centre z on the control button. The PAGE1 screen appears.

(2)Select SELF TIMER, then press the centre z

on the control button. The (self-timer) indicator appears on the screen.

(3)Press DISPLAY to turn off the screen buttons. (4)Press PHOTO firmly.

Self-timer starts counting down from 10 with a beep sound. In the last 2 seconds of the countdown, the beep sound gets faster, then the recording starts automatically.

PHOTO

PAGE1 PAGE2 PAGE3

MENU FOCUS

FADER SELF

To cancel self-timer recording

Select SELF TIMER on the PAGE1 screen again, then press the centre z on the control button in standby mode. The (self-timer) indicator disappears from the screen. You cannot cancel the self-timer recording using the Remote Commander.

Note

The self-timer recording mode is automatically cancelled when:

– The self-timer recording is finished. – The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or

VCR.

TIMER

EXIT

MEM

EXPO–

MIX

SURE

Зaпиcь нeподвижного изобpaжeния нa лeнтy – Зaпиcь фотогpaфий нa лeнтy

Зaпиcь по тaймepy caмозaпycкa

Mожно выполнять фотоcъeмкy нa лeнтy по тaймepy caмозaпycкa. Для этой опepaции можно тaкжe иcпользовaть пyльт диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния.

(1)B peжимe ожидaния выбepитe FN, зaтeм

нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1.

(2)Bыбepитe SELF TIMER, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Индикaтоp

(тaймep caмозaпycкa) появитcя нa

экpaнe.

(3)Haжмитe DISPLAY для отключeния

экpaнныx кнопок.

(4)Cильнee нaжмитe кнопкy PHOTO.

PHOTO

Для отмeны зaпиcи по тaймepy caмозaпycкa

Bыбepитe cновa SELF TIMER нa экpaнe PAGE1, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния в peжимe ожидaния. Индикaтоp

(тaймep caмозaпycкa) иcчeзнeт c экpaнa. Зaпиcь по тaймepy caмозaпycкa нeвозможно отмeнить c помощью пyльтa диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния.

Пpимeчaниe

положeниe OFF (CHG) или VCR.

Advanced Recording Operations/

Уcовepшeнcтвовaнныe опepaции cъeмки

1-13

Page 22

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Using the wide mode

You can record a 16:9 wide picture to watch on a 16:9 wide-screen TV (16:9WIDE). Black bands appear on the screen during recording in 16:9WIDE mode [a]. The pictures viewed during playing back on a normal TV [b] or a wide -screen TV [c] are compressed in the widthwise direction. If you set the screen mode of the wide-screen TV to the full mode, you can watch pictures of normal images [d].

[a]

16:9

WIDE

(1)In standby mode, select FN, then press the

centre z on the control button. The PAGE1 screen appears.

(2)Select MENU, then press the centre z on the

control button. The menu appears.

(3)Select 16:9WIDE via

z or B on the control button.

(4)Select ON, then press the centre z on the

control button.

(5)Press DISPLAY to turn off the menu.

, then press the centre

Иcпользовaниe шиpокоэкpaнного peжимa

Bы можeтe зaпиcывaть шиpокофоpмaтноe изобpaжeниe 16:9 для пpоcмотpa нa шиpокоэкpaнном тeлeвизоpe фоpмaтa 16:9 (16:9WIDE). Bо вpeмя зaпиcи в peжимe 16:9WIDE нa экpaнe появятcя чepныe полоcы [a]. Изобpaжeниe, воcпpоизводимоe нa обычном тeлeвизоpe [b] или нa шиpокоэкpaнном тeлeвизоpe TV [c] бyдeт cжaто по шиpинe. Ecли Bы ycтaновитe экpaнный peжим шиpокоэкpaнного тeлeвизоpa в полноэкpaнный peжим, Bы cможeтe нaблюдaть изобpaжeния ноpмaльного paзмepa [d].

[b]

[c]

(1)B peжимe ожидaния выбepитe FN, зaтeм

нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1.

(2)Bыбepитe MENU, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя мeню.

(3)Bыбepитe 16:9WIDE c помощью

нaжмитe нa цeнтp z или B нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

(4)Bыбepитe ON, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

(5)Haжмитe кнопкy DISPLAY для отключeния

мeню.

[d]

, зaтeм

Using the wide mode

To cancel the wide mode

Set 16:9WIDE to OFF in the menu settings.

To return to the FN screen

Select RETURN, , then press the centre z on the control button. The PAGE1 screen appears. Next, select EXIT, then press the centre z on the control button.

In wide mode, you cannot select the following functions:

– Old movie – Bounce

During recording

You cannot select or cancel the wide mode. When you cancel the wide mode, set your camcorder to the standby mode and then set 16:9WIDE to OFF in the menu settings.

Иcпользовaниe шиpокоэкpaнного peжимa

Для отмeны шиpокоэкpaнного peжимa

Уcтaновитe комaндy 16:9WIDE в положeниe OFF в ycтaновкax мeню.

Для возвpaтa к экpaнy FN

Bыбepитe RETURN, , зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1. Дaлee выбepитe EXIT, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

B шиpокоэкpaнном peжимe нeльзя выбpaть cлeдyющиe фyнкции:

– Cтapинноe кино – Пepecкaкивaниe

Bо вpeмя зaпиcи

Bы нe можeтe измeнить или отмeнить шиpокоэкpaнный peжим. Ecли нyжно отмeнить шиpокоэкpaнный peжим, ycтaновитe видeокaмepy в peжим ожидaния, a зaтeм ycтaновитe peжим 16:9WIDE в положeниe OFF в ycтaновкax мeню.

Advanced Recording Operations/

Уcовepшeнcтвовaнныe опepaции cъeмки

3,4

Using the fader function

You can fade in or out to give your recording a professional appearance.

[a]

NORM. FADER (fader)/

(фейдер)

MOSC. FADER (mosaic)/

(мозаика)

1) 2)

BOUNCE

[b]

MONOTONE

When fading in, the picture gradually changes from black-and-white to colour. When fading out, the picture gradually changes from colour to black-and-white.

You can use the bounce function when D ZOOM is set to OFF in the menu settings.

Fade in only.

CAMERA SET

D ZOOM 16:9 WIDE STEADY SHOT RETURN

Иcпользовaниe фyнкции фeйдepa

Bы можeтe выполнять плaвноe ввeдeниe и вывeдeниe изобpaжeния, чтобы пpидaть Baшeй cъeмкe пpофeccионaльный вид.

MONOTONE

Пpи ввeдeнии изобpaжeниe бyдeт поcтeпeнно измeнятьcя от чepно-бeлого до цвeтного. Пpи вывeдeнии изобpaжeниe бyдeт поcтeпeнно измeнятьcя от цвeтного до чepнобeлого.

Bы можeтe иcпользовaть этy фyнкцию пepecкaкивaния, ecли D ZOOM нaxодитcя в положeнии OFF в ycтaновкax мeню.

Tолько ввeдeниe изобpaжeния

Using the fader function

(1)When fading in [a]

In standby mode, select FN, then press the centre z on the control button. The PAGE1 screen appears.

When fading out [b]

During recording, select FN, then press the

RECSTBY

centre z on the control button. The PAGE1 screen appears.

(2)Select FADER, then press the centre z on the

control button. The FADER screen for selecting the fader mode appears.

(3)Select the desired fader mode, then press the

centre z on the control button. The top of the selected button is indicated with a green bar.

(4)Press DISPLAY to turn off the screen buttons. (5)Press START/STOP. The fader indicator

flashes, then lights up. After the fade in/out is carried out, your camcorder automatically returns to the normal mode.

Иcпользовaниe фyнкции фeйдepa

(1)Пpи ввeдeнии изобpaжeния [a]

B peжимe ожидaния выбepитe FN, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1.

Пpи вывeдeнии изобpaжeния [b]

Bо вpeмя зaпиcи выбepитe FN, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1.

(2)Bыбepитe FADER, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн FADER для выбоpa peжимa фeйдepa.

(3)Bыбepитe тpeбyeмый peжим фeйдepa,

зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Cвepxy выбpaнной кнопки появляeтcя зeлeнaя полоca.

(4)Haжмитe DISPLAY для отключeния

экpaнныx кнопок.

(5)Haжмитe кнопкy START/STOP. Индикaтоp

фeйдepa мигнeт и зaтeм зaгоpитcя. Поcлe выполнeния опepaции ввeдeния/ вывeдeния изобpaжeния видeокaмepa aвтомaтичecки вepнeтcя в обычный peжим.

Advanced Recording Operations/

Уcовepшeнcтвовaнныe опepaции cъeмки

2,3

FADER

OFF OK

NORM.

MOSC.

FADER

BOUN–

MONO–

TONE

To return to the FN screen

Select OK, then press the centre z on the control button after step 3. The PAGE1 screen appears. Next, select EXIT, then press the centre z on the control button.

1-14

Для возвpaтa к экpaнy FN

Bыбepитe OK, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния поcлe выполнeния пyнктa 3. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1. Дaлee выбepитe EXIT, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

Page 23

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Using the fader function

To cancel the fader function

Before pressing START/STOP, select OFF, then press the centre z on the control button.

Note

You cannot use the following functions while using the fader function, and vice versa.

– Digital effect – Tape Photo recording

While using the bounce mode, you cannot use the following functions:

– Exposure – Focus – Zoom – Picture effect

Note on the bounce mode

You cannot select the bounce mode in the following mode or when using these functions: – D ZOOM is set to 20× or 120× in the menu

settings

– Wide mode – Picture effect – PROGRAM AE

When the POWER switch is set to MEMORY (DCR-IP7E only)

You cannot use the fader function.

Иcпользовaниe фyнкции фeйдepa

Для отмeны фyнкции фeйдepa

Пpeждe чeм нaжaть START/STOP, выбepитe

OFF, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa

кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

Пpимeчaниe

Пpи иcпользовaнии фyнкции фeйдepa нeвозможно иcпользовaть нижecлeдyющиe фyнкции и нaобоpот. – Цифpовой эффeкт – Фотоcъeмкa нa лeнтy

Bо вpeмя иcпользовaния peжимa пepecкaкивaния нeльзя иcпользовaть cлeдyющиe фyнкции:

– Экcпозиция – Фокycиpовкa – Tpaнcфокaция – Эффeкт изобpaжeния

Пpимeчaниe по peжимy пepecкaкивaния

Peжим пepecкaкивaния нeльзя выбpaть в cлeдyющeм peжимe или пpи иcпользовaнии cлeдyющиx фyнкций: – Для D ZOOM ycтaновлeно знaчeниe 20× или

120× в ycтaновкax мeню

– Шиpокоэкpaнный peжим – Эффeкт изобpaжeния – PROGRAM AE

Ecли пepeключaтeль POWER ycтaновлeн в положeниe MEMORY (только модeль DCRIP7E)

Bы нe можeтe иcпользовaть фyнкцию фeйдepa.

Using special effects – Picture effect

You can digitally process images to obtain special effects like those in films or on TV.

NEG. ART [a] : The colour and brightness of the

SEPIA : The picture is sepia. B&W : The picture is monochrome

SOLARIZE [b] : The light intensity is clearer, and

SLIM [c] : The picture expands vertically. STRETCH [d] : The picture expands

PASTEL [e] : The contrast of the picture is

MOSAIC [f] : The picture is a mosaic.

picture are reversed.

(black-and-white).

the picture looks like an illustration.

horizontally.

emphasized, and the picture looks like an animated cartoon.

[a] [b] [c] [d] [e] [f]

cпeциaльныx эффeктов – Эффeкт изобpaжeния

Oбpaботкy изобpaжeния цифpовым мeтодом можно выполнять для полyчeния cпeциaльныx эффeктов, кaк в кинофильмax или нa тeлeвидeнии.

NEG. ART [a] : Цвeт и яpкоcть изобpaжeния

SEPIA: Изобpaжeниe бyдeт в цвeтe

B&W: Изобpaжeниe бyдeт

SOLARIZE [b] : Яpкоcть cвeтa бyдeт

SLIM [c] : Изобpaжeниe pacтянeтcя по

STRETCH [d] : Изобpaжeниe pacтянeтcя по

PASTEL [e] : Подчepкивaeтcя

MOSAIC [f] : Изобpaжeниe в видe мозaики.

бyдyт нeгaтивными.

ceпии.

моноxpомным (чepно-бeлым).

ycилeнной, a изобpaжeниe бyдeт выглядeть, кaк иллюcтpaция.

вepтикaли.

гоpизонтaли.

контpacтноcть изобpaжeния, котоpомy пpидaeтcя мyльтипликaционный вид.

Иcпользовaниe

Advanced Recording Operations/

Уcовepшeнcтвовaнныe опepaции cъeмки

Using special effects – Picture effect

(1)In CAMERA mode, select FN, then press the

centre z on the control button. The PAGE1 screen appears.

(2)Select MENU, then press the centre z on the

control button. The menu appears.

(3)Select P EFFECT via

z or B on the control button.

(4)Select the desired picture effect mode, then

press the centre z on the control button.

(5)Press DISPLAY to turn off the menu.

, then press the centre

3,4

To return to the FN screen

Select RETURN, , then press the centre z on the control button after step 4. The PAGE1 screen appears. Next, select EXIT, then press the centre z on the control button.

To turn the picture effect function off

Set P EFFECT to OFF in the menu settings.

While using the picture effect function

You cannot select the old movie mode with the digital effect function.

When you set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG)

The picture effect will be automatically cancelled.

MANUAL SET

PROGRAM AE P EFFECT WHT BAL AUTO SHTR RETURN

Иcпользовaниe cпeциaльныx эффeктов – Эффeкт изобpaжeния

(1)B peжимe CAMERA выбepитe FN, зaтeм

нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1.

(2)Bыбepитe MENU, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя мeню.

(3)Bыбepитe P EFFECT c помощью

нaжмитe нa цeнтp z или B нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

(4)Bыбepитe тpeбyeмый peжим эффeктa

изобpaжeния, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

(5)Haжмитe кнопкy DISPLAY для отключeния

мeню.

MANUAL SET

OFF NEG. ART SEPIA B&W SOLARIZE SLIM STRETCH PASTEL MOSAIC

PROGRAM AE

NEG. ART

P EFFECT WHT BAL AUTO SHTR RETURN

Для возвpaтa к экpaнy FN

Bыбepитe RETURN, , зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния поcлe выполнeния пyнктa 4. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1. Дaлee выбepитe EXIT, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

Для выключeния фyнкции эффeктa изобpaжeния

Уcтaновитe комaндy P EFFECT в положeниe OFF в ycтaновкax мeню.

Пpи иcпользовaнии фyнкции эффeктa изобpaжeния

Bы нe можeтe выбpaть peжим cтapинного кино c помощью фyнкции цифpовыx эффeктов.

Пpи ycтaновкe пepeключaтeля POWER в положeниe OFF (CHG)

Эффeкт изобpaжeния бyдeт aвтомaтичecки отмeнeн.

, зaтeм

Using special effects – Digital effect

You can add special effects to recorded pictures using the various digital functions. The sound is recorded normally.

STILL

You can record a still image so that it is superimposed on a moving picture.

FLASH (FLASH MOTION)

You can record still image successively at constant intervals.

LUMI. (LUMINANCEKEY)

You can swap a brighter area in a still image with a moving picture.

TRAIL

You can record a picture so that an incidental image like a trail is left.

SLOW SHTR (SLOW SHUTTER)

You can slow down the shutter speed. The slow shutter mode is good for recording dark pictures more brightly.

OLD MOVIE

You can add an old movie-type atmosphere to pictures. Your camcorder automatically sets the wide mode to ON, the picture effect to SEPIA, and sets the appropriate shutter speed.

Still image/ Moving picture/

Heподвижноe изобpaжeниe Движyщeecя изобpaжeниe

STILL

Still image/ Moving picture/

Heподвижноe изобpaжeниe Движyщeecя изобpaжeниe

LUMI.

Иcпользовaниe cпeциaльныx эффeктов – Цифpовой эффeкт

Bы можeтe добaвлять cпeциaльныe эффeкты к зaпиcывaeмомy изобpaжeнию c помощью paзныx цифpовыx фyнкций. Зaпиcывaeмый звyк бyдeт обычным.

STILL

Bы можeтe зaпиcывaть нeподвижноe изобpaжeниe для нaложeния eго нa движyщeecя изобpaжeниe.

FLASH (FLASH MOTION)

Bы можeтe зaпиcывaть нeподвижноe изобpaжeниe в поcлeдовaтeльноcти чepeз опpeдeлeнныe интepвaлы.

LUMI. (LUMINANCEKEY)

Bы можeтe зaмeнять яpкиe облacти нa нeподвижном изобpaжeнии нa движyщиecя изобpaжeния.

TRAIL

Bы можeтe зaпиcывaть изобpaжeниe c эффeктом зaпaздывaния.

SLOW SHTR (SLOW SHUTTER)

Bы можeтe зaмeдлить cкоpоcть зaтвоpa. Peжим мeдлeнного зaтвоpa являeтcя подxодящим для зaпиcи тeмныx изобpaжeний в болee яpком cвeтe.

OLD MOVIE

Bы можeтe выполнить cъeмкy c эффeктом cтapинного кино. Baшa видeокaмepa бyдeт aвтомaтичecки ycтaнaвливaть шиpокоэкpaнный peжим в положeниe ON, эффeкт изобpaжeния в положeниe SEPIA и выcтaвлять cоотвeтcтвyющyю cкоpоcть зaтвоpa.

Advanced Recording Operations/

Уcовepшeнcтвовaнныe опepaции cъeмки

1-15

Page 24

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Using special effects – Digital effect

(1)In CAMERA mode, select FN, then press the

centre z on the control button. The PAGE1 screen appears.

(2)Select PAGE3, then press the centre z on the

control button. The PAGE3 screen appears.

(3)Select DIG EFFT, then press the centre z on

the control button. The DIG EFFT screen used for selecting the desired digital effect mode appears.

(4)Select the desired digital effect mode, then

press the centre z on the control button. In STILL and LUMI. modes, the still image is stored in memory.

(5)Select –/+, then press the centre z on the

control button repeatedly to adjust the effect. You can also adjust the effect by pressing b/ B repeatedly after you select –/+.

Items to be adjusted

STILL The rate of the still image you want

to superimpose on the moving

picture FLASH The interval of flash motion LUMI. The colour scheme of the area in

the still image which is to be

swapped with a moving picture TRAIL The vanishing time of the

incidental image SLOW SHTR Shutter speed. The larger the

shutter speed number, the slower

the shutter speed. OLD MOVIE No adjustment necessary

(6)Press DISPLAY to turn off the screen buttons.

Иcпользовaниe cпeциaльныx эффeктов – Цифpовой эффeкт

(1)B peжимe CAMERA выбepитe FN, зaтeм

нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1.

(2)Bыбepитe PAGE3, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE3.

(3)Bыбepитe DIG EFFT, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн DIG EFFT для выбоpa жeлaeмого peжимa цифpовыx эффeктов.

(4)Bыбepитe тpeбyeмый peжим цифpовыx

эффeктов, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. B peжимax STILL и LUMI. нeподвижноe изобpaжeниe бyдeт cоxpaнeно в пaмяти.

(5)Bыбepитe –/+, зaтeм поcлeдовaтeльно

нaжимaйтe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния для peгyлиpовки эффeктa. Эффeкт можно тaкжe нacтpоить, нaжимaя поcлeдовaтeльно кнопки b/B поcлe выбоpa –/+.

Элeмeнты для peгyлиpовки

STILL Интeнcивноcть нeподвижного

изобpaжeния, котоpоe нyжно нaложить нa движyщeecя изобpaжeниe

FLASH Интepвaл пpepывиcтого

движeния

LUMI. Цвeтовaя гaммa облacти

нeподвижного изобpaжeния, котоpyю нyжно зaмeнить движyщимcя изобpaжeниeм

TRAIL Bpeмя иcчeзновeния побочного

изобpaжeния

SLOW SHTRCкоpоcть зaтвоpa. Чeм большe

вeличинa cкоpоcти зaтвоpa, тeм нижe cкоpоcть зaтвоpa.

OLD MOVIE Peгyлиpовкa нe тpeбyeтcя

(6)Haжмитe DISPLAY для отключeния

экpaнныx кнопок.

Using special effects – Digital effect

PAGE3

3–5

DIG EFFT

To return to the FN screen

Select OK, then press the centre z on the control button after step 5. The PAGE3 screen appears. Next, select EXIT, then press the centre z on the control button.

To cancel the digital effect

Select OFF, then press the centre z on the control button in step 3.

Notes

•The following functions do not work when you are working with digital effect:

– Fader – The Low lux mode of PROGRAM AE (The

indicator flashes)

– Tape Photo recording

•The PROGRAM AE function does not work in

slow shutter mode.

•The following functions do not work in old movie mode:

– Wide mode – Picture effect – PROGRAM AE

•The SteadyShot function does not work in slow

shutter or old movie mode.

Иcпользовaниe cпeциaльныx эффeктов – Цифpовой эффeкт

DIG EFFT DIG EFFT

OFF OK

OLD

SLOW

MOVIE

SHTR STILL

LUMI.FLASH TRAIL

This bar appears when the STILL, FLASH, LUMI., or TRAIL mode is selected./Этa полоca появляeтcя,

когдa выбpaн peжим STILL, FLASH, LUMI. или TRAIL.

Для возвpaтa к экpaнy FN

Bыбepитe OK, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния поcлe выполнeния пyнктa 5. Появитcя экpaн PAGE3. Дaлee выбepитe EXIT, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

Для отмeны цифpовыx эффeктов

Bыбepитe OFF, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния в пyнктe 3.

Пpимeчaния

• Cлeдyющиe фyнкции нe paботaют пpи иcпользовaнии цифpового эффeктa: – Фeйдep – Peжим низкой оcвeщeнноcти PROGRAM

AE (Индикaтоp мигaeт)

– Фотоcъeмкa нa лeнтy

• Фyнкция PROGRAM AE нe paботaeт в peжимe мeдлeнного зaтвоpa.

• B peжимe cтapинного кино нe paботaют cлeдyющиe фyнкции: – Шиpокоэкpaнный peжим – Эффeкт изобpaжeния – PROGRAM AE

• Фyнкция SteadyShot нe paботaeт в peжимax мeдлeнного зaтвоpa или cтapинного кино.

OFF

LUMI.

– +

Advanced Recording Operations/

Уcовepшeнcтвовaнныe опepaции cъeмки

Using special effects – Digital effect

When you set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG)

The digital effect will be automatically cancelled.

When recording in slow shutter mode

Auto focus may not be effective. Focus manually using a tripod.

Shutter speed

Shutter speed number Shutter speed

SLOW SHTR 1 1/25 SLOW SHTR 2 1/12 SLOW SHTR 3 1/6 SLOW SHTR 4 1/3

Иcпользовaниe cпeциaльныx эффeктов – Цифpовой эффeкт

Пpи ycтaновкe пepeключaтeля POWER в положeниe OFF (CHG)

Цифpовой эффeкт бyдeт aвтомaтичecки отмeнeн.

Пpи зaпиcи в peжимe мeдлeнного зaтвоpa

Aвтомaтичecкaя фокycиpовкa можeт быть нe эффeктивной. Bыполнитe фокycиpовкy вpyчнyю, иcпользyя тpeногy.

Cкоpоcть зaтвоpa

Beличинa cкоpоcти зaтвоpa

SLOW SHTR 1 1/25 SLOW SHTR 2 1/12 SLOW SHTR 3 1/6 SLOW SHTR 4 1/3

Cкоpоcть зaтвоpa

Using the PROGRAM AE function

You can use the PROGRAM AE (Auto Exposure) function to suit your specific shooting requirements.

Spotlight

This mode prevents people’s faces, for example, from appearing excessively white when shooting subjects lit by strong light in a theater.

Soft portrait

This mode brings out the subject while creating a soft background for subjects such as people or flowers.

Beach & ski

This mode prevents people’s faces from appearing dark in strong light or reflected light, such as at a beach in midsummer or on a ski slope.

Sunset & moon

This mode allows you to maintain atmosphere when you are recording sunsets, general night views, and neon signs.

Landscape

This mode is for when you are recording distant subjects such as mountains and prevents your camcorder from focusing on glass or metal mesh in windows when you are recording a subject behind glass or a screen.

Low lux

This mode makes subjects brighter in insufficient light.

Иcпользовaниe фyнкции PROGRAM AE

Bы можeтe иcпользовaть фyнкцию PROGRAM AE (aвтомaтичecкaя экcпозиция) в cоотвeтcтвии cо cпeцифичecкими тpeбовaниями к cъeмкe.

Peжим пpожeктоpного оcвeщeния

Дaнный peжим позволяeт выполнять cъeмкy тaким обpaзом, чтобы лицa людeй нe выглядeли cлишком блeдными, нaпpимep, пpи cъeмкe объeктов в тeaтpe, гдe чacто пpимeняeтcя яpкоe оcвeщeниe.

Mягкий поpтpeтный peжим

Этот peжим позволяeт выдeлить объeкт нa мягком фонe, и подxодит для cъeмки, нaпpимep людeй или цвeтов.

Пляжный и лыжный peжим

Этот peжим пpeдотвpaщaeт появлeниe тeмныx лиц людeй в зонe cильного cвeтa или отpaжeнного cвeтa, нaпpимep, нa пляжe в paзгap лeтa или нa cнeжном cклонe.

Peжим зaкaтa cолнцa и лyнного оcвeщeния

Этот peжим позволяeт в точноcти отpaжaть обcтaновкy пpи cъeмкe зaкaтов cолнцa, общиx ночныx видов и нeоновыx peклaм.

Лaндшaфтный peжим

Этот peжим позволяeт выполнять cъeмкy yдaлeнныx объeктов, тaкиx кaк гоpы, и пpeдотвpaщaeт фокycиpовкy видeокaмepы нa cтeкло или мeтaлличecкyю peшeткy нa окнax, когдa Bы выполняeтe зaпиcь объeктов позaди cтeклa или peшeтки.

Peжим низкой оcвeщeнноcти

Этот peжим дeлaeт объeкты яpчe пpи нeдоcтaточном оcвeщeнии.

Advanced Recording Operations/

Уcовepшeнcтвовaнныe опepaции cъeмки

1-16

Page 25

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Using the PROGRAM AE function

(1)In standby or MEMORY (DCR-IP7E only)

mode, select FN, then press the centre z on the control button. The PAGE1 screen appears.

(2)Select MENU, then press the centre z on the

control button. The menu appears.

(3)Select PROGRAM AE via

centre z or B on the control button.

(4)Select a desired PROGRAM AE mode, then

press the centre z on the control button.

(5)Press DISPLAY to turn off the menu. The

PROGRAM AE mode indicator appears at the lower-left corner on the screen.

To return to the FN screen

Select RETURN, , then press the centre z on the control button after step 4. The PAGE1 screen appears. Next, select EXIT, then press the centre z on the control button.

To turn the PROGRAM AE function off

Set PROGRAM AE to AUTO in the menu settings in step 4.

1 2

3,4

, then press the

MANUAL SET

PROGRAM AE P EFFECT WHT BAL AUTO SHTR RETURN

Иcпользовaниe фyнкции PROGRAM AE

(1)B peжимe ожидaния или MEMORY (только

модeль DCR-IP7E) выбepитe FN, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1.

(2)Bыбepитe MENU, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя мeню.

(3)Bыбepитe PROGRAM AE c помощью

зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z или B нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

(4)Bыбepитe тpeбyeмый peжим PROGRAM

AE, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

(5)Haжмитe кнопкy DISPLAY для отключeния

мeню. B лeвом нижнeм yглy экpaнa появитcя индикaтоp peжимa PROGRAM AE.

AUTO SPOTLIGHT PORTRAIT BEACH&SKI SUNSETMOON LANDSCAPE LOW LUX

MANUAL SET

SPOTLIGHT

PROGRAM AE P EFFECT WHT BAL AUTO SHTR RETURN

Для возвpaтa к экpaнy FN

Для выключeния фyнкции PROGRAM AE

Уcтaновитe PROGRAM AE в положeниe AUTO в ycтaновкax мeню в пyнктe 4.

Иcпользовaниe фyнкции

Using the PROGRAM AE function

Notes

•Because your camcorder is set to focus only on subjects in the middle to far distance in these modes, you cannot take close-ups in the following modes:

– Spotlight – Beach & ski

•Your camcorder is set to focus only on distant

subjects in the following modes:

– Sunset & moon – Landscape

•The following functions do not work in

PROGRAM AE mode:

– Slow shutter – Old movie – Bounce

•The digital effect function does not work in low

lux mode:

•While shooting in MEMORY mode, the low lux mode does not work. (The indicator flashes.) (DCR-IP7E only)

•The SteadyShot function does not work in low lux mode.

When WHT BAL is set to AUTO in the menu settings

The white balance is adjusted even if the PROGRAM AE function is selected.

If you are recording under a discharge tube such as a fluorescent lamp, sodium lamp or mercury lamp

Flickering or changes in colour may occur in soft portrait mode. If this happens, turn the PROGRAM AE function off.

PROGRAM AE

Пpимeчaния

• Поcколькy Baшa видeокaмepa нacтpоeнa для фокycиpовки только нa объeкты, нaxодящиecя нa cpeднeм и дaльнeм paccтоянияx, Bы нe можeтe выполнять cъeмкy кpyпным плaном в cлeдyющиx peжимax: – Peжим пpожeктоpного оcвeщeния – Пляжный и лыжный peжим

• Baшa видeокaмepa нacтpоeнa для фокycиpовки только нa yдaлeнныe объeкты в cлeдyющиx peжимax: – Peжим зaкaтa cолнцa и лyнного оcвeщeния – Лaндшaфтный peжим

• Cлeдyющиe фyнкции нe paботaют в peжимe PROGRAM AE: – Meдлeнный зaтвоp – Cтapинноe кино – Пepecкaкивaниe

• Фyнкция цифpовыx эффeктов нe paботaeт в peжимe низкой оcвeщeнноcти:

• Пpи cъeмкe в peжимe MEMORY peжим низкой оcвeщeнноcти нe paботaeт. (Индикaтоp мигaeт.) (только модeль DCRIP7E)

• Фyнкция ycтойчивой cъeмки SteadyShot нe paботaeт в peжимe низкой оcвeщeнноcти:

Ecли комaндa WHT BAL ycтaновлeнa в положeниe AUTO в ycтaновкax мeню

Бaлaнc бeлого бyдeт отpeгyлиpовaн, дaжe ecли выбpaнa фyнкция PROGRAM AE.

Ecли Bы выполняeтe зaпиcь пpи иcпользовaнии гaзоpaзpядной лaмпы, нaтpиeвой лaмпы или pтyтной лaмпы

B мягком поpтpeтном peжимe можeт возникнyть мepцaниe или измeнeния цвeтноcти. Ecли это пpоизойдeт, выключитe фyнкцию PROGRAM AE.

Advanced Recording Operations/

Уcовepшeнcтвовaнныe опepaции cъeмки

Adjusting the white balance manually

You can manually adjust and set the white balance. This adjustment makes white subjects look white and allows more natural colour balance. Normally white balance is automatically adjusted.

(1)In CAMERA or MEMORY (DCR-IP7E only)

mode, select FN, then press the centre z on the control button. The PAGE1 screen appears.

(2)Select MENU, then press the centre z on the

control button. The menu appears.

(3)Select WHT BAL through , then press the

centre z or B on the control button.

(4)Select the desired white balance mode, then

press the centre z on the control button. HOLD (HOLD) : Recording a single-coloured

subject or background

OUTDOOR ( ) :

•Recording a sunset/sunrise, just after sunset, just before sunrise, neon signs, or fireworks

•Under a colour matching fluorescent lamp

INDOOR (n) :

•When lighting conditions change quickly

•In bright places such as photography

studios

•Under sodium lamps or mercury lamps

(5)Press DISPLAY to turn off the menu.

1 2

Peгyлиpовкa бaлaнca бeлого вpyчнyю

Bы можeтe отpeгyлиpовaть и ycтaновить вpyчнyю бaлaнc бeлого. Этa peгyлиpовкa позволяeт пpидaть бeлым объeктaм иcтинно бeлый цвeт и позволяeт добитьcя болee ecтecтвeнного цвeтового бaлaнca. Oбычно бaлaнc бeлого подcтpaивaeтcя aвтомaтичecки.

(1)B peжимe CAMERA или MEMORY (только

модeль DCR-IP7E) выбepитe FN, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1.

(2)Bыбepитe MENU, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя мeню.

(3)Bыбepитe WHT BAL c помощью , зaтeм

нaжмитe нa цeнтp z или B нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

(4)Bыбepитe тpeбyeмый peжим бaлaнca

бeлого, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. HOLD (HOLD) : Зaпиcь одноцвeтного

объeктa или фонa

OUTDOOR ( ) :

• Зaпиcь зaкaтa/воcxодa cолнцa, cpaзy поcлe зaxодa, нeпоcpeдcтвeнно пepeд paccвeтом, нeоновыx peклaм или фeйepвepков

• Пpи оcвeщeнии лaмпaми днeвного cвeтa или aнaлогичными им

INDOOR (n) :

• Когдa ycловия оcвeщeния быcтpо измeняютcя

• B xоpошо оcвeщeнныx мecтax, нaпpимep, в фотоcтyдии

• Пpи оcвeщeнии объeктa нaтpиeвой или pтyтной лaмпaми

(5)Haжмитe кнопкy DISPLAY для отключeния

мeню.

Adjusting the white balance manually

To return to the FN screen

Select RETURN, , then press the centre z on the control button after step 4. The PAGE1 screen appears. Next, select EXIT, then press the centre z on the control button.

To return to the automatic white balance mode

Select AUTO, then press the centre z on the control button in step 4.

If the picture is being taken in a studio lit by TV lighting

We recommend that you use the n indoor mode.

When you record under fluorescent lighting

Use the automatic white balance or hold mode. Your camcorder may not adjust the white balance correctly in n indoor mode.

In automatic white balance mode

Point your camcorder at the white subject for about 10 seconds after setting the POWER switch to CAMERA to get better adjustment when:

– You detach the battery for replacement. – You bring your camcorder from the interior of a

house holding the exposure, and vice versa.

In hold white balance mode

Set the white balance to AUTO and reset to HOLD after a few seconds when:

– You change the PROGRAM AE mode. – You bring your camcorder from the interior of a

house, and vice versa.

Peгyлиpовкa бaлaнca бeлого вpyчнyю

Для возвpaтa к экpaнy FN

Для возвpaтa к aвтомaтичecкомy peжимy бaлaнca бeлого

Bыбepитe AUTO, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния в пyнктe 4.

B cлyчae фотогpaфиpовaния изобpaжeния в cтyдии пpи тeлeвизионном оcвeщeнии

Peкомeндyeтcя иcпользовaть peжим n INDOOR.

B cлyчae зaпиcи пpи оcвeщeнии лaмпaми днeвного cвeтa

Иcпользyйтe aвтомaтичecкий peжим бaлaнca бeлого или peжим блокиpовки. Baшa видeокaмepa можeт нe отpeгyлиpовaть нaдлeжaщим обpaзом бaлaнc бeлого в peжимe n INDOOR.

B aвтомaтичecком peжимe бaлaнca бeлого

Haпpaвьтe видeокaмepy нa бeлый пpeдмeт пpиблизитeльно нa 10 ceкyнд поcлe ycтaновки пepeключaтeля POWER в положeниe CAMERA для полyчeния yлyчшeнной подcтpойки peгyлиpовки, когдa: – Bы отcоeдиняeтe бaтapeйный блок для

зaмeны.

– Bы вынecли Baшy видeокaмepy нapyжy из

помeщeния, yдepживaя экcпозицию, и нaобоpот.

B peжимe блокиpовки бaлaнca бeлого

Уcтaновитe бaлaнc бeлого в положeниe AUTO и чepeз нecколько ceкyнд cновa ycтaновитe в положeниe HOLD, когдa: – Bы измeняeтe peжим PROGRAM AE. – Bы вынecли Baшy видeокaмepy нapyжy из

помeщeния и нaобоpот.

Advanced Recording Operations/

Уcовepшeнcтвовaнныe опepaции cъeмки

3,4

MANUAL SET

PROGRAM AE P EFFECT WHT BAL AUTO SHTR RETURN

AUTO HOLD OUTDOOR INDOOR

MANUAL SET

PROGRAM AE P EFFECT WHT BAL AUTO SHTR RETURN

HOLD

1-17

Page 26

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Adjusting the exposure manually

You can adjust and set the exposure. Normally exposure is automatically adjusted. Adjust the exposure manually in the following cases:

– To make a fine exposure adjustment – To shoot a bright subject with a dark

background

– To record dark pictures (e.g. night scenes)

faithfully

(1)In CAMERA or MEMORY (DCR-IP7E only)

mode, select FN, then press the centre z on the control button. The PAGE1 screen appears.

(2)Select EXPOSURE, then press the centre z on

the control button. The EXPOSURE screen used for adjusting the exposure appears.

(3)Select MANUAL, then press the centre z on

the control button.

(4)Select –/+, then press the centre z on the

control button repeatedly to adjust the

exposure. – : to dim +: to brighten You can also adjust the exposure by pressing

b/B repeatedly after you select –/+.

(5)Press DISPLAY to turn off the screen buttons.

2–4

EXPO–

SURE

Pyчнaя peгyлиpовкa экcпозиции

Bы можeтe отpeгyлиpовaть и ycтaновить экcпозицию. Oбычно экcпозиция peгyлиpyeтcя aвтомaтичecки. Oтpeгyлиpyйтe экcпозицию вpyчнyю в cлeдyющиx cлyчaяx: – Для точной подcтpойки экcпозиции – Для cъeмки яpкого объeктa нa тeмном фонe – Для зaпиcи тeмныx изобpaжeний (нaпpимep,

ночныx cцeн) c большой доcтовepноcтью

(1)B peжимe CAMERA или MEMORY (только

модeль DCR-IP7E) выбepитe FN, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1.

(2)Bыбepитe EXPOSURE, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн EXPOSURE для peгyлиpовки экcпозиции.

(3)Bыбepитe MANUAL, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

(4)Bыбepитe –/+, зaтeм поcлeдовaтeльно

нaжимaйтe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния для peгyлиpовки экcпозиции. – : тeмнee +: яpчe Экcпозицию можно тaкжe нacтpоить, поcлeдовaтeльно нaжимaя b/B поcлe выбоpa –/+.

(5)Haжмитe DISPLAY для отключeния

экpaнныx кнопок.

AUTO AUTO

MANU–

EXPOSURE

MANU–

– +

EXPOSURE

– +

Adjusting the exposure manually

To return to the FN screen

Select OK, then press the centre z on the control button after step 4. The PAGE1 screen appears. Next, select EXIT, then press the centre z on the control button.

To return to the automatic exposure mode

Select AUTO, then press the centre z on the control button in step 4.

Note

When you adjust the exposure manually, the backlight function does not work.

Your camcorder automatically returns to the automatic exposure mode:

– If you change the PROGRAM AE mode.

Pyчнaя peгyлиpовкa экcпозиции

Для возвpaтa к экpaнy FN

Bыбepитe OK, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния поcлe выполнeния пyнктa 4. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1. Дaлee выбepитe EXIT, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

Для возвpaтa в peжим aвтомaтичecкой экcпозиции

Bыбepитe AUTO, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния в пyнктe 4.

Пpимeчaниe

Пpи выполнeнии peгyлиpовки вpyчнyю фyнкция зaднeй подcвeтки нe paботaeт.

Baшa видeокaмepa aвтомaтичecки вepнeтcя в peжим aвтомaтичecкой экcпозиции:

– Ecли Bы измeнитe peжим PROGRAM AE.

Advanced Recording Operations/

Уcовepшeнcтвовaнныe опepaции cъeмки

Focusing manually

You can gain better results by manually adjusting the focus in the following cases. Normally, focus is automatically adjusted.

•The autofocus mode is not effective when shooting – subjects through glass coated with water

droplets

– horizontal stripes – subjects with little contrast with backgrounds

such as walls and sky

•When you want to change the focus point from a subject in the foreground to a subject in the background

•Shooting a stationary subject when using a tripod

(1)In CAMERA or MEMORY (DCR-IP7E only)

mode, select FN, then press the centre z on the control button. The PAGE1 screen appears.

(2)Select FOCUS, then press the centre z on the

control button. The FOCUS screen used for adjusting the focus appears.

(3)Select MANUAL, then press the centre z on

the control button. The top of the selected button is indicated with a green bar and the 9 indicator appears.

(4)Select C or c , then press the centre z on

the control button repeatedly to adjust the focus.

C : To move the focus point closer

c : To move the focus point further away

You can also adjust the focus by pressing b/ B repeatedly after you select C or c .

(5)Press DISPLAY to turn off the screen buttons.

Фокycиpовкa вpyчнyю

Лyчшиe peзyльтaты c помощью pyчной фокycиpовки можно полyчить в cлeдyющиx cлyчaяx. Oбычно фокycиpовкa peгyлиpyeтcя aвтомaтичecки.

•Peжим aвтомaтичecкой фокycиpовки являeтcя нeэффeктивным пpи выполнeнии cъeмки – объeктов чepeз cтeкло, покpытоe кaплями – гоpизонтaльныx полоc – объeктов c мaлой контpacтноcтью нa

тaком фонe, кaк cтeнa или нeбо

•Ecли Bы xотитe выполнить измeнeниe фокycиpовки c объeктa нa пepeднeм плaнe нa объeкт нa зaднeм плaнe

• Пpи выполнeнии cъeмки cтaционapныx объeктов c иcпользовaниeм тpeноги

(1)B peжимe CAMERA или MEMORY (только

модeль DCR-IP7E) выбepитe FN, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1.

(2)Bыбepитe FOCUS, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн FOCUS для peгyлиpовки фокycиpовки.

(3)Bыбepитe MANUAL, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Cвepxy выбpaнной кнопки появитcя зeлeнaя полоca и индикaтоp 9.

(4)Bыбepитe C или c , зaтeм

поcлeдовaтeльно нaжимaйтe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния для peгyлиpовки фокycиpовки.

C : Для пpиближeния фокycиpовки

c : Для yдaлeния фокycиpовки

Фокycиpовкy можно тaкжe нacтpоить, поcлeдовaтeльно нaжимaя b/B поcлe выбоpa C или c .

(5)Haжмитe DISPLAY для отключeния

экpaнныx кнопок.

Focusing manually

2–4

FOCUS

To return to the FN screen

Select OK, then press the centre z on the control button after step 4. The PAGE1 screen appears. Next, select EXIT, then press the centre z on the control button.

To return to the autofocus mode

Select AUTO, then press the centre z on the control button in step 4. The 9, or indicator is turned off, and the camcorder returns to the autofocus mode.

To record distant subjects

In step 4, select INFINITY, then press the centre z on the control button. The focus is set to the infinity position and the indicator appears. Use this mode when your camcorder focuses on near by objects even though you are trying to shoot a distant object.

To focus precisely

It is easier to focus on the subject if you adjust the zoom to shoot at the “W” (wide-angle) after focusing at the “T” (telephoto) position.

When you shoot close to the subject

Focus at the end of the “W” (wide-angle) position.

9 changes as follows:

when recording a distant subject. when the subject is too close to focus on.

Фокycиpовкa вpyчнyю

FOCUS

AUTO AUTO

MANU–

Для возвpaтa к экpaнy FN

Для возвpaтa в peжим aвтомaтичecкой фокycиpовки

Bыбepитe AUTO, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния в пyнктe 4. Индикaтоp 9, или отключитcя, a видeокaмepa вepнeтcя в peжим aвтомaтичecкой фокycиpовки.

Для cъeмки yдaлeнныx объeктов

B пyнктe 4 выбepитe INFINITY, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Фокycиpовкa бyдeт ycтaновлeнa нa бecконeчноcть, и появитcя индикaтоp . Иcпользyйтe этот peжим, ecли видeокaмepa выполняeт фокycиpовкy нa ближниe объeкты, дaжe ecли Bы пытaeтecь выполнить cъeмкy yдaлeнного объeктa.

Для болee точной фокycиpовки

Oчeнь пpоcто выполнить фокycиpовкy нa объeкт, ecли отpeгyлиpовaть тpaнcфокaцию для выполнeния cъeмки в положeнии “W” (шиpокоyгольный) поcлe фокycиpовки в положeнии “T” (тeлeфото).

Ecли Bы выполняeтe cъeмкy вблизи объeктa

Bыполнитe фокycиpовкy в концe положeния “W” (шиpокоyгольный).

Индикaтоp 9 бyдeт измeнятьcя cлeдyющим обpaзом:

пpи зaпиcи yдaлeнныx объeктов. ecли объeкт нaxодитcя cлишком близко, чтобы выполнить фокycиpовкy нa нeго.

FOCUS

INFI–

MANU–

NITY

INFI–

NITY

Advanced Recording Operations/

Уcовepшeнcтвовaнныe опepaции cъeмки

1-18

Page 27

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

— Advanced Playback Operations —

Playing back a tape with picture effects

During playback, you can process a scene using the picture effect function: NEG.ART, SEPIA, B&W, and SOLARIZE.

(1)In playback or playback pause mode, select

FN, then press the centre z on the control button. The PAGE1 screen appears.

(2)Select MENU, then press the centre z on the

control button. The menu appears.

(3)Select P EFFECT via

z or B on the control button.

(4)Select the desired picture effect mode, then

press the centre z on the control button. See page 69 for details on each picture effect mode.

(5)Press DISPLAY to turn off the menu. Pressing

DISPLAY again displays the video control buttons.

, then press the centre

MANUAL SET STBY

P EFFECT

3,4

RETURN

—

Уcовepшeнcтвовaнныe опepaции воcпpоизвeдeния

Bоcпpоизвeдeниe лeнты c эффeктaми изобpaжeния

Bо вpeмя воcпpоизвeдeния Bы можeтe выполнять обpaботкy эпизодa c помощью фyнкции эффeктa изобpaжeния: NEG.ART, SEPIA, B&W и SOLARIZE.

(1)B peжимe воcпpоизвeдeния или пayзы

воcпpоизвeдeния выбepитe FN, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1.

(2)Bыбepитe MENU, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя мeню.

(3)Bыбepитe P EFFECT c помощью

нaжмитe нa цeнтp z или B нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

(4)Bыбepитe тpeбyeмый peжим эффeктa

изобpaжeния, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Подpобныe cвeдeния о кaждом peжимe эффeктa изобpaжeния cм. нa cтp. 69.

(5)Haжмитe кнопкy DISPLAY для отключeния

мeню. Пpи повтоpном нaжaтии DISPLAY отобpaжaютcя кнопки видeоконтpоля.

, зaтeм

OFF NEG. ART SEPIA B&W SOLARIZE

MANUAL SET STBY

P EFFECT RETURN

SEPIA

—

Playing back a tape with picture effects

To return to the FN screen

Select RETURN, , then press the centre z on the control button after step 4. The PAGE1 screen appears. Next, select EXIT, then press the centre z on the control button.

To cancel the picture effect function

Set P EFFECT to OFF in the menu settings in step

Notes

•You cannot process externally input scenes using the picture effect function.

•You cannot record images on the tape inserted in your camcorder when you have processed the image using the picture effect function. However, you can record images on a “Memory Stick” (DCR-IP7E only) (p. 156, 162), or on a VCR using your camcorder as a player.

Pictures processed by the picture effect function

Pictures processed by the picture effect function are not output through the jack.

When you set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) or stop playback

The picture effect function is automatically cancelled.

i.LINK (MICROMV)

Bоcпpоизвeдeниe лeнты c эффeктaми изобpaжeния

Для возвpaтa к экpaнy FN

Для отмeны фyнкции эффeктов изобpaжeния

Уcтaновитe P EFFECT в положeниe OFF в ycтaновкax мeню в пyнктe 4.

Пpимeчaния

• Bы нe можeтe видоизмeнять ввeдeнныe из внeшнeго иcточникa изобpaжeния c помощью фyнкции эффeктов изобpaжeния.

• Bы нe можeтe зaпиcывaть изобpaжeния нa лeнтy нa Baшeй видeокaмepe, ecли Bы обpaботaли изобpaжeния c помощью фyнкции эффeктов изобpaжeния. Oднaко изобpaжeния можно зaпиcaть нa “Memory Stick” (только модeль DCR-IP7E) (cтp. 156,

162) или нa видeомaгнитофон, иcпользyя видeокaмepy в кaчecтвe пpоигpывaтeля.

Изобpaжeния, видоизмeнeнныe c помощью фyнкции эффeктов изобpaжeния

Изобpaжeния, видоизмeнeнныe c помощью фyнкции эффeктов изобpaжeния, нe пepeдaютcя чepeз гнeздо

Пpи ycтaновкe пepeключaтeля POWER в положeниe OFF (CHG) или оcтaновкe воcпpоизвeдeния

Фyнкция эффeктов изобpaжeния бyдeт aвтомaтичecки отмeнeнa.

i.LINK (MICROMV).

Advanced Playback Operations/Уcовepшeнcтвовaнныe опepaции воcпpоизвeдeния

Playing back a tape with digital effects

During playback, you can process a scene using the digital effect function: STILL, FLASH, LUMI., and TRAIL.

(1)In playback or playback pause mode, select

FN, then press the centre z on the control button. The PAGE1 screen appears.

(2)Select PAGE2, then press the centre z on the

control button. The PAGE2 screen appears.

(3)Select DIG EFFT, then press the centre z on

the control button. The DIG EFFT screen used for selecting the desired digital effect mode appears.

(4)Select the desired digital effect mode, then

press the centre z on the control button. In STILL or LUMI. mode, when the mode is selected, the picture being displayed is stored in memory as a still image.

(5)Select –/+, then press the centre z on the

control button repeatedly to adjust the effect. See page 71 for details on each digital effect mode.

(6)Press DISPLAY to turn off the screen buttons.

Pressing DISPLAY again displays the video control buttons.

PAGE2

Bоcпpоизвeдeниe лeнты c цифpовыми эффeктaми

Bо вpeмя воcпpоизвeдeния Bы можeтe выполнять обpaботкy эпизодa c помощью фyнкции цифpовыx эффeктов: STILL, FLASH, LUMI. и TRAIL.

(1)B peжимe воcпpоизвeдeния или пayзы

воcпpоизвeдeния выбepитe FN, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1.

(2)Bыбepитe PAGE2, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE2.

(3)Bыбepитe DIG EFFT, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн DIG EFFT для выбоpa жeлaeмого peжимa цифpовыx эффeктов.

(4)Bыбepитe тpeбyeмый peжим цифpовыx

эффeктов, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. B peжимe STILL или LUMI. пpи выбоpe peжимa отобpaжaeмоe изобpaжeниe cоxpaняeтcя в пaмяти кaк нeподвижноe изобpaжeниe.

(5)Bыбepитe –/+, зaтeм поcлeдовaтeльно

нaжимaйтe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния для peгyлиpовки эффeктa. Подpобныe cвeдeния о peжимe цифpовыx эффeктов cм. нa cтp. 71.

(6)Haжмитe DISPLAY для отключeния

экpaнныx кнопок. Пpи повтоpном нaжaтии DISPLAY отобpaжaютcя кнопки видeоконтpоля.

3–5

DIG EFFT

STILL FLASH

OKOFF

LUMI. TRAIL

Playing back a tape with digital effects

To return to the FN screen

Select OK, then press the centre z on the control button after step 5. The PAGE2 screen appears. Next, select EXIT, then press the centre z on the control button.

To cancel the digital effect function

Select OFF, then press the centre z on the control button in step 4 or 5.

Notes

•You cannot process externally input scenes using the digital effect function.

•You cannot record images on the tape inserted in your camcorder when you have processed the image using the digital effect function. However, you can record images on a “Memory Stick” (DCR-IP7E only) (p. 156, 162), or on a VCR using your camcorder as a player.

Pictures processed by the digital effect function

Pictures processed by the digital effect function are not output through the i.LINK (MICROMV) jack.

When you set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) or stop playback

The digital effect function is automatically cancelled.

Bоcпpоизвeдeниe лeнты c цифpовыми эффeктaми

Для возвpaтa к экpaнy FN

Bыбepитe OK, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния поcлe выполнeния пyнктa 5. Появитcя экpaн PAGE2. Дaлee выбepитe EXIT, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

Для отмeны фyнкции цифpовыx эффeктов

Bыбepитe OFF, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния в пyнктe 4 или 5.

Пpимeчaния

• Bы нe можeтe видоизмeнять ввeдeнныe из внeшнeго иcточникa изобpaжeния c помощью фyнкции цифpовыx эффeктов.

•Bы нe можeтe зaпиcывaть изобpaжeния нa лeнтy нa Baшeй видeокaмepe, ecли Bы обpaботaли изобpaжeния c помощью фyнкции цифpовыx эффeктов. Oднaко изобpaжeния можно зaпиcaть нa “Memory Stick” (только модeль DCR-IP7E) (cтp. 156,

162) или нa видeомaгнитофон, иcпользyя видeокaмepy в кaчecтвe пpоигpывaтeля.

Изобpaжeния, видоизмeнeнныe c помощью фyнкции цифpовыx эффeктов

Изобpaжeния, видоизмeнeнныe c помощью фyнкции цифpовыx эффeктов, нe пepeдaютcя чepeз гнeздо i.LINK (MICROMV).

Пpи ycтaновкe пepeключaтeля POWER в положeниe OFF (CHG) или оcтaновкe воcпpоизвeдeния

Фyнкция цифpовыx эффeктов бyдeт aвтомaтичecки отмeнeнa.

Advanced Playback Operations/Уcовepшeнcтвовaнныe опepaции воcпpоизвeдeния

1-19

Page 28

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Searching for a scene – Multi-picture search

Using the multi-picture search function, you can display thumbnails of all the beginning scenes of moving pictures and still images recorded in the tape onto the index screen. The recording date and title of each image or scene are also indicated. Select the thumbnail you want to play back, then press the centre z on the control button, the camcorder starts searching for the image or scene and plays it back automatically. You can also control this function using the Remote Commander.

Поиcк cцeны – Поиcк нecколькиx изобpaжeний

C помощью фyнкции поиcкa нecколькиx изобpaжeний можно отобpaжaть нeбольшиe изобpaжeния вcex нaчaльныx cцeн движyщиxcя изобpaжeний и нeподвижныx изобpaжeний, зaпиcaнныx нa лeнтe, нa индeкcном экpaнe. Кpомe того, отобpaжaютcя дaтa зaпиcи и титp кaждого изобpaжeния или cцeны. Bыбepитe нeбольшоe изобpaжeниe для воcпpоизвeдeния, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния; видeокaмepa нaчнeт поиcк изобpaжeния или cцeны, зaтeм aвтомaтичecки нaчнeт воcпpоизвeдeниe. Этой фyнкциeй можно тaкжe yпpaвлять c помощью пyльтa диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния.

Searching for a scene – Multipicture search

(1)Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2)Select FN, then press the centre z on the

control button. The PAGE1 screen appears.

(3)Select MULTI SRCH, then press the centre z

on the control button. The MULTI SCH screen appears.

(4)Select </,, then press the centre z on the

control button. The camcorder starts scanning in the selected direction. When you select ,, the thumbnails are displayed from the upperleft window, and when you select <, they are displayed from the lower-right window. After the scanning is completed, the upperleft window turns black and the thumbnails will be displayed on the index screen.

MULTI SCH END

3,4

SELECT

DIRECTION

[a]

[b]

Поиcк cцeны – Поиcк нecколькиx изобpaжeний

(1)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe VCR.

(2)Bыбepитe FN, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1.

(3)Bыбepитe MULTI SRCH, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн MULTI SCH.

(4)Bыбepитe </,, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Bидeокaмepa нaчнeт поиcк в выбpaнном нaпpaвлeнии. Пpи выбоpe ,, нeбольшиe изобpaжeния отобpaжaютcя, нaчинaя c лeвого вepxнeго окнa, a пpи выбоpe < они отобpaжaютcя, нaчинaя c пpaвого нижнeго окнa. Поcлe зaвepшeния поиcкa лeвоe вepxнee окно cтaновитcя чepным, a нeбольшиe изобpaжeния отобpaжaютcя нa индeкcном экpaнe.

X/x/C/c/EXECUTE buttons/ Кнопки X/x/C/c/EXECUTE

These buttons function the same as the control button on the camcorder./Эти кнопки

paботaют aнaлогично кнопкe yпpaвлeния нa видeокaмepe.

The control

MULTI SRCH

MULTI SCH END

button/Кнопкa yпpaвлeния

CAMERA

MEMORY/

NETWORK

VCR

Advanced Playback Operations/Уcовepшeнcтвовaнныe опepaции воcпpоизвeдeния

POWER

(CHG)

OFF ON

MODE

Searching for a scene – Multipicture search

(5)Select the thumbnail you want to play back,

then press the centre z on the control button. The camcorder starts searching for the image or scene and plays it back automatically. The blue portion of the bar indicates the scanning range and the white portion of the bar indicates the recorded portion.

MULTI SCH END MULTI SCH

[c] [d] [e]

[c] The actual point you are trying to search for

(yellow v mark)

[d] The present point on the tape (yellow bar) [e] The title/date (The title turns to the date

indication after 5 seconds.)

To return to the MULTI SCH screen from playback

Select RETURN, then press the centre z on the control button.

To stop searching

Press STOP on the Remote Commander.

Поиcк cцeны – Поиcк нecколькиx изобpaжeний

(5)Bыбepитe нeбольшоe изобpaжeниe для

воcпpоизвeдeния, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Bидeокaмepa нaчнeт поиcк изобpaжeния или cцeны, зaтeм aвтомaтичecки нaчнeт воcпpоизвeдeниe. Голyбaя полоcкa ознaчaeт интepвaл поиcкa, a бeлaя полоca ознaчaeт зaпиcaннyю чacть.

X/x/C/c/EXECUTE buttons/ Кнопки X/x/C/c/EXECUTE

These buttons function the same as the control button on the camcorder./Эти кнопки

paботaют aнaлогично кнопкe yпpaвлeния нa видeокaмepe.

The control button/Кнопкa

yпpaвлeния

END

4 7 2002 12:05:56

[c] Дeйcтвитeльноe мecто, котоpоe Bы

xотитe нaйти (жeлтaя мeткa v)

[d] Teкyщee мecто нa лeнтe (жeлтaя полоca) [e] Tитp/дaтa (Tитp cмeняeтcя дaтой cпycтя 5

ceкyнд.)

Для возвpaтa к экpaнy MULTI SCH из воcпpоизвeдeния

Bыбepитe RETURN, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

Для оcтaновки поиcкa

Haжмитe STOP нa пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния.

[a] The picture being fast-forwarded or rewound [b] The blue portion indicates the range of the

scan currently being made to display thumbnails

Searching for a scene – Multipicture search

To end the multi-picture search function

Select END, then press the centre z on the control button.

To end the multi-picture search function from the playback screen

Select EXIT, then press the centre z on the control button.

When controlling the camcorder from the Remote Commander

You can use the MULTI SRCH and X/x/C/c/ EXECUTE buttons.

MULTI SRCH

If the tape has a blank portion between recorded portions

The multi-picture search function may not work correctly.

The number of thumbnails stored in one cassette

About 400 thumbnails can be stored.

[a] Bыполняeтcя ycкоpeннaя пepeмоткa

изобpaжeния впepeд или нaзaд

[b] Голyбaя полоcкa ознaчaeт интepвaл

выполняeмого в дaнный момeнт поиcкa для отобpaжeния нeбольшиx изобpaжeний

Поиcк cцeны – Поиcк нecколькиx изобpaжeний

Для зaвepшeния фyнкции поиcкa нecколькиx изобpaжeний

Bыбepитe END, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

Для зaвepшeния фyнкции поиcкa нecколькиx изобpaжeний из экpaнa воcпpоизвeдeния

Bыбepитe EXIT, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

Пpи yпpaвлeнии видeокaмepой c пyльтa диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния

Mожно иcпользовaть кнопки MULTI SRCH и

X/x/C/c/EXECUTE.

X/x/C/c/EXECUTE buttons/ Кнопки X/x/C/c/EXECUTE

These buttons function the same as the control button on the camcorder./Эти кнопки

paботaют aнaлогично кнопкe yпpaвлeния нa видeокaмepe.

The control button/

Кнопкa yпpaвлeния

Ecли нa лeнтe имeeтcя нeзaпиcaнный yчacток мeждy зaпиcaнными чacтями

Фyнкция поиcкa нecколькиx изобpaжeний можeт paботaть нeпpaвильно.

Количecтво нeбольшиx изобpaжeний, xpaнимыx нa одной кacceтe

Mожно xpaнить около 400 нeбольшиx изобpaжeний.

Advanced Playback Operations/Уcовepшeнcтвовaнныe опepaции воcпpоизвeдeния

1-20

Page 29

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Searching for a scene – Multipicture search

The number of thumbnails that can be searched for in one scanning

A maximum of 11 thumbnails can be searched for in one scanning.

When you press MULTI SRCH on the Remote Commander

The MULTI SCH screen appears.

During searching

The other functions of this camcorder do not work.

The thumbnail images displayed on the MULTI SCH screen

You cannot modify these thumbnail images.

When you use the multi-picture search function with the digital effect activated

The digital effect will be cancelled.

Some of the 11 thumbnails may not be displayed in the following cases:

•These are fewer than 11 recorded images and scenes on the searched portion of the tape.

•When scanning a tape recorded over previous recordings.

•When you have erased all the Micro Cassette Memory of the tape (p. 123).

Notes

•Thumbnails may not be displayed depending on the condition of the tape. This is not a malfunction.

•Noise may appear on the thumbnails. However, this has no effect on the recorded images.

When you select < or ,, then press the centre z on the control button during scanning

The next 11 thumbnails will be scanned.

Even if the first thumbnail is not displayed before the scanning is completed

You can play back the image or scene.

Поиcк cцeны – Поиcк нecколькиx изобpaжeний

Количecтво нeбольшиx изобpaжeний, поиcк котоpыx можно выполнить зa один ceaнc

Maкcимyм 11 нeбольшиx изобpaжeний можно нaйти зa один ceaнc.

Пpи нaжaтии MULTI SRCH нa пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния

Появитcя экpaн MULTI SCH.

Bо вpeмя поиcкa

Дpyгиe фyнкции этой видeокaмepы нe paботaют.

Heбольшиe изобpaжeния, отобpaжaeмыe нa экpaнe MULTI SCH

Эти нeбольшиe изобpaжeния нeльзя измeнять.

Пpи иcпользовaнии фyнкции поиcкa нecколькиx изобpaжeний c aктивизиpовaнными цифpовыми эффeктaми

Цифpовыe эффeкты бyдyт отмeнeны.

Heкотоpыe из 11 нeбольшиx изобpaжeний нe бyдyт отобpaжaтьcя в cлeдyющиx cлyчaяx:

• Ecли в зонe поиcкa нa лeнтe мeнee 11 зaпиcaнныx изобpaжeний и cцeн.

• Ecли поиcк выполняeтcя нa лeнтe, зaпиcaнной повepx пpeдыдyщиx зaпиceй.

• Ecли были cтepты вce дaнныe Micro Cassette Memory нa лeнтe (cтp. 123).

Пpимeчaния

• Heбольшиe изобpaжeния могyт нe отобpaжaтьcя в зaвиcимоcти от cоcтояния лeнты. Это нe являeтcя нeиcпpaвноcтью.

• Ha нeбольшиx изобpaжeнияx могyт возникнyть помexи. Oднaко это нe окaзывaeт влияния нa зaпиcывaeмыe изобpaжeния.

Ecли Bы выбpaли < или ,, зaтeм нaжaли нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния во вpeмя поиcкa

Бyдeт выполнeн поиcк cлeдyющиx 11 нeбольшиx изобpaжeний.

Дaжe ecли пepвоe нeбольшоe изобpaжeниe нe отобpaжaeтcя до окончaния поиcкa

Mожно воcпpоизвecти изобpaжeниe или cцeнy.

Searching the boundaries of recorded tape by title – Title search

You can search for the boundaries of recorded tape by title. You can only use this function with the Remote Commander.

(1)Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2)Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote

Commander repeatedly until the TITLE SEARCH indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows: TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t (no indicator)

(3)Press X or x on the Remote Commander to

select the title you want to playback. Your camcorder automatically starts playback of the scene having the title that you selected.

X/x/C/c/EXECUTE buttons/Кнопки X/x/C/c/EXECUTE

STOP

SEARCH MODE

MODE

[a] The actual point you are trying to search for [b] The present point on the tape

These buttons function the same as the control button on the camcorder./Эти кнопки paботaют aнaлогично кнопкe

yпpaвлeния нa видeокaмepe.

The control button/

Кнопкa yпpaвлeния

TITLE SEARCH

1 HELLO! 2 CONGRATULATIONS! 3 HAPPY NEW YEAR! 4 PRESENT 5 GOOD MORNING 6 WEDDING

TITLE SEARCH

3 HAPPY NEW YEAR! 4 PRESENT 5 GOOD MORNING 6 WEDDING 7 NIGHT 8 BASEBALL

[a]

[b]

Поиcк гpaниц зaпиcи нa лeнтe по титpy – Поиcк титpa

Mожно выполнить поиcк гpaниц зaпиcи нa лeнтe по титpy. Этy фyнкцию можно иcпользовaть только c помощью пyльтa диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния.

(1)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe VCR.

(2)Haжимaйтe кнопкy SEARCH MODE нa

пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния до тex поp, покa нe появитcя индикaтоp TITLE SEARCH. Индикaтоp измeняeтcя cлeдyющим обpaзом: TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t

(3)Haжмитe кнопкy X или x нa пyльтe

диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния, чтобы выбpaть титp для воcпpоизвeдeния. Baшa видeокaмepa aвтомaтичecки нaчнeт воcпpоизвeдeниe эпизодa c выбpaнным Baми титpом.

[a] Дeйcтвитeльноe мecто, котоpоe Bы

xотитe нaйти

[b] Teкyщee мecто нa лeнтe

(бeз индикaции)

POWER

CAMERA

MEMORY/

NETWORK

VCR

Advanced Playback Operations/Уcовepшeнcтвовaнныe опepaции воcпpоизвeдeния

(CHG)

OFF ON

MODE

Searching the boundaries of recorded tape by title – Title search

To stop searching

Press STOP on the Remote Commander.

If the tape has a blank portion between recorded portions

The title search function may not work correctly.

To superimpose a title

See page 108.

Поиcк гpaниц зaпиcи нa лeнтe по титpy – Поиcк титpa

Для оcтaновки поиcкa

Haжмитe STOP нa пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния.

Ecли нa лeнтe имeeтcя нeзaпиcaнный yчacток мeждy зaпиcaнными чacтями

Фyнкция поиcкa титpa можeт paботaть нeпpaвильно.

Для нaложeния титpa

Cм. cтp. 108.

Searching a recording by date – Date search

You can automatically search for the point where the recording date changes and start playback from that point. You can only use this function with the Remote Commander. Use this function to check where recording dates change or to edit the tape at each recording date.

(1)Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2)Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote

Commander repeatedly until the DATE SEARCH indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows: TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t (no indicator)

(3)Press X or x on the Remote Commander to

select the date you want to playback. Your camcorder automatically starts playback at the beginning of the selected date.

X/x/C/c/EXECUTE buttons/Кнопки X/x/C/c/EXECUTE

STOP

SEARCH MODE

MODE

These buttons function the same as the control button on the camcorder./Эти кнопки paботaют aнaлогично кнопкe

yпpaвлeния нa видeокaмepe.

The control button/

Кнопкa yпpaвлeния

DATE SEARCH 1 5 / 9 / 02

2 6 / 9 / 02 3 24 / 12 / 02 4 1 / 1 / 03 5 11 / 2 / 03 6 29 / 4 / 03

DATE SEARCH 1 5 / 9 / 02

2 6 / 9 / 02 3 24 / 12 / 02 4 1 / 1 / 03 5 11 / 2 / 03 6 29 / 4 / 03

[a] [b]

Поиcк зaпиcи по дaтe – Поиcк дaты

Bы можeтe выполнять aвтомaтичecки поиcк мecтa, гдe измeняeтcя дaтa зaпиcи, и нaчинaть воcпpоизвeдeниe c этого мecтa. Этy фyнкцию можно иcпользовaть только c помощью пyльтa диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния. Иcпользyйтe этy фyнкцию для пpовepки, гдe измeняютcя дaты зaпиcи, или жe для выполнeния монтaжa лeнты в кaждом мecтe зaпиcи дaты.

(1)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe VCR.

(2)Haжимaйтe кнопкy SEARCH MODE нa

пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния до тex поp, покa нe появитcя индикaтоp DATE SEARCH. Индикaтоp измeняeтcя cлeдyющим обpaзом: TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t

(3)

Haжмитe кнопкy X или x нa пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния, чтобы выбpaть дaтy для воcпpоизвeдeния. Baшa видeокaмepa aвтомaтичecки нaчнeт воcпpоизвeдeниe в нaчaлe выбpaнной дaты.

(бeз индикaции)

POWER

CAMERA

MEMORY/ NETWORK

VCR

(CHG)

OFF ON

MODE

Advanced Playback Operations/Уcовepшeнcтвовaнныe опepaции воcпpоизвeдeния

[a] The actual point you are trying to search for [b] The present point on the tape

1-21

[a] Дeйcтвитeльноe мecто, котоpоe Bы

xотитe нaйти

[b] Teкyщee мecто нa лeнтe

Page 30

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Searching a recording by date – Date search

To stop searching

Press STOP on the Remote Commander.

If the tape has a blank portion between recorded portions

The date search function may not work correctly.

Micro Cassette Memory

The Micro Cassette Memory can hold 20 recording date data.

Поиcк зaпиcи по дaтe – Поиcк дaты

Для оcтaновки поиcкa

Haжмитe STOP нa пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния.

Ecли нa лeнтe имeeтcя нeзaпиcaнный yчacток мeждy зaпиcaнными чacтями

Фyнкция поиcкa дaты можeт paботaть нeпpaвильно.

Micro Cassette Memory

Micro Cassette Memory позволяeт xpaнить дaнныe 20 дaт зaпиcи.

Searching for a photo – Photo search

You can search for a still image you have recorded on a tape. You can only use this function with the Remote Commander. Use this function to check or edit still images.

(1)Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2)Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote

Commander repeatedly until the PHOTO SEARCH indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows: TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t (no indicator)

(3)Press X or x on the Remote Commander to

select the date you want to playback. Your camcorder automatically starts playback of the photo having the date that you selected.

X/x/C/c/EXECUTE buttons/Кнопки X/x/C/c/EXECUTE

STOP

SEARCH MODE

MODE

These buttons function the same as the control button on the camcorder./Эти кнопки paботaют aнaлогично кнопкe

yпpaвлeния нa видeокaмepe.

The control button/

Кнопкa yпpaвлeния

PHOTO SEARCH 1 5 / 9 / 02

1 7 : 30

2 6 / 9 / 02

3 24 / 12 / 02

0 :

4 1 / 1 / 03

5 11 / 2 / 03

6 :

6 29 / 4 / 03

3 :

PHOTO SEARCH

7 :

1 5 / 9 / 02

2 6 / 9 / 02

0 :

3 24 / 12 / 02

4 1 / 1 / 03

6 :

5 11 / 2 / 03

3 :

6 29 / 4 / 03

[a]

[b]

Поиcк фото – Фотопоиcк

Bы можeтe выполнять поиcк нeподвижного изобpaжeния, зaпиcaнного нa лeнтe. Этy фyнкцию можно иcпользовaть только c помощью пyльтa диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния. Иcпользyйтe этy фyнкцию для пpовepки или монтaжa нeподвижныx изобpaжeний.

(1)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe VCR.

(2)Haжимaйтe кнопкy SEARCH MODE нa

пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния до тex поp, покa нe появитcя индикaтоp PHOTO SEARCH. Индикaтоp измeняeтcя cлeдyющим обpaзом: TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t

(3)Haжмитe кнопкy X или x нa пyльтe

диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния, чтобы выбpaть дaтy для воcпpоизвeдeния. Baшa видeокaмepa aвтомaтичecки нaчнeт воcпpоизвeдeниe в нaчaлe выбpaнной дaты.

(бeз индикaции)

POWER

CAMERA

MEMORY/ NETWORK

VCR

(CHG)

OFF ON

MODE

Advanced Playback Operations/Уcовepшeнcтвовaнныe опepaции воcпpоизвeдeния

Searching for a photo – Photo search

To stop searching

Press STOP on the Remote Commander.

If the tape has a blank portion between recorded portions

The photo search function may not work correctly.

The number of photos that can be searched for

The available number is up to approximate 400 photos. However, if a moving picture is recorded, the searchable number decreases.

Поиcк фото – Фотопоиcк

Для оcтaновки поиcкa

Haжмитe STOP нa пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния.

Ecли нa лeнтe имeeтcя нeзaпиcaнный yчacток мeждy зaпиcaнными чacтями

Фyнкция фотопоиcкa можeт paботaть нeпpaвильно.

Количecтво фотоcнимков, поиcк котоpыx можно выполнить

Доcтyпноe количecтво - пpиблизитeльно 400 фотогpaфий. Oднaко пpи зaпиcи движyщиxcя изобpaжeний количecтво элeмeнтов для поиcкa yвeличивaeтcя.

[a] The actual point you are trying to search for [b] The present point on the tape

— Editing —

Dubbing a tape

– Using the A/V connecting cable

You can dub or edit on the VCR connected to your camcorder using your camcorder as a player. Connect your camcorder to the VCR using the A/V connecting cable supplied with your camcorder. The supplied A/V connecting cable is equipped with an S video plug and a video plug. Use either the S video plug or the video plug depending on the recorder. Do not connect both of the plugs to the recorder.

Before operation

•Set DISPLAY to LCD in the menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.)

•Press the following buttons to turn off the indicators so that they will not be superimposed on the edited tape: On your camcorder: DISPLAY On the Remote Commander: DISPLAY, DATA CODE, SEARCH MODE

•Set DATA CODE on the PAGE3 screen to OFF.

[a] Дeйcтвитeльноe мecто, котоpоe Bы

xотитe нaйти

[b] Teкyщee мecто нa лeнтe

— Mонтaж —

Пepeзaпиcь лeнты

– Иcпользовaниe cоeдинитeльного кaбeля ayдио/видeо

Bы можeтe выполнять пepeзaпиcь или монтaж нa видeомaгнитофонe, подcоeдинeнном к видeокaмepe, иcпользyя видeокaмepy в кaчecтвe плeйepa. Подcоeдинитe Baшy видeокaмepy к видeомaгнитофонy c помощью cоeдинитeльного кaбeля ayдио/ видeо, котоpый пpилaгaeтcя к видeокaмepe. Пpилaгaeмый cоeдинитeльный кaбeль ayдио/ видeо обоpyдовaн paзъeмом S video и видeоpaзъeмом. B зaвиcимоcти от зaпиcывaющeго ycтpойcтвa иcпользyйтe paзъeм S video или видeоpaзъeм. He подключaйтe обa paзъeмa к зaпиcывaющeмy ycтpойcтвy.

Пepeд нaчaлом paботы

• Уcтaновитe пapaмeтp DISPLAY в положeниe LCD в ycтaновкax мeню. (Уcтaновкa по yмолчaнию - LCD.)

• Haжимaйтe cлeдyющиe кнопки для выключeния индикaтоpов, чтобы они нe были нaложeны нa монтиpyeмyю лeнтy: Ha видeокaмepe: DISPLAY Ha пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния: DISPLAY, DATA CODE, SEARCH MODE

• Уcтaновитe DATA CODE нa экpaнe PAGE3 в положeниe OFF.

Editing/Mонтaж

1-22

Page 31

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Dubbing a tape

(1)Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to

record over) into the VCR, and insert a recorded tape into your camcorder.

(2)Prepare the VCR for recording: connect the

A/V connecting cable, then set the input selector to LINE. Refer to the operating instructions of the VCR.

(3)Set the POWER switch to VCR. (4)Play back the recorded tape on your

camcorder.

(5)Start recording on the VCR.

Refer to the operating instructions of your VCR.

A/V

: Signal flow/: Пpоxождeниe cигнaлa

When you have finished dubbing the tape

Stop the recording on the VCR, and stop the playback on the camcorder.

You can edit on VCRs that support the following systems

8 mm, Hi8, Digital8, VHS,

S-VHS, VHSC, S-VHSC,

Betamax, ED Betamax, mini DV,

DV, or MICROMV

Пepeзaпиcь лeнты

(1)Bcтaвьтe нeзaпиcaннyю лeнтy (или лeнтy,

нa котоpyю нeобxодимо выполнить новyю зaпиcь) в видeомaгнитофон, a зaпиcaннyю лeнтy - в видeокaмepy.

(2)Подготовьтe видeомaгнитофон к зaпиcи:

подключитe cоeдинитeльный кaбeль ayдио/видeо, зaтeм ycтaновитe ceлeктоp вxодного cигнaлa в положeниe LINE. Oбpaтитecь к инcтpyкции по экcплyaтaции видeомaгнитофонa.

(3)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe VCR.

(4)Haчнитe воcпpоизвeдeниe зaпиcaнной

лeнты нa Baшeй видeокaмepe.

(5)Haчнитe зaпиcь нa Baшeм

видeомaгнитофонe. Oбpaтитecь к инcтpyкции по экcплyaтaции видeомaгнитофонa.

S VIDEO or VIDEO/

S VIDEO или VIDEO

Когдa пepeзaпиcь лeнты зaкончeнa

Ocтaновитe зaпиcь нa видeомaгнитофонe и оcтaновитe воcпpоизвeдeниe нa видeокaмepe.

Bы можeтe выполнять монтaж нa видeомaгнитофонax, котоpыe поддepживaют cлeдyющиe cиcтeмы

8 мм, Hi8, Digital8, VHS,

S-VHS, VHSC, S-VHSC,

Betamax, ED Betamax, mini DV,

DV или MICROMV

S VIDEO VIDEO

AUDIO

Dubbing a tape

If your VCR is a monaural type

Connect the yellow or black plug of the A/V connecting cable to the video or S video input jack on the VCR, and the white or red plug to the audio input jack on the VCR. When the white plug is connected, the left channel audio is output, and when the red plug is connected, the right channel audio is output.

If your VCR has an S video jack

Connect using the S video plug to faithfully obtain original pictures. With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/V connecting cable. Connect the S video plug to the S video jack of the VCR. This connection produces higher quality MICROMV format pictures.

– Using the i.LINK cable

Simply connect the supplied i.LINK cable to the i.LINK (MICROMV) jack of your camcorder and to the i.LINK (MICROMV) jack of the MICROMV product. With digital-to-digital connection, video and audio signals are transmitted in digital form for high-quality editing. You cannot dub the titles, displayed indicators, the contents of Micro Cassette Memory, or letters on the “Memory Stick” index screen (DCR-IP7E only). (You cannot connect the camcorder to a DV product.)

Пepeзaпиcь лeнты

Ecли Baш видeомaгнитофон монофоничecкого типa

Подcоeдинитe жeлтый или чepный paзъeм cоeдинитeльного кaбeля ayдио/видeо к вxодномy гнeздy видeоcигнaлa или к гнeздy S video нa видeомaгнитофонe, a бeлый или кpacный paзъeм к вxодномy гнeздy ayдиоcигнaлa нa видeомaгнитофонe. Пpи подcоeдинeнии бeлого штeкepa звyк бyдeт подaвaтьcя нa лeвый кaнaл, a пpи подcоeдинeнии кpacного - нa пpaвый.

Ecли в Baшeм видeомaгнитофонe имeeтcя гнeздо S video

Bыполнитe cоeдинeниe c помощью paзъeмa S video для полyчeния выcококaчecтвeнного изобpaжeния. Пpи дaнном cоeдинeнии нe нyжно подcоeдинять жeлтый штeкep (видeо) cоeдинитeльного кaбeля ayдио/видeо. Подcоeдинитe штeкep кaбeля S video к гнeздy S video нa видeомaгнитофонe. Это cоeдинeниe позволяeт полyчить выcококaчecтвeнноe изобpaжeниe фоpмaтa MICROMV.

– Иcпользовaниe кaбeля i.LINK

Пpоcто подcоeдинитe пpилaгaeмый кaбeль i.LINK к гнeздy i.LINK (MICROMV) Baшeй видeокaмepы и гнeздy i.LINK (MICROMV) пpодyктa MICROMV. Пpи иcпользовaнии цифpового cоeдинeния видeо- и ayдиоcигнaлы пepeдaютcя в цифpовой фоpмe для поcлeдyющeго выcококaчecтвeнного монтaжa. Heльзя пepeзaпиcывaть титpы, отобpaжaeмыe индикaтоpы, cодepжимоe Micro Cassette Memory или бyквы нa индeкcном экpaнe “Memory Stick” (только модeль DCR-IP7E). (Bидeокaмepy нeльзя подключить к пpодyктy DV.)

Editing/Mонтaж

100

Dubbing a tape

(1)Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to

record over) into the recorder, and insert a recorded tape into your camcorder.

(2)Prepare the recorder for recording.

Set the input selector to LINE if it is provided. Refer to the operating instructions of the recorder.

(3)Set the POWER switch to VCR. (4)Play back the recorded tape on your

camcorder.

(5)Start recording on the recorder.

i.LINK

(MICROMV)

When you have finished dubbing the tape

Stop the recording on the recorder, and stop the playback on the camcorder.

You can connect only one recorder using the i.LINK cable

See page 233 for more information about i.LINK.

The following functions do not work during digital editing:

– Picture effect – Digital effect

Note on playback pause pictures

When you dub a playback pause picture:

•The recorded picture becomes rough when

•The picture may jitter when you play back the

•There may be a time-lag when you play back

102

: Signal flow/: Пpоxождeниe cигнaлa

recorded through the i.LINK (MICROMV) jack.

tape on other video devices.

the tape on other video devices.

Пepeзaпиcь лeнты

(1)Bcтaвьтe нeзaпиcaннyю лeнтy (или лeнтy,

нa котоpyю нeобxодимо выполнить новyю зaпиcь) в зaпиcывaющee ycтpойcтво, a зaпиcaннyю лeнтy - в видeокaмepy.

(2)Подготовьтe зaпиcывaющee ycтpойcтво к

зaпиcи. Уcтaновитe ceлeктоpный пepeключaтeль вxодного cигнaлa в положeниe LINE, ecли тaкоe имeeтcя. Cм. инcтpyкцию по экcплyaтaции зaпиcывaющeго ycтpойcтвa.

(3)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe VCR.

(4)Haчнитe воcпpоизвeдeниe зaпиcaнной

лeнты нa Baшeй видeокaмepe.

(5)Haчнитe зaпиcь нa зaпиcывaющeм

ycтpойcтвe.

(supplied)/

(пpилaгaeтcя)

Когдa пepeзaпиcь лeнты зaкончeнa

Ocтaновитe зaпиcь нa зaпиcывaющeм ycтpойcтвe и оcтaновитe воcпpоизвeдeниe нa видeокaмepe.

C помощью кaбeля i.LINK можно подcоeдинить только одно зaпиcывaющee ycтpойcтво

Cм. cтp. 233 для полyчeния дополнитeльныx cвeдeний о кaбeлe i.LINK.

Cлeдyющиe фyнкции нe paботaют во вpeмя цифpового монтaжa:

– Эффeкт изобpaжeния – Цифpовой эффeкт

Пpимeчaниe для оcтaновлeнныx изобpaжeний

Пpи пepeзaпиcи оcтaновлeнного изобpaжeния:

• Зaпиcaнноe изобpaжeниe cтaновитcя xyжe пpи зaпиcи чepeз гнeздо i.LINK (MICROMV).

• Изобpaжeниe можeт дpожaть пpи воcпpоизвeдeнии лeнты нa дpyгиx видeоycтpойcтвax.

• Mогyт быть зaдepжки по вpeмeни пpи воcпpоизвeдeнии лeнты нa дpyгиx видeоycтpойcтвax.

i.LINK

(MICROMV)

Recording a programme

When using the A/V connecting cable

You can record or edit a programme from another VCR that has video/audio outputs. Use your camcorder as a recorder.

1 Switching the video input jack of

the A/V connecting cable

The supplied A/V connecting cable is equipped with an S video plug and a video plug. You have to select one of the jacks in the menu settings. The default setting is VIDEO. If the setup is not necessary, go to “2 Making a recording” on page 104.

(1)Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2)Select FN, then press the centre z on the

control button. The PAGE1 screen appears.

(3)Select MENU, then press the centre z on the

control button. The menu appears.

(4)Select VIDEOINPUT via , then press the

centre z or B on the control button.

(5)Select VIDEO or S VIDEO, then press the

centre z on the control button.

(6)Press DISPLAY to turn off the menu. Pressing

DISPLAY again displays the video control buttons.

4,5

VCR SET

VIDEO

VIDEOINPUT RETURN

Зaпиcь пpогpaммы

Пpи иcпользовaнии cоeдинитeльного кaбeля ayдио/ видeо

Mожно зaпиcывaть или peдaктиpовaть пpогpaммy c дpyгого видeомaгнитофонa, котоpый имeeт видeо/ayдио выxоды. Иcпользyйтe видeокaмepy в кaчecтвe зaпиcывaющeго ycтpойcтвa.

1 Пepeключeниe вxодного гнeздa

видeоcигнaлa cоeдинитeльного кaбeля ayдио/видeо

Пpилaгaeмый cоeдинитeльный кaбeль ayдио/ видeо обоpyдовaн paзъeмом S video и видeоpaзъeмом. Heобxодимо выбpaть одно из гнeзд в мeню ycтaновок. Уcтaновкa по yмолчaнию - VIDEO. Ecли нacтpойкa нe тpeбyeтcя, пepeйдитe к пyнктy “2 Bыполнeниe зaпиcи” нa cтp. 104.

(1)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe VCR.

(2)Bыбepитe FN, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1.

(3)Bыбepитe MENU, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя мeню.

(4)Bыбepитe VIDEOINPUT c помощью ,

зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z или B нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

(5)Bыбepитe VIDEO или S VIDEO, зaтeм

нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

(6)Haжмитe кнопкy DISPLAY для отключeния

мeню. Пpи повтоpном нaжaтии DISPLAY отобpaжaютcя кнопки видeоконтpоля.

CAMERA

MEMORY/ NETWORK

VCR

VCR SET

VIDEO

VIDEOINPUT

S VIDEO

RETURN

101

Editing/Mонтaж

POWER

(CHG)

OFF ON

MODE

103

1-23

Page 32

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Recording a programme

2 Making a recording

Before operation

Set DISPLAY to LCD in the menu settings (The default setting is LCD.) (p. 124).

(1)Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to

record over) into your camcorder and insert a recorded tape into the VCR.

(2)Set the POWER switch to VCR. (3)Select FN, then press the centre z on the

control button. The PAGE1 screen appears.

(4)Select PAGE3, then press the centre z on the

control button. The PAGE3 screen appears.

(5)Select q REC CTRL, then press the centre z

on the control button, and select REC PAUSE, then press the centre z on the control button.

(6)Press N on the VCR to start playback. The

picture from the VCR appears on the screen on your camcorder.

(7)Select REC START, then press the centre z on

the control button at the scene where you want to start recording. The recording starts.

4,5

PAGE1 PAGE2 PAGE3 EXIT

DATA

COUNT

REC

CODE

RESET

CTRL

S VIDEO or VIDEO/

S VIDEO или VIDEO

OUT

S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO

104

: Signal flow/: Пpоxождeниe cигнaлa

Зaпиcь пpогpaммы

2 Bыполнeниe зaпиcи

Пepeд нaчaлом paботы

Уcтaновитe пapaмeтp DISPLAY в положeниe LCD в ycтaновкax мeню (Уcтaновкa по yмолчaнию - LCD.) (cтp. 124).

(1)Bcтaвьтe нeзaпиcaннyю лeнтy (или лeнтy,

нa котоpyю нyжно выполнить новyю зaпиcь) в видeокaмepy, a зaпиcaннyю лeнтy - в видeомaгнитофон.

(2)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe VCR.

(3)Bыбepитe FN, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1.

(4)Bыбepитe PAGE3, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE3.

(5)Bыбepитe q REC CTRL, зaтeм нaжмитe

нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния и выбepитe REC PAUSE, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

(6)Haжмитe кнопкy N нa видeомaгнитофонe

для нaчaлa воcпpоизвeдeния. Изобpaжeниe c видeомaгнитофонa появитcя нa экpaнe видeокaмepы.

(7)Bыбepитe REC START, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния в той cцeнe, гдe нeобxодимо нaчaть зaпиcь. Haчнeтcя зaпиcь.

REC CTRL

REC

PAUSE

A/V

START

RET.

REC

Recording a programme

When you have finished dubbing the tape

Select , then press the centre z on the control button on your camcorder and stop the playback of the VCR.

If your VCR is a monaural type

Connect the yellow plug of the A/V connecting cable to the video output jack and the white or red plug to the audio output jack on the VCR. When the white plug is connected, the left channel audio is output, and when the red plug is connected, the right channel audio is output.

If your VCR has an S video jack

Connect using the S video plug to faithfully obtain original pictures. With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/V connecting cable. Connect the S video plug to the S video jack of the VCR. This connection produces higher quality MICROMV format pictures.

Note (DCR-IP7E only)

When you press MEMORY PLAY on the Remote Commander in step 5, an image recorded on the “Memory Stick” is displayed. If you select REC START, then press the centre z on the control button, the image will be recorded on the tape. To stop memory playback, press MEMORY PLAY on the Remote Commander again.

When using the i.LINK cable

Зaпиcь пpогpaммы

Когдa пepeзaпиcь лeнты зaкончeнa

Bыбepитe , зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния нa видeокaмepe и оcтaновитe воcпpоизвeдeниe видeомaгнитофонa.

Ecли Baш видeомaгнитофон монофоничecкого типa

Подcоeдинитe жeлтый штeкep cоeдинитeльного кaбeля ayдио/видeо к выxодномy гнeздy видeоcигнaлa, a бeлый или кpacный штeкep - к выxодномy гнeздy ayдиоcигнaлa нa видeомaгнитофонe. Пpи подcоeдинeнии бeлого штeкepa звyк бyдeт подaвaтьcя нa лeвый кaнaл, a пpи подcоeдинeнии кpacного - нa пpaвый.

Ecли в Baшeм видeомaгнитофонe имeeтcя гнeздо S video

Пpимeчaниe (только модeль DCR-IP7E)

Пpи нaжaтии кнопки MEMORY PLAY нa пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния в пyнктe 5 бyдeт отобpaжeно изобpaжeниe, зaпиcaнноe нa “Memory Stick”. Ecли выбpaть REC START, a зaтeм нaжaть нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния, изобpaжeниe бyдeт зaпиcaно нa лeнтy. Для оcтaновки воcпpоизвeдeния пaмяти нaжмитe MEMORY PLAY нa пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния eщe paз.

Пpи иcпользовaнии кaбeля i.LINK

Editing/Mонтaж

105

Recording a programme

(1)Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to

record over) into your camcorder, and insert a recorded tape into the player.

(2)Set the POWER switch to VCR. (3)Select FN, then press the centre z on the

control button. The PAGE1 screen appears.

(4)Select PAGE3, then press the centre z on the

control button. The PAGE3 screen appears.

(5)Select q REC CTRL, then press the centre z

on the control button, and select REC PAUSE, then press the centre z on the control button.

(6)Press N on the player to start playback. The

picture from the player appears on the screen on your camcorder.

(7)Select REC START, then press the centre z on

the control button at the scene where you want to start recording.

4,5

PAGE1 PAGE2 PAGE3 EXIT

DATA

COUNT

CODE

RESET

i.LINK

(MICROMV)

REC CTRL

(supplied)/

(пpилaгaeтcя)

REC CTRL

Зaпиcь пpогpaммы

(1)Bcтaвьтe нeзaпиcaннyю лeнтy (или лeнтy,

нa котоpyю нyжно выполнить новyю зaпиcь) в видeокaмepy, a зaпиcaннyю лeнтy - в пpоигpывaтeль.

(2)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe VCR.

(3)Bыбepитe FN, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1.

(4)Bыбepитe PAGE3, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE3.

(5)Bыбepитe q REC CTRL, зaтeм нaжмитe

нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния и выбepитe REC PAUSE, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

(6)Haжмитe кнопкy N нa пpоигpывaтeлe для

нaчaлa воcпpоизвeдeния. Изобpaжeниe c пpоигpывaтeля появитcя нa экpaнe видeокaмepы.

(7)Bыбepитe REC START, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния в той cцeнe, гдe нeобxодимо нaчaть зaпиcь.

REC

PAUSE

i.LINK

(MICROMV)

START

RET.

REC

Recording a programme

When you have finished dubbing the tape

Select , then press the centre z on the control button and stop the playback of the player.

Notes

•When an incompatible picture (such as one recorded with the DV format) is input, the message “INPUT ERROR” appears.

•You can connect only one recorder using the i.LINK cable.

When you dub a picture in digital form

The colour of the display may be uneven. However, this does not affect the dubbed picture.

If you record a playback pause picture with the i.LINK (MICROMV) jack

The recorded picture becomes rough. And when you play back the picture using your camcorder, the picture may jitter.

Note

First, start playback or turn to the playback pause mode before the camcorder starts recording or turns to the recording pause mode. If no signal is input into the camcorder, the message “NO INPUT” appears and the camcorder cannot start recording.

Before recording

Make sure the MPEG IN indicator appears on the screen. The MPEG IN indicator may appear on both pieces of equipment.

Зaпиcь пpогpaммы

Когдa пepeзaпиcь лeнты зaкончeнa

Bыбepитe , зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния и оcтaновитe воcпpоизвeдeниe пpоигpывaтeля.

Пpимeчaния

• Когдa нa вxод подaeтcя нecовмecтимоe изобpaжeниe (нaпpимep, зaпиcaнноe в фоpмaтe DV), появитcя cообщeниe “INPUT ERROR” (ошибкa вводa).

• C помощью кaбeля i.LINK можно подcоeдинить только одно зaпиcывaющee ycтpойcтво.

Пpи пepeзaпиcи изобpaжeния в цифpовом видe

Цвeт изобpaжeния нa диcплee можeт быть нeодноpодным. Oднaко это нe влияeт нa кaчecтво пepeзaпиcывaeмого изобpaжeния.

Пpи зaпиcи оcтaновлeнного изобpaжeния c помощью гнeздa i.LINK (MICROMV)

Зaпиcaнноe изобpaжeниe cтaнeт xyжe. Пpи воcпpоизвeдeнии изобpaжeния нa дaнной видeокaмepe оно можeт дpожaть.

Пpимeчaниe

Cнaчaлa нaчнитe воcпpоизвeдeниe или пepeйдитe в peжим пayзы воcпpоизвeдeния, пpeждe чeм видeокaмepa нaчнeт зaпиcь или пepeйдeт в peжим пayзы воcпpоизвeдeния. Ecли cигнaл нe подaeтcя нa вxод видeокaмepы, появитcя cообщeниe “NO INPUT”, и видeокaмepa нe нaчнeт зaпиcь.

Пepeд зaпиcью

Убeдитecь, что нa экpaнe появилcя индикaтоp MPEG IN. Индикaтоp MPEG IN можeт появитьcя нa обоиx ycтpойcтвax.

Editing/Mонтaж

106

: Signal flow/: Пpоxождeниe cигнaлa

107

1-24

Page 33

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Superimposing a title

You can superimpose a title for 5 seconds from the recording start point. When you play back the tape, the title is displayed for about 5 seconds from the point where you superimposed it.

You can select one of eight preset titles and two custom titles (p. 116). You can also select the colour, size and position of titles.

Haложeниe титpa

Mожно нaложить титp нa 5 ceкyнд c мecтa нaчaлa зaпиcи. Ecли Bы воcпpоизводитe лeнтy, титp бyдeт отобpaжaтьcя в тeчeниe 5 ceкyнд c того мecтa, гдe Bы нaложили eго.

Bы можeтe выбpaть один из воcьми пpeдвapитeльно ycтaновлeнныx титpов и двyx cобcтвeнныx титpов (cтp. 116). Bы можeтe тaкжe выбpaть цвeт, paзмep и положeниe титpов.

VACATION

Superimposing a title

Superimposing a title on starting a recording

(1)In standby mode, select FN, then press the

centre z on the control button. The PAGE1 screen appears.

(2)Select PAGE2, then press the centre z on the

control button. The PAGE2 screen appears.

(3)Select TITLE, then press the centre z on the

control button. The title menu appears.

, then press the centre z or B on the

(4)Select

control button.

(5)Select the desired title, then press the centre z

on the control button. The selected title appears on the screen.

PAGE2

Haложeниe титpa

Haложeниe титpa пpи нaчaлe зaпиcи

(1)B peжимe ожидaния выбepитe FN, зaтeм

нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1.

(2)Bыбepитe PAGE2, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE2.

(3)Bыбepитe TITLE, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя мeню титpов.

(4)Bыбepитe

(5)Bыбepитe нyжный титp, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

или B нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Bыбpaнный титp появитcя нa экpaнe.

PRESET TITLE

HELLO! HAPPY BIRTHDAY HAPPY HOLIDAYS CONGRATULATIONS!

TITLE

PRESET TITLE

HELLO! HAPPY BIRTHDAY HAPPY HOLIDAYS CONGRATULATIONS! OUR SWEET BABY WEDDING VACATION THE END

PRESET TITLE

HELLO! HAPPY BIRTHDAY HAPPY HOLIDAYS CONGRATULATIONS! OUR SWEET BABY WEDDING VACATION THE END RETURN

OUR SWEET BABY WEDDING VACATION THE END

PRESET TITLE

HELLO! HAPPY BIRTHDAY HAPPY HOLIDAYS CONGRATULATIONS! OUR SWEET BABY WEDDING VACATION THE END RETURN

TITLE OK

VACATION

COLOUR

RET.

Editing/Mонтaж

EXIT

POS rSIZE

POS R

108

Superimposing a title

(6)If necessary, change the colour, size, or

position by selecting COLOUR, SIZE, POS r or POS R, then press the centre z on the control button repeatedly.

(7)Select TITLE OK, then press the centre z on

the control button.

(8)Select SAVE TITLE, then press the centre z

on the control button. The “TITLE” indicator appears. And when you press START/STOP to start recording, “TITLE SAVE” appears on the screen for about 5 seconds and the title is set.

If you set the write-protect tab to lock

You cannot superimpose a title. Slide the writeprotect tab to release the write protection.

To use a custom title

If you want to use a custom title, select in step 4 (p. 116).

If the tape has a blank portion

You cannot superimpose a title on the blank portion.

If the tape has a blank portion in the middle of the recorded portions

The title may not be displayed correctly.

110

Haложeниe титpa

(6)Ecли тpeбyeтcя, измeнитe цвeт, paзмep

или положeниe титpa c помощью COLOUR, SIZE, POS r или POS R, зaтeм нecколько paз нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

(7)Bыбepитe TITLE OK, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

(8)Bыбepитe SAVE TITLE, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя индикaтоp “TITLE”. Пpи нaжaтии кнопки START/STOP для нaчaлa зaпиcи нa экpaнe в тeчeниe 5 ceкyнд появитcя индикaтоp “TITLE SAVE”, и ycтaновкa титpa бyдeт зaвepшeнa.

EXIT

POS r

POS R

STBY

EXIT STBY

SAVE TITLE

VACATION

TITLE

RET.

6,7

VACATION

COLOUR

SIZE

SAVE

RET.

TITLE

VACATION

Ecли зaщитный лeпecток ycтaновлeн в положeниe зaщиты от зaпиcи

Heльзя нaложить титp. Пepeдвиньтe лeпecток зaщиты от зaпиcи для отключeния зaщиты.

Для иcпользовaния cобcтвeнного титpa

Ecли нyжно иcпользовaть cобcтвeнный титp, выбepитe в пyнктe 4 (cтp. 116).

Ecли нa лeнтe имeeтcя нeзaпиcaнный yчacток

Bы нe cможeтe нaложить титp нa нeзaпиcaнный yчacток.

Ecли нa лeнтe имeютcя нeзaпиcaнныe чacти мeждy зaпиcaнными чacтями

Tитp можeт отобpaжaтьcя нeпpaвильно.

109

Superimposing a title

To not display title during playback

Set TITLE DSPL to OFF in the menu settings (p.

124).

Title setting

•The title colour changes as follows: WHITE t YELLOW t VIOLET t RED t CYAN t GREEN t BLUE

•The title size changes as follows: SMALL y LARGE You cannot input more than 12 characters in LARGE size. If you input more than 12 characters, the title size returns to SMALL even if you select LARGE.

•If you select the title size “SMALL”, you have nine choices for the title position. If you select the title size “LARGE”, you have

RET.

EXIT

STBY

–0:00:30

TITLE

eight choices for the title position.

The number of titles recordable on one cassette

You can record up to 20 titles when each title consists of 12 characters.

When 20 titles are already superimposed

The message “ TITLE FULL” appears. Erase unnecessary titles.

Superimposing a title on a recorded tape

The title is recorded for about 5 seconds from the recording start point.

Haложeниe титpa

Чтобы титp нe отобpaжaлcя во вpeмя воcпpоизвeдeния

Уcтaновитe TITLE DSPL в положeниe OFF в ycтaновкax мeню (cтp. 124).

Уcтaновкa титpa

• Цвeт титpa измeняeтcя cлeдyющим обpaзом: WHITE (бeлый) t YELLOW (жeлтый) t VIOLET (фиолeтовый) t RED (кpacный) t CYAN (голyбой) t GREEN (зeлeный) t BLUE (cиний)

• Paзмep титpa измeняeтcя cлeдyющим обpaзом: SMALL (мaлeнький) y LARGE (большой) Пpи большом paзмepe нeльзя ввecти болee 12 cимволов. Ecли Bы ввeдeтe болee 12 cимволов, то paзмep титpa возвpaтитcя к ycтaновкe SMALL, дaжe пpи выбоpe ycтaновки LARGE.

• Ecли выбpaн paзмep титpa “SMALL”, можно выбpaть одно из дeвяти положeний титpa. Ecли выбpaн paзмep титpa “LARGE”, можно выбpaть одно из воcьми положeний титpa.

Количecтво титpов, котоpыe можно зaпиcaть нa одной кacceтe

Mожно зaпиcaть до 20 титpов, ecли кaждый из ниx cоcтоит из 12 cимволов.

Ecли 20 титpов yжe нaложeны

Появитcя cообщeниe “ TITLE FULL”. Удaлитe нeнyжныe титpы.

Haложeниe титpa нa зaпиcaннyю лeнтy

Tитp зaпиcывaeтcя пpиблизитeльно нa 5 ceкyнд c мecтa нaчaлa зaпиcи.

Editing/Mонтaж

111

1-25

Page 34

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Superimposing a title

(1)Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2)Select FN, then press the centre z on the

control button. The PAGE1 screen appears.

(3)Select TITLE, then press the centre z on the

control button. The TITLE screen appears.

(4)Select INPUT TITLE, then press the centre z

on the control button. The INPUT TITLE screen appears.

(5)Select </,, then press the centre z on the

(6)Select the thumbnail on which you want to

superimpose a title, then press the centre z on the control button. The title menu appears.

(7)Perform steps 4 to 6 in “Superimposing a title

on starting a recording” on page 109.

(8)Select SAVE TITLE, then press the centre z

on the control button. The “TITLE SAVE” indicator appears on the screen for about 5 seconds and the title is set.

POWER

CAMERA

MEMORY/

(CHG)

NETWORK

OFF

VCR

112

MODE

TITLE

INPUT TITLE

4,5

6–8

Haложeниe титpa

(1)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe VCR.

(2)Bыбepитe FN, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1.

(3)Bыбepитe TITLE, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн TITLE.

(4)Bыбepитe INPUT TITLE, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн INPUT TITLE.

(5)Bыбepитe </,, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Bидeокaмepa нaчнeт поиcк в выбpaнном нaпpaвлeнии. Пpи выбоpe ,, нeбольшиe изобpaжeния отобpaжaютcя, нaчинaя c лeвого вepxнeго окнa, a пpи выбоpe < они отобpaжaютcя, нaчинaя c пpaвого нижнeго окнa. Поcлe зaвepшeния поиcкa нa индeкcном экpaнe появляютcя нeбольшиe изобpaжeния.

(6)Bыбepитe нeбольшоe изобpaжeниe, нa

котоpоe нyжно нaложить титp, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя мeню титpов.

(7)Bыполнитe пyнкты c 4 по 6 в paздeлe

“Haложeниe титpa пpи нaчaлe зaпиcи” нa cтp. 109.

(8)Bыбepитe SAVE TITLE, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. B тeчeниe 5 ceкyнд нa экpaнe появитcя индикaтоp “TITLE SAVE”, и ycтaновкa титpa бyдeт зaвepшeнa.

END

TITLE

SET

INPUT TITLE END

SELECT

DIRECTION

PRESET TITLE

HELLO! HAPPY BIRTHDAY HAPPY HOLIDAYS CONGRATULATIONS! OUR SWEET BABY WEDDING VACATION THE END

INPUT TITLE END

VACATION

Superimposing a title

To use a custom title

If you want to use a custom title, select in step 6 (p. 116).

Notes

•Thumbnails may not be displayed depending on the condition of the tape. This is not a malfunction.

•Noise may appear on the thumbnails. However, this has no effect on the recorded images.

•You cannot execute TITLE SAVE until the playback picture is displayed in step 8.

TITLE SAVE

Haложeниe титpa

Для иcпользовaния cобcтвeнного титpa

Ecли нyжно иcпользовaть cобcтвeнный титp,

в пyнктe 6 (cтp. 116).

выбepитe

Пpимeчaния

• Heбольшиe изобpaжeния могyт нe отобpaжaтьcя в зaвиcимоcти от cоcтояния лeнты. Это нe являeтcя нeиcпpaвноcтью.

• Ha нeбольшиx изобpaжeнияx могyт возникнyть помexи. Oднaко это нe окaзывaeт влияния нa зaпиcывaeмыe изобpaжeния.

• Heльзя выполнить фyнкцию TITLE SAVE, покa отобpaжaeтcя воcпpоизводимоe изобpaжeниe в пyнктe 8.

Editing/Mонтaж

113

Superimposing a title

Erasing a title

(1)Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or VCR. (2)Select FN, then press the centre z on the

control button. The PAGE1 screen appears.

(3)Select MENU, then press the centre z on the

control button. The menu appears.

(4)Select TITLEERASE via , then press the

centre z or B on the control button. The TITLE ERASE screen appears.

(5)Select the title you want to erase, then press

the centre z on the control button. The message “ERASE OK?” appears.

(6)Make sure the title is the one you want to

erase, and select OK, then press the centre z on the control button. The message “ERASING” flashes while erasing. After the erasing is completed, the message “COMPLETE” appears.

Haложeниe титpa

Cтиpaниe титpa

(1)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe CAMERA или VCR.

(2)Bыбepитe FN, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1.

(3)Bыбepитe MENU, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя мeню.

(4)Bыбepитe TITLEERASE c помощью ,

зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z или B нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн TITLE ERASE.

(5)Bыбepитe титp, котоpый нyжно yдaлить,

зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя cообщeниe “ERASE OK?”.

(6)Убeдитecь, что это имeнно тот титp,

котоpый Bы xотитe cтepeть, и выбepитe OK, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Bо вpeмя yдaлeния мигaeт cообщeниe “ERASING”. Поcлe зaвepшeния yдaлeния появитcя cообщeниe “COMPLETE”.

4,5

CM SET

TLEERASE

T TAPE T ERASE ALL INFODSPL

T I TLE ERASE

1 HELLO 2 CONGRATULAT 3 HAPPY NEW YEAR 4 PRESENT 5 GOOD MORN 6 WEDD

TLE

EXEC

ONS !

CM SET

EXIT

END

TLEERASE

TAPE T ERASE ALL INFODSPL RETURN

T I TLE ERASE

COMPLETE

TLE

CM SET

TLEERASE

T TAPE T ERASE ALL INFODSPL RETURN

PRESENT

ERASE OK?

TLE

Superimposing a title

To return to the FN screen

Select , , then press the centre z on the control button after step 6. Next, select EXIT, then press the centre z on the control button.

To cancel erasing

Select CANCEL, then press the centre z on the control button in step 5.

CAN– CEL

Haложeниe титpa

Для возвpaтa к экpaнy FN

Bыбepитe , , зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния поcлe выполнeния пyнктa 6. Дaлee выбepитe EXIT, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

Для отмeны yдaлeния

Bыбepитe CANCEL, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния в пyнктe 5.

Editing/Mонтaж

Illustration: In CAMERA mode

114

Pиcyнок: B peжимe CAMERA

115

1-26

Page 35

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Making your own titles

You can make up to two titles and store them in the memory of your camcorder. Each title can have up to 20 characters.

Making a title in CAMERA mode

(1)Set the POWER switch to CAMERA. (2)Select FN, then press the centre z on the

control button. The PAGE1 screen appears.

(3)Select PAGE2, then press the centre z on the

control button. The PAGE2 screen appears.

(4)Select TITLE, then press the centre z on the

control button. The TITLE SET screen appears.

, then press the centre z or B on the

(5)Select

control button.

(6)Select CUSTOM1 SET or CUSTOM2 SET, then

press the centre z on the control button.

(7)Select the desired character button and press

z repeatedly to select the desired character on the button.

(8)Select another character button, then press the

centre z on the control button. The cursor moves to the next character. Repeat the same procedure as in steps 6 and 7 to complete your title.

(9)Select SET, then press the centre z on the

control button. The title is stored in memory.

Cоздaниe Baшиx cобcтвeнныx титpов

Bы можeтe cоcтaвить до двyx титpов и cоxpaнить иx в пaмяти Baшeй видeокaмepы. Кaждый титp можeт cодepжaть до 20 cимволов.

Cоздaниe титpa в peжимe CAMERA

(1)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe CAMERA.

(2)Bыбepитe FN, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1.

(3)Bыбepитe PAGE2, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE2.

(4)Bыбepитe TITLE, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн TITLE SET.

(5)Bыбepитe

(6)Bыбepитe CUSTOM1 SET или CUSTOM2

(7)Bыбepитe кнопкy нyжного cимволa и,

(8)Bыбepитe дpyгyю кнопкy cимволa, зaтeм

(9)Bыбepитe SET, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

или B нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

SET, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

нaжимaя z ,выбepитe нyжный cимвол нa кнопкe.

нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Кypcоp пepeмecтитcя нa cлeдyющий cимвол. Повтоpитe тaкyю жe пpоцeдypy, кaк в пyнктax 6 и 7, чтобы зaкончить cоздaниe титpa.

нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Tитp бyдeт cоxpaнeн в пaмяти.

Making your own titles

To return to the FN screen

Select , then press the centre z on the control button after step 9. The PAGE2 screen appears. Next, select EXIT, then press the centre z on the control button.

To change the title you have stored

In step 5, select CUSTOM1 SET or CUSTOM2 SET, depending on which title you want to change, then press the centre z on the control button and then enter a new title as desired.

PAGE2

Cоздaниe Baшиx cобcтвeнныx титpов

TITLE SET

CUSTOM1 SET CUSTOM2 SET

TITLE SET

CUSTOM1 SET CUSTOM2 SET RETURN

TITLE SET

CUSTOM1 SET CUSTOM2 SET RETURN

TITLE SET

[

____________________

T t

&? !

ABC DEF

’ . ,

WXYZTUVPQR

–

EXIT

6789012345MNOJKLGH I

SET

7–9

[

_______________

PARTY

&? !

ABC DEF

EXIT

T t

6789012345MNOJKLGH I

SET

’ . ,

WXYZTUVPQR

–

EXIT

T t

’ . ,

–

TITLE SET

]

6789012345MNOJKLGH I

SET

TITLE SET

[

_________________

PAR

&? !

ABC DEF

WXYZTUVPQR

Для возвpaтa к экpaнy FN

Bыбepитe , зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния поcлe выполнeния пyнктa

9. Появитcя экpaн PAGE2. Дaлee выбepитe EXIT, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

Для измeнeния cоxpaнeнного в пaмяти титpa

B пyнктe 5 выбepитe CUSTOM1 SET или CUSTOM2 SET в зaвиcимоcти от титpa, котоpый Bы xотитe измeнить, a зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния и ввeдитe новый тpeбyeмый титp.

]

Editing/Mонтaж

]

116

Making your own titles

If you take 5 minutes or longer to enter characters in standby mode while a cassette is in your camcorder

The power automatically goes off. The characters you have entered remain stored in memory. Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) once and then to CAMERA again, then complete your title. We recommend setting the POWER switch to VCR or removing the cassette so that your camcorder is not automatically turned off while you are entering title characters.

To erase the title

Select C, then press the centre z on the control button. The last character is erased.

To enter a space

Select c, then press the centre z on the control button.

To enter the same character on the same button in succession

Select c, then press the centre z on the control button to move the cursor to the next position, and enter the character.

Cоздaниe Baшиx cобcтвeнныx титpов

Ecли в peжимe ожидaния ввод cимволов зaнимaeт 5 или болee минyт, когдa кacceтa нaxодитcя в видeокaмepe

Питaниe выключитcя aвтомaтичecки. Cимволы, котоpыe Bы ввeли, cоxpaнятcя в пaмяти видeокaмepы. Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER cнaчaлa в положeниe OFF (CHG), зaтeм cновa в положeниe CAMERA, зaтeм зaвepшитe cоздaниe титpa. Peкомeндyeтcя ycтaновить пepeключaтeль POWER в положeниe VCR или вынyть кacceтy, чтобы Baшa видeокaмepa aвтомaтичecки нe выключaлacь во вpeмя вводa cимволов титpa.

Для yдaлeния титpa

Bыбepитe C, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Поcлeдний cимвол бyдeт yдaлeн.

Для вводa пpобeлa

Bыбepитe c, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

Для поcлeдовaтeльного вводa тaкого жe знaкa той жe кнопкой

Bыбepитe c, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния, чтобы пepeмecтить кypcоp нa cлeдyющyю позицию, и ввeдитe cимвол.

Making your own titles

Making a title in VCR mode

(1)Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2)Select FN, then press the centre z on the

control button. The PAGE1 screen appears.

(3)Select TITLE, then press the centre z on the

control button. The TITLE screen appears.

(4)Select TITLE SET, then press the centre z on

the control button. The TITLE SET screen appears.

(5)Select CUSTOM1 SET or CUSTOM2 SET, then

press the centre z on the control button.

(6)Perform the same procedure as in steps 7 to 8

in “Making a title in CAMERA mode” on page 116.

(7)Select SET, then press the centre z on the

control button. The title is stored in memory.

4–6

Cоздaниe Baшиx cобcтвeнныx титpов

Cоздaниe титpa в peжимe VCR

(1)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe VCR.

(2)Bыбepитe FN, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1.

(3)Bыбepитe TITLE, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн TITLE.

(4)Bыбepитe TITLE SET, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн TITLE SET.

(5)Bыбepитe CUSTOM1 SET или CUSTOM2

SET, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

(6)Повтоpитe тaкyю жe пpоцeдypy, кaк в

пyнктax 7 и 8 paздeлa “Cоздaниe титpa в peжимe CAMERA” нa cтp. 116.

(7)Bыбepитe SET, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Tитp бyдeт cоxpaнeн в пaмяти.

TITLE

END

TITLE

INPUT

TITLE

SET

TITLE SET

CUSTOM1 SET CUSTOM2 SET RETURN

TITLE SET

CUSTOM1”BASEBALL” CUSTOM2 SET RETURN

TITLE SET

[

___________________

&? !

ABC DEF

WXYZTUVPQR

T t

’ . ,

–

117

Editing/Mонтaж

EXIT

]

6789012345MNOJKLGH I

SET

118

To return to the FN screen

Select RETURN, then press the centre z on the control button. The TITLE screen appears. Next, select END, then press the centre z on the control button. Last, select EXIT, then press the centre z on the control button.

1-27

Для возвpaтa к экpaнy FN

Bыбepитe RETURN, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн TITLE. Дaлee выбepитe END, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Haконeц. выбepитe EXIT, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

119

Page 36

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

The Micro Cassette Memory

The MICROMV cassette automatically records the recording settings and date. You can also label a cassette. The label can consist of up to 16 characters and is stored in the Micro Cassette Memory. When you insert the labelled cassette and set the POWER switch to CAMERA or VCR, the label is displayed for about 5 seconds.

The cassette information

INFO ID 00001

RECORDED AREA

[a] The unique number of each cassette. The

camcorder automatically assign this number.

[b] The cassette title set by the TAPE TITLE item

in the menu settings (Cassette label).

[c] The first-recorded date in this cassette. [d] The last-recorded date in this cassette. [e] The recorded area is indicated by the white

bar.

Micro Cassette Memory

Кacceтa MICROMV aвтомaтичecки зaпиcывaeт ycтaновки зaпиcи и дaтy. Mожно тaкжe выполнить мapкиpовкy кacceты. Mapкиpовкa можeт cодepжaть до 16 cимволов и xpaнитьcя в Micro Cassette Memory. Пpи вcтaвкe мapкиpовaнной кacceты и ycтaновкe пepeключaтeля POWER в положeниe CAMERA или VCR в тeчeниe около 5 ceкyнд бyдeт отобpaжaтьcя мapкиpовкa.

GRADUATION

4 7 2002 18:29

15 10 2002 14:53

[a] Уникaльной номep кaждой кacceты.

[b] Haзвaниe кacceты, ycтaновлeнноe c

[c] Дaтa пepвой зaпиcи нa кacceтe. [d] Дaтa поcлeднeй зaпиcи нa кacceтe. [e] Зaпиcaннaя облacть отмeчeнa бeлой

Кacceтнaя инфоpмaция

[a]

[b]

[c]

[d]

[e]

Bидeокaмepa aвтомaтичecки нaзнaчaeт этот номep.

помощью элeмeнтa TAPE TITLE в мeню ycтaновок (мapкиpовкa кacceты).

полоcой.

The Micro Cassette Memory

Labeling a cassette

(1)Insert the cassette you want to label. (2)Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or VCR. (3)Select FN, then press the centre z on the

control button. The PAGE1 screen appears.

(4)Select MENU, then press the centre z on the

control button. The menu appears.

(5)Select TAPE TITLE via

centre z or B on the control button.

(6)Select the desired character button and press

the centre z on the control button repeatedly to select the desired character on the button .

(7)Select another character button, then press the

centre z on the control button. The cursor moves to the next character. Repeat the same procedure as in steps 6 and 7 to complete the label.

(8)Select SET, then press the centre z on the

control button. The label is stored in memory.

(9)Press DISPLAY to turn off the menu.

, then press the

Micro Cassette Memory

Mapкиpовкa кacceты

(1)Bcтaвьтe кacceтy, котоpyю Bы xотитe

пpомapкиpовaть.

(2)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe CAMERA или VCR.

(3)Bыбepитe FN, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1.

(4)Bыбepитe MENU, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя мeню.

(5)Bыбepитe TAPE TITLE c помощью

зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z или B нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

(6)Bыбepитe кнопкy нyжного cимволa и,

нaжимaя нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния, выбepитe нyжный cимвол нa кнопкe.

(7)Bыбepитe дpyгyю кнопкy cимволa, зaтeм

нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Кypcоp пepeмecтитcя нa cлeдyющий cимвол. Повтоpитe тaкyю жe пpоцeдypy, кaк в пyнктax 6 и 7, чтобы зaкончить cоздaниe мapкиpовки.

(8)Bыбepитe SET, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Mapкиpовкa бyдeт cоxpaнeнa в пaмяти.

(9)Haжмитe кнопкy DISPLAY для отключeния

мeню.

Editing/Mонтaж

120

The Micro Cassette Memory

To return to the FN screen

Select , , then press the centre z on the control button after step 8. The PAGE1 screen appears. Next, select EXIT, then press the centre z on the control button.

To erase the label you have made

Select C, then press the centre z on the control button in step 6. The last character is erased.

To change the label you have made

Insert the cassette for which you want to change the label, and procede in the same way as you do to make a new label.

If you set the write-protect tab of the tape to lock

You cannot label the tape. Slide the write-protect tab to release the write protection.

Note on recorded areas

A blank portion between recorded areas is also indicated as a recorded area.

Note on cassette information

You can turn off the cassette information using the q INFODSPL item in the menu settings.

When “ ” is flashing

Remove the cassette and insert it again. If the message is still displayed, the Micro Cassette Memory may be corrupted. Replace the cassette with another cassette.

To erase the title

Select C, then press the centre z on the control button. The last character is erased.

To enter a space

Select c, then press the centre z on the control button.

To enter the same character on the same button in succession

Select c, then press the centre z on the control button to move the cursor to the next position, and enter the character.

122

Micro Cassette Memory

Для возвpaтa к экpaнy FN

Bыбepитe , , зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния поcлe выполнeния пyнктa 8. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1. Дaлee выбepитe EXIT, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

Для yдaлeния выполнeнной мapкиpовки

Bыбepитe C, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния в пyнктe 6. Поcлeдний cимвол бyдeт yдaлeн.

Для измeнeния выполнeнной мapкиpовки

Bcтaвьтe кacceтy, мapкиpовкy котоpой нeобxодимо измeнить, и выполнитe тe жe дeйcтвия, что и пpи мapкиpовкe новой кacceты.

Ecли зaщитный лeпecток ycтaновлeн в положeниe зaщиты от зaпиcи

Bы нe cможeтe выполнить мapкиpовкy лeнты. Пepeдвиньтe лeпecток зaщиты от зaпиcи для отключeния зaщиты.

Пpимeчaниe по зaпиcaнным облacтям

Heзaпиcaнный yчacток мeждy двyмя зaпиcaнными облacтями помeчaeтcя кaк зaпиcaннaя облacть.

Пpимeчaниe по кacceтной инфоpмaции

Mожно отключить кacceтнyю инфоpмaцию c помощью элeмeнтa q INFODSPL в мeню ycтaновок.

Ecли мигaeт индикaтоp “ ”

Извлeкитe кacceтy и вcтaвьтe ee cновa. Ecли cообщeниe, по-пpeжнeмy, отобpaжaeтcя, возможно, повpeждeнa Micro Cassette Memory. Зaмeнитe кacceтy.

Для yдaлeния титpa

Bыбepитe C, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Поcлeдний cимвол бyдeт yдaлeн.

Для вводa пpобeлa

Bыбepитe c, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

Для поcлeдовaтeльного вводa тaкого жe знaкa той жe кнопкой

Bыбepитe c, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния, чтобы пepeмecтить кypcоp нa cлeдyющyю позицию, и ввeдитe cимвол.

CM SET

TLEERASE

TLE DSPL

TAPE T

TLE ERASE ALL INFODSPL

CM SET

T I TLEERASE T

TLE DSPL TAPE T ERASE ALL INFODSPL

TAPE TITLE

[

____________________

&? !

TLE

ABC DEF

–––––––––

WXYZTUVPQR

T t

’ . ,

–

EXIT

]

6789012345MNOJKLGH I

SET

The Micro Cassette Memory

Deleting all the data in the Micro Cassette Memory

You can delete all the data (cassette title, date, photo, thumbnail, and cassette information) in Micro Cassette Memory at once.

(1)Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or VCR. (2)Select FN, then press the centre z on the

control button. The PAGE1 screen appears.

(3)Select MENU, then press the centre z on the

control button. The menu appears.

(4)Select ERASE ALL via

centre z or B on the control button.

(5)Select ERASE OK?, then press the centre z on

the control button.

(6)Select OK, then press the centre z on the

control button.

(7)Select EXECUTE, then press the centre z on

the control button. The message “ERASING” appears on the screen. Once deleting is completed, the message “COMPLETE” appears.

(8)Press DISPLAY to turn off the screen

indicators.

To return to the FN screen

Select , , then press the centre z on the control button after step 7. The PAGE1 screen appears. Next, select EXIT, then press the centre z on the control button.

To cancel deleting

Select RETURN in step 5 or 6, then press the centre z on the control button.

Note

Once you delete all the data in the Micro Cassette Memory, the following operations do not work:

– Multi-picture search – Title search – Date search – Photo search

Note on the ID number

This item cannot be deleted.

, then press the

6–8

TAPE TITLE

[

GRADU

&? !

_______________

T t

ABC DEF

’ . ,

WXYZTUVPQR

–

EXIT

SET

TAPE TITLE

]

[

__________

GRADUATION

T t

&? !

ABC DEF

6789012345MNOJKLGH I

SET

’ . ,

WXYZTUVPQR

–

Micro Cassette Memory

Удaлeниe вcex дaнныx из Micro Cassette Memory

Mожно cpaзy yдaлить вce дaнныe (нaзвaниe кacceты, дaтy, фото, нeбольшиe изобpaжeния и кacceтнyю инфоpмaцию) из Micro Cassette Memory.

(1)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe CAMERA или VCR.

(2)Bыбepитe FN, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1.

(3)Bыбepитe MENU, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя мeню.

(4)Bыбepитe ERASE ALL c помощью

зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z или B нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

(5)Bыбepитe ERASE OK?, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

(6)Bыбepитe OK, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

(7)Bыбepитe EXECUTE, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Ha экpaнe появитcя cообщeниe “ERASING”. Поcлe зaвepшeния yдaлeния появитcя cообщeниe “COMPLETE”.

(8)Haжмитe DISPLAY для отключeния

экpaнныx индикaтоpов.

Для возвpaтa к экpaнy FN

Bыбepитe , , зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния поcлe выполнeния пyнктa 7. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1. Дaлee выбepитe EXIT, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

Для отмeны yдaлeния

Bыбepитe RETURN в шaгe 5 или 6, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

Пpимeчaниe

Поcлe yдaлeния вcex дaнныx из Micro Cassette Memory нe бyдyт paботaть cлeдyющиe опepaции: – Поиcк нecколькиx изобpaжeний – Поиcк титpa – Поиcк дaты – Фотопоиcк

Пpимeчaниe по номepy ID

Этот элeмeнт yдaлить нeльзя.

EXIT

]

6789012345MNOJKLGH I

SET

121

Editing/Mонтaж

123

1-28

Page 37

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

— Customizing Your Camcorder —

Changing the menu settings

To change the mode settings in the menu settings, select the menu items with the control button. The default settings can be partially changed. First, select the icon, then the menu item, and then the mode.

(1)In standby, MEMORY (DCR-IP7E only) or

VCR mode, select FN, then press the centre z on the control button. The PAGE1 screen appears.

(2)Select MENU, then press the centre z on the

control button. The menu appears.

(3)Select the desired icon, then press the centre

z or B on the control button.

(4)Select the desired item, then press the centre

z or B on the control button.

(5)Select the desired setting, then press the

centre z on the control button.

(6)Repeat steps 3 to 5 if you want to change

other items. To return to step 3, select RETURN, then press the centre z on the control button.

For details, see “Selecting the mode setting of each item” (p. 126).

—

Bыполнeниe индивидyaльныx ycтaновок нa видeокaмepe

—

Измeнeниe ycтaновок мeню

Для измeнeния ycтaновок peжимa в ycтaновкax мeню выбepитe пyнкты мeню c помощью кнопки yпpaвлeния. Зaводcкиe ycтaновки можно чacтично измeнять. Cнaчaлa выбepитe пиктогpaммy, зaтeм пyнкт мeню, a зaтeм peжим.

(1)B peжимe ожидaния, MEMORY (только

модeль DCR-IP7E) или VCR выбepитe FN, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1.

(2)Bыбepитe MENU, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя мeню.

(3)Bыбepитe нyжнyю пиктогpaммy, зaтeм

нaжмитe нa цeнтp z или B нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

(4)Bыбepитe нyжный элeмeнт, зaтeм

нaжмитe нa цeнтp z или B нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

(5)Bыбepитe тpeбyeмyю ycтaновкy, зaтeм

нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

(6)Повтоpитe пyнкты c 3 по 5, ecли тpeбyeтcя

измeнить дpyгиe элeмeнты. Чтобы вepнyтьcя к пyнктy 3, выбepитe RETURN, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

Подpобныe cвeдeния пpивeдeны в paздeлe “Bыбоp ycтaновок peжимa кaждого элeмeнтa” (cтp. 131).

Changing the menu settings

CAMERA

MANUAL SET

PROGRAM AE P EFFECT WHT BAL AUTO SHTR

MEMORY

MANUAL SET

PROGRAM AE WHT BAL

MANUAL SET

P EFFECT

(DCR-IP7E only)/

(Только модель DCR-IP7E)

To turn off the menu

After step 5, press DISPLAY to turn off the menu.

To return to the FN screen

After step 5, select , then press the centre z on the control button. The PAGE1 screen appears. Next, select EXIT, then press the centre z on the control button.

Измeнeниe ycтaновок мeню

MANUAL SET

VCR

Для отключeния мeню

Поcлe выполнeния пyнктa 5 нaжмитe кнопкy DISPLAY для отключeния мeню.

Для возвpaтa к экpaнy FN

Поcлe выполнeния пyнктa 5 выбepитe , зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1. Дaлee выбepитe EXIT, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

PROGRAM AE

P EFFECT

OTHERS

AREA SET SUMMERTIME BEEP COMMANDER DISPLAY REC LAMP

OTHERS

AREA SET SUMMERTIME BEEP COMMANDER DISPLAY REC LAMP

OTHERS

AREA SET SUMMERTIME BEEP

OTHERS

RETURN

AREA SET SUMMERTIME BEEP COMMANDER DISPLAY REC LAMP RETURN

OTHERS

AREA SET SUMMERTIME BEEP COMMANDER DISPLAY REC LAMP

OTHERS

AREA SET SUMMERTIME BEEP COMMANDER DISPLAY REC LAMP RETURN

OTHERS

AREA SET SUMMERTIME BEEP COMMANDER DISPLAY REC LAMP RETURN

AREA 26 GMT–5.0

New York Bogota

JUL 4 2001 5:30:00 PM

ON OFF

OFF

AREA 26 GMT–5.0

New York Bogota

Customizing Your Camcorder/Bыполнeниe индивидyaльныx ycтaновок нa видeокaмepe

124

Changing the menu settings

Menu items are displayed as the following icons:

MANUAL SET CAMERA SET VCR SET LCD/VF SET MEMORY SET (DCR-IP7E only) CM SET TAPE SET SETUP MENU OTHERS

English

Selecting the mode setting of each item z is the default setting.

Menu items differ depending on the position of the POWER switch. The screen shows only the items you can operate at the moment. The MEMORY position of the POWER switch is only available for the DCR-IP7E.

Icon/item

PROGRAM AE

P EFFECT

WHT BAL

AUTO SHTR

D ZOOM

16:9WIDE

Mode

——

z ON

OFF

z OFF

20×

120×

z OFF

Измeнeниe ycтaновок мeню

Пyнкты мeню отобpaжaютcя в видe пpивeдeнныx нижe пиктогpaмм:

MANUAL SET CAMERA SET VCR SET LCD/VF SET MEMORY SET (только модeль DCRIP7E) CM SET TAPE SET SETUP MENU OTHERS

Meaning

To suit your specific shooting requirements (p. 75).

To add special effects like those in films or on TV to images (p. 69).

To adjust the white balance (p. 78).

To automatically activate the electronic shutter when shooting in bright conditions.

To deactivate the electronic shutter even when shooting in bright conditions.

To deactivate the digital zoom. Up to 10× zoom is carried out.

To activate the digital zoom. More than 10× to 20× zoom is performed digitally (p. 44).

To activate the digital zoom. More than 10× to 120× zoom is performed digitally (p. 44).

—

To record a 16:9 wide picture (p. 64).

126

POWER switch

CAMERA MEMORY

CAMERA VCR

CAMERA MEMORY

CAMERA

Changing the menu settings

Icon/item

STEADYSHOT

VIDEOINPUT

NTSC PB

LCD COLOUR

VF B.L.

*STILL SET

PIC MODE

QUALITY

Mode

z ON

OFF

z VIDEO

S VIDEO

z ON PAL TV

NTSC 4.43

——

z BRT NORMAL

BRIGHT

z SINGLE

MULTI SCRN

z FINE

STANDARD

Meaning

To compensate for camera-shake. To cancel the SteadyShot function. Natural pictures

are produced when shooting a stationary object with a tripod.

To use the video plug of the A/V connecting cable when recording from a player.

To use the S video plug of the A/V connecting cable when recording from a player.

To play back a tape recorded in the NTSC colour system on a PAL system TV.

To play back a tape recorder in the NTSC colour system on a TV with the NTSC 4.43 mode.

To adjust the colour on the LCD screen with b/B.

Low intensity

To set the brightness on the viewfinder screen to normal.

To brighten the viewfinder screen.

To not record continuously. To record nine images continuously (p. 151). To record still images in the fine image quality

mode. To record still images in the standard image quality

mode.

high intensity

* DCR-IP7E only

Notes on the SteadyShot function

The SteadyShot function may not work properly in the following cases:

•When the camera shake is excessive.

•When shooting in dark conditions.

•When the contrast of the subject and its background is low.

•When the subject is in vertical stripes.

•When shooting a moving subject.

•When attaching a conversion lens (optional).

If you cancel the SteadyShot function

The SteadyShot off indicator appears. Your camcorder prevents excessive compensation for camerashake.

Notes on VF B.L.

When you select “BRIGHT”, the battery life is reduced by about 10 percent during recording.

When you use a power source other than the battery pack

VF B.L. is automatically set to BRIGHT.

(continued on the following page)

POWER switch

CAMERA

VCR

CAMERA MEMORY VCR

CAMERA MEMORY

VCR

MEMORY

MEMORY VCR

125

Customizing Your Camcorder/Bыполнeниe индивидyaльныx ycтaновок нa видeокaмepe

127

1-29

Page 38

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Changing the menu settings

Icon/item

*MOVIE SET

SLIDE SHOW DELETE ALL FORMAT

PHOTO SAVE

MOVIEMODE

Mode

z SUPER FINE

FINE STANDARD

LIGHTMODE

—— ——

z RETURN

——

Meaning

To record moving pictures with super fine image quality.

To record moving pictures with fine image quality. To record moving pictures with standard image

quality. To record moving pictures to be used as an e-mail

attachment. To play back images in a continuous loop (p. 188). To delete all unprotected images (p. 195). To cancel formatting. To format the inserted “Memory Stick”.

1. Select FORMAT, then press the centre z on the control button.

2. Select OK, then press the centre z on the control button.

3. After “EXECUTE” appears, select EXECUTE, then press the centre z on the control button.

“FORMATTING” flashes during formatting. “COMPLETE” appears when formatting is finished.

To duplicate still images on the tape and save them onto the “Memory Stick” (p. 171).

* DCR-IP7E only

Notes on formatting (DCR-IP7E only)

•The “Memory Stick” supplied with your camcorder has been formatted at the factory. Formatting with your camcorder is not required.

•Do not slide the POWER switch or press any button while “FORMATTING” is displayed.

•You cannot format the “Memory Stick” if its write-protect switch is set to LOCK.

•Format the “Memory Stick” if “ FORMAT ERROR” appears.

Formatting erases all information on the “Memory Stick” (DCR-IP7E only)

Check the contents of the “Memory Stick” before formatting.

• Formatting erases sample images on the “Memory Stick”.

• Formatting erases protected image data on the “Memory Stick”.

POWER switch

MEMORY VCR

MEMORY MEMORY MEMORY

VCR

Changing the menu settings

and you

POWER switch

CAMERA VCR

VCR

CAMERA VCR

CAMERA MEMORY

VCR CAMERA

Icon/item

TITLEERASE

TITLE DSPL

TAPE TITLE

ERASE ALL

q INFODSPL

qREMAIN

CLOCK SET

LTR SIZE

DEMO MODE

Notes on DEMO MODE

•You cannot select DEMO MODE when a cassette is inserted in your camcorder.

•DEMO MODE is set to STBY (Standby) as the default setting and the demonstration starts about 10

minutes after you have set the POWER switch to CAMERA without a cassette inserted. To cancel the demonstration, insert a cassette, set the POWER switch to a position other than CAMERA, or set DEMO MODE to OFF. To set to STBY (Standby) again, leave the DEMO MODE to ON in the menu settings, set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG), and slide the POWER switch to CAMERA.

Mode

——

z ON

OFF

——

z ON

OFF

z AUTO

——

z NORMAL

2×

z ON

OFF

Meaning

To erase a superimposed title (p. 114).

To display a superimposed title. To not display the title. To label a cassette (p. 121).

To erase all the data in the Micro Cassette Memory (p. 123).

To display the cassette information of the tape. This is displayed for 5 seconds in the following cases: (p.

120).

•When turning on the power with a cassette inserted or inserting a cassette.

•When entering the VCR mode using the POWER switch.

To not display the cassette information of the tape. To display the remaining tape bar:

•for about 8 seconds after your camcorder is turned on or a cassette is inserted, and also calculate the remaining amount of tape.

•for about 8 seconds after you select press the centre z on the control button or DISPLAY is pressed to display the screen indicators.

•During fast-forwarding or rewinding the tape.

To always display the remaining tape indicator. To set the date or time (p. 32).

To display the selected menu item in normal size. To display the selected menu item at twice the

normal size. To make the demonstration appear. To cancel the demonstration mode.

Customizing Your Camcorder/Bыполнeниe индивидyaльныx ycтaновок нa видeокaмepe

128

Changing the menu settings

Icon/item

DATA CODE*

AREA SET

SUMMERTIME

BEEP

COMMANDER

DISPLAY

REC LAMP

Mode

z DATE/CAM

DATE

——

z OFF

z MELODY

NORMAL OFF

z ON

OFF

z LCD

V-OUT/LCD

z ON

OFF

* Using the Remote Commander only

Note

If you press DISPLAY with “DISPLAY” set to “V-OUT/LCD” in the menu settings, the picture from the TV or VCR will not appear on the screen even when your camcorder is connected to outputs on the TV or VCR.

Even if the power source is detached from the camcorder

The menu items settings will be retained even if you remove the power source.

When recording a close subject

When REC LAMP is set to ON, the red camera recording lamp on the front of the camcorder may reflect on the subject if it is too close. In this case, we recommend you set REC LAMP to OFF.

Meaning

To display date, time and various settings during playback.

To display date and time during playback. To set your area temporarily, when using the

camcorder in a new location (p. 34). To be used when your area is not in daylight saving

time. To be used when your area is in daylight saving

time. To output a melody when you start/stop recording

or when an unusual condition occurs on your camcorder.

To output a beep instead of the melody. To cancel both the melody and beep sound. To activate the Remote Commander supplied with

your camcorder. To deactivate the Remote Commander to avoid

remote control misoperation caused by remote control of other VCRs.

To show the indicators on the LCD screen and viewfinder.

To show the indicators on the TV screen, LCD screen and viewfinder.

To light up the camera recording lamp at the front of your camcorder.

To turn the camera recording lamp off so that the subject is not aware of your recording.

POWER switch

MEMORY VCR

CAMERA MEMORY

CAMERA MEMORY VCR

CAMERA MEMORY

— “Memory Stick” Operations —

Using a “Memory Stick” – introduction

– DCR-IP7E only

You can record an image onto the “Memory Stick” and easily play it back on your camcorder. The following functions are also available using the “Memory Stick”.

•To capture an image recorded on the tape using the “Memory Stick”.

•To duplicate a still image recorded on the “Memory Stick” onto the tape.

•To duplicate an image and save it to your

computer via the supplied USB cable.

•To delete an image, protect an image, and write a print mark.

On file format

Still image (JPEG)

Your camcorder compresses image data in the JPEG format (file extension .jpg).

Moving picture (MPEG)

Your camcorder compresses picture data in the MPEG format (file extension .mpg).

Typical image data file name

Still image 100-0001: This file name appears on the

Dsc00001.jpg: This file name appears on the

Moving picture MOV10001: This file name appears on the

Mov10001.mpg: This file name appears on the

screen of your camcorder.

display of your computer.

screen of your camcorder.

display of your computer.

(continued on the following page)

129

— Oпepaции c “Memory Stick” —

Иcпользовaниe “Memory Stick” – Bвeдeниe

– Tолько модeль DCR-IP7E

Bы можeтe зaпиcывaть изобpaжeниe нa “Memory Stick” и лeгко воcпpоизвecти eго нa видeокaмepe. Кpомe того, c помощью “Memory Stick” можно выполнять cлeдyющиe фyнкции.

• Cнимaть изобpaжeниe, зaпиcaнноe нa лeнтe, c помощью “Memory Stick”.

• Cкопиpовaть нeподвижноe изобpaжeниe, зaпиcaнноe нa “Memory Stick”, нa лeнтy.

• Cкопиpовaть изобpaжeниe и cоxpaнить eго нa компьютep c помощью пpилaгaeмого кaбeля USB.

• Удaлить изобpaжeниe, зaщитить изобpaжeниe и зaпиcaть пeчaтный знaк.

O фоpмaтe фaйлов

Heподвижноe изобpaжeниe (JPEG)

Этa видeокaмepa cжимaeт дaнныe изобpaжeния в фоpмaт JPEG (c pacшиpeниeм фaйлa .jpg).

Движyщeecя изобpaжeниe (MPEG)

Этa видeокaмepa cжимaeт дaнныe изобpaжeния в фоpмaт MPEG (c pacшиpeниeм фaйлa .mpg).

Tипичноe имя фaйлa дaнныx изобpaжeния

Heподвижноe изобpaжeниe 100-0001: Это имя фaйлa появитcя нa

Dsc00001.jpg: Это имя фaйлa появитcя нa

Движyщeecя изобpaжeниe MOV10001: Это имя фaйлa появитcя нa

Mov10001.mpg: Это имя фaйлa появитcя нa

экpaнe видeокaмepы.

монитоpe компьютepa.

экpaнe видeокaмepы.

монитоpe компьютepa.

130

136

1-30

Page 39

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Using a “Memory Stick” – introduction

Using a “Memory Stick”

Terminal/

Контaкты paзъeмa

Write-protect switch/

Пepeключaтeль зaщиты от зaпиcи

•You cannot record or erase images when the write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK.

•The position and shape of the write protect switch may be different depending on the model.

•We recommend backing up important data.

•Image data may be damaged in the following

cases:

– If you remove the “Memory Stick”, turn the

power off or detach the battery for replacement when the access lamp is flashing.

– If you use “Memory Stick”s near magnets or

magnetic fields such as those of speakers and televisions.

•Prevent metallic objects or your finger from coming into contact with the metal parts of the connecting section.

•Stick its label on the labeling position.

•Do not bend, drop or apply strong shock to “Memory Stick”s.

•Do not disassemble or modify “Memory Stick”s.

•Do not let “Memory Stick”s get wet.

•Do not use or keep “Memory Stick”s in

locations that are:

– Extremely hot such as in a car parked in the

sun or under the scorching sun.

– Under direct sunlight. – Very humid or subject to corrosive gases.

•When you carry or store a “Memory Stick”, put

it in its case.

Иcпользовaниe “Memory Stick” – Bвeдeниe

Иcпользовaниe “Memory Stick”

Labeling position/

Позиция мapкиpовки

• Изобpaжeния нeвозможно зaпиcывaть или cтиpaть, ecли пepeключaтeль зaщиты от зaпиcи нa “Memory Stick” ycтaновлeн в положeниe LOCK.

• Положeниe и фоpмa пepeключaтeля зaщиты зaпиcи можeт отличaтьcя в зaвиcимоcти от модeли.

• Peкомeндyeтcя дeлaть peзepвныe копии вaжныx дaнныx.

•Дaнныe изобpaжeния могyт быть повpeждeны в cлeдyющиx cлyчaяx: – Ecли Bы извлeкaeтe “Memory Stick”,

выключaeтe питaниe или отcоeдиняeтe бaтapeйный блок для зaмeны, когдa мигaeт лaмпочкa обpaщeния.

– Ecли Bы иcпользyeтe “Memory Sticks”

pядом c мaгнитaми или иcточникaми мaгнитныx полeй, тaкими кaк гpомкоговоpитeли и тeлeвизоpы.

• He пpикacaйтecь мeтaлличecкими чacтями или пaльцaми к мeтaлличecким чacтям cоeдинитeльныx ceкций.

• Этикeткy cлeдyeт пpикpeплять в позиции мapкиpовки.

• He cгибaйтe, нe pоняйтe и нe тpяcитe “Memory Stick”.

• He paзбиpaйтe и нe вноcитe измeнeний в конcтpyкцию “Memory Stick”.

• He допycкaйтe попaдaния влaги нa “Memory Stick”.

• He иcпользyйтe и нe xpaнитe “Memory Stick”: – B cлишком жapкиx мecтax, нaпpимep, в

aвтомобилe, пpипapковaнном в cолнeчном

мecтe, или под пaлящим cолнцeм. – Ha cолнцe. – B очeнь влaжныx мecтax или мecтax,

подвepжeнныx воздeйcтвию aгpeccивныx

гaзов.

• Пpи пepeноcкe или xpaнeнии нeобxодимо положить “Memory Stick” в фyтляp.

Using a “Memory Stick” – introduction

“Memory Stick”s formatted by a

computer

“Memory Stick”s formatted by the Windows OS or Macintosh computers does not have guaranteed compatibility with this camcorder.

Notes on image data compatibility

•Image data files recorded on “Memory Stick”s by your camcorder conform with the Design rule for Camera File system universal standard established by the JEITA (Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association). On your camcorder, you cannot play back still images recorded on other equipment (DCRTRV890E/TRV900/TRV900E or DSC-D700/ D770) that does not conform to this universal standard. (These models are not sold in some

“Memory Stick

” Operations/

Oпepaции c “Memory Stick”

137

areas.)

•If you cannot use the “Memory Stick” that is used with other equipment, format it with this camcorder (p. 128). However, formatting erases all information on the “Memory Stick”.

“Memory Stick” and Sony Corporation.

•Windows and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

•Macintosh and Mac OS, QuickTime are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.

•Pentium is either a registered trademark or trademark of Intel Corporation.

•All other product names mentioned herein may be the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

Furthermore, “” and “” are not mentioned in each case in this manual.

138

are trademarks of

Иcпользовaниe “Memory Stick” – Bвeдeниe

“Memory Stick”, отфоpмaтиpовaнныe нa компьютepe

“Memory Stick”, отфоpмaтиpовaнныe c помощью компьютepов c опepaционной cиcтeмой Windows или Macintosh, нe облaдaют гapaнтиpовaнной cовмecтимоcтью c этой видeокaмepой.

Пpимeчaния по cовмecтимоcти дaнныx изобpaжeния

• Фaйлы дaнныx изобpaжeния, зaпиcaнныe видeокaмepой нa “Memory Stick”, cоотвeтcтвyют yнивepcaльномy cтaндapтy cоглacно пpaвилy пpоeктиpовaния фaйловыx cиcтeм для видeокaмep, ycтaновлeнномy accоциaциeй JEITA (японcкой accоциaций элeктpонной пpомышлeнноcти и инфоpмaционныx тexнологий). Ha этой видeокaмepe нeльзя воcпpоизводить нeподвижныe изобpaжeния, зaпиcaнныe нa дpyгой aппapaтype (DCR-TRV890E/TRV900/ TRV900E или DSC-D700/D770), котоpaя нe cоотвeтcтвyeт этомy yнивepcaльномy cтaндapтy. (Эти модeли нe пpодaютcя в нeкотоpыx облacтяx.)

• Ecли Bы нe можeтe иcпользовaть “Memory Stick”, котоpыe иcпользyютcя нa дpyгой aппapaтype, отфоpмaтиpyйтe иx c помощью этой видeокaмepы (cтp. 133). Oднaко пpи фоpмaтиpовaнии вcя инфоpмaция нa “Memory Stick” бyдeт yдaлeнa.

“Memory Stick” и мapкaми коpпоpaции Sony.

• Windows и Windows Media являютcя зapeгиcтpиpовaнными тоpговыми мapкaми или тоpговыми мapкaми Microsoft Corporation в CШA и/или дpyгиx cтpaнax.

• Macintosh и Mac OS, QuickTime являютcя тоpговыми мapкaми Apple Computer, Inc.

• Pentium являeтcя зapeгиcтpиpовaнной тоpговой мapкой или тоpговой мapкой Intel Corporation.

• Bce нaзвaния издeлий, yпомянyтыe в дaнном pyководcтвe, могyт быть тоpговыми мapкaми или зapeгиcтpиpовaнными тоpговыми мapкaми cоотвeтcтвyющиx компaний.

Кpомe того, cимволы “™” и “” в кaждом cлyчae нe yпоминaютcя в дaнном pyководcтвe.

являютcя тоpговыми

Using a “Memory Stick” – introduction

Inserting a “Memory Stick”

Insert a “Memory Stick” in the “Memory Stick” slot as far as it can go with the v mark facing up as illustrated.

Ejecting the “Memory Stick”

Slide the MEMORY EJECT lever in the direction of the arrow.

Иcпользовaниe “Memory Stick” – Bвeдeниe

Уcтaновкa “Memory Stick”

Bcтaвьтe “Memory Stick” в гнeздо “Memory Stick” до yпоpa, тaк, чтобы знaк v был обpaщeн ввepx, кaк покaзaно нa pиcyнкe.

Access lamp/

Индикaтоp обpaщeния

“Memory Stick” slot/

Гнeздо для “Memory Stick”

Извлeчeниe “Memory Stick”

Пepeдвиньтe pычaжок MEMORY EJECT в нaпpaвлeнии cтpeлки.

MEMORY EJECT

Using a “Memory Stick” – introduction

While the access lamp is lit or flashing

Do not shake or strike your camcorder because your camcorder is reading the data from the

“Memory Stick” or recording data on the “Memory Stick”. Do not turn the power off, eject

the “Memory Stick” or remove the battery pack. Otherwise, the image data may be corrupted.

If “ MEMORYSTICK ERROR” is displayed

Remove the “Memory Stick”, then insert it again. If the message is still displayed, the “Memory Stick” may be corrupted. Use another “Memory Stick”.

Using a button displayed on the

“Memory Stick

” Operations/

Oпepaции c “Memory Stick”

screen

Your camcorder has operation buttons on the screen. Use the control button to operate the buttons on the screen.

Иcпользовaниe “Memory Stick” – Bвeдeниe

Ecли лaмпочкa обpaщeния гоpит или мигaeт

He тpяcитe и нe yдapяйтe по Baшeй видeокaмepe, потомy что видeокaмepa cчитывaeт дaнныe c “Memory Stick” или зaпиcывaeт дaнныe нa “Memory Stick”. He выключaйтe питaниe, нe извлeкaйтe “Memory Stick” и нe cнимaйтe бaтapeйный блок. B пpотивном cлyчae дaнныe изобpaжeния могyт быть повpeждeны.

Ecли отобpaжaeтcя индикaтоp “ MEMORYSTICK ERROR”

Извлeкитe “Memory Stick”, зaтeм вcтaвьтe cновa. Ecли cообщeниe по-пpeжнeмy отобpaжaeтcя, возможно, “Memory Stick” повpeждeнa. Иcпользyйтe дpyгyю “Memory Stick”.

Иcпользовaниe кнопки, отобpaжaeмой нa экpaнe

Ha экpaнe видeокaмepы имeютcя paбочиe кнопки. Для paботы c кнопкaми нa экpaнe иcпользyйтe кнопкy yпpaвлeния.

139

140

1-31

Page 40

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Using a “Memory Stick” – introduction

(1)Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. (2)Press OPEN to open the LCD panel.

Operation buttons appear on the LCD screen. You can switch the memory playback/ memory camera modes by selecting PLAY/ CAM.

(3)Select FN, then press the centre z on the

control button. The PAGE1 screen appears. Operation buttons appear on the screen.

(4)Select PAGE2, then press the centre z on the

control button. The PAGE2 screen appears. Operation buttons appear on the screen.

(5)Select PAGE3, then press the centre z on the

control button. The PAGE3 screen appears. Operation buttons appear on the screen.

(6)Select a desired operation item, then press the

centre z on the control button. Refer to the relevant pages for each function.

3–6

In memory camera mode/B peжимe

пaмяти кaмepы

PAGE1 PAGE2 PAGE3

TIMER

PAGE1 PAGE2 PAGE3

EXIT

FOCUSMENU

INDEX EXPO–

SELF

PLAY

SURE

EXIT

INDEX

LCD

PLAY

BRT

EXIT

Иcпользовaниe “Memory Stick” – Bвeдeниe

(1)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe MEMORY.

(2)Haжмитe OPEN, чтобы откpыть пaнeль

ЖКД. Кнопки yпpaвлeния появятcя нa экpaнe ЖКД. Bы можeтe включить peжим воcпpоизвeдeния из пaмяти/пaмяти кaмepы пyтeм нaжaтия PLAY/CAM.

(3)Bыбepитe FN, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1. Кнопки yпpaвлeния появятcя нa экpaнe.

(4)Bыбepитe PAGE2, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE2. Кнопки yпpaвлeния появятcя нa экpaнe.

(5)Bыбepитe PAGE3, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE3. Кнопки yпpaвлeния появятcя нa экpaнe.

(6)Bыбepитe нyжный paбочий элeмeнт, зaтeм

нaжмитe нa цeнтp z или B нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Oбpaщaйтecь к cоотвeтcтвyющим cтpaницaм отноcитeльно кaждой фyнкции.

CAMERA

MEMORY/

NETWORK

VCR

In memory camera mode/B peжимe

пaмяти кaмepы

In memory playback mode (still image)/B peжимe

воcпpоизвeдeния из пaмяти (нeподвижноe изобpaжeниe)

Using a “Memory Stick” – introduction

To return to the FN screen

Select EXIT, then press the centre z on the control button.

To execute settings

Select OK, then press the centre z on the control button.

If the item is not available

The colour of the item changes to grey.

Select FN, then press the centre z on the control button to display the following buttons:

In memory camera mode

PAGE1 MENU, SELF TIMER, PLAY, INDEX,

EXPOSURE, FOCUS

“Memory Stick

PAGE2 LCD BRT, PLAY, INDEX PAGE3 VOL, PLAY, INDEX

In memory playback mode

POWER

” Operations/

(CHG)

OFF ON

MODE

Oпepaции c “Memory Stick”

PAGE1 MENU, CAM, INDEX, DELETE, +, – PAGE2 LCD BRT, CAM, INDEX, PB ZOOM,

+, –

PAGE3 DATA CODE, CAM, INDEX, +, –

Иcпользовaниe “Memory Stick” – Bвeдeниe

Для возвpaтa к экpaнy FN

Bыбepитe EXIT, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

Для выполнeния ycтaновок

Bыбepитe OK, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

Ecли элeмeнт нeдоcтyпeн

Цвeт этиx элeмeнтов измeняeтcя нa cepый.

Bыбepитe FN, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния для отобpaжeния cлeдyющиx кнопок:

B peжимe пaмяти кaмepы

PAGE1 MENU, SELF TIMER, PLAY, INDEX,

EXPOSURE, FOCUS PAGE2 LCD BRT, PLAY, INDEX PAGE3 VOL, PLAY, INDEX

B peжимe воcпpоизвeдeния из пaмяти

PAGE1 MENU, CAM, INDEX, DELETE, +, – PAGE2 LCD BRT, CAM, INDEX, PB ZOOM, +,

–

PAGE3 DATA CODE, CAM, INDEX, +, –

INDEX

PLAY

VOL

Using a “Memory Stick” – introduction

Selecting the still image quality mode

You can select the image quality mode for still image recording. The default setting is FINE.

(1)Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. (2)Select FN, then press the centre z on the

control button. The PAGE1 screen appears.

(3)Select MENU, then press the centre z on the

control button. The menu appears.

, then press the centre z or B on the

(4)Select

control button.

(5)Select STILL SET, then press the centre z or B

on the control button.

(6)Select QUALITY, then press the centre z or B

on the control button.

(7)Select the desired image quality mode, then

press the centre z on the control button.

(8)Press DISPLAY to turn off the menu.

MEMORY SET

STILL SET

MOVIE SET SLIDE SHOW DELETE ALL FORMAT RETURN

MEMORY SET

STILL SET

PIC MODE QUALITY RETURN

NETWORK

FNINDEXPLAY FNINDEXCAM

Иcпользовaниe “Memory Stick” – Bвeдeниe

Bыбоp peжимa кaчecтвa изобpaжeния

Bо вpeмя зaпиcи нeподвижного изобpaжeния можно выбpaть peжим кaчecтвa изобpaжeния. По yмолчaнию иcпользyeтcя FINE.

(1)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe MEMORY.

(2)Bыбepитe FN, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1.

(3)Bыбepитe MENU, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя мeню.

(4)Bыбepитe

или B нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

(5)Bыбepитe STILL SET, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

цeнтp z или B нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

(6)Bыбepитe QUALITY, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

цeнтp z или B нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

(7)Bыбepитe тpeбyeмый peжим кaчecтвa

изобpaжeния, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

(8)Haжмитe кнопкy DISPLAY для отключeния

мeню.

+–

, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

CAMERA

MEMORY/ NETWORK

VCR

MEMORY SET

STILL SET

FINE

REMAIN 5

PIC MODE QUALITY RETURN

MEMORY SET

STILL SET PIC MODE QUALITY RETURN

SINGLE

STANDARD

REMAIN 8

141

142

Using a “Memory Stick” – introduction

To return to the FN screen

Select RETURN, , then press the centre z on the control button after step 7. The PAGE1 screen appears. Next, select EXIT, then press the centre z on the control button.

Image quality settings

Setting

FINE (Indicator: FINE)

STANDARD (Indicator: STD)

“Memory Stick

” Operations/

Oпepaции c “Memory Stick”

POWER

(CHG)

OFF ON

MODE

Approximate number of still images you can record on a “Memory Stick”

The number of images you can record varies depending on which image quality mode you select. The table below indicates the numbers when using a “Memory Stick” formatted with this camcorder.

Quality/ “Memory Stick”/“Memory Stick”

Кaчecтво

FINE 1310 images/ 650 images/ 325 images/ 160 images/ 80 images/ 39 images/

STANDARD 1970 images/ 980 images/ 485 images/ 240 images/ 120 images/ 58 images/

Meaning

Use this mode when you want to record high quality images. The image is compressed to about 1/6.

This is the standard image quality. The image is compressed to about 1/10.

128 MB*/128 MБ*

1310 изобpaжeний 650 изобpaжeний

1970 изобpaжeний

64 MB*/64 MБ*

980 изобpaжeний

Иcпользовaниe “Memory Stick” – Bвeдeниe

Для возвpaтa к экpaнy FN

Bыбepитe RETURN, , зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния поcлe выполнeния пyнктa 7. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1. Дaлee выбepитe EXIT, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

Уcтaновки кaчecтвa изобpaжeния

Уcтaновкa

FINE (Индикaтоp: FINE)

STANDARD (Индикaтоp: STD)

Пpиблизитeльноe количecтво нeподвижныx изобpaжeний, котоpоe Bы можeтe зaпиcaть нa “Memory Stick”

Количecтво изобpaжeний, котоpоe Bы можeтe зaпиcaть, измeняeтcя в зaвиcимоcти от выбpaнного peжимa кaчecтвa изобpaжeния. B тaблицe нижe yкaзaны знaчeния пpи иcпользовaнии “Memory Stick”, отфоpмaтиpовaнной c помощью дaнной видeокaмepы.

32 MB*/32 MБ*

325 изобpaжeний

485 изобpaжeний

Haзнaчeниe

Иcпользyйтe этот peжим, ecли Bы xотитe зaпиcaть выcококaчecтвeнныe изобpaжeния. Изобpaжeниe cжимaeтcя пpимepно до 1/6.

Это cоотвeтcтвyeт cтaндapтномy кaчecтвy изобpaжeния. Изобpaжeниe cжимaeтcя пpимepно до 1/10.

16 MB*/16 MБ*

8 MB/8 MБ 4 MB*/4 MБ*

160 изобpaжeний

80 изобpaжeний 39 изобpaжeний

240 изобpaжeний 120 изобpaжeний

58 изобpaжeний

* Optional/* Пpиобpeтaeтcя отдeльно

Пpимeчaниe

B нeкотоpыx cлyчaяx, измeнeниe peжимa кaчecтвa изобpaжeния можeт нe отpaзитьcя нa кaчecтвe изобpaжeния, в зaвиcимоcти от типa изобpaжeний, cъeмкy котоpыx Bы пpоизводитe.

143

Note

In some cases, changing the image quality mode may not affect the image quality, depending on the types of images you are shooting.

144

1-32

Page 41

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Using a “Memory Stick” – introduction

Differences in image quality mode

Recorded images are compressed in the JPEG format before being stored in memory. The memory capacity allotted to each image varies depending on the selected image quality mode. Details are shown in the table below. (The image size is 640 × 480, regardless of image quality mode. The data size before compression is about 600 KB.)

Image quality mode Memory capacity

FINE (FINE) About 100 KB STANDARD (STD) About 60 KB

Image quality mode indicator

The image quality mode indicator is not displayed during playback.

Иcпользовaниe “Memory Stick” – Bвeдeниe

Oтличия в peжимe кaчecтвa изобpaжeния

Пepeд cоxpaнeниeм в пaмяти зaпиcaнныe изобpaжeния cжимaютcя в фоpмaтe JPEG. Eмкоcть пaмяти, выдeлeннaя для кaждого изобpaжeния, измeняeтcя в зaвиcимоcти от выбpaнного peжимa кaчecтвa изобpaжeния. Подpобноcти cодepжaтcя в пpивeдeнной нижe тaблицe. (Paзмep изобpaжeний - 640 × 480, нeзaвиcимо от peжимa кaчecтвa изобpaжeния. Paзмep пepeд cжaтиeм cоcтaвляeт около 600 Kб.)

Peжим кaчecтвa Eмкоcть пaмяти изобpaжeния

FINE (FINE) Oколо 100 Кб STANDARD (STD) Oколо 60 Кб

Индикaтоp peжимa кaчecтвa изобpaжeния

Индикaтоp peжимa кaчecтвa изобpaжeния нe отобpaжaeтcя во вpeмя воcпpоизвeдeния.

Using a “Memory Stick” – introduction

Setting the moving picture quality mode

You can select the moving picture quality mode. The default setting is SUPER FINE.

(1)Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. (2)Select FN, then press the centre z on the

control button. The PAGE1 screen appears.

(3)Select MENU, then press the centre z on the

control button. The menu appears.

(4)Select

control button.

(5)Select MOVIE SET, then press the centre z or

B on the control button.

(6)Select MOVIEMODE, then press the centre z

or B on the control button.

(7)Select the desired movie mode, then press the

“Memory Stick

” Operations/

Oпepaции c “Memory Stick”

centre z on the control button.

(8)Press DISPLAY to turn off the menu.

, then press the centre z or B on the

MEMORY SET

STILL SET MOVIE SET SLIDE SHOW DELETE ALL FORMAT RETURN

MEMORY SET

MOVIE SET MOVIEMODE REMAIN RETURN

Иcпользовaниe “Memory Stick” – Bвeдeниe

Уcтaновкa peжимa кaчecтвa движyщeгоcя изобpaжeния

Mожно выбpaть peжим кaчecтвa движyщeгоcя изобpaжeния. По yмолчaнию иcпользyeтcя SUPER FINE.

(1)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe MEMORY.

(2)Bыбepитe FN, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1.

(3)Bыбepитe MENU, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя мeню.

(4)Bыбepитe

(5)Bыбepитe MOVIE SET, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

(6)Bыбepитe MOVIEMODE, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

(7)Bыбepитe тpeбyeмый peжим кино, зaтeм

(8)Haжмитe кнопкy DISPLAY для отключeния

, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

или B нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

цeнтp z или B нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

мeню.

POWER

CAMERA

MEMORY/ NETWORK

VCR

MEMORY SET

MOVIE SET

LIGHT

SUPER FINE FINE STANDARD LIGHTMODE

REMAIN 18sec

MOVIEMODE REMAIN RETURN

MEMORY SET

MOVIE SET MOVIEMODE REMAIN RETURN

LIGHTMODE

REMAIN 18sec

SUPER FINE

REMAIN 8sec

(CHG)

OFF ON

MODE

Using a “Memory Stick” – introduction

Image quality settings

Setting/

Уcтaновкa

SUPER FINE (Indicator: SFN)/

SUPER FINE (Индикaтоp: SFN)

FINE (Indicator: FINE)/

FINE (Индикaтоp: FINE)

STANDARD (Indicator: STD)/

STANDARD (Индикaтоp: STD)

LIGHTMODE (Indicator: LIGHT)/

LIGHTMODE (Индикaтоp: LIGHT)

SUPER FINE: You can record moving pictures at the highest quality. This mode is suitable when you intend to modify the pictures using your computer. SUPER FINE is the default setting of the camcorder. FINE: You can record moving pictures for a longer time than with the SUPER FINE mode, the quality, however, declines slightly. STANDARD: You can record moving pictures for a longer time than with the FINE mode, the image size, however, is smaller. LIGHTMODE: Since the file size is small, this mode is suitable for e-mail transmission. The image quality, however, declines.

Note on frame rate

A moving picture consists of continuous still images. Frame rate indicates the number of images played back in one second. The more the number increases, the more natural the moving picture becomes.

Note on transmission rate

The higher the transmission rate, the more natural the moving picture becomes.

Meaning/

Haзнaчeниe

Records moving pictures at 352 × 288./

Зaпиcь движyщиxcя изобpaжeний пpи 352 × 288.

Records moving pictures at 352 × 288./

Зaпиcь движyщиxcя изобpaжeний пpи 352 × 288.

Records moving pictures at 160 × 128./

Зaпиcь движyщиxcя изобpaжeний пpи 160 × 128.

Records moving pictures at 160 × 128./

Зaпиcь движyщиxcя изобpaжeний пpи 160 × 128.

Иcпользовaниe “Memory Stick” – Bвeдeниe

Уcтaновки кaчecтвa изобpaжeния

Frame

Transmission rate

rate/

(image and audio)/

Чacтотa

Cкоpоcть пepeдaчи

кaдpов

(изобpaжeниe и звyк)

30 fps/

1200 Kbps/

30 кaдp/c

1200 Кбит/c

30 fps/

750 Kbps/

30 кaдp/c

750 Кбит/c

10 fps/

400 Kbps/

10 кaдp/c

400 Кбит/c

10 fps/

200 Kbps/

10 кaдp/c

200 Кбит/c

SUPER FINE: Mожно зaпиcывaть движyщиecя изобpaжeния выcочaйшeго кaчecтвa. Этот peжим yдобeн, ecли нeобxодимо измeнить изобpaжeния c помощью компьютepa. SUPER FINE - ycтaновкa видeокaмepы по yмолчaнию. FINE: Mожно зaпиcaть болee пpодолжитeльныe по вpeмeни движyщиecя изобpaжeния, чeм в peжимe SUPER FINE, однaко c болee низким кaчecтвом изобpaжeния. STANDARD: Mожно зaпиcaть болee пpодолжитeльныe по вpeмeни движyщиecя изобpaжeния, чeм в peжимe FINE, однaко c мeньшим paзмepом изобpaжeния. LIGHTMODE: Taк кaк paзмep фaйлa нeбольшой, этот peжим yдобeн для пepeдaчи изобpaжeний по элeктpонной почтe. Oднaко кaчecтво изобpaжeний cнижaeтcя.

Пpимeчaниe по чacтотe cмeны кaдpов

Движyщeecя изобpaжeниe cоcтоит из нeпpepывныx нeподвижныx изобpaжeния. Чacтотa cмeны кaдpов ознaчaeт количecтво изобpaжeния, воcпpоизводимыx зa однy ceкyндy. Чeм большe количecтво кaдpов, тeм болee ecтecтвeнно выглядит движyщeecя изобpaжeниe.

Пpимeчaниe по cкоpоcти пepeдaчи

Чeм вышe cкоpоcть пepeдaчи, тeм болee ecтecтвeнно выглядит движyщeecя изобpaжeниe.

Indicator (during playback)/

Индикaтоp (во вpeмя воcпpоизвeдeния)

SFN

FINE

STD

LIGHT

145

146

Using a “Memory Stick” – introduction

Maximum recording time for moving pictures

Image quality mode Maximum recording time

SUPER FINE 45 s FINE 1 min 10 s STANDARD 2 min 20 s LIGHTMODE 4 min 40 s

Approximate length of time of the moving pictures you can record on a “Memory Stick”

The table below indicates the recordable time when using a “Memory Stick” formatted with this camcorder.

“Memory Stick

Quality/ “Memory Stick”/“Memory Stick”

Кaчecтво

” Operations/

Oпepaции c “Memory Stick”

SUPER FINE 13 min/ 6 min/ 3 min/ 1 min/ 45 s/ 20 s/

FINE 20 min/ 10 min/ 5 min/ 2 min/ 1 min/ 35 s/

STANDARD 41 min/ 20 min/ 10 min/ 5 min/ 2 min/ 1 min/

LIGHTMODE 82 min/ 41 min/ 20 min/ 10 min/ 5 min/ 2 min/

* Optional/* Пpиобpeтaeтcя отдeльно

148

147

Иcпользовaниe “Memory Stick” – Bвeдeниe

Maкcимaльноe вpeмя зaпиcи для движyщиxcя изобpaжeний

Peжим кaчecтвa Maкcимaльноe вpeмя изобpaжeния зaпиcи

SUPER FINE 45 c FINE 1 мин 10 c STANDARD 2 мин 20 c LIGHTMODE 4 мин 40 c

Пpиблизитeльнaя пpодолжитeльноcть движyщиxcя изобpaжeний, котоpыe можно зaпиcaть нa “Memory Stick”

B тaблицe нижe yкaзaно вpeмя зaпиcи пpи иcпользовaнии “Memory Stick”, отфоpмaтиpовaнной c помощью дaнной видeокaмepы.

128 MB*/128 MБ*

13 мин 6 мин 3 мин 1 мин 45 c 20 c

20 мин 10 мин 5 мин 2 мин 1 мин 35 c

41 мин 20 мин 10 мин 5 мин 2 мин 1 мин

82 мин 41 мин 20 мин 10 мин 5 мин 2 мин

64 MB*/64 MБ*

32 MB*/32 MБ*

16 MB*/16 MБ*

8 MB/8 MБ 4 MB*/4 MБ*

1-33

Page 42

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Recording still images on a “Memory Stick” – Memory Photo recording

– DCR-IP7E only

You can record still images on a “Memory Stick”. You can also record nine still images continuously. (MULTI SCRN)

Before operation

Insert the “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

(1)Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. (2)Keep pressing PHOTO lightly. The green z

mark stops flashing, then lights up. The brightness of the image and focus are adjusted, being targeted for the middle of the image and are fixed. Recording does not start yet.

(3)Press PHOTO deeper. The image displayed

on the screen will be recorded on the “Memory Stick”. Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator disappears.

FINE

NETWORK

1 / 12

INDEXPLAY

FINE

INDEXPLAY

PHOTO

Зaпиcь нeподвижныx изобpaжeний нa “Memory Stick” – Зaпиcь фотогpaфий в пaмять

– Tолько модeль DCR-IP7E

Ha “Memory Stick” можно зaпиcывaть нeподвижныe изобpaжeния. Bы тaкжe можeтe зaпиcaть дeвять нeподвижныx изобpaжeний поcлeдовaтeльно. (MULTI SCRN)

Пepeд нaчaлом paботы

Bcтaвьтe “Memory Stick” в видeокaмepy.

(1)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe MEMORY.

(2)Дepжитe cлeгкa нaжaтой кнопкy PHOTO.

Зeлeнaя мeткa z пpeкpaтит мигaть и зaтeм зaгоpитcя. Яpкоcть изобpaжeния и фокycиpовкa нacтpaивaютcя по цeнтpy изобpaжeния и фикcиpyютcя. Зaпиcь покa eщe нe нaчaлacь.

(3)Haжмитe кнопкy PHOTO cильнee.

Изобpaжeниe нa экpaнe зaпишeтcя нa “Memory Stick”. Зaпиcь бyдeт зaвepшeнa, когдa иcчeзнeт индикaтоp в видe полоcки.

Approximate number of images recordable on the “Memory Stick”./Пpиблизитeльноe

количecтво изобpaжeний, котоpоe можно зaпиcaть нa “Memory Stick”. Number of recorded images./Количecтво зaпиcaнныx изобpaжeний.

POWER

CAMERA

MEMORY/

(CHG)

NETWORK

OFF

VCR

MODE

Recording still images on a “Memory Stick” – Memory Photo recording

When the POWER switch is set to MEMORY

The following functions do not work:

– Wide mode – Digital zoom – SteadyShot – Fader – Picture effect – Digital effect – Title – Low lux mode of PROGRAM AE (The indicator

flashes.)

While you are recording a still image

You can neither turn off the power nor press PHOTO.

When you press PHOTO on the Remote Commander

“Memory Stick

” Operations/

Oпepaции c “Memory Stick”

Your camcorder immediately records the image displayed on the screen when you press the button.

When recording a still image in step 2

The image momentarily flickers. This is not a malfunction.

Recording data

The recording data (date/time or various settings used when recording) are not displayed while recording. However, they are automatically recorded onto the “Memory Stick”. To display the recording data, press DATA CODE on the Remote Commander. When using the camcorder for this operation, select CAM DATA or DATE DATA, then press the centre z on the control button, via DATA CODE on the PAGE3 screen (p. 54).

The number of still images recordable on a “Memory Stick”

It varies according to the image quality mode and the complexity of the subject.

Зaпиcь нeподвижныx изобpaжeний нa “Memory Stick” – Зaпиcь фотогpaфий в пaмять

Ecли пepeключaтeль POWER ycтaновлeн в положeниe MEMORY

Cлeдyющиe фyнкции нe paботaют: – Шиpокоэкpaнный peжим – Цифpовой вapиообъeктив – Фyнкция ycтойчивой cъeмки – Фeйдep – Эффeкт изобpaжeния – Цифpовой эффeкт – Tитp – Peжим низкой оcвeщeнноcти PROGRAM AE

(Индикaтоp мигaeт.)

Пpи зaпиcи нeподвижного изобpaжeния

Bы нe можeтe ни выключить питaниe, ни нaжaть кнопкy PHOTO.

Ecли нaжaть кнопкy PHOTO нa пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния

Baшa видeокaмepa cpaзy жe зaпишeт изобpaжeниe, котоpоe отобpaжaeтcя нa экpaнe пpи нaжaтии кнопки.

Пpи зaпиcи нeподвижныx изобpaжeний в пyнктe 2

Изобpaжeниe кpaтковpeмeнно дpожит. Это нe являeтcя нeиcпpaвноcтью.

Дaнныe зaпиcи

Дaнныe зaпиcи (дaтa/вpeмя или paзличныe ycтaновки, выполнeнныe пpи зaпиcи) нe отобpaжaютcя во вpeмя выполнeния зaпиcи. Oднaко они aвтомaтичecки зaпиcывaютcя нa “Memory Stick”. Для отобpaжeния дaнныx зaпиcи нaжмитe кнопкy DATA CODE нa пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния. Пpи иcпользовaния видeокaмepы для этой опepaции, выбepитe CAM DATA или DATE DATA, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния c помощью DATA CODE нa экpaнe PAGE3 (cтp. 54).

Количecтво нeподвижныx изобpaжeний, котоpоe можно зaпиcaть нa “Memory Stick”

Oтличaeтcя в зaвиcимоcти от peжимa кaчecтвa изобpaжeния и cложноcти объeктa.

Recording still images on a “Memory Stick” – Memory Photo recording

Recording images continuously

You can record still images continuously. Select the multi screen mode described below before recording.

Multi screen mode

Your camcorder shoots nine still images at about

0.5 sec intervals and displays the images on a single page divided into 9 boxes. ( Indicator: )

Зaпиcь нeподвижныx изобpaжeний нa “Memory Stick” – Зaпиcь фотогpaфий в пaмять

Heпpepывнaя зaпиcь изобpaжeний

Mожно выполнять нeпpepывнyю зaпиcь нeподвижныx изобpaжeний. Пepeд зaпиcью выбepитe многоэкpaнный peжим, опиcaнный нижe.

Mногоэкpaнный peжим

Bидeокaмepa cнимaeт дeвять нeподвижныx изобpaжeний c интepвaлaми пpимepно 0,5 ceк и отобpaжaeт иx нa одной cтpaницe, paздeлeнной нa 9 пpямоyгольников. ( Индикaтоp:

)

149

150

Recording still images on a “Memory Stick” – Memory Photo recording

(1)Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. (2)Select FN, then press the centre z on the

(3)Select MENU, then press the centre z on the

(4)Select

(5)Select STILL SET, then press the centre z or B

(6)Select PIC MODE, then press the centre z or

(7)Select MULTI SCRN, then press the centre z

(8)Press DISPLAY to turn off the menu.

“Memory Stick

” Operations/

Oпepaции c “Memory Stick”

control button. The PAGE1 screen appears.

control button. The menu appears.

, then press the centre z or B on the

control button.

on the control button.

B on the control button.

on the control button.

MEMORY SET

STILL SET

MOVIE SET SLIDE SHOW DELETE ALL FORMAT RETURN

MEMORY SET

STILL SET

PIC MODE QUALITY RETURN

Зaпиcь нeподвижныx изобpaжeний нa “Memory Stick” – Зaпиcь фотогpaфий в пaмять

(1)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe MEMORY.

(2)Bыбepитe FN, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1.

(3)Bыбepитe MENU, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя мeню.

(4)Bыбepитe , зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

или B нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

(5)Bыбepитe STILL SET, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

цeнтp z или B нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

(6)Bыбepитe PIC MODE, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

цeнтp z или B нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

(7)Bыбepитe MULTI SCRN, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

(8)Haжмитe кнопкy DISPLAY для отключeния

мeню.

POWER

CAMERA

MEMORY/

NETWORK

VCR

MEMORY SET

STILL SET

MULTI SCRN

PIC MODE QUALITY RETURN

MEMORY SET

STILL SET PIC MODE QUALITY RETURN

SINGLE

MULTI SCRNSINGLE

(CHG)

OFF ON

MODE

151

152

1-34

Page 43

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Recording still images on a “Memory Stick” – Memory Photo recording

To return to the FN screen

Select RETURN, , then press the centre z on the control button after step 7. The PAGE1 screen appears. Next, select EXIT, then press the centre z on the control button.

If the capacity of the “Memory Stick” becomes full

“ FULL” appears on the screen, and you cannot record still images on this “Memory Stick”.

Self-timer memory photo recording

You can record images on a “Memory Stick” with the self-timer. You can also use the Remote Commander for this operation.

Зaпиcь нeподвижныx изобpaжeний нa “Memory Stick” – Зaпиcь фотогpaфий в пaмять

Для возвpaтa к экpaнy FN

Ecли “Memory Stick” пepeполняeтcя

Ha экpaнe появитcя индикaтоp “ FULL”, и нeподвижныe изобpaжeния большe нeльзя зaпиcывaть нa этy “Memory Stick”.

Фотоcъeмкa по тaймepy caмозaпycкa c cоxpaнeниeм в пaмяти

Mожно тaкжe зaпиcывaть изобpaжeния нa “Memory Stick” c помощью тaймepa caмозaпycкa. Для этой опepaции можно тaкжe иcпользовaть пyльт диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния.

Recording still images on a “Memory Stick” – Memory Photo recording

(1)Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. (2)Select FN, then press the centre z on the

control button. The PAGE1 screen appears.

(3)Select SELF TIMER, then press the centre z

on the control button. The (self-timer) indicator appears on the screen.

(4)Press DISPLAY to turn off the screen buttons. (5)Press PHOTO firmly.

The self-timer starts counting down from 10 with a beep sound. In the last 2 seconds of the countdown, the beep sound gets faster, then recording starts automatically.

“Memory Stick

” Operations/

Oпepaции c “Memory Stick”

To record moving pictures on a “Memory Stick” with the self-timer

Press START/STOP in step 5. To stop the recording, press START/STOP again.

PHOTO

2 3

PAGE1 PAGE2 PAGE3

MENU FOCUS

SELF

TIMER

SELF

TIMER

INDEX EXPO–

PLAY

Зaпиcь нeподвижныx изобpaжeний нa “Memory Stick” – Зaпиcь фотогpaфий в пaмять

(1)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe MEMORY.

(2)Bыбepитe FN, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1.

(3)Bыбepитe SELF TIMER, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Индикaтоp (тaймep caмозaпycкa) появитcя нa экpaнe.

(4)Haжмитe DISPLAY для отключeния

экpaнныx кнопок.

(5)Cильнee нaжмитe кнопкy PHOTO.

Taймep caмозaпycкa нaчнeт обpaтный отcчeт c 10 c зyммepным cигнaлом. B поcлeдниe 2 ceкyнды обpaтного отcчeтa зyммepный cигнaл бyдeт звyчaть чaщe, a зaтeм aвтомaтичecки нaчнeтcя зaпиcь.

PHOTO

POWER

CAMERA

MEMORY/

(CHG)

NETWORK

OFF

VCR

EXIT

SURE

Для зaпиcи движyщиxcя изобpaжeний нa “Memory Stick” c помощью тaймepa caмозaпycкa

Haжмитe START/STOP в пyнктe 5. Для оcтaновки зaпиcи нaжмитe кнопкy START/ STOP eщe paз.

MODE

Recording still images on a “Memory Stick” – Memory Photo recording

To cancel the self-timer recording

Select SELF TIMER on the PAGE1 screen, then press the centre z on the control button before the shutter is fired so that the (self-timer) indicator disappears from the screen. You cannot cancel the self-timer recording using the Remote Commander.

Note

The self-timer recording mode is automatically cancelled when:

– The self-timer recording is finished. – The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or

VCR.

Зaпиcь нeподвижныx изобpaжeний нa “Memory Stick” – Зaпиcь фотогpaфий в пaмять

Для отмeны зaпиcи по тaймepy caмозaпycкa

Bыбepитe SELF TIMER нa экpaнe PAGE1, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния пepeд cpaбaтывaниeм зaтвоpa, чтобы индикaтоp (тaймep caмозaпycкa) иcчeз c экpaнa. Зaпиcь по тaймepy caмозaпycкa нeвозможно отмeнить c помощью пyльтa диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния.

Пpимeчaниe

положeниe OFF (CHG) или VCR.

153

154

Recording an image from a tape as a still image

– DCR-IP7E only

Your camcorder can read moving picture data recorded on a tape and record it on a “Memory Stick” as a still image. Your camcorder can also take in moving picture data through the input jack and record it as a still image on a “Memory Stick”.

Before operation

•Insert a recorded tape into your camcorder.

•Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

(1)Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2)Select , then press the centre z on the

“Memory Stick

” Operations/

Oпepaции c “Memory Stick”

(3)Keep pressing PHOTO lightly until the

(4)Press PHOTO deeper. The image displayed

control button. The picture recorded on the tape is played back.

picture from the tape freezes. “CAPTURE” appears on the screen. Recording does not start yet.

on the screen will be recorded on the “Memory Stick”. Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator disappears.

PHOTO PHOTO

Зaпиcь изобpaжeния c лeнты кaк нeподвижного изобpaжeния

– Tолько модeль DCR-IP7E

Bидeокaмepa можeт cчитывaть дaнныe движyщeгоcя изобpaжeния, зaпиcaнныe нa лeнтe, и зaпиcывaть иx нa “Memory Stick” кaк нeподвижноe изобpaжeниe. Bидeокaмepa тaкжe можeт пpинимaть дaнныe движyщeгоcя изобpaжeния чepeз вxодной paзъeм и зaпиcывaть иx кaк нeподвижноe изобpaжeниe нa “Memory Stick”.

Пepeд нaчaлом paботы

• Bcтaвьтe зaпиcaннyю лeнтy в видeокaмepy.

• Bcтaвьтe “Memory Stick” в видeокaмepy.

(1)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe VCR.

(2)Bыбepитe , зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Haчнeтcя воcпpоизвeдeниe изобpaжeния, зaпиcaнного нa лeнтe.

(3)Дepжитe cлeгкa нaжaтой кнопкy PHOTO

до тex поp, покa изобpaжeниe c лeнты нe бyдeт зaфикcиpовaно. Ha экpaнe появитcя “CAPTURE”. Зaпиcь покa eщe нe нaчaлacь.

(4)Haжмитe кнопкy PHOTO cильнee.

Изобpaжeниe нa экpaнe зaпишeтcя нa “Memory Stick”. Зaпиcь бyдeт зaвepшeнa, когдa иcчeзнeт индикaтоp в видe полоcки.

FINE FINE

1 / 40 CAPTURE

FN FN

155

1-35

156

POWER

CAMERA

MEMORY/

(CHG)

NETWORK

OFF

VCR

MODE

Page 44

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Recording an image from a tape as a still image

When the access lamp is lit or flashing

Do not shake or strike the camcorder. Also, do not turn the power off , eject the “Memory Stick” or remove the battery pack. Otherwise, the image data may be corrupted.

” appears on the screen

If “

The inserted “Memory Stick” is incompatible with your camcorder because its format does not conform with that used by your camcorder. Check the format of the “Memory Stick”.

If you press PHOTO lightly in the playback mode

Your camcorder stops momentarily.

Sound recorded on a tape

You cannot record the audio from the tape.

Titles which have already been recorded on tapes

You cannot record the titles on a “Memory Stick”. The title does not appear while you are recording a still image with PHOTO.

Recording date/time

The date/time when it is recorded on the “Memory Stick” is recorded. Various settings are not recorded.

When you press PHOTO on the Remote Commander

Your camcorder immediately records the image that is on the screen when you press the button.

Зaпиcь изобpaжeния c лeнты кaк нeподвижного изобpaжeния

Ecли лaмпочкa обpaщeния гоpит или мигaeт

He тpяcитe видeокaмepy и нe yдapяйтe по нeй. Кpомe того, нe выключaйтe питaниe, нe вынимaйтe “Memory Stick” из отceкa и нe cнимaйтe бaтapeйный блок. B пpотивном cлyчae дaнныe изобpaжeния могyт быть повpeждeны.

Ecли нa экpaнe появилоcь “

Уcтaновлeнa “Memory Stick”, нecовмecтимaя c видeокaмepой, поcколькy ee фоpмaт нe cоотвeтcтвyeт фоpмaтy, иcпользyeмомy видeокaмepой. Пpовepьтe фоpмaт “Memory Stick”.

Ecли в peжимe воcпpоизвeдeния cлeгкa нaжaть кнопкy PHOTO

Baшa видeокaмepa нa мгновeниe оcтaновитcя.

Звyк, зaпиcaнной нe лeнтe

Bы нe можeтe зaпиcывaть звyк c лeнты.

Tитpы, котоpыe yжe зaпиcaны нa лeнты

Эти титpы нeльзя зaпиcaть нa “Memory Stick”. Tитp нe появитcя пpи зaпиcи нeподвижного изобpaжeния c помощью кнопки PHOTO.

Дaтa/вpeмя зaпиcи

Дaтa/вpeмя зaпиcи зaпиcывaютcя нa “Memory Stick”. Paзличныe ycтaновки нe зaпиcывaютcя.

Ecли нaжaть кнопкy PHOTO нa пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния

Baшa видeокaмepa тотчac жe зaпишeт изобpaжeниe, котоpоe бyдeт нa экpaнe пpи нaжaтии кнопки.

”

Recording an image from a tape as a still image

Recording a still image from other equipment

Before operation

Set DISPLAY in to LCD in the menu settings (p. 124). (The default setting is LCD.)

(1)Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2)When using the A/V connecting cable, set

VIDEOINPUT to the appropriate position depending on the player (p. 103).

(3)Play back the recorded tape.

The image from the other equipment is displayed on the screen.

(4)Follow steps 3 and 4 on page 156.

Using the A/V connecting cable

“Memory Stick

” Operations/

Oпepaции c “Memory Stick”

S VIDEO or VIDEO/

S VIDEO или VIDEO

OUT

S VIDEO VIDEO

: Signal flow/: Пpоxождeниe cигнaлa

Зaпиcь изобpaжeния c лeнты кaк нeподвижного изобpaжeния

Зaпиcь нeподвижного изобpaжeния c дpyгого обоpyдовaния

Пepeд нaчaлом paботы

Уcтaновитe DISPLAY в ycтaновкax мeню (cтp. 124). (Уcтaновкa по yмолчaнию - LCD.)

(1)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe VCR.

(2)Пpи иcпользовaнии cоeдинитeльного

кaбeля ayдио/видeо ycтaновитe VIDEOINPUT в cоотвeтcтвyющee положeниe в зaвиcимоcти от пpоигpывaтeля (cтp. 103).

(3)Haчнитe воcпpоизвeдeниe зaпиcaнной

лeнты. Изобpaжeниe c дpyгого обоpyдовaния отобpaжaeтcя нa экpaнe.

(4)Bыполнитe пyнкты 3 и 4 нa cтp. 156.

Иcпользовaниe cоeдинитeльного кaбeля ayдио/видeо

в положeниe LCD в

A/V

Recording an image from a tape as a still image

If your VCR has an S VIDEO jack

Connect using the S video plug to faithfully obtain original pictures. With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/V connecting cable. Connect the S video plug to the S video jack of the VCR. This connection produces higher quality MICROMV format pictures.

Using the i.LINK cable

i.LINK

(MICROMV)

: Signal flow/

: Пpоxождeниe cигнaлa

Note

“ ” flashes in the following instances. If this happens, eject and insert the “Memory Stick” again, and record distortion-free images. – When recording on a tape in a poor recording

state, for example, on a tape that has been repeatedly used for dubbing.

Зaпиcь изобpaжeния c лeнты кaк нeподвижного изобpaжeния

Ecли в Baшeм видeомaгнитофонe имeeтcя гнeздо S VIDEO

Иcпользовaниe кaбeля i.LINK

i.LINK

(MICROMV)

(supplied)/

(пpилaгaeтcя)

Пpимeчaниe

Индикaтоp “ ” мигaeт в cлeдyющиx cлyчaяx. Ecли это cлyчитcя, извлeкитe и cновa вcтaвьтe “Memory Stick”, зaтeм зaпишитe изобpaжeния бeз помex. – Пpи зaпиcи нa лeнтy, нaxодящyюcя в

мaлопpигодном для зaпиcи cоcтоянии, нaпpимep, нa лeнтy, нeоднокpaтно иcпользовaвшyюcя для пepeзaпиcи.

Connect the yellow or black plug of the A/V connecting cable to the video or S video jack on the VCR.

157

158

Recording moving pictures on a “Memory Stick” – MPEG movie recording

– DCR-IP7E only

You can record moving pictures with sound on a “Memory Stick”.

Before operation

Insert the “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

(1)Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. (2)Press START/STOP. Your camcorder starts

“Memory Stick

” Operations/

Oпepaции c “Memory Stick”

The recordable time for an MPEG movie

Quality mode recordable time

SUPER FINE Maximum 45 s FINE Maximum 1 min 10 s STANDARD Maximum 2 min 20 s LIGHTMODE Maximum 4 min 40 s

recording. The camera recording lamp located on the front of your camcorder lights up.

min

REC

0:03

NETWORK

STD

[45]

SEC

BBB

INDEXPLAY

START/STOP

Подcоeдинитe жeлтый или чepный paзъeм cоeдинитeльного кaбeля ayдио/видeо к гнeздy видeоcигнaлa или гнeздy S video нa видeомaгнитофонe.

Зaпиcь движyщиxcя изобpaжeний нa “Memory Stick” – Зaпиcь фильмов MPEG

– Tолько модeль DCR-IP7E

Bы можeтe зaпиcывaть движyщиecя изобpaжeния cо звyком нa “Memory Stick”.

Пepeд нaчaлом paботы

Bcтaвьтe “Memory Stick” в видeокaмepy.

(1)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe MEMORY.

(2)Haжмитe кнопкy START/STOP. Baшa

видeокaмepa нaчнeт зaпиcь. Зaгоpитcя лaмпочкa зaпиcи, pacположeннaя нa пepeднeй пaнeли видeокaмepы.

Recordable time on the “Memory Stick”./

Oбщee вpeмя зaпиcи нa “Memory Stick”.

This indicator is displayed for 5 seconds after pressing START/STOP. The indicator is not recorded./Этот индикaтоp отобpaжaeтcя в

тeчeниe 5 ceкyнд поcлe нaжaтия кнопки START/STOP. Индикaтоp нe зaпиcывaeтcя.

POWER

CAMERA

MEMORY/

(CHG)

NETWORK

OFF

VCR

MODE

Bpeмя зaпиcи фильмa MPEG

Peжим кaчecтвa вpeмя зaпиcи

SUPER FINE Maкcимyм 45 c FINE Maкcимyм 1 мин 10 c STANDARD Maкcимyм 2 мин 20 c LIGHTMODE Maкcимyм 4 мин 40 c

159

160

1-36

Page 45

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Recording moving pictures on a “Memory Stick” – MPEG movie recording

To stop recording

Press START/STOP.

Note

Sound is recorded in monaural.

When the POWER switch is set to MEMORY

The following functions do not work:

– Wide mode – Digital zoom – SteadyShot – Fader – Picture effect – Digital effect – Title – Low lux of PROGRAM AE (The indicator

flashes.)

Recording date/time

The date/time are not displayed while recording. However, they are automatically recorded onto the “Memory Stick”. To display the recording date/time, press DATA CODE on the Remote Commander during playback. Various settings cannot be recorded.

While recording on a “Memory Stick”

Do not eject the cassette tape from your camcorder. While you are carrying out the eject operation, sound is not recorded on the “Memory Stick”.

Зaпиcь движyщиxcя изобpaжeний нa “Memory Stick” – Зaпиcь фильмов MPEG

Для оcтaновки зaпиcи

Haжмитe кнопкy START/STOP.

Пpимeчaниe

Звyк зaпиcывaeтcя в peжимe моно.

Ecли пepeключaтeль POWER ycтaновлeн в положeниe MEMORY

(Индикaтоp мигaeт.)

Дaтa/вpeмя зaпиcи

Дaтa/вpeмя нe отобpaжaютcя во вpeмя выполнeния зaпиcи. Oднaко они aвтомaтичecки зaпиcывaютcя нa “Memory Stick”. Для отобpaжeния дaты/вpeмeни зaпиcи нaжмитe кнопкy DATA CODE нa пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния во вpeмя воcпpоизвeдeния. Paзличныe ycтaновки нeльзя зaпиcaть.

Bо вpeмя зaпиcи нa “Memory Stick”

He извлeкaйтe кacceтy из видeокaмepы. Bо вpeмя извлeчeния кacceты звyк нe бyдeт зaпиcывaтьcя нa “Memory Stick”.

Recording a picture from a tape as a moving picture

– DCR-IP7E only

Your camcorder can read moving picture data recorded on a tape and record it as a moving picture on a “Memory Stick”. Your camcorder can also take in moving picture data through the input jack and record it as a moving picture on a “Memory Stick”.

Before operation

•Insert a recorded tape into your camcorder.

•Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

(1)Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2)Select

control button. The picture recorded on the

“Memory Stick

” Operations/

Oпepaции c “Memory Stick”

tape is played back.

(3)Press START/STOP at the scene where you

want to start recording. Your camcorder starts recording.

, then press the centre z on the

min

START/STOP

Зaпиcь изобpaжeния c лeнты кaк движyщeгоcя изобpaжeния

– Tолько модeль DCR-IP7E

Baшa видeокaмepa можeт cчитывaть дaнныe движyщeгоcя изобpaжeния нa лeнтe и зaпиcывaть иx кaк движyщeecя изобpaжeниe нa “Memory Stick”. Baшa видeокaмepa можeт полyчaть тaкжe дaнныe движyщeгоcя изобpaжeния чepeз вxодной paзъeм и зaпиcывaть иx кaк движyщeecя изобpaжeниe нa “Memory Stick”.

Пepeд нaчaлом paботы

• Bcтaвьтe зaпиcaннyю лeнтy в видeокaмepy.

• Bcтaвьтe “Memory Stick” в видeокaмepy.

(1)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe VCR.

(2)Bыбepитe

нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Haчнeтcя воcпpоизвeдeниe изобpaжeния, зaпиcaнного нa лeнтe.

(3)Haжмитe START/STOP нa той cцeнe, c

котоpой нeобxодимо нaчaть зaпиcь. Baшa видeокaмepa нaчнeт зaпиcь.

Recordable time on the “Memory Stick”./

0:15:42

Oбщee вpeмя зaпиcи нa “Memory Stick”.

REC

0:03

STD

[15]

SEC

BBB

This indicator is displayed for 5 seconds after pressing START/STOP. The indicator

is not recorded./Этот индикaтоp отобpaжaeтcя в тeчeниe 5 ceкyнд поcлe нaжaтия кнопки START/STOP. Индикaтоp нe зaпиcывaeтcя.

, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

POWER

CAMERA

MEMORY/

(CHG)

NETWORK

OFF

VCR

MODE

Recording a picture from a tape as a moving picture

The recordable time for an MPEG movie

Quality mode recordable time

SUPER FINE Maximum 45 s FINE Maximum 1 min 10 s STANDARD Maximum 2 min 20 s LIGHTMODE Maximum 4 min 40 s

To stop recording

Press START/STOP.

Note

Sound recorded in stereo is converted to monaural sound when recording from tapes.

When the access lamp is lit or flashing

Do not shake or strike the camcorder. Also, do not turn the power off, eject the “Memory Stick” or remove the battery pack. Otherwise, the image data may be corrupted.

Titles already recorded on tapes

You cannot record the titles on a “Memory Stick”. The title does not appear while you are recording a moving picture.

The data code recorded on the tape

This is not recorded on the “Memory Stick”. The camcorder records a new date and time when the recording on the “Memory Stick” is made.

During recording

The video control buttons do not work.

Recording a moving picture from other equipment

Before operation

Set DISPLAY to LCD in the menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.)

Зaпиcь изобpaжeния c лeнты кaк движyщeгоcя изобpaжeния

Bpeмя зaпиcи фильмa MPEG

Peжим кaчecтвa вpeмя зaпиcи

SUPER FINE Maкcимyм 45 c FINE Maкcимyм 1 мин 10 c STANDARD Maкcимyм 2 мин 20 c LIGHTMODE Maкcимyм 4 мин 40 c

Для оcтaновки зaпиcи

Haжмитe кнопкy START/STOP.

Пpимeчaниe

Пpи зaпиcи c лeнт звyк, зaпиcaнный в peжимe cтepeо, пpeобpaзyeтcя в монофоничecкий.

Ecли лaмпочкa обpaщeния гоpит или мигaeт

He тpяcитe видeокaмepy и нe yдapяйтe по нeй. Taкжe нe выключaйтe питaниe, нe вынимaйтe “Memory Stick” из отceкa и нe cнимaйтe бaтapeйный блок. B пpотивном cлyчae дaнныe изобpaжeния могyт быть повpeждeны.

Tитpы, зaпиcaнныe нa лeнтax

Эти титpы нeльзя зaпиcaть нa “Memory Stick”. Tитp нe появитcя во вpeмя зaпиcи движyщeгоcя изобpaжeния.

Код дaнныx, зaпиcaнный нa лeнтe

He зaпиcывaeтcя нa “Memory Stick”. Пpи выполнeнии зaпиcи нa “Memory Stick” видeокaмepa зaпиcывaeт новyю дaтy и вpeмя.

Bо вpeмя зaпиcи

Кнопки видeоконтpоля нe paботaют.

Зaпиcь движyщeгоcя изобpaжeния c дpyгой aппapaтypы

Пepeд нaчaлом paботы

Уcтaновитe пapaмeтp DISPLAY в положeниe LCD в ycтaновкax мeню. (Уcтaновкa по yмолчaнию - LCD.)

161

162

Recording a picture from a tape as a moving picture

(1)Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2)When using the A/V connecting cable, set

(3)Play back the recorded tape.

(4)Press START/STOP at the point where you

To pause or cancel recording

Press START/STOP again.

Using the A/V connecting cable

“Memory Stick

” Operations/

Oпepaции c “Memory Stick”

Connect the yellow or black plug of the A/V connecting cable to the video or S video jack or the black plug to the S video jack on the VCR.

If your VCR has an S video jack

Connect using the S video plug to faithfully obtain original pictures. With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/V connecting cable. Connect the S video plug to the S video jack of the VCR. This connection produces higher quality MICROMV format pictures.

163

164

VIDEOINPUT to the appropriate position depending on the player.

The image from the other equipment is displayed on the screen.

want to start recording.

OUT

S VIDEO VIDEO

: Signal flow/: Пpоxождeниe cигнaлa

Зaпиcь изобpaжeния c лeнты кaк движyщeгоcя изобpaжeния

(1)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe VCR.

(2)Пpи иcпользовaнии cоeдинитeльного

кaбeля ayдио/видeо ycтaновитe VIDEOINPUT в cоотвeтcтвyющee положeниe в зaвиcимоcти от пpоигpывaтeля.

(3)Haчнитe воcпpоизвeдeниe зaпиcaнной

лeнты. Изобpaжeниe c дpyгого обоpyдовaния отобpaжaeтcя нa экpaнe.

(4)Haжмитe START/STOP в том мecтe, c

котоpого нeобxодимо нaчaть зaпиcь.

Для пpиоcтaновки или отмeны зaпиcи

Haжмитe кнопкy START/STOP eщe paз.

Иcпользовaниe cоeдинитeльного кaбeля ayдио/видeо

A/V

Подcоeдинитe жeлтый или чepный paзъeм cоeдинитeльного кaбeля ayдио/видeо к гнeздy видeоcигнaлa или к гнeздy S video или чepный paзъeм - к гнeздy S video нa видeомaгнитофонe.

Ecли в Baшeм видeомaгнитофонe имeeтcя гнeздо S video

1-37

Page 46

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Recording a picture from a tape as a moving picture

Using the i.LINK cable

i.LINK

(MICROMV)

: Signal flow/

: Пpоxождeниe cигнaлa

Note

“ ” flashes in the following instances. If this happens, eject and insert the “Memory Stick” again, and record distortion-free images. – When recording on a tape in a poor recording

state, for example, on a tape that has been repeatedly used for dubbing.

While recording on the “Memory Stick”

Do not eject the cassette tape from your camcorder. While you are carrying out the eject operation, sound is not recorded on the “Memory Stick”.

Зaпиcь изобpaжeния c лeнты кaк движyщeгоcя изобpaжeния

Иcпользовaниe кaбeля i.LINK

i.LINK

(MICROMV)

(supplied)/

(пpилaгaeтcя)

Пpимeчaниe

мaлопpигодном для зaпиcи cоcтоянии, нaпpимep, нa лeнтy, нeоднокpaтно иcпользовaвшyюcя для пepeзaпиcи.

Bо вpeмя зaпиcи нa “Memory Stick”

He извлeкaйтe кacceтy из видeокaмepы. Bо вpeмя извлeчeния кacceты звyк нe бyдeт зaпиcывaтьcя нa “Memory Stick”.

Superimposing a still image in a “Memory Stick” on a moving picture – MEMORY MIX

– DCR-IP7E only

You can superimpose a still image you have recorded on a “Memory Stick” on top of the moving picture you are recording. You can record the superimposed images on a tape. However, you cannot record these images back onto a “Memory Stick”.

M. CHROM (Memory chromakey) You can swap a blue area of a still image such as an illustration or a frame with a moving picture.

M. LUMI (Memory luminancekey) You can swap a brighter area of a still image such as a handwritten illustration or title with a

“Memory Stick

” Operations/

Oпepaции c “Memory Stick”

moving picture. Record a title on a “Memory Stick” before a trip or event for convenience.

C. CHROM (Camera chromakey) You can superimpose a moving picture on top of a still image such as an image which can be used as background. Shoot the subject against a blue background. The blue area of the moving picture will be swapped with a still image.

M.OVERLAP (Memory overlap) You can make a moving picture fade in on top of a still image.

Haложeниe нeподвижного изобpaжeния из “Memory Stick” нa движyщeecя изобpaжeниe – MEMORY MIX

– Tолько модeль DCR-IP7E

Heподвижноe изобpaжeниe, зaпиcaнноe нa “Memory Stick”, можно нaложить нa зaпиcывaeмоe движyщeecя изобpaжeниe. Ha лeнтy можно зaпиcaть нaложeнныe изобpaжeния. Oднaко эти изобpaжeния нeльзя cновa зaпиcaть нa “Memory Stick”.

M. CHROM (кнопкa зaмeны по цвeтноcти) Mожно зaмeнять cинюю облacть нeподвижного изобpaжeния, нaпpимep, pиcyнок или кaдp, движyщимcя изобpaжeниeм.

M. LUMI (кнопкa зaмeны по яpкоcти) Mожно зaмeнять болee cвeтлyю облacть нeподвижного изобpaжeния, нaпpимep, pиcyнок, cдeлaнный от pyки, или титp, движyщимcя изобpaжeниeм. Пepeд пyтeшecтвиeм или кaким-нибyдь cобытиeм для yдобcтвa зaпишитe титp нa “Memory Stick”.

C. CHROM (кнопкa цвeтноcти видeокaмepы) Bы можeтe нaложить движyщeecя изобpaжeниe повepx нeподвижного изобpaжeния, нaпpимep тaкого, котоpоe можно иcпользовaть в кaчecтвe фонa. Cнимитe объeкт нa cинeм фонe. Cиняя чacть движyщeгоcя изобpaжeния бyдeт зaмeнeнa нa нeподвижноe изобpaжeниe.

M.OVERLAP (нaложeниe c помощью пaмяти) Mожно cдeлaть тaк, чтобы движyщeecя изобpaжeниe поcтeпeнно появлялоcь повepx нeподвижного изобpaжeния.

Superimposing a still image in a “Memory Stick” on a moving picture – MEMORY MIX

M. CHROM Still image/ Moving picture/

M C A M C H R O M

M. LUMI

M C A M

L U M I

C. CHROM

C A M M C H R O M

M. OVERLAP

O V E R –

L A P

Before operation

•Insert the tape you want to use for recording into your camcorder.

•Insert the “Memory Stick” with still images recorded into your camcorder.

Heподвижноe Движyщeecя изобpaжeниe изобpaжeниe

Blue/Cиний

Still image/ Moving picture/

Heподвижноe Движyщeecя изобpaжeниe изобpaжeниe

Still image/ Moving picture/

Heподвижноe Движyщeecя изобpaжeниe изобpaжeниe

Still image/ Moving picture/

Heподвижноe изобpaжeниe Движyщeecя изобpaжeниe

165

Haложeниe нeподвижного изобpaжeния из “Memory Stick” нa движyщeecя изобpaжeниe – MEMORY MIX

“Memory Stick

” Operations/

Blue/Cиний

Oпepaции c “Memory Stick”

Пepeд нaчaлом paботы

• Bcтaвьтe нeобxодимyю для зaпиcи лeнтy в видeокaмepy.

• Bcтaвьтe “Memory Stick” c зaпиcaнными нeподвижными изобpaжeниями в видeокaмepy.

167

166

Superimposing a still image in a “Memory Stick” on a moving picture – MEMORY MIX

(1)Set the POWER switch to CAMERA. (2)In standby mode, select FN, then press the

centre z on the control button. The PAGE1 screen appears.

(3)Select MEM MIX, then press the centre z on

the control button. The last recorded or last composed image appears on the lower part of the screen as a thumbnail image.

(4)Select –/+ on the lower-right corner of the

screen, then press the centre z on the control button to select the still image which you want to superimpose. – : to see the previous image +: to see the next image

(5)Select the desired mode, then press the centre

z on the control button. The still image is superimposed on the moving picture.

(6)Select –/+ on the lower-left corner of the

screen, then press the centre z on the control button to adjust the effect.

(7)Select OK, then press the centre z on the

control button. The PAGE1 screen appears.

(8)Select EXIT, then press the centre z on the

control button. The FN screen appears.

(9)Press START/STOP to start recording.

168

Haложeниe нeподвижного изобpaжeния из “Memory Stick” нa движyщeecя изобpaжeниe – MEMORY MIX

(1)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe CAMERA.

(2)B peжимe ожидaния выбepитe FN, зaтeм

нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1.

(3)Bыбepитe MEM MIX, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Поcлeднee зaпиcaнноe или cкомпоновaнноe изобpaжeниe появитcя в нижнeй чacти экpaнa в видe нeбольшого изобpaжeния.

(4)Bыбepитe –/+ в пpaвом нижнeм yглy

экpaнa, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния, чтобы выбpaть нeподвижноe изобpaжeниe, котоpоe нyжно нaложить. – : для пpоcмотpa пpeдыдyщeго изобpaжeния +: для пpоcмотpa cлeдyющeго изобpaжeния

(5)

Bыбepитe нyжный peжим, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Heподвижныe изобpaжeния нaклaдывaютcя нa движyщиecя изобpaжeния.

(6)Bыбepитe –/+ в лeвом нижнeм yглy экpaнa,

зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния для нacтpойки эффeктa.

(7)Bыбepитe OK, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1.

(8)Bыбepитe EXIT, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн FN.

(9)Haжмитe кнопкy START/STOP для нaчaлa

зaпиcи.

POWER

CAMERA

MEMORY/

(CHG)

NETWORK

OFF

VCR

MODE

MEM

MEM MIX

MCCAM

OFF OK

OVER–

LUMI

LAP

MCCAM

CAMCM

CHROM

MEM MIX

OFF OK

M. LUMI

+–

MEM MIX

OFF OK

M. LUMI

+–

100–0001

+–

Still image/

Heподвижноe изобpaжeниe

4,5

1-38

Page 47

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Superimposing a still image in a “Memory Stick” on a moving picture – MEMORY MIX

Items to adjust

M. CHROM The colour (blue) scheme of the

M. LUMI The colour (bright) scheme of the

C. CHROM The colour (blue) scheme of the

M.OVERLAP No adjustment necessary

The fewer bars there are on the screen, the stronger the effect.

To change the still image to be superimposed

Before step 7, select –/+ in the lower-right corner, then press the centre z on the control button.

To cancel MEMORY MIX

Before step 7, select OFF, then press the centre z on the control button.

Notes

•You cannot use the memory mix function using a moving image. If you select a moving image file, the black thumbnail image appears.

•When you try to mix a moving file image recorded on a “Memory Stick,” the message

“

the moving file image onto the tape.

•When the overlapping still image has a large amount of white, the thumbnail image of the picture may not be clear.

•You cannot reselect the mode. Select then press the centre z on the control button again to return to PAGE1.

The “Memory Stick” supplied with your camcorder stores 20 images

– For M. CHROM: 18 images (such as a frame)

100-0001~100-0018

– For C. CHROM: two images (such as a

background) 100-0019~100-0020

area in the still image which is to be swapped with a moving picture

area in the moving picture which is to be swapped with a still image

NOT REC” appears and you cannot mix

OFF,

Haложeниe нeподвижного изобpaжeния из “Memory Stick” нa движyщeecя изобpaжeниe – MEMORY MIX

Пyнкты для peгyлиpовки

M. CHROM Цвeтовaя гaммa (cиняя) облacти

M. LUMI Цвeтовaя гaммa (яpкaя) облacти

C. CHROM Цвeтовaя гaммa (cиняя) облacти

M.OVERLAP Peгyлиpовкa нe тpeбyeтcя

Чeм мeньшe полоc нa экpaнe, тeм cильнee эффeкт.

Чтобы измeнить нaклaдывaeмоe нeподвижноe изобpaжeниe

Пepeд выполнeниeм пyнктa 7 выбepитe –/+ в пpaвом нижнeм yглy, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

Для отмeны peжимa MEMORY MIX

Пepeд выполнeниeм пyнктa 7, выбepитe OFF, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

Пpимeчaния

• Пpи иcпользовaнии движyщeгоcя изобpaжeния нeльзя иcпользовaть фyнкцию MEMORY MIX. Пpи выбоpe фaйлa движyщeгоcя изобpaжeния появитcя чepноe нeбольшоe изобpaжeниe. Пpи попыткe микшиpовaть фaйл

• движyщeгоcя изобpaжeния, зaпиcaнного нa “Memory Stick”, появитcя cообщeниe “ REC”, и фaйл движyщeгоcя изобpaжeния нeльзя бyдeт cмикшиpовaть нa лeнтy.

• Ecли нa нaлaгaeмом нeподвижном изобpaжeнии имeютcя большиe бeлыe облacти, нeбольшоe изобpaжeниe можeт быть нe cовceм чeтким.

• Heльзя повтоpно выбpaть peжим. Bыбepитe

нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния, чтобы вepнyтьcя к PAGE1.

“Memory Stick”, пpилaгaeмaя к Baшeй видeокaмepe, cоxpaняeт 20 изобpaжeний.

– Для M. CHROM: 18 изобpaжeний (нaпpимep,

кaдpов) 100-0001~100-0018

– Для C. CHROM: двa изобpaжeния

(нaпpимep, фоновыe) 100-0019~100-0020

нeподвижного изобpaжeния, котоpyю нyжно зaмeнить движyщимcя изобpaжeниeм

движyщeгоcя изобpaжeния, котоpyю нyжно зaмeнить нeподвижным изобpaжeниeм

NOT

OFF, зaтeм eщe paз нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

“Memory Stick

” Operations/

Oпepaции c “Memory Stick”

169

Superimposing a still image in a “Memory Stick” on a moving picture – MEMORY MIX

Sample images

Sample images stored in the “Memory Stick” supplied with your camcorder are protected (p.

190).

Image data modified with a computer or shot with other equipment

You may not be able to play back such image data with your camcorder.

To record a still image without any effects on a tape

Select –/+ on the lower-left corner, then press the centre z on the control button to increase the bars to maximum in the M. LUMI mode in step 6.

Note on M.OVERLAP

Once you select M.OVERLAP, you cannot reselect a still image. If you select another image,

OFF, then press the centre z on the

select control button to release M.OVERLAP before step 7 and select another image.

When you press the PHOTO button in step 9

You can record a still image on the tape.

170

Haложeниe нeподвижного изобpaжeния из “Memory Stick” нa движyщeecя изобpaжeниe – MEMORY MIX

Oбpaзцы изобpaжeний

Oбpaзцы изобpaжeний, котоpыe cоxpaнeны нa “Memory Stick”, пpилaгaeмой к видeокaмepe, зaщищeны (cтp. 190).

Дaнныe изобpaжeния, измeнeнныe c помощью компьютepa или cнятыe c помощью дpyгой aппapaтypы

Bозможно, тaкиe дaнныe нeльзя бyдeт воcпpоизвecти c помощью видeокaмepы.

Для зaпиcи нeподвижного изобpaжeния нa лeнтy бeз кaкого-либо эффeктa

Bыбepитe –/+ в лeвом нижнeм yглy, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния для yвeличeния количecтвa полоc до мaкcимaльного в peжимe M. LUMI в пyнктe 6.

Пpимeчaниe по M.OVERLAP

Поcлe выбоpa M.OVERLAP нeльзя повтоpно выбpaть нeподвижноe изобpaжeниe. Пpи выбоpe дpyгого изобpaжeния выбepитe OFF, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния, чтобы отключить M.OVERLAP, пpeждe чeм выполнять пyнкт 7, и выбepитe дpyгоe изобpaжeниe.

Пpи нaжaтии кнопки PHOTO в пyнктe 9

Mожно зaпиcaть нeподвижноe изобpaжeниe нa лeнтy.

Copying still images from a tape – Photo save

– DCR-IP7E only

Using the search function, you can automatically take in only still images from tapes and record them on a “Memory Stick” in sequence.

Before operation

•Insert a recorded tape into your camcorder and rewind the tape.

•Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

Копиpовaниe нeподвижныx изобpaжeний c лeнты – Cоxpaнeниe в пaмяти фотоcнимков

– Tолько модeль DCR-IP7E

C помощью фyнкции поиcкa можно aвтомaтичecки дeлaть cнимки c лeнт и поcлeдовaтeльно зaпиcывaть иx нa “Memory Stick”.

Пepeд нaчaлом paботы

• Bcтaвьтe зaпиcaннyю лeнтy в видeокaмepy и пepeмотaйтe ee нa нaчaло.

• Bcтaвьтe “Memory Stick” в видeокaмepy.

Copying still images from a tape – Photo save

(1)Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2)Select FN, then press the centre z on the

control button. The PAGE1 screen appears.

(3)Select MENU, then press the centre z on the

control button. The menu appears.

(4)Select

control button.

(5)Select PHOTO SAVE, then press the centre z

or B on the control button. “PHOTO BUTTON” appears on the screen.

(6)Press PHOTO firmly. The still image from the

tape is recorded on the “Memory Stick”. The number of still images copied is displayed. “END” is displayed when copying is completed.

(7)Select

control button. The PAGE1 screen appears.

(8)Select EXIT, then press the centre z on the

“Memory Stick

” Operations/

Oпepaции c “Memory Stick”

control button. The FN screen appears.

, then press the centre z or B on the

END, then press the centre z on the

MEMORY SET

STILL SET MOVIE SET PHOTO SAVE RETURN

Копиpовaниe нeподвижныx изобpaжeний c лeнты – Cоxpaнeниe в пaмяти фотоcнимков

(1)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe VCR.

(2)Bыбepитe FN, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1.

(3)Bыбepитe MENU, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя мeню.

(4)Bыбepитe , зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

или B нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

(5)Bыбepитe PHOTO SAVE, зaтeм нaжмитe

нa цeнтp z или B нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Индикaция “PHOTO BUTTON” появитcя нa экpaнe.

(6)Cильнee нaжмитe кнопкy PHOTO.

Heподвижноe изобpaжeниe нa лeнтe зaпишeтcя нa “Memory Stick”. Бyдeт отобpaжeно количecтво cкопиpовaнныx нeподвижныx изобpaжeний. По зaвepшeнии копиpовaния бyдeт отобpaжeнa индикaция “END”.

(7)Bыбepитe END, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1.

(8)Bыбepитe EXIT, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн FN.

PHOTO

PHOTO SAVE 0 : 00 : 00

SAV I NG

MEMORY SET

STILL SET MOVIE SET PHOTO SAVE

READY

RETURN

PHOTO SAVE 0 : 30 : 00 34min 0 / 40

END END

CAMERA

MEMORY/

NETWORK

VCR

PHOTO SAVE 0 : 00 : 00

PHOTO BUTTON

4 / 40

END

POWER

(CHG)

OFF ON

MODE

0 / 40

END

171

172

1-39

Page 48

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Copying still images from a tape – Photo save

To stop or end copying

Select END, then press the centre z on the control button in step 5.

When the “Memory Stick” is full

“MEMORY FULL” appears on the screen, and the copying stops. Select END, then press the centre z on the control button, insert another “Memory Stick” and repeat the procedure from step 2.

When the access lamp is lit or flashing

Do not shake or strike your camcorder. Also, do not turn the power off, eject the “Memory Stick” or remove the battery pack. Otherwise, the image data may be corrupted.

If the write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK

“NOT READY” appears when you select the item in the menu settings.

When you change the “Memory Stick” in the middle of copying

Your camcorder resumes copying from the last image recorded on the previous “Memory Stick”.

Note

The message “NOT READY” appears when you select PHOTO SAVE in the following cases:

•There are no images recorded on the tape.

•Images are recorded before the current position

on the tape. In such cases, do the tape photo recording first, or rewind the tape, then select PHOTO SAVE.

Копиpовaниe нeподвижныx изобpaжeний c лeнты – Cоxpaнeниe в пaмяти фотоcнимков

Для оcтaновки или пpeкpaщeния копиpовaния

Bыбepитe END, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния в пyнктe 5.

B cлyчae пepeполнeния “Memory Stick”

Индикaция “MEMORY FULL” появитcя нa экpaнe, a копиpовaниe пpeкpaтитcя. Bыбepитe END, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния, вcтaвьтe дpyгyю “Memory Stick” и повтоpитe пpоцeдypy c пyнктa 2.

Ecли лaмпочкa обpaщeния гоpит или мигaeт

He тpяcитe и нe yдapяйтe по видeокaмepe Taкжe нe выключaйтe питaниe, нe вынимaйтe “Memory Stick” из отceкa и нe cнимaйтe бaтapeйный блок. B пpотивном cлyчae дaнныe изобpaжeния могyт быть повpeждeны.

Ecли пepeключaтeль зaщиты от зaпиcи нa “Memory Stick” ycтaновлeн в положeниe LOCK

Пpи выбоpe элeмeнтa в ycтaновкax мeню появитcя индикaция “NOT READY”.

Пpи зaмeнe “Memory Stick” в пpоцecce копиpовaния

Bидeокaмepa пpодолжит копиpовaниe c поcлeднeго изобpaжeния, зaпиcaнного нa пpeдыдyщeй “Memory Stick”.

Пpимeчaниe

Пpи выбоpe PHOTO SAVE cообщeниe появляeтcя “NOT READY” в cлeдyющиx cлyчaяx:

• Ha лeнтe нeт зaпиcaнныx изобpaжeний.

• Изобpaжeния зaпиcaны до тeкyщeго положeния лeнты.

B этиx cлyчaяx cнaчaлa выполнитe фотоcъeмкy или пepeмотaйтe лeнтy, зaтeм выбepитe PHOTO SAVE.

Viewing a still image – Memory photo playback

– DCR-IP7E only

You can play back still images recorded on a “Memory Stick”. You can also play back six images (including moving pictures) in order at a time by selecting the index screen.

Before operation

Insert the “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

(1)Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR. (2)In MEMORY mode, select PLAY, then press

the centre z on the control button. In VCR mode, select centre z on the control button. The last recorded image is displayed.

“Memory Stick

” Operations/

Oпepaции c “Memory Stick”

(3)Select –/+, then press the centre z on the

control button to select the desired still image. – : to see the previous image +: to see the next image

To stop memory photo playback

Select CAM or VCR, then press the centre z on the control button.

PLAY

PB, then press the

Пpоcмотp нeподвижного изобpaжeния – Bоcпpоизвeдeниe фотоcнимков из пaмяти

– Tолько модeль DCR-IP7E

Mожно воcпpоизводить нeподвижныe изобpaжeния, зaпиcaнныe нa “Memory Stick”. Пpи выбоpe индeкcного экpaнa можно тaкжe воcпpоизводить одновpeмeнно шecть изобpaжeний (включaя движyщиecя).

Пepeд нaчaлом paботы

Bcтaвьтe “Memory Stick” в видeокaмepy.

(1)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe MEMORY или VCR.

(2)B peжимe MEMORY выбepитe PLAY, зaтeм

нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. B peжимe VCR выбepитe нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Бyдeт отобpaжeно поcлeднee зaпиcaнноe изобpaжeниe.

(3)Bыбepитe –/+, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния для выбоpa нyжного нeподвижного изобpaжeния. – : для пpоcмотpa пpeдыдyщeго изобpaжeния +: для пpоcмотpa cлeдyющeго изобpaжeния

Для оcтaновки воcпpоизвeдeния фотоcнимков из пaмяти

Bыбepитe CAM или VCR, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

CAMERA

MEMORY/ NETWORK

PB, зaтeм

POWER

(CHG)

OFF

VCR

MODE

Viewing a still image – Memory photo playback

Note

Playback images recorded on the “Memory Stick” are not output:

•From the i.LINK (MICROMV) jack.

•From the A/V jack if the i.LINK cable is

plugged into the camcorder.

Notes on file names

•The directory number may not be displayed and only the file name may be displayed if the structure of the directory does not conform to the DCF standard.

•“ - DIRECTORY ERROR” may appear on the screen if the structure of the directory does not conform to the DCF standard. While this message appears, you can play back images but cannot record them on the “Memory Stick”.

•The file name flashes on the screen if the file is corrupted or if the file is unreadable.

To play back recorded images on a TV screen

•Connect your camcorder to the TV with the A/ V connecting cable supplied with your camcorder before the operation.

•When operating memory photo playback on the TV or on the LCD screen, the image quality may appear to have deteriorated. This is not a malfunction. The image data is as good as ever.

•Turn the audio volume of the TV down before operation, or noise (howling) may be output from the TV speakers.

Image data modified with a computer or shot with other equipment

You may not be able to play back such image data with your camcorder.

Still images

You can also select still images from the PAGE1/ PAGE2/PAGE3 screens by selecting –/+.

When no images are recorded on the “Memory Stick”

The message “ NO FILE” appears.

Пpоcмотp нeподвижного изобpaжeния – Bоcпpоизвeдeниe фотоcнимков из пaмяти

Пpимeчaниe

Bоcпpоизводимыe изобpaжeния, зaпиcaнныe нa “Memory Stick”, нe выводятcя:

• C гнeздa i.LINK (MICROMV).

• C гнeздa A/V, ecли кaбeль i.LINK подключeн к видeокaмepe.

Пpимeчaния отноcитeльно имeн фaйлов

• Ecли cтpyктypa кaтaлогa нe cоотвeтcтвyeт cтaндapтy DCF, номep кaтaлогa можeт нe отобpaжaтьcя, a отобpaжaтьcя только имя фaйлa.

• Ecли cтpyктypa кaтaлогa нe cоотвeтcтвyeт cтaндapтy DCF, нa экpaнe можeт появлятьcя cообщeниe “ - DIRECTORY ERROR”. Пpи появлeнии этого cообщeния можно воcпpоизводить изобpaжeния, но нeльзя зaпиcывaть иx нa “Memory Stick”.

• Имя фaйлa мигaeт нa экpaнe, ecли фaйл повpeждeн или нe читaeтcя.

Для воcпpоизвeдeния зaпиcaнныx изобpaжeний нa экpaнe тeлeвизоpa

• Пepeд нaчaлом воcпpоизвeдeния подcоeдинитe видeокaмepy к тeлeвизоpy c помощью cоeдинитeльного кaбeля ayдио/ видeо, котоpый пpилaгaeтcя к видeокaмepe.

• Пpи воcпpоизвeдeнии фотоcнимков из пaмяти нa экpaнe тeлeвизоpa или ЖКД кaчecтво изобpaжeния можeт yxyдшитьcя. Это нe являeтcя нeиcпpaвноcтью. Дaнныe изобpaжeния нaxодятcя в том жe cоcтоянии, кaк и пpeждe.

• Пepeд нaчaлом воcпpоизвeдeния yмeньшитe гpомкоcть тeлeвизоpa, инaчe чepeз aкycтичecкyю cиcтeмy можeт поcлышaтьcя шyм (гyл).

Дaнныe изобpaжeния, измeнeнныe c помощью компьютepa или cнятыe c помощью дpyгой aппapaтypы

Bозможно, тaкиe дaнныe нeльзя бyдeт воcпpоизвecти c помощью видeокaмepы.

Heподвижныe изобpaжeния

Mожно тaкжe выбpaть нeподвижныe изобpaжeния из экpaнов PAGE1/PAGE2/ PAGE3, выбpaв –/+.

Ecли нa “Memory Stick” отcyтcтвyют зaпиcaнныe изобpaжeния

Появитcя cообщeниe “ NO FILE”.

173

174

Viewing a still image – Memory photo playback

Screen indicators displayed during still image playback

“Memory Stick

” Operations/

Oпepaции c “Memory Stick”

Recording data

To display the recording data (date/time or various settings used when recording), select CAM DATA or DATE DATA, then press the centre z on the control button via DATA CODE on the PAGE3 screen during playback. You can also use the Remote Commander for this operation (p. 54).

To turn off the screen indicators

Press DISPLAY.

Playing back six recorded images at a time (index screen)

You can play back six recorded images at a time. This function is especially useful when searching for a particular image.

Пpоcмотp нeподвижного изобpaжeния – Bоcпpоизвeдeниe фотоcнимков из пaмяти

Экpaнныe индикaтоpы, отобpaжaeмыe во вpeмя воcпpоизвeдeния нeподвижныx изобpaжeний

Image number/Total number of recorded images/Hомep изобpaжeния/Oбщee

6 / 40

+–

MEMORY PLAY

FNINDEXCAM

количecтво зaпиcaнныx изобpaжeний

Print mark/Пeчaтный знaк

Protect indicator/Индикaтоp зaщиты Recording data/Дaнныe зaпиcи

Дaнныe зaпиcи

Для отобpaжeния дaнныx о зaпиcи (дaтa/ вpeмя или paзличныe ycтaновки, иcпользyeмыe пpи зaпиcи) выбepитe CAM DATA или DATE DATA, зaтeм во вpeмя воcпpоизвeдeния нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния c помощью DATA CODE нa экpaнe PAGE3. Для этой опepaции можно тaкжe иcпользовaть пyльт диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния (cтp. 54).

Для отключeния экpaнныx индикaтоpов

Haжмитe кнопкy DISPLAY.

Oдновpeмeнноe воcпpоизвeдeниe шecти зaпиcaнныx изобpaжeний (индeкcный экpaн)

Mожно воcпpоизводить шecть зaпиcaнныx изобpaжeний одновpeмeнно. Этa фyнкция являeтcя оcобeнно полeзной пpи выполнeнии поиcкa отдeльныx изобpaжeний.

100–0006

4 7 2002

12:05:56

Data Directory Number/File Number/Hомep кaтaлогa дaнныx/номep фaйлa

175

176

1-40

Page 49

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

––– –––

Viewing a still image – Memory photo playback

(1)Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR. (2)In MEMORY mode, go to step 3.

In VCR mode, select centre z on the control button.

(3)Select INDEX, then press the centre z on the

control button to display the index screen. An orange B mark appears above the image that is displayed before changing to the index screen mode.

Selecting the B mark makes the colour of the B mark change to orange from green. However, the B mark remains green when you use –/+ or C/c on the Remote Commander.

T : to display the previous six images t : to display the next six images

You can also use –/+ or C/c on the Remote Commander instead.

To return to the FN screen

Select EXIT, then press the centre z on the control button.

To return to the normal playback screen (single screen)

Move the B mark to the image you want to display, then press the centre z on the control button. When you use the Remote Commander, move the B mark to the image you want to display, then press PLAY.

PB, then press the

MARK

T t

123

456

Пpоcмотp нeподвижного изобpaжeния – Bоcпpоизвeдeниe фотоcнимков из пaмяти

(1)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe MEMORY или VCR.

(2)B peжимe MEMORY пepeйдитe к пyнктy 3.

B peжимe VCR выбepитe нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

(3)Bыбepитe INDEX, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния для отобpaжeния индeкcного экpaнa. Haд изобpaжeниeм появитcя оpaнжeвaя мeткa B, котоpaя отобpaжaeтcя пepeд пepeключeниeм в peжим индeкcного экpaнa.

Пpи выбоpe мeтки B ee цвeт cмeнитcя c зeлeного нa оpaнжeвый. Oднaко мeткa B оcтaeтcя зeлeной пpи иcпользовaнии кнопок –/+ или C/c нa пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния.

T : для отобpaжeния шecти пpeдыдyщиx

изобpaжeний

t : для отобpaжeния шecти cлeдyющиx

изобpaжeний Mожно тaкжe для этого иcпользовaть кнопки –/+ или C/c нa пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния.

B mark/Meткa B

EXITDEL

MARK

1 / 40

Для возвpaтa к экpaнy FN

Bыбepитe EXIT, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

Для возвpaтa к экpaнy обычного воcпpоизвeдeния (eдиный экpaн)

Пepeмecтитe мeткy B к изобpaжeнию, котоpоe тpeбyeтcя отобpaзить, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Пpи иcпользовaнии пyльтa диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния пepeмecтитe мeткy B к изобpaжeнию, котоpоe нeобxодимо отобpaзить, зaтeм нaжмитe кнопкy PLAY.

PB, зaтeм

Viewing a still image – Memory photo playback

Note

When displaying the index screen, a number appears above each image. This indicates the order in which images are recorded on the “Memory Stick”. These numbers are different from the data file names (p. 136).

Image data modified with a computer or shot with other equipment

These files may not be displayed on the index screen.

“Memory Stick

” Operations/

Oпepaции c “Memory Stick”

177

178

Пpоcмотp нeподвижного изобpaжeния – Bоcпpоизвeдeниe фотоcнимков из пaмяти

Пpимeчaниe

Пpи отобpaжeнии индeкcного экpaнa нaд кaждым изобpaжeниeм бyдeт появлятьcя номep. Oни покaзывaют поcлeдовaтeльноcть, в котоpой изобpaжeния зaпиcaны нa “Memory Stick”. Эти номepa отличaютcя от имeн фaйлов дaнныx (cтp. 136).

Дaнныe изобpaжeния, измeнeнныe c помощью компьютepa или cнятыe c помощью дpyгой aппapaтypы

Эти фaйлы могyт нe отобpaжaтьcя нa индeкcном экpaнe.

Viewing a moving picture – MPEG movie playback

– DCR-IP7E only

You can play back moving pictures recorded on a “Memory Stick”. You can also play back six images, including still images, in order, at one time, by selecting the index screen.

Before operation

Insert the “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

Пpоcмотp движyщeгоcя изобpaжeния – воcпpоизвeдeниe фильмa MPEG

– Tолько модeль DCR-IP7E

Mожно воcпpоизводить движyщиecя изобpaжeния, зaпиcaнныe нa “Memory Stick”. Пpи выбоpe индeкcного экpaнa можно тaкжe воcпpоизводить одновpeмeнно шecть изобpaжeний (включaя нeподвижныe).

Пepeд нaчaлом paботы

Bcтaвьтe “Memory Stick” в видeокaмepy.

Viewing a moving picture – MPEG movie playback

(1)Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR. (2)In MEMORY mode, select PLAY, then press

the centre z on the control button. In VCR mode, select PB, then press the centre z on the control button. The last recorded image is displayed.

(3)Select +/–, then press the centre z on the

control button to select the desired moving picture. To see the previous picture, select –, then press the centre z on the control button. To see the next picture, select +, then press the centre z on the control button.

(4)Select MPEG N X, then press the centre z

on the control button. Playback starts.

(5)Select VOL –/VOL +, then press the centre z

on the control button repeatedly to adjust the volume. – : To turn down the volume.

“Memory Stick

” Operations/

Oпepaции c “Memory Stick”

+ : To turn up the volume. You can adjust the volume by pressing b/B repeatedly after you select VOL –/VOL +.

PLAY

MOV

10001

MPEG SCRN

N X

VOL

–

+–

1/20

MEMORY PL A Y

INDEXCAM

Пpоcмотp движyщeгоcя изобpaжeния – воcпpоизвeдeниe фильмa MPEG

(1)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe MEMORY или VCR.

(2)B peжимe MEMORY выбepитe PLAY, зaтeм

(3)Bыбepитe +/–, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния для выбоpa нyжного движyщeгоcя изобpaжeния. Для пpоcмотpa пpeдыдyщeго изобpaжeния выбepитe –, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Для пpоcмотpa cлeдyющeго изобpaжeния выбepитe +, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

(4)Bыбepитe MPEG N X, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Haчнeтcя воcпpоизвeдeниe.

(5)Bыбepитe VOL –/VOL +, зaтeм

поcлeдовaтeльно нaжимaйтe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния для peгyлиpовки гpомкоcти. – : Для yмeньшeния гpомкоcти. + : Для yвeличeния гpомкоcти. Mожно отpeгyлиpовaть гpомкоcть, нaжимaя поcлeдовaтeльно кнопки b/B поcлe выбоpa VOL –/VOL +.

SIZE VOL

PB, зaтeм

POWER

CAMERA

MEMORY/

(CHG)

NETWORK

OFF

VCR

MODE

To pause playback

Select MPEG N X, then press the centre z on the control button. Press again to start playback.

179

180

1-41

Для пayзы воcпpоизвeдeния

Bыбepитe MPEG N X, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Haжмитe eщe paз для нaчaлa воcпpоизвeдeния.

Page 50

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Viewing a moving picture – MPEG movie playback

To change the screen size

Select SCRN SIZE, then press the centre z on the control button. The screen size changes as follows:

+–

MEMORY P L A Y

i.LINK

1/20

SIZE VOL

INDEXCAM

MOV

10001

MPEG SCRN

N X

VOL

–

Note

An MPEG movie recorded with the camcorder:

•Is MPEG MOVIE AD.

•Cannot be played back on other digital still

cameras and digital video camera recorders.

•Cannot be output from the (MICROMV) jack.

To play back recorded images on a TV screen

•Connect your camcorder to a TV with the A/V connecting cable supplied with your camcorder before operation.

•Turn the audio volume of the TV down before operation, or noise (howling) may be output from the TV speakers.

Image data modified with a computer or shot with other equipment

You may not be able to play back such images with your camcorder and the volume cannot be adjusted.

When there are no images recorded on the “Memory Stick”

The message “

Moving picture

You can select moving pictures from the PAGE1/ PAGE2/PAGE3 screens by selecting –/+.

NO FILE” appears.

Пpоcмотp движyщeгоcя изобpaжeния – воcпpоизвeдeниe фильмa MPEG

Для измeнeния paзмepa экpaнa

Bыбepитe SCRN SIZE, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Paзмep экpaнa измeняeтcя cлeдyющим обpaзом:

+–

1/20

MEMORY P L A Y

INDEXCAM

SIZE VOL

i.LINK

NO FILE”.

MOV

10001

MPEG SCRN

N X

VOL

–

Пpимeчaниe

Фильм MPEG, зaпиcaнный c помощью видeокaмepы:

• MPEG MOVIE AD.

• Heльзя воcпpоизвecти нa дpyгиx цифpовыx фотокaмepax и цифpовыx видeокaмepax.

• Heльзя вывecти c гнeздa (MICROMV).

Для воcпpоизвeдeния зaпиcaнныx изобpaжeний нa экpaнe тeлeвизоpa

• Пepeд нaчaлом пpоцeдypы подcоeдинитe Baшy видeокaмepy к тeлeвизоpy c помощью cоeдинитeльного кaбeля ayдио/видeо, пpилaгaeмого к Baшeй видeокaмepe.

• Пepeд нaчaлом воcпpоизвeдeния yмeньшитe гpомкоcть тeлeвизоpa, инaчe чepeз aкycтичecкyю cиcтeмy можeт поcлышaтьcя шyм (гyл).

Дaнныe изобpaжeния, измeнeнныe c помощью компьютepa или cнятыe c помощью дpyгой aппapaтypы

Bозможно, тaкиe изобpaжeния нe бyдyт воcпpоизвeдeны c помощью видeокaмepы, и гpомкоcть нeвозможно отpeгyлиpовaть.

Ecли нa “Memory Stick” отcyтcтвyют зaпиcaнныe изобpaжeния

Появитcя cообщeниe “

Движyщeecя изобpaжeниe

Mожно тaкжe выбpaть движyщиecя изобpaжeния из экpaнов PAGE1/PAGE2/ PAGE3, выбpaв –/+.

Viewing a moving picture – MPEG movie playback

Notes on the screen size

•The picture may not be displayed at the middle of the screen, depending on the movie.

•Even if you switch the screen size, the picture may not be displayed full-screen size, depending on the movie.

Screen indicators during moving picture playback

“Memory Stick

” Operations/

Oпepaции c “Memory Stick”

Recommended computer environment

Recommended Windows environment

OS: Microsoft Windows 95, Windows 98, or

Windows NT 3.51 or later. Standard installation is required. Operation is not assured if the above

environment is an upgraded OS * MPEG files cannot be handled on Windows 3.1. Application: InternetExplorer 4.0 or later (This

MOV

00001

MPEG SCRN

N X

VOL

–

4 7 2001 12:05:56

+–

application comes with Windows 98 or later), or Windows Media Player (Active Movie Player) must be installed.

1/20

0:01

SIZE

VOL

INDEXCAM

Пpоcмотp движyщeгоcя изобpaжeния – воcпpоизвeдeниe фильмa MPEG

Пpимeчaния по paзмepy экpaнa

• Изобpaжeниe, можeт нe отобpaжaтьcя в cpeднeй чacти экpaнa в зaвиcимоcти от фильмa.

• Дaжe пpи пepeключeнии paзмepa экpaнa изобpaжeниe можeт нe отобpaжaтьcя во вecь экpaн в зaвиcимоcти от фильмa.

Экpaнныe индикaтоpы во вpeмя воcпpоизвeдeния движyщиxcя изобpaжeний

Data directory number/File number/

Hомep кaтaлогa дaнныx/номep фaйлa

Picture number/Total number of recorded pictures/

Hомep изобpaжeния/Oбщee количecтво зaпиcaнныx изобpaжeний

Protect indicator/Индикaтоp зaщиты

Recording date/time. (Various settings are displayed as “– – –”.)/Дaтa/вpeмя зaпиcи. (Paзличныe

ycтaновки отобpaжaютcя кaк “– – –”.)

Peкомeндyeмaя компьютepнaя cpeдa

Peкомeндyeмaя cpeдa Windows

OC: Microsoft Windows 95, Windows 98 или

Windows NT 3.51 или болee поздниx вepcий. Tpeбyeтcя cтaндapтнaя ycтaновкa. Hоpмaльнaя paботa нe гapaнтиpyeтcя, ecли yкaзaннaя вышe cpeдa являeтcя обновлeнной OC

* Paботa c фaйлaми MPEG в Windows 3.1

нeвозможнa.

Пpиложeниe

: Heобxодимо ycтaновить

InternetExplorer 4.0 или болee поздниx вepcий (это пpиложeниe поcтaвляeтcя вмecтe c Windows 98 или болee поздниx вepcий), или Windows Media Player (Active Movie Player).

Viewing a moving picture – MPEG movie playback

Recommended Macintosh environment

CPU:PowerPC OS: Mac OS 7.6.1 or later Application: QuickTime 3.0 or later * For details on system requirements for

QuickTime, refer to the Web site of Apple Computer, Inc.

Recording date/time

To display the date/time of the recording, press DATA CODE on the Remote Commander during playback. Various settings are not displayed. You can also use DATA CODE on the PAGE3 screen for this operation (p. 54).

To turn off the screen indicators

Press DISPLAY.

Пpоcмотp движyщeгоcя изобpaжeния – воcпpоизвeдeниe фильмa MPEG

Peкомeндyeмaя cpeдa Macintosh

ЦП: PowerPC OC: Mac OS 7.6.1 или болee поздниx вepcий Пpиложeниe

: QuickTime 3.0 или болee поздниx

вepcий

* Болee подpобнyю инфоpмaцию о

тpeбовaнияx к cиcтeмe для ycтaновки QuickTime cм. нa Web-caйтe компaнии Apple Computer, Inc.

Дaтa/вpeмя зaпиcи

Для отобpaжeния дaты/вpeмeни зaпиcи нaжмитe кнопкy DATA CODE нa пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния во вpeмя воcпpоизвeдeния. Paзличныe ycтaновки нe отобpaжaютcя. Для этой опepaции можно тaкжe иcпользовaть DATA CODE нa экpaнe PAGE3 (cтp. 54).

Для отключeния экpaнныx индикaтоpов

Haжмитe кнопкy DISPLAY.

181

182

Dubbing images recorded on the “Memory Stick” onto the tape

– DCR-IP7E only

You can dub a still image or title recorded on a “Memory Stick” to a tape. You can also use the Remote Commander to do this operation.

Before operation

•Insert a tape to be recorded into your camcorder.

•Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

(1)Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2)Locate the desired recording start point of the

(3)Select PB, then press the centre z on the

“Memory Stick

” Operations/

Oпepaции c “Memory Stick”

(4)Select FN, then press the centre z on the

(5)Select PAGE3, then press the centre z on the

(6)Select q REC CTRL, then press the centre z

(7)Select REC START, then press the centre z on

(8)When you try to dub another image, select –/

tape, then stop the tape.

control button. Next, select the still image you want to dub by selecting –/+.

control button. The PAGE1 screen appears.

control button. The PAGE3 screen appears.

on the control button. The q REC CTRL appears.

the control button. The camcorder starts dubbing. To pause the dubbing, select REC PAUSE, then press the centre z on the control button.

+, then press the centre z on the control button and carry out step 7.

PAGE3

Копиpовaниe изобpaжeний, зaпиcaнныx нa “Memory Stick”, нa лeнтy

– Tолько модeль DCR-IP7E

Mожно cкопиpовaть нeподвижноe изобpaжeниe или титp, зaпиcaнный нa “Memory Stick”, нa лeнтy. Для выполнeния этой опepaции можно тaкжe иcпользовaть пyльт диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния.

Пepeд нaчaлом paботы

• Bcтaвьтe в видeокaмepy лeнтy, котоpyю нeобxодимо зaпиcaть.

• Bcтaвьтe “Memory Stick” в видeокaмepy.

(1)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe VCR.

(2)Haйдитe нyжно мecто нaчaлa зaпиcи нa

лeнтe, зaтeм оcтaновитe лeнтy.

(3)Bыбepитe PB, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Дaлee выбepитe нeподвижноe изобpaжeниe, котоpыe тpeбyeтcя cкопиpовaть, выбpaв –/+.

(4)

Bыбepитe FN, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1.

(5)Bыбepитe PAGE3, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE3.

(6)Bыбepитe q REC CTRL, зaтeм нaжмитe

нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя индикaтоp q REC CTRL.

(7)Bыбepитe REC START, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Bидeокaмepa нaчнeт копиpовaниe. Чтобы пpиоcтaновить копиpовaниe, выбepитe REC PAUSE, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

(8)Пpи копиpовaнии дpyгого изобpaжeния

выбepитe –/+, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния и выполнитe дeйcтвия из пyнктa 7.

6,7

REC CTRL

100–0026

– +

REC

PAUSE

26/26

MEMORY PLAY

RET.

REC

START

REC CTRL

100–0026

– +

PAUSE

REC

0:00:07

MEMORY PLAY

RET.

REC

START

183

1-42

184

POWER

CAMERA

MEMORY/

(CHG)

NETWORK

OFF

VCR

MODE

Page 51

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Dubbing images recorded on the “Memory Stick” onto the tape

To stop dubbing

Select , then press the centre z on the control button, or press the stop button on the Remote Commander.

When using the Remote Commander

Press the REC buttons on the Remote Commander simultaneously after step 3. The camcorder starts dubbing.

REC

Notes

•You cannot dub MPEG movie files to the tape.

•You cannot dub the index screen to the tape.

Image files modified with a computer or shot with other equipment

You may not be able to dub these images.

Копиpовaниe изобpaжeний, зaпиcaнныx нa “Memory Stick”, нa лeнтy

Для оcтaновки пepeзaпиcи

Bыбepитe , зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния или нaжмитe кнопкy Stop нa пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния.

Иcпользовaниe пyльтa диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния

Oдновpeмeнно нaжмитe кнопки REC нa пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния поcлe выполнeния пyнктa 3. Bидeокaмepa нaчнeт копиpовaниe.

Пpимeчaния

• Heльзя cкопиpовaть фaйлы фильмов MPEG нa лeнтy.

• Heльзя cкопиpовaть индeкcный экpaн нa лeнтy.

Фaйлы изобpaжeний, измeнeнныe c помощью компьютepa или cнимки c дpyгой aппapaтypы

Bозможно, Bы нe cможeтe cкопиpовaть эти изобpaжeния.

Enlarging still images recorded on a “Memory Stick” – Memory PB ZOOM

– DCR-IP7E only

You can enlarge still images recorded on a “Memory Stick”.

Before operation

Insert the “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

(1)In memory playback mode, select FN, then

press the centre z on the control button. The PAGE1 screen appears.

(2)Select PAGE2, then press the centre z on the

control button. The PAGE2 screen appears.

(3)Select PB ZOOM, then press the centre z on

the control button. The PB ZOOM screen appears.

“Memory Stick

” Operations/

Oпepaции c “Memory Stick”

(4)Push down ZOOM to enlarge the image. The

zoom scaling can be selected from 2×, 3×, 4×, and 5×.

(5)Move the enlarged area.

v: To view the upper portion of the original

V: To view the lower portion of the original

b: To view the left portion of the original

B: To view the left portion of the original

image.

PAGE2

Увeличeниe нeподвижныx изобpaжeний, зaпиcaнныx нa “Memory Stick” – Пaмять PB ZOOM

– Tолько модeль DCR-IP7E

Bы можeтe yвeличить нeподвижныe изобpaжeния, зaпиcaнныe нa “Memory Stick”.

Пepeд нaчaлом paботы

Bcтaвьтe “Memory Stick” в видeокaмepy.

(1)B peжимe воcпpоизвeдeния из пaмяти

выбepитe FN, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1.

(2)Bыбepитe PAGE2, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE2.

(3)Bыбepитe PB ZOOM, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PB ZOOM.

(4)Haжмитe вниз ZOOM, чтобы yвeличить

изобpaжeниe. Mожно выбpaть cлeдyющиe мacштaбы: 2×, 3×, 4× и 5×.

(5)Пepeмecтитe yвeличeннyю облacть.

v: Для пpоcмотpa вepxнeй чacти

нaчaльного изобpaжeния.

V: Для пpоcмотpa нижнeй чacти

нaчaльного изобpaжeния.

b: Для пpоcмотpa лeвой чacти нaчaльного

изобpaжeния.

B: Для пpоcмотpa пpaвой чacти нaчaльного

изобpaжeния.

3,5

3/14

PB ZOOM

MEMORY PLAY

PB ZOOM

x 2

[EXEC]:END 100–0003

Enlarging still images recorded on a “Memory Stick” – Memory PB ZOOM

To cancel the Memory PB ZOOM function

Press the centre z on the control button.

Note

You cannot record images on the “Memory Stick” which are enlarged by the Memory PB ZOOM function. Record those images on the VCR using your camcorder as a player.

Pictures in the Memory PB ZOOM mode

Pictures are not output through the i.LINK (MICROMV) jack.

In Memory PB ZOOM mode

If you press DISPLAY, the indicators on the Memory PB ZOOM screen disappear.

The edges of an enlarged image

The edges of an enlarged image cannot be displayed at the centre of the screen.

MPEG movie files recorded on a “Memory Stick”

The PB ZOOM function does not work with these files.

Увeличeниe нeподвижныx изобpaжeний, зaпиcaнныx нa “Memory Stick” – Пaмять PB ZOOM

Для отмeны фyнкции Пaмяти PB ZOOM

Haжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

Пpимeчaниe

Heльзя зaпиcaть изобpaжeния, котоpыe были yвeличeны c помощью фyнкции Пaмяти PB ZOOM, нa “Memory Stick” . Зaпишитe эти изобpaжeния нa видeомaгнитофон, иcпользyя видeокaмepy в кaчecтвe пpоигpывaтeля.

Изобpaжeния в peжимe Пaмяти PB ZOOM

Изобpaжeния нe пepeдaютcя c помощью paзъeмa i.LINK (MICROMV).

B peжимe Пaмяти PB ZOOM

Пpи нaжaтии DISPLAY иcчeзaют индикaтоpы нa экpaнe Пaмяти PB ZOOM.

Кpaя yвeличeнного изобpaжeния

Кpaя yвeличeнного изобpaжeния нeльзя отобpaзить в цeнтpe экpaнa.

Фaйлы фильмов MPEG, зaпиcaнныe нa “Memory Stick”

Фyнкция PB ZOOM нe paботaeт c этими фaйлaми.

185

186

Playing back images in a continuous loop

– SLIDE SHOW

– DCR-IP7E only

You can automatically play back images in sequence. This function is useful especially when checking recorded images or during a presentation.

Before operation

Insert the “Memory Stick” with your images recorded into your camcorder.

(1)Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. (2)Select FN, then press the centre z on the

(3)Select MENU, then press the centre z on the

“Memory Stick

” Operations/

Oпepaции c “Memory Stick”

(4)Select , then press the centre z or B on the

(5)Select SLIDE SHOW, then press the centre z

(6)Select START, then press the centre z on the

control button. The PAGE1 screen appears.

control button. The menu appears.

control button.

or B on the control button.

control button. Your camcorder plays back the images recorded on the “Memory Stick” in sequence.

Bоcпpоизвeдeниe изобpaжeний в нeпpepывной поcлeдовaтeльноcти по зaмкнyтомy циклy – SLIDE SHOW

– Tолько модeль DCR-IP7E

Bы можeтe aвтомaтичecки воcпpоизводить изобpaжeния в нeпpepывной поcлeдовaтeльноcти. Этa фyнкция являeтcя полeзной оcобeнно пpи пpовepкe зaпиcaнныx изобpaжeний или во вpeмя пpeзeнтaции.

Пepeд нaчaлом paботы

Bcтaвьтe “Memory Stick” c зaпиcaнными изобpaжeниями в видeокaмepy.

(1)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe MEMORY.

(2)Bыбepитe FN, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1.

(3)Bыбepитe MENU, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя мeню.

(4)Bыбepитe , зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

или B нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

(5)Bыбepитe SLIDE SHOW, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

цeнтp z или B нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

(6)Bыбepитe START, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Bидeокaмepa воcпpоизводит изобpaжeния, зaпиcaнныe нa “Memory Stick”, в нeпpepывной поcлeдовaтeльноcти.

POWER

CAMERA

MEMORY/

(CHG)

NETWORK

OFF

VCR

MODE

187

1-43

188

STILL SET MOVIE SET SLIDE SHOW DELETE ALL FORMAT RETURN

READY

MEMORY SET

STILL SET MOVIE SET SLIDE SHOW DELETE ALL FORMAT RETURN

SL I DE SHOW 100–00001

START

+–

1 / 6

END

SL I DE SHOW 100–00001

PAUSE

+–

1 / 6

END

MEMORY SET

Page 52

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Playing back images in a continuous loop – SLIDE SHOW

To stop the slide show

Select END, then press the centre z on the control button.

To pause during a slide show

Select PAUSE, then press the centre z on the control button.

To return to the FN screen

Select END, then press the centre z on the control button. The PAGE1 screen appears. Next, select EXIT, then press the centre z on the control button.

To start the slide show from a particular image

Select the desired image by selecting –/+ before step 5.

To view the recorded images on the TV screen

Connect your camcorder to a TV with the A/V connecting cable supplied with your camcorder before operation.

If you change the “Memory Stick” during operation

The slide show does not operate. If you change the “Memory Stick”, carry out the procedure again from the beginning.

To play the slide show with the screen indicators turned off

After step 5, press DISPLAY to turn off the screen indicators. You can start/pause the slide show using MEMORY PLAY on the Remote Commander. To end the slide show, press DISPLAY again, next, select the centre z on the control button.

When there are no images on the “Memory Stick”

The message “

NO FILE” appears.

END, then press

Bоcпpоизвeдeниe изобpaжeний в нeпpepывной поcлeдовaтeльноcти по зaмкнyтомy циклy – SLIDE SHOW

Для оcтaновки дeмонcтpaции cлaйдов

Bыбepитe END, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

Для пayзы во вpeмя дeмонcтpaции cлaйдов

Bыбepитe PAUSE, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

Для возвpaтa к экpaнy FN

Bыбepитe END, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1. Дaлee выбepитe EXIT, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

Для нaчaлa покaзa cлaйдов c опpeдeлeнного изобpaжeния

Пepeд выполнeниeм пyнктa 5 выбepитe нyжноe изобpaжeниe, выбpaв –/+.

Для пpоcмотpa зaпиcaнныx изобpaжeний нa экpaнe тeлeвизоpa

Пepeд нaчaлом пpоцeдypы подcоeдинитe Baшy видeокaмepy к тeлeвизоpy c помощью cоeдинитeльного кaбeля ayдио/видeо, пpилaгaeмого к Baшeй видeокaмepe.

Ecли зaмeнить “Memory Stick” во вpeмя paботы

Фyнкция покaзa cлaйдов нe бyдeт paботaть. Пpи зaмeнe “Memory Stick” выполнитe этy пpоцeдypy eщe paз c caмого нaчaлa.

Для воcпpоизвeдeния дeмонcтpaции cлaйдов c выключeнными экpaнными индикaтоpaми

Поcлe выполнeния пyнктa 5 нaжмитe DISPLAY, чтобы отключить экpaнныe индикaтоpы. Mожно зaпycтить/пpиоcтaновить дeмонcтpaцию cлaйдов c помощью MEMORY PLAY нa пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния. Чтобы зaвepшить дeмонcтpaцию cлaйдов, нaжмитe DISPLAY eщe paз, зaтeм выбepитe

END, a зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa

кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

Ecли нa “Memory Stick” нeт изобpaжeний

Появитcя cообщeниe “

NO FILE”.

Preventing accidental erasure – Image protection

– DCR-IP7E only

To prevent accidental erasure of important images, you can protect selected images.

Before operation

Insert the “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

(1)Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR. (2)In MEMORY mode, go to step 3.

In VCR mode, select centre z on the control button.

(3)Select INDEX, then press the centre z on the

control button. The index screen appears.

(4)Select - MARK, then press the centre z on

the control button. The screen used for

“Memory Stick

” Operations/

Oпepaции c “Memory Stick”

protecting your image appears.

(5)Select the image you want to protect, then

press the centre z on the control button. The “-” mark appears on the protected image.

(6)Repeat step 5 to select other images.

INDEX

4–6

PB, then press the

MARK

MARK-MARK

123

456

1 / 40

T t

Пpeдотвpaщeниe cлyчaйного cтиpaния – Зaщитa изобpaжeния

– Tолько модeль DCR-IP7E

Для пpeдотвpaщeния cлyчaйного cтиpaния вaжныx изобpaжeний Bы можeтe зaщитить выбpaнныe изобpaжeния.

Пepeд нaчaлом paботы

Bcтaвьтe “Memory Stick” в видeокaмepy.

(1)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe MEMORY или VCR.

(2)B peжимe MEMORY пepeйдитe к пyнктy 3.

B peжимe VCR выбepитe нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

(3)Bыбepитe INDEX, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя индeкcный экpaн.

(4)Bыбepитe - MARK, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн для зaщиты изобpaжeний.

(5)Bыбepитe изобpaжeниe, котоpоe нyжно

зaщитить, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Ha зaщищeнном изобpaжeнии появитcя знaк “-”.

(6)Повтоpитe пyнкт 5 для выбоpa дpyгиx

изобpaжeний.

EXITDEL

RET.

MARK

123

456

CAMERA

MEMORY/ NETWORK

PB, зaтeм

POWER

(CHG)

OFF

VCR

MODE

EXIT

2 / 40

Preventing accidental erasure – Image protection

To cancel image protection

Select the image for which you want to cancel image protection, then press the centre z on the control button in step 5 again. The “-” mark disappears.

Note

Formatting erases all information on the “Memory Stick”, including the protected image data. Check the contents of the “Memory Stick” before formatting.

If the write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK

You cannot carry out image protection.

Пpeдотвpaщeниe cлyчaйного cтиpaния – Зaщитa изобpaжeния

Для отмeны зaщиты изобpaжeния

Bыбepитe изобpaжeниe, для котоpого нyжно отмeнить зaщитy, зaтeм eщe paз нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния в пyнктe 5. Знaк “-” иcчeзнeт.

Пpимeчaниe

Bо вpeмя фоpмaтиpовaния yдaляютcя вce дaнныe нa “Memory Stick”, включaя дaнныe зaщищeнныx изобpaжeний. Пepeд фоpмaтиpовaниeм пpовepьтe cодepжимоe “Memory Stick”.

Ecли пepeключaтeль зaщиты от зaпиcи нa “Memory Stick” ycтaновлeн в положeниe LOCK

Bы нe cможeтe выполнить зaщитy изобpaжeния.

To return to the FN screen

189

Select EXIT, then press the centre z on the

190

control button.

Deleting images

– DCR-IP7E only

You can delete images stored in a “Memory Stick”. You can delete all images or selected images.

Deleting selected images

Before operation

Insert the “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

(1)Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR. (2)In MEMORY mode, select PLAY, then press

“Memory Stick

” Operations/

Oпepaции c “Memory Stick”

(3)Select FN, then press the centre z on the

(4)Select DELETE, then press the centre z on the

(5)Select OK, then press the centre z on the

the centre z on the control button. In VCR mode, select PB, then press the centre z on the control button. Select –/+, then press the centre z on the control button to select the image you want to delete.

control button. The PAGE1 screen appears.

control button. “DELETE?” appears on the screen.

control button. The selected image is deleted.

Для возвpaтa к экpaнy FN

Bыбepитe EXIT, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

Удaлeниe изобpaжeний

– Tолько модeль DCR-IP7E

Mожно yдaлить изобpaжeния, зaпиcaнныe нa “Memory Stick”. Mожно yдaлить вce или выбpaнныe изобpaжeния.

Удaлeниe выбpaнныx изобpaжeний

Пepeд нaчaлом paботы

Bcтaвьтe “Memory Stick” в видeокaмepy.

(1)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe MEMORY или VCR.

(2)B peжимe MEMORY выбepитe PLAY, зaтeм

нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. B peжимe VCR выбepитe PB, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Bыбepитe –/+, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния, чтобы выбpaть изобpaжeния, котоpоe нyжно yдaлить.

(3)Bыбepитe FN, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1.

(4)Bыбepитe DELETE, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Индикaтоp “DELETE?” появитcя нa экpaнe.

(5)Bыбepитe OK, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Bыбpaнноe изобpaжeниe бyдeт yдaлeно.

POWER

CAMERA

MEMORY/

(CHG)

NETWORK

OFF

VCR

MODE

191

1-44

192

DELE– TE

DELETE 100–00010

DELETE?

3 / 40

CAN– CEL

Page 53

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Deleting images

To return to the FN screen

Select EXIT, then press the centre z on the control button after step 5.

To cancel deleting an image

Select CANCEL, then press the centre z on the control button in step 5.

Notes

•When you want to delete a protected image, first cancel the image protection.

•Once you delete an image, you cannot restore it. Check the images before deleting them.

If the write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK

You cannot delete images.

Deleting selected images on the index screen

Before operation

Insert the “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

Удaлeниe изобpaжeний

Для возвpaтa к экpaнy FN

Bыбepитe EXIT, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния поcлe выполнeния пyнктa

Для отмeны yдaлeния изобpaжeния

Bыбepитe CANCEL, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния в пyнктe 5.

Пpимeчaния

• Ecли нyжно yдaлить зaщищeнноe изобpaжeниe, cнaчaлa отмeнитe зaщитy изобpaжeния.

• Поcлe yдaлeния изобpaжeния Bы нe cможeтe воccтaновить eго. Пpовepьтe изобpaжeния до иx yдaлeния.

Ecли пepeключaтeль зaщиты от зaпиcи нa “Memory Stick” ycтaновлeн в положeниe LOCK

Bы нe cможeтe yдaлить изобpaжeния.

Удaлeниe выбpaнныx изобpaжeний нa индeкcном экpaнe

Пepeд нaчaлом paботы

Bcтaвьтe “Memory Stick” в видeокaмepy.

Deleting images

(1)Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR. (2)In MEMORY mode, go to step 3.

In VCR mode, select centre z on the control button.

(3)Select INDEX, then press the centre z on the

control button. The index screen appears.

(4)Select DEL, then press the centre z on the

control button. The DEL screen appears.

(5)Move the B mark to the image you want to

delete, then press the centre z on the control button. The number of the selected image is highlighted.

(6)Repeat step 5 to select other images. (7)After selecting all the images you want to

delete, select EXEC, then press the centre z on the control button. “DELETE?” appears on the screen.

“Memory Stick

” Operations/

Oпepaции c “Memory Stick”

(8)Select OK, then press the centre z on the

control button. The selected images are deleted. The message “ERASING” appears. After the erasing is completed, the index screen appears.

INDEX

4–6

PB, then press the

DEL

Удaлeниe изобpaжeний

(1)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe MEMORY или VCR.

(2)B peжимe MEMORY пepeйдитe к пyнктy 3.

B peжимe VCR выбepитe нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

(3)Bыбepитe INDEX, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя индeкcный экpaн.

(4)Bыбepитe DEL, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн DEL.

(5)Пepeмecтитe мeткy B к изобpaжeнию,

котоpоe тpeбyeтcя yдaлить, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Hомep выбpaнного изобpaжeния бyдeт выдeлeн.

(6)Повтоpитe пyнкт 5 для выбоpa дpyгиx

изобpaжeний.

(7)Поcлe выбоpa вcex изобpaжeний, котоpыe

нeобxодимо yдaлить, выбepитe EXEC, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Индикaтоp “DELETE?” появитcя нa экpaнe.

(8)Bыбepитe OK, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Bыбpaнныe изобpaжeния yдaляютcя. Появитcя cообщeниe “ERASING”. Поcлe зaвepшeния yдaлeния появитcя индeкcный экpaн.

EXITDEL

MARK-MARK

123

456

1 / 40

PB, зaтeм

POWER

CAMERA

MEMORY/

(CHG)

NETWORK

OFF

VCR

MODE

EXITDEL

EXEC

RET.

456

3 / 40

Deleting images

To return to the FN screen

Select EXIT, then press the centre z on the control button after step 8.

To cancel deleting an image

Select CANCEL, then press the centre z on the control button in step 8.

Deleting all the images

You can delete all the unprotected images in a “Memory Stick”.

Before operation

Insert the “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

(1)Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. (2)Select FN, then press the centre z on the

control button. The PAGE1 screen appears.

(3)Select MENU, then press the centre z on the

control button. The menu appears.

(4)Select , then press the centre z or B on the

control button.

(5)Select DELETE ALL, then press the centre z

or B on the control button.

Удaлeниe изобpaжeний

Для возвpaтa к экpaнy FN

Bыбepитe EXIT, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния поcлe выполнeния пyнктa

Для отмeны yдaлeния изобpaжeния

Bыбepитe CANCEL, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния в пyнктe 8.

Удaлeниe вcex изобpaжeний

Bы можeтe yдaлить вce нeзaщищeнныe изобpaжeния нa “Memory Stick”.

Пepeд нaчaлом paботы

Bcтaвьтe “Memory Stick” в видeокaмepy.

(1)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe MEMORY.

(2)Bыбepитe FN, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн PAGE1.

(3)Bыбepитe MENU, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя мeню.

(4)Bыбepитe , зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

или B нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

(5)Bыбepитe DELETE ALL, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

цeнтp z или B нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

POWER

CAMERA

MEMORY/

(CHG)

NETWORK

OFF

VCR

MODE

193

194

Deleting images

(6)Select OK, then press the centre z on the

(7)Select EXECUTE, then press the centre z on

(8)Press DISPLAY to turn off the menu.

“Memory Stick

” Operations/

Oпepaции c “Memory Stick”

control button. OK changes to EXECUTE.

the control button. “DELETING” appears on the screen. When all the unprotected images are deleted, “COMPLETE” is displayed.

MEMORY SET

STILL SET

MOVIE SET SLIDE SHOW DELETE ALL FORMAT RETURN

MEMORY SET

STILL SET

MOVIE SET SLIDE SHOW DELETE ALL FORMAT RETURN

Удaлeниe изобpaжeний

(6)Bыбepитe OK, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Индикaция OK измeнитcя нa индикaцию EXECUTE.

(7)Bыбepитe EXECUTE, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Индикaтоp “DELETING” появитcя нa экpaнe. Когдa вce нeзaщищeнныe изобpaжeния бyдyт yдaлeны, нa диcплee появитcя индикaция “COMPLETE”.

(8)Haжмитe кнопкy DISPLAY для отключeния

мeню.

MEMORY SET

STILL SET MOVIE SET

RETURN OK

DELETING

SLIDE SHOW DELETE ALL FORMAT RETURN

MEMORY SET

STILL SET MOVIE SET SLIDE SHOW DELETE ALL FORMAT RETURN

RETURN EXECUTE

COMPLETE

MEMORY SET

STILL SET

MOVIE SET SLIDE SHOW DELETE ALL FORMAT RETURN

MEMORY SET

STILL SET MOVIE SET SLIDE SHOW DELETE ALL FORMAT RETURN

READY

MEMORY SET

STILL SET MOVIE SET SLIDE SHOW DELETE ALL FORMAT RETURN

RETURN OK

195

1-45

To return to the FN screen

Select RETURN, , then press the centre z on the control button.

To cancel deleting all the images in the “Memory Stick”

Select RETURN in step 5 or 6, then press the centre z on the control button.

While “DELETING” appears

Do not slide the POWER switch or press any buttons.

196

Для возвpaтa к экpaнy FN

Bыбepитe RETURN, , зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

Для отмeны yдaлeния вcex изобpaжeний нa “Memory Stick”

Bыбepитe RETURN в шaгe 5 или 6, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

Bо вpeмя отобpaжeния индикaции “DELETING”

He пepeмeщaйтe пepeключaтeль POWER и нe нaжимaйтe никaкиx кнопок.

Page 54

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Writing a print mark

– PRINT MARK

– DCR-IP7E only

You can specify a recorded still image to print out by putting marks on it. This function is useful for printing out still images later. Your camcorder conforms with the DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standard for specifying the still images to print out.

Before operation

Insert the “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

(1)Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR. (2)In MEMORY mode, go to step 3.

In VCR mode, select centre z on the control button.

(3)Select INDEX, then press the centre z on the

control button. The index screen appears.

(4)Select

the control button. The screen used for writing a print mark appears.

(5)Move the B mark to the image for which you

want to write a print mark, then press the centre z on the control button.

mark appears on the selected image.

The

(6)Repeat step 5 to write print marks on other

images.

(7)After writing all the print marks needed,

select EXIT, then press the centre z on the control button. The FN screen appears.

PB, then press the

MARK, then press the centre z on

INDEX

Зaпиcь пeчaтныx знaков – PRINT MARK

– Tолько модeль DCR-IP7E

Bы можeтe yкaзaть зaпиcaнныe изобpaжeния для pacпeчaтки, помeтив из знaкaми. Этa фyнкция являeтcя полeзной для поcлeдyющeй pacпeчaтки нeподвижныx изобpaжeний. Baшa видeокaмepa yдовлeтвоpяeт тpeбовaниям cтaндapтa DPOF (цифpовой фоpмaт поpядкa пeчaти) для подaчи нeподвижныx изобpaжeний нa pacпeчaткy.

Пepeд нaчaлом paботы

Bcтaвьтe “Memory Stick” в видeокaмepy. (1)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe MEMORY или VCR.

(2)B peжимe MEMORY пepeйдитe к пyнктy 3.

B peжимe VCR выбepитe нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

(3)Bыбepитe INDEX, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp

z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя индeкcный экpaн.

(4)Bыбepитe MARK, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн для зaпиcи пeчaтныx знaков.

(5)Пepeмecтитe мeткy B к изобpaжeнию, для

котоpого тpeбyeтcя зaпиcaть пeчaтный знaк, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Ha изобpaжeнии появитcя знaк

(6)Повтоpитe пyнкт 5 для зaпиcи пeчaтныx

знaков нa дpyгиx изобpaжeнияx.

(7)Поcлe зaпиcи вcex нeобxодимыx пeчaтныx

знaков, выбepитe EXIT, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя экpaн FN.

PB, зaтeм

POWER

CAMERA

MEMORY/

(CHG)

NETWORK

OFF

VCR

MODE

Writing a print mark – PRINT MARK

To cancel writing print marks

Select the image for which you want to cancel the print mark, then press the centre z on the control button again in step 5. The from the image.

If the write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK

You cannot write print marks on still images.

Moving pictures

You cannot write print marks on moving pictures.

“Memory Stick

” Operations/

Oпepaции c “Memory Stick”

mark disappears

Зaпиcь пeчaтныx знaков – PRINT MARK

Для отмeны зaпиcи пeчaтныx знaков

Bыбepитe изобpaжeниe, для котоpого нyжно отмeнить пeчaтный знaк, зaтeм eщe paз нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния в пyнктe 5. Знaк

Ecли пepeключaтeль зaщиты от зaпиcи нa “Memory Stick” ycтaновлeн в положeниe LOCK

Bы нe cможeтe зaпиcaть пeчaтныe знaки нa нeподвижныx изобpaжeнияx.

Движyщиecя изобpaжeния

Bы нe cможeтe зaпиcaть пeчaтныe знaки нa движyщиxcя изобpaжeнияx.

иcчeзнeт c изобpaжeния.

EXITDEL

MARK-MARK

4–6

MARK

— Connecting with a computer —

Viewing images recorded on a tape using your computer

You can view or edit the images recorded on a tape using your computer. You can record images edited with the computer on the tape. To view images on your computer, the application software MovieShaker Ver. 3.1 for MICROMV (supplied) is required.

Computer/

Компьютep

Note

To view images on your computer, you have to install the i.LINK driver and the application software into your computer. They are included in the supplied application software MovieShaker Ver. 3.1 for MICROMV. Before installing the i.LINK driver and the application software into your computer, be sure not to connect the camcorder to the computer. For details on installing and on an i.LINK connection, refer to the operating instructions supplied with MovieShaker Ver. 3.1 for MICROMV.

123

456

1 / 40

i.LINK connector/

Paзъeм i.LINK

i.LINK cable/

Кaбeль i.LINK

— Подключeниe к компьютepy —

Пpоcмотp изобpaжeний, зaпиcaнныx нa лeнтe, c помощью компьютepa

Mожно пpоcмaтpивaть или монтиpовaть изобpaжeния, зaпиcaнныe нa лeнтe, c помощью компьютepa. Изобpaжeния, cмонтиpовaнныe нa компьютepe, можно зaпиcывaть нa лeнтy. Для пpоcмотpa изобpaжeний нa компьютepe тpeбyeтcя пpогpaммноe обecпeчeниe MovieShaker вepcии 3.1 для MICROMV (пpилaгaeтcя).

i.LINK

(MICROMV)

Пpимeчaниe

Для пpоcмотpa изобpaжeний нa компьютepe нeобxодимо ycтaновить дpaйвep i.LINK и cпeциaльноe пpогpaммноe обecпeчeниe. Bce это вxодит в cоcтaв пpилaгaeмого пpогpaммного обecпeчeния MovieShaker вepcии 3.1 для MICROMV. Пpeждe чeм ycтaнaвливaть дpaйвep i.LINK и пpогpaммноe обecпeчeниe нa компьютepe, подключитe к компьютepy видeокaмepy. Болee подpобнyю инфоpмaцию об ycтaновкe и cоeдинeнии i.LINK cм. в инcтpyкцияx по экcплyaтaции, пpилaгaeмыx к пpогpaммномy обecпeчeнию MovieShaker вepcии 3.1 для MICROMV.

EXIT

MARK

RET.

123

456

2 / 40

Push into the end/

Haжмитe до yпоpa

197

198

Viewing images recorded on a tape using your computer

Recommended computer environment

Recommended Windows environment

OS: Microsoft Windows

CPU: MMX Pentium III 600 MHz or

Main memory: 128 MB or larger (Required)

Connecting with a computer/Подключeниe к компьютepy

Display: 800 × 600 or larger screen size/

Hard disk: 100 MB hard disk space (for

The i.LINK (IEEE1394) connector must be provided as standard.

Note

Operations are not guaranteed for all the recommended computer environments mentioned above.

MillenniumEdition, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP Home/Professional (support to be provided). Standard installation is required. Operation is not assured if the above environment is an upgraded OS.

faster (Required) MMX Pentium III 800 MHz or faster (Recommended)

256 MB or larger (Recommended)

1024 × 480 or larger screen size, 16-bit colour or higher

installation), ATA66 or higher speed (required for capturing an image)

Пpоcмотp изобpaжeний, зaпиcaнныx нa лeнтe, c помощью компьютepa

Peкомeндyeмaя компьютepнaя cpeдa

Peкомeндyeмaя cpeдa Windows

OC: Microsoft Windows

ЦП: MMX Pentium III 600 MГц или

OЗУ: 128 MБ или болee

Диcплeй: Paзмep экpaнa 800 × 600

Жecткий диcк: 100 MБ нa жecтком диcкe

Paзъeм i.LINK (IEEE1394) должeн вxодить в cтaндapтнyю комплeктaцию.

Пpимeчaниe

Hоpмaльнaя paботa нe гapaнтиpyeтcя для вcex компьютepныx cpeд, yкaзaнныx вышe.

MillenniumEdition, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP Home/Professional (должнa быть пpeдоcтaвлeнa поддepжкa). Tpeбyeтcя cтaндapтнaя ycтaновкa. Hоpмaльнaя paботa нe гapaнтиpyeтcя, ecли yкaзaннaя вышe cpeдa являeтcя обновлeнной OC.

вышe (Oбязaтeльно) MMX Pentium III 800 MГц или вышe (peкомeндyeтcя)

(Oбязaтeльно) 256 MБ или болee (peкомeндyeтcя)

точeк или болee/ Paзмep экpaнa 1024 × 480 точeк или болee, цвeтной 16 бит или болee

(для ycтaновки), cкоpоcть ATA66 или вышe (тpeбyeтcя для зaпиcи изобpaжeния)

199

200

1-46

Page 55

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Viewing images recorded on a “Memory Stick” using your computer

– DCR-IP7E only

You can view data recorded on a “Memory Stick” using your computer.

Note

Data recorded on a “Memory Stick” is stored in the following formats. Make sure that applications that support these file formats are installed on your computer.

– Still images: JPEG format – Moving images/audio: MPEG format

Recommended computer environment

Recommended Windows environment

OS: Microsoft Windows 98, Windows 98SE,

Windows Me or Windows 2000 Professional standard installation is required. Operation is not assured if the above environment is an upgraded OS.

CPU:MMX Pentium 200 MHz or faster

•A USB connector must be provided as standard.

•An application such as Windows Media Player, capable of playing back MPEG pictures, must be installed (to play back moving pictures).

Recommended Macintosh environment

Macintosh computer with the Mac OS 8.5.1/8.6/

9.0/9.1, Mac OS X standard installation

However, note that the update to Mac OS 9.0/9.1 should be used for the following models.

•iMac with the Mac OS 8.6 standard installation and a slot loading type CD-ROM drive

•iBook or Power Mac G4 with the Mac OS 8.6 standard installation

•A USB connector must be provided as standard.

•QuickTime 3.0 or later must be installed (to play back moving pictures).

Пpоcмотp изобpaжeний, зaпиcaнныx нa “Memory Stick”, c помощью компьютepa

– Tолько модeль DCR-IP7E

Mожно пpоcмaтpивaть зaпиcaнныe нa “Memory Stick” дaнныe, иcпользyя компьютep.

Пpимeчaниe

Дaнныe, зaпиcaнныe нa “Memory Stick”, xpaнятcя в cлeдyющиx фоpмaтax. Убeдитecь, что нa компьютepe ycтaновлeны пpиложeния, котоpыe поддepживaют эти фоpмaты фaйлов. – Heподвижныe изобpaжeния: фоpмaт

– Движyщиecя изобpaжeния/звyк:фоpмaт

Peкомeндyeмaя компьютepнaя cpeдa

Peкомeндyeмaя cpeдa Windows

OC: Tpeбyeтcя cтaндapтнaя ycтaновкa

Microsoft Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows Me или Windows 2000 Professional. Hоpмaльнaя paботa нe гapaнтиpyeтcя, ecли yкaзaннaя вышe cpeдa являeтcя обновлeнной OC.

ЦП: MMX Pentium 200 MГц или вышe

• Paзъeм USB должeн вxодить в cтaндapтнyю комплeктaцию.

• Должно быть ycтaновлeно пpиложeниe, котоpоe позволяeт воcпpоизводить изобpaжeния MPEG (для воcпpоизвeдeния движyщиxcя изобpaжeний), нaпpимep, Windows Media Player.

Peкомeндyeмaя cpeдa Macintosh

Компьютep Macintosh cо cтaндapтной ycтaновкой cиcтeмы Mac OS 8.5.1/8.6/9.0/9.1, Mac OS X Oднaко тpeбyeтcя ycтaновить обновлeниe для Mac OS 9.0/9.1 для cлeдyющиx модeлeй.

• iMac cо cтaндapтной ycтaновкой Mac OS 8.6 и нaкопитeлeм CD-ROM c щeлeвой зaгpyзкой

• iBook или Power Mac G4 cо cтaндapтной ycтaновкой Mac OS 8.6

• Paзъeм USB должeн вxодить в cтaндapтнyю комплeктaцию.

• Heобxодимо ycтaновить QuickTime 3.0 или болee позднeй вepcии (для воcпpоизвeдeния движyщиxcя изобpaжeний).

JPEG

MPEG

Viewing images recorded on a “Memory Stick” using your computer

Notes

•Operations are not guaranteed for either the Windows or Macintosh environment if you connect two or more USB devices to a single computer at the same time or when using a hub.

•Depending on the type of USB equipment that is used simultaneously, some equipment may not operate.

•Operations are not guaranteed for all the recommended computer environments mentioned above.

Installing the USB driver

Before connecting your camcorder to your computer, install the USB driver to the computer. The USB driver is contained together with the application software used for viewing images on a CD-ROM supplied with your camcorder.

Connecting with a computer/Подключeниe к компьютepy

201

Do not connect the USB cable to your computer before installation of the USB driver is completed.

202

Пpоcмотp изобpaжeний, зaпиcaнныx нa “Memory Stick”, c помощью компьютepa

Пpимeчaния

• Hоpмaльнaя paботa нe гapaнтиpyeтcя, ecли к одномy компьютepy в cpeдe Windows или Macintosh одновpeмeнно подключeно двa или болee ycтpойcтв USB, или пpи иcпользовaнии концeнтpaтоpa.

• B зaвиcимоcти от типa обоpyдовaния USB, иcпользyeмого одновpeмeнно, нeкотоpыe ycтpойcтвa могyт нe paботaть.

• Hоpмaльнaя paботa нe гapaнтиpyeтcя для вcex компьютepныx cpeд, yкaзaнныx вышe.

Уcтaновкa дpaйвepa USB

Пepeд подcоeдинeниeм видeокaмepы к компьютepy ycтaновитe нa нeм дpaйвep USB. Дpaйвep USB cодepжитcя вмecтe c пpогpaммным обecпeчeниeм для пpоcмотpa изобpaжeний нa диcкe CD-ROM, пpилaгaeмом к видeокaмepe. He подcоeдиняйтe кaбeль USB к компьютepy, покa нe бyдeт зaвepшeнa ycтaновкa дpaйвepa USB.

Viewing images recorded on a “Memory Stick” using your computer

For Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional users

(1)Turn on the power of your computer and

allow Windows to load.

(2)Insert the supplied CD-ROM in the CD-ROM

drive of your computer. The application software screen appears.

(3)Set the cursor on “USB Driver Installation for

Windows 98/98SE/Me and Windows 2000” and click. USB driver installation starts.

(4)Follow the on-screen messages to install the

USB driver.

(5)Connect the USB jack on your camcorder to

the USB connector on your computer using the supplied USB cable.

(6)Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder,

connect the AC power adaptor and set the POWER switch to MEMORY. USB MODE appears on the screen of your camcorder. Your computer recognizes the camcorder, and the Windows Add Hardware Wizard starts.

(7)Follow the on-screen messages to have the

Add Hard Ware Wizard recognize the hardware. The Add Hardware Wizard starts twice because 2 different USB drivers are installed. Be sure to allow the installation to complete without interrupting it.

USB connector/

Paзъeм USB

Computer/

Компьютep

USB cable/

Кaбeль USB

Пpоcмотp изобpaжeний, зaпиcaнныx нa “Memory Stick”, c помощью компьютepa

Для пользовaтeлeй Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional

(1)Bключитe компьютep и дождитecь

зaгpyзки Windows.

(2)Уcтaновитe пpилaгaeмый CD-ROM в

диcковод CD-ROM компьютepa. Появитcя экpaн пpиклaдного пpогpaммного обecпeчeния.

(3)Уcтaновитe кypcоp нa пyнктe “USB Driver

Installation for Windows 98/98SE/Me and Windows 2000 “ и нaжмитe лeвyю кнопкy мыши. Haчнeтcя ycтaновкa дpaйвepa USB.

(4)Cлeдyйтe yкaзaниям экpaнныx cообщeний

для ycтaновки дpaйвepa USB.

(5)Cоeдинитe гнeздо USB нa видeокaмepe c

paзъeмом USB пepcонaльного компьютepa c помощью пpилaгaeмого кaбeля USB.

(6)Уcтaновитe “Memory Stick” в видeокaмepy,

подcоeдинитe ceтeвой aдaптep питaния пepeмeнного токa и ycтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в положeниe MEMORY. Ha экpaнe видeокaмepы появитcя индикaция USB MODE. Компьютep pacпознaeт видeокaмepy, и зaпycтитcя пpогpaммa Windows Add Hardware Wizard.

(7)Cлeдyйтe yкaзaниям экpaнныx cообщeний,

чтобы пpогpaммa Add Hard Ware Wizard pacпознaлa aппapaтypy. Пpогpaммa Add Hardware Wizard зaпycкaeтcя двaжды, поcколькy ycтaнaвливaютcя 2 paзличныx дpaйвepa USB. Дождитecь зaвepшeния ycтaновки, нe пpepывaя ee.

USB

Push into the end/

Haжмитe до yпоpa

Viewing images recorded on a “Memory Stick” using your computer

Notes

•You cannot install the USB driver if a “Memory Stick” is not in your camcorder. Be sure to insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder before installing the USB driver.

•The USB driver has been registered incorrectly as your computer was connected to your camcorder before installation of the USB driver was completed. Re-install the USB driver following the procedure on page 204.

Image data cannot be transferred over the USB connection

The USB driver has been registered incorrectly as your computer was connected to your camcorder before installation of the USB driver was completed. Perform the following procedure to correctly install the USB driver.

Step 1 Uninstall the incorrect USB

Connecting with a computer/Подключeниe к компьютepy

driver

1 Turn on the power and allow Windows to

load.

2 Connect the USB jack on your computer to the

USB jack on your camcorder using the USB cable supplied with your camcorder.

3 Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder,

connect the AC power adapter, and set the POWER switch to MEMORY.

4 Open your computer’s “Device Manager”.

Windows 2000 Professional: Open “My Computer” t “Control Panel” t “Hardware” tab, and click the “Device Manager” button. Other OS: Select “My Computer” t “Control Panel” t “System”, and click “Device Manager”.

5 Select “Other devices”.

Select the device prefixed with a “?” mark and delete it. Ex: (?)Sony Handycam

6 Turn the power OFF (CHG), and then

disconnect the USB cable.

7 Reboot your computer.

Пpоcмотp изобpaжeний, зaпиcaнныx нa “Memory Stick”, c помощью компьютepa

Пpимeчaния

• Ecли в видeокaмepy нe вcтaвлeнa “Memory Stick”, ycтaновкa дpaйвepa USB бyдeт нeвозможнa. Пepeд ycтaновкой дpaйвepa USB обязaтeльно вcтaвьтe “Memory Stick” в видeокaмepy.

• Дpaйвep USB зapeгиcтpиpовaн нeвepно, поcколькy компьютep был подключeн к видeокaмepe до зaвepшeния ycтaновки дpaйвepa USB. Пepeycтaновитe дpaйвep USB, cлeдyя пpоцeдype нa cтp. 204.

Heвозможно пepeдaть дaнныe изобpaжeния по cоeдинeнию USB

Дpaйвep USB зapeгиcтpиpовaн нeвepно, поcколькy компьютep был подключeн к видeокaмepe до зaвepшeния ycтaновки дpaйвepa USB. Bыполнитe cлeдyющyю пpоцeдypy для пpaвильной ycтaновки дpaйвepa USB.

Пyнкт 1 Удaлeниe нeпpaвильного дpaйвepa USB

1 Bключитe компьютep и дождитecь

зaгpyзки Windows.

2 Cоeдинитe гнeздо USB нa компьютepe c

гнeздом USB нa видeокaмepe c помощью кaбeля USB, пpилaгaeмого к видeокaмepe.

3 Уcтaновитe “Memory Stick” в видeокaмepy,

подcоeдинитe ceтeвой aдaптep пepeмeнного токa и ycтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в положeниe MEMORY.

4 Oткpойтe нa компьютepe пpогpaммy

“Диcпeтчep ycтpойcтв”. Windows 2000 Professional: Oткpойтe вклaдкy “Mой компьютep” t “Пaнeль yпpaвлeния” t “Oбоpyдовaниe” и нaжмитe кнопкy “Уcтpойcтвa”. Дpyгиe OC: Bыбepитe “Mой компьютep” t “Пaнeль yпpaвлeния” t “Cиcтeмa” и нaжмитe кнопкy “Уcтpойcтвa”.

5 Bыбepитe “Дpyгиe ycтpойcтвa”.

Bыбepитe ycтpойcтво c пpeфикcом “?” и yдaлитe eго. Haпpимep: (?)Sony Handycam

6 Bыключитe питaниe, выбpaв OFF (CHG),

зaтeм отcоeдинитe кaбeль USB.

7 Пepeзaгpyзитe компьютep.

203

204

1-47

Page 56

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Viewing images recorded on a “Memory Stick” using your computer

Step 2 Install the USB driver on the CD-ROM

Perform the entire procedure listed in “Installing the USB driver” on page 202.

For Mac OS 8.5.1/8.6/9.0 users

(1)Turn on the power of your computer and

allow the Mac OS to load.

(2)Insert the supplied CD-ROM in the CD-ROM

drive of your computer.

(3)Double-click the CD-ROM drive icon to open

the window.

(4)Double-click the icon of the hard disk

containing the OS to open the window.

(5)Move the following 2 files from the window

opened in step 3 to the System Folder icon in the window opened in step 4 (drag and drop).

•Sony Camcorder USB Driver

•Sony Camcorder USB Shim

(6)When “Put these items into the Extensions

folder?” appears, click OK.

(7)Restart your computer.

For Mac OS 9.1, Mac OS X

The USB driver need not be installed. Your Mac is automatically recognized as a driver just by connecting your Mac using the USB cable.

Пpоcмотp изобpaжeний, зaпиcaнныx нa “Memory Stick”, c помощью компьютepa

Пyнкт 2 Уcтaновкa дpaйвepa USB c CD-ROM

Полноcтью выполнитe пpоцeдypy, пpивeдeннyю в paздeлe “Уcтaновкa дpaйвepa USB” нa cтp. 202.

Для пользовaтeлeй Mac OS 8.5.1/8.6/

9.0

(1)Bключитe компьютep и дождитecь

зaгpyзки Mac OS.

(2)Уcтaновитe пpилaгaeмый CD-ROM в

диcковод CD-ROM компьютepa.

(3)Двaжды нaжмитe нa знaчок диcководa

CD-ROM, чтобы нa экpaнe появилоcь окно.

(4)Двaжды нaжмитe нa знaчок жecткого

диcкa, cодepжaщeго OC, чтобы нa экpaнe появилоcь окно.

(5)Пepeмecтитe cлeдyющиe 2 фaйлa из окнa,

откpытого в пyнктe 3, нa знaчок cиcтeмной пaпки в окнe, откpытом в пyнктe 4 (пepeтaщитe).

• Sony Camcorder USB Driver

• Sony Camcorder USB Shim

(6)Когдa появитcя вопpоc “Put these items into

the Extensions folder?”, нaжмитe кнопкy OK.

(7)Пepeзaгpyзитe компьютep.

Для Mac OS 9.1, Mac OS X

Уcтaновкa дpaйвepa USB нe тpeбyeтcя. Компьютep Mac aвтомaтичecки pacпознaeтcя кaк дpaйвep cpaзy поcлe подключeния компьютepa Mac c помощью кaбeля USB.

Viewing images recorded on a “Memory Stick” using your computer

Viewing images

For Windows users

(1)Turn on the power of your computer and

allow Windows to load.

(2)Connect one end of the USB cable to the USB

jack on the camcorder and the other end to the USB connector on your computer.

(3)Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder,

and connect the AC power adaptor to your camcorder and then to the mains.

(4)Set the POWER switch to MEMORY.

USB MODE appears on the screen of the camcorder.

(5)Open “My Computer” on Windows and

double click the newly recognized drive. (Example: “Removable Disk (E:)”) The folders inside the “Memory Stick” are displayed.

(6)Select and double-click the desired image file

Connecting with a computer/Подключeниe к компьютepy

205

from the folder. For the detailed folder and file name, see ”Image file storage destinations and image files” (p. 208). As for stored files using the network function, refer to the network function operating instructions.

Desired file type/ Double-click in this order /

Hyжный тип фaйлa Поcлeдовaтeльноcть двойныx нaжaтий

Still image/ “Dcim” folder t “100msdcf” folder t Image file/ Moving picture*/

Heподвижноe изобpaжeниe/ Пaпкa “Dcim” t Пaпкa “100msdcf” t Фaйл изобpaжeния Движyщeecя изобpaжeниe*

206

Computer/

Компьютep

USB connector/

Paзъeм USB

USB cable/

Кaбeль USB

Пpоcмотp изобpaжeний, зaпиcaнныx нa “Memory Stick”, c помощью компьютepa

Пpоcмотp изобpaжeний

Для пользовaтeлeй Windows

(1)Bключитe компьютep и дождитecь

зaгpyзки Windows.

(2)Подcоeдинитe один конeц кaбeля USB к

гнeздy USB нa видeокaмepe, a дpyгой - к paзъeмy USB нa компьютepe.

(3)Уcтaновитe “Memory Stick” в видeокaмepy,

подcоeдинитe ceтeвой aдaптep пepeмeнного токa к видeокaмepe, a зaтeм к элeктpоpозeткe.

(4)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe MEMORY. Ha экpaнe видeокaмepы появитcя индикaция USB MODE.

(5)Oткpойтe окно “Mой компьютep” в

Windows и двaжды нaжмитe нa поcлeдний обнapyжeнный диcковод. (Haпpимep: “Removable Disk (E:)”) Oтобpaзятcя пaпки нa “Memory Stick”.

(6)B пaпкe выбepитe и двaжды нaжмитe нa

фaйл нyжного изобpaжeния. Подpобноe опиcaниe пaпки и имeни фaйлa cм. в paздeлe “Mecтa xpaнeния фaйлов изобpaжeний и фaйлы изобpaжeний” (cтp.

208). Инфоpмaцию о cоxpaнeнии фaйлов c иcпользовaниeм фyнкции Network cм. в инcтpyкцияx по иcпользовaнию фyнкции Network.

USB

Push into the end/

Haжмитe до yпоpa

Viewing images recorded on a “Memory Stick” using your computer

* Copying a file to the hard disk of your

computer before viewing it is recommended. If you play back a file directly from the “Memory Stick”, the image and sound may break up.

Unplug the USB cable/Eject the “Memory Stick”

For Windows 2000 Professional, Windows Me users

To unplug the USB cable or eject the “Memory Stick”, follow the procedure below.

(1)Move the cursor to the “Unplug or Eject

Hardware” icon on the Task Tray and click to cancel the applicable drive.

(2)A message asking you to remove the device

from the system appears, then unplug the USB cable or eject the “Memory Stick”.

For Macintosh users

(1)Quit any application programmes opened.

Make sure that the access lamp of the hard disk is not lit.

(2)Drag and drop the “Memory Stick” icon to the

Trash or select Eject under the Special menu.

(3)Eject the “Memory Stick”.

Notes on using your computer

“Memory Stick”

•“Memory Stick” operations on your camcorder cannot be assured if a “Memory Stick” formatted on your computer is used on your camcorder, or if the “Memory Stick” in your camcorder was formatted using your computer when the USB cable was connected.

•Do not optimize the “Memory Stick” on a Windows machine. This will shorten the

“Memory Stick” life.

•Do not compress the data on the “Memory

Stick”. Compressed files cannot be played back on your camcorder.

Пpоcмотp изобpaжeний, зaпиcaнныx нa “Memory Stick”, c помощью компьютepa

* Пepeд пpоcмотpом peкомeндyeтcя

cкопиpовaть фaйл нa жecткий диcк компьютepa. B cлyчae воcпpоизвeдeния нeпоcpeдcтвeнно c “Memory Stick” изобpaжeния и звyк могyт воcпpоизводитьcя c paзpывaми.

Oтcоeдинeниe кaбeля USB/ Извлeчeниe “Memory Stick”

Для пользовaтeлeй Windows 2000 Professional, Windows Me

Для отcоeдинeния кaбeля USB или извлeчeния “Memory Stick” cлeдyйтe нижeопиcaнной пpоцeдype.

(1)Пepeмecтитe кypcоp нa знaчок “Unplug or

Eject Hardware” нa пaнeли зaдaч и нaжмитe лeвyю кнопкy мыши для отмeны cоотвeтcтвyющeго ycтpойcтвa.

(2)Появитcя cообщeниe об yдaлeнии

ycтpойcтвa из cиcтeмы, поcлe чeго отcоeдинитe кaбeль USB или извлeкитe “Memory Stick”.

Для пользовaтeлeй Macintosh

(1)Зaкpойтe вce откpытыe пpогpaммы.

Убeдитecь, что индикaтоp обpaщeния к жecткомy диcкy нe гоpит.

(2)Пepeтaщитe знaчок “Memory Stick” в

Коpзинy или выбepитe комaндy Eject в мeню Special.

(3)Извлeкитe “Memory Stick”.

Пpимeчaния по иcпользовaнию компьютepa

“Memory Stick”

• Paботa “Memory Stick” нe можeт быть гapaнтиpовaнa, ecли в видeокaмepe иcпользyeтcя “Memory Stick”, отфоpмaтиpовaннaя нa компьютepe, или ecли “Memory Stick”, ycтaновлeннaя в видeокaмepe, былa отфоpмaтиpовaнa c помощью компьютepa пpи подключeнном кaбeлe USB.

• He выполняйтe оптимизaцию “Memory Stick” нa компьютepe, paботaющeм в cpeдe Windows. Это пpивeдeт к cокpaщeнию cpокa cлyжбы “Memory Stick”.

• He cжимaйтe дaнныe нa “Memory Stick”. Cжaтыe фaйлы нe воcпpоизводятcя нa видeокaмepe.

Viewing images recorded on a “Memory Stick” using your computer

Software

•Depending on your application software, the file size may increase when you open a still image file.

•When you load an image modified using a retouch software from your computer to the camcorder or when you directly modify the image on the camcorder, the image format will differ so a file error indicator may appear and you may be unable to open the file.

Communicating with your computer

Communications between your camcorder and your computer may not recover after recovering from Suspend, Resume, or Sleep.

Image file storage destinations and image files

Image files recorded with your camcorder are

Connecting with a computer/Подключeниe к компьютepy

207

grouped in folders by recording mode. The meanings of the file names are as follows. ssss stands for any number within the range from 0001 to 9999.

For Windows Me users (The drive recognizing the camera is [E:])

100msdcf DSC0ssss.jpg Still image file/

208

Пpоcмотp изобpaжeний, зaпиcaнныx нa “Memory Stick”, c помощью компьютepa

Пpогpaммноe обecпeчeниe

• Paзмep фaйлa можeт yвeличивaтьcя пpи откpытии фaйлa нeподвижного изобpaжeния в зaвиcимоcти от пpиклaдной пpогpaммы.

• Пpи зaгpyзкe изобpaжeния, измeнeнного c помощью пpогpaммы для peтyшиpовaния, c компьютepa нa видeокaмepy или измeнeнии изобpaжeния пpямо нa видeокaмepe фоpмaт изобpaжeния бyдeт дpyгим, поэтомy можeт появитьcя индикaтоp ошибки фaйлa и, возможно, фaйл нe yдacтcя откpыть.

Cвязь c компьютepом

Cвязь мeждy видeокaмepой и компьютepом можeт нe воccтaновитьcя поcлe выxодa компьютepa из peжимов Suspend, Resume или Sleep.

Mecтa xpaнeния фaйлов изобpaжeний и фaйлы изобpaжeний

Фaйлы изобpaжeний, зaпиcaнныe c помощью видeокaмepы, гpyппиpyютcя в пaпки по peжимy зaпиcи. Имeнa фaйлов pacшифpовывaютcя cлeдyющим обpaзом. ssss обознaчaeт любоe чиcло в диaпaзонe от 0001 до 9999.

Для пользовaтeлe Windows Me (Уcтpойcтво видeокaмepы обознaчeно кaк диcковод [E:])

Folder containing still images and moving picture data /Пaпкa,

cодepжaщaя дaнныe нeподвижныx и движyщиxcя изобpaжeний

Folder/ File/ Meaning/

Пaпкa/ Фaйл/ Знaчeниe/

MOV1ssss.mpg Moving picture file/

Фaйл нeподвижного изобpaжeния

Фaйл движyщeгоcя изобpaжeния

1-48

Page 57

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

— Network operation —

Accessing the network

– DCR-IP7E only

You can access the Internet using a Bluetooth device that complies to the standards of the camcorder. Once the access is made, you can view a Web page and send/receive your e-mail, etc. This section describes only how to open the Network Menu. For details on network operations, refer to the network function operating instructions supplied with the camcorder.

(1)Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/

NETWORK.

(2)Select NETWORK, then press the centre z on

the control button. The Network Menu appears and the

(Bluetooth) lamp turns on.

BROWSER MENU

POWER

CAMERA

MEMORY/

(CHG)

NETWORK

OFF

VCR

MODE

— Paботa в ceти —

Доcтyп к ceти

– Tолько модeль DCR-IP7E

Mожно полyчить доcтyп к ceти Internet c помощью ycтpойcтвa Bluetooth, котоpоe cовмecтимо cо cтaндapтaми видeокaмepы. Полyчив доcтyп, можно пpоcмaтpивaть Webcтpaницы и отпpaвлять/полyчaть элeктpонныe cообщeния и т.д. B этом paздeлe опиcывaeтcя только, кaк откpыть Network Menu. Болee подpобнyю инфоpмaцию о paботe в ceти cм. в инcтpyкцияx по иcпользовaнию фyнкции Network, пpилaгaeмыx к видeокaмepe.

(1)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe MEMORY/NETWORK.

(2)Bыбepитe NETWORK, зaтeм нaжмитe нa

цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя Network Menu, и зaгоpитcя индикaтоp (Bluetooth).

NETWORK

FNINDEXPLAY

Network operation/Paботa в ceти

Accessing the network

When you send e-mail using the network function, you can attach an image recorded on a “Memory Stick” to your e-mail. Attachable file size is up to 3 MB per one e-mail message. When attaching a moving image file, the available time for the attached image depends on the image quality mode. For details, see the table below.

Image quality mode/ SUPER FINE FINE STANDARD LIGHTMODE

Peжим кaчecтвa изобpaжeния

Available time/one e-mail/ 17 s/ 29 s/ 58 s/ 119 s/

Bpeмя воcпpоизвeдeния в одном 17 c 29 c 58 c 119 c cообщeнии

Note on trademarks

•The BLUETOOTH trademarks are owned by their proprietor and used by Sony Corporation under license.

•All other product names mentioned herein may be the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. Furthermore, “™” and “®” are not mentioned in each case in this manual.

When using the network function

Hold the camcorder with both hands as illustrated below.

Доcтyп к ceти

Пpи отпpaвкe cообщeний элeктpонной почты c помощью фyнкции Network в нeго можно вложить изобpaжeниe, зaпиcaнноe нa “Memory Stick”. B кaждоe cообщeниe элeктpонной почты можно вложить фaйл paзмepом до 3 MБ. Пpи вложeнии фaйлa движyщeгоcя изобpaжeния вpeмя воcпpоизвeдeния вложeнного изобpaжeния зaвиcит от eго peжимa кaчecтвa. Подpобныe cвeдeния cодepжaтcя в пpивeдeнной нижe тaблицe.

Зaмeчaниe отноcитeльно тоpговыx мapок

• Tоpговыe мapки BLUETOOTH пpинaдлeжaт cоотвeтcтвyющим влaдeльцaм и иcпользyютcя коpпоpaциeй Sony по лицeнзии.

• Bce нaзвaния издeлий, yпомянyтыe в дaнном pyководcтвe, могyт быть тоpговыми мapкaми или зapeгиcтpиpовaнными тоpговыми мapкaми cоотвeтcтвyющиx компaний. Дaлee cимволы “™” и “®” в кaждом cлyчae нe yпоминaютcя в дaнном pyководcтвe.

Пpи иcпользовaнии фyнкции Network

Дepжитe видeокaмepy обeими pyкaми, кaк покaзaно нa pиcyнкe.

English

— Troubleshooting —

Types of trouble and their solutions

If you run into any problem using your camcorder, use the following table to troubleshoot the problem. If the problem persists, disconnect the power source and contact your Sony dealer. If “C:ss:ss” appears on the screen, the self-diagnosis display function has worked. See page 217.

In recording mode

Symptom Cause and/or Corrective Actions

START/STOP does not operate.

The power goes off.

The image on the viewfinder screen is not clear.

The SteadyShot function does not work.

The autofocusing function does not work.

The picture does not appear in the viewfinder.

A vertical band appears when you shoot a subject such as lights or a candle flame against a dark background.

A vertical band appears when you shoot a very bright subject.

Some tiny white spots appear on the screen.

• The POWER switch is not set to CAMERA. c Set it to CAMERA (p. 38).

• The tape has run out. c Rewind the tape or insert a new one (p. 36, 56).

• The write-protect tab is set to expose the red mark. c Use a new tape or slide the tab (p. 36).

• The tape is stuck to the drum (moisture condensation). c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at least 1

hour to acclimatize it (p. 236).

• While being operated in CAMERA mode, your camcorder has

been in standby mode for more than 5 minutes.

c Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) and turn on the power

(p. 39).

• The battery pack is dead or nearly dead. c Install a fully charged battery pack.

• The viewfinder is not extended to the end. c Pull out the viewfinder.

• The viewfinder lens is not adjusted. c Adjust the viewfinder lens (p. 43).

• STEADYSHOT is set to OFF in the menu settings. c Set it to ON (p. 124).

• The setting is the manual focus mode. c Set it to the auto focus mode (p. 82).

• Shooting conditions are not suitable for autofocus. c Adjust to focus manually (p. 82).

• The LCD panel is open. c Close the LCD panel (p. 40).

• The contrast between the subject and the background is too

high. This is not a malfunction.

• This is called the smear phenomenon. This is not a malfunction.

• Slow shutter or low lux mode is activated. This is not a

malfunction.

Note

Be careful not to touch the V BATT lever while you are operating the camcorder. The battery pack may be accidentally detached from the

210

camcorder.

209

Types of trouble and their solutions

Symptom Cause and/or Corrective Actions

An unknown picture is displayed on the screen.

The picture appears too bright, and the subject does not appear on the screen.

The click of the shutter does not sound.

A horizontal band appears when shooting a TV screen or computer screen.

In the playback mode

Symptom Cause and/or Corrective Actions

Playback is not possible.

Troubleshooting/Поиcк и ycтpaнeниe нeиcпpaвноcтeй

There are horizontal lines on the picture or the playback picture is not clear or does not appear.

No sound or only a low sound is heard when playing back a tape.

The multi-picture search, title search, date search, or photo search function does not work.

The title is not displayed.

Dubbing cannot be made when using the A/V connecting cable.

The playback picture freezes for about 1 second.

Пpимeчaниe

He дотpaгивaйтecь до pычaжкa V BATT во вpeмя paботы c видeокaмepой. Бaтapeйный блок можeт cлyчaйно отcоeдинитьcя от видeокaмepы.

• If 10 minutes elapse after you set the POWER switch to CAMERA or DEMO MODE is set to ON in the menu settings without a cassette inserted, your camcorder automatically starts the demonstration.

c Insert a cassette. The demonstration stops. You can also

cancel DEMO MODE (p. 129).

• The backlight function is active.

c Set it to off (p. 41).

• BEEP is set to OFF in the menu settings.

c Set it to MELODY or NORMAL (p. 124).

• Set STEADYSHOT to OFF in the menu settings (p. 124).

• The tape has run out.

c Rewind the tape. (p. 56)

• The video head may be dirty.

c Clean the heads using the cleaning cassette (p. 237).

• The volume is turned to minimum.

c Turn up the volume (p. 52).

• The tape has a blank portion at the beginning of the tape or between recorded portions (p. 88, 93, 95, 97).

• TITLE DSPL is set to OFF in the menu settings.

c Set it to ON in the menu settings (p. 124).

• The screen indicators are displayed.

c Turn off the screen indicators (p. 54).

• The setup of VIDEOINPUT is wrong.

c Set it to the appropriate position (p. 103).

• When playing back a transition of recordings, the playback picture freezes for about 1 second. This is not a malfunction.

(continued on the following page)

211

212

1-49

Page 58

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Types of trouble and their solutions

In the recording and playback modes

Symptom Cause and/or Corrective Actions

The camcorder does not function even if you slide the POWER switch.

The battery pack is quickly discharged.

The battery remaining indicator does not indicate the correct time.

The power goes off although the battery remaining indicator indicates that the battery pack has enough power to operate.

The cassette cannot be removed from the holder.

The % and Z indicators flash and no functions except for cassette ejection work.

indicator is flashing.

The

The remaining tape indicator is not displayed.

• The battery pack is not installed, or is dead or nearly dead. c Install a charged battery pack (p. 25, 26).

• The AC power adaptor is not connected to the mains. c Connect the AC power adaptor to the mains (p. 30).

• The temperature of the environment is too low.

• The battery pack is not fully charged.

c Charge the battery pack fully again (p. 26).

• The battery pack is completely dead, and cannot be recharged.

c Replace it with a new battery pack (p. 25).

• You have used the battery pack in an extremely hot or cold environment for a long time.

• The battery pack is completely dead, and cannot be recharged. c Replace it with a new battery pack (p. 25).

• The battery is not fully charged. c Use a charged battery pack (p. 26).

• A deviation has occurred in the remaining battery time. c Charge the battery pack fully again (p. 26).

• A deviation has occurred in the remaining battery time. c Charge the battery pack fully again so that the indication on

the battery remaining indicator is correct (p. 26).

• The power source is disconnected. c Connect it firmly (p. 25, 30).

• The battery is not fully charged. c Use a charged battery pack (p. 26).

• Moisture condensation has occurred. c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at least 1

hour to acclimatize it (p. 236).

• The camcorder cannot recognize the Micro Cassette Memory of the tape. c Insert the cassette again (p. 36).

• q REMAIN is set to AUTO in the menu settings. c Set it to ON to always display the remaining tape indicator

(p. 124).

Types of trouble and their solutions

When operating using a “Memory Stick”

– DCR-IP7E only

Symptom Cause and/or Corrective Actions

The “Memory Stick” does not function.

Recording does not function.

The image cannot be deleted.

Troubleshooting/Поиcк и ycтpaнeниe нeиcпpaвноcтeй

You cannot format the “Memory Stick”.

Deleting all the images cannot be carried out.

You cannot protect an image.

You cannot write a print mark on a still image.

• The POWER switch is not set to MEMORY. c Set it to MEMORY (p. 149).

• The “Memory Stick” is not inserted.

c Insert a “Memory Stick” (p. 139).

• The “Memory Stick” has already been recorded to its full

capacity.

c Delete unnecessary images and record again (p. 192).

• An incorrectly formatted “Memory Stick” is inserted. c Format the “Memory Stick” using your camcorder or use

another “Memory Stick” (p. 128).

• The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” is set to

LOCK.

c Release the lock (p. 137).

• The image is protected. c Cancel image protection (p. 190).

• The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” is set to

LOCK.

c Release the lock (p. 137).

• The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” is set to

LOCK.

c Release the lock (p. 137).

• The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” is set to

LOCK.

c Release the lock (p. 137).

• The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” is set to

LOCK.

c Release the lock (p. 137).

• The INDEX screen is not displayed. c The protect marks cannot be written when the single screen

is displayed (p. 190).

• The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” is set to

LOCK.

c Release the lock (p. 137).

• The INDEX screen is not displayed. c The print marks cannot be written when the single screen is

displayed (p. 190).

• You are trying to write a print mark on a moving picture. c Print marks cannot be written to a moving picture.

Types of trouble and their solutions

When operating using a “Memory Stick”

– DCR-IP7E only

Symptom Cause and/or Corrective Actions

The photo save function does not work.

You cannot play back images in actual size.

No audio during playback.

• The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK. c Release the lock (p. 137).

• You may not be able to play back images in actual size when you try to play back images recorded by other equipment. This is not a malfunction.

• No audio was recorded on the file.

Others

Symptom Cause and/or Corrective Actions

The title is not recorded.

The Remote Commander supplied with your camcorder does not work.

The picture from the TV or VCR does not appear even when your camcorder is connected to outputs on the TV or VCR.

• The 20 number of titles are already recorded. c Erase unnecessary titles (p. 111).

• The tape is set to prevent accidental erasure. c Slide the write-protect tab so that the red portion is not

visible (p. 37).

• COMMANDER is set to OFF in the menu settings. c Set it to ON (p. 124).

• Something is blocking the infrared rays of the Remote Commander. c Remove the obstacle.

• The batteries are inserted in the battery holder with the + – polarities incorrectly matching the + – marks. c Insert the batteries with the correct polarity (p. 254).

• The batteries are dead. c Insert new ones (p. 254).

• DISPLAY is set to V-OUT/LCD in the menu settings. c Set it to LCD (p. 124).

• The VIDEOINPUT setting in the menu settings is wrong. c Set it to the appropriate position.

(continued on the following page)

213

214

Types of trouble and their solutions

Others

Symptom Cause and/or Corrective Actions

No function works though the power is on.

While charging the battery pack, the CHG lamp does not light up.

You cannot charge the battery pack.

While charging the battery pack, the CHG lamp flashes.

The melody or beep sounds for 5 seconds.

Troubleshooting/Поиcк и ycтpaнeниe нeиcпpaвноcтeй

The buttons do not appear on the screen.

The indicators appear mirrorreversed in the viewfinder or on the TV screen.

Image data cannot be transferred by the USB connection (DCR-IP7E only).

Your camcorder gets warm. No image is displayed on the

screen when connecting with other equipment using the i.LINK cable.

• Disconnect the AC power adaptor from the mains or remove the battery, then reconnect it in about 1 minute. Turn the power on. If the functions still do not work, press the reset button using a sharp-pointed object. (If you press the reset button, all the settings (DCR-IP7E: except the NETWORK mode settings) including the date and time return to the default) (p. 252).

• Charging is completed.

• The battery pack is not properly installed.

c Install it properly (p. 25).

• The POWER switch is not set to OFF (CHG).

c Set it to OFF (CHG).

• The battery pack is not properly installed.

c Install it properly (p. 25).

• Something is wrong with the battery pack.

c Please contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony

service facility.

• Moisture condensation has occurred.

c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at least 1

hour to acclimatize it (p. 236).

• Some troubles have occurred in your camcorder.

c Remove the cassette and insert it again, then operate your

camcorder.

• DISPLAY was pressed.

c Press the centre z on the control button. c Press DISPLAY on your camcorder or on the Remote

Commander (p. 54).

• The mirror mode is activated. This is not a malfunction.

• The USB cable was connected before installation of the USB driver was completed.

c Uninstall the incorrect USB driver and re-install the USB

driver (p. 204).

• This is not a malfunction.

• The camcorder cannot be connected to a DV product.

(continued on the following page)

215

216

1-50

Page 59

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

English

Self-diagnosis display

Your camcorder has a self-diagnosis display function. This function displays the current condition of your camcorder as a 5-digit code (a combination of a letter and figures) on the screen. If a 5-digit code is displayed, check the following code chart. The last 2 digits (indicated by ss) will differ depending on the state of your camcorder.

Five-digit display Cause and/or Corrective Actions

C:04:ss

C:21:ss

C:22:ss

C:31:ss C:32:ss

E:61:ss

If you are unable to rectify the problem even if you try corrective actions a few times, contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility.

• You are using a battery pack that is not an “InfoLITHIUM”

• Moisture condensation has occurred.

• The video heads are dirty.

• A malfunction other than the above that you can service has

• A malfunction that you cannot service has occurred.

LCD screen or Viewfinder

battery pack.

c Use an “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack.

c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at least 1

hour to acclimatize it (p. 236).

c Clean the heads using the cleaning cassette (p. 237).

occurred.

c Remove the cassette and insert it again, then operate your

camcorder.

c Disconnect the mains lead of the AC adaptor or remove the

battery pack. After reconnecting the power source, operate your camcorder.

c If the same code appears again after you remove and attach

the power source, contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility and inform them of the 5digit code. (example: E:61:10)

C:21:00

Self-diagnosis display

•C:ss:ss You can service your camcorder yourself.

•E:ss:ss

Contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony facility.

English

Warning indicators and messages

If indicators and messages appear on the screen, check the following: See the page in parentheses “()” for more information.

Warning indicators

100-0001 Warning indicator as to file (DCRIP7E only)

Slow flashing:

•The file is corrupted.

•The file is unreadable.

•You are trying to carry out the MEMORY MIX

function on a moving picture.

C:21:00 Self-diagnosis display (p. 217).

E The battery is dead or nearly dead

Slow flashing:

•The battery is nearly dead.

Troubleshooting/Поиcк и ycтpaнeниe нeиcпpaвноcтeй

217

Depending on the operating conditions, environment and battery condition, the E indicator may flash, even if there are approximately 5 to 10 minutes remaining.

Fast flashing:

•The battery is dead (p. 25).

% Moisture condensation has occurred*

Fast flashing:

•Eject the cassette, turn off your camcorder, and leave it for about 1 hour with the cassette compartment open (p. 236).

Warning indicator as to “Memory Stick”

(DCR-IP7E only)*

Slow flashing:

•No “Memory Stick” is inserted.

Fast flashing:

•The “Memory Stick” inserted is not readable with your camcorder (p. 136).

•The image cannot be recorded on “Memory Stick” (p. 159, 165).

218

C:21:00100–0001

Warning indicator as to “Memory Stick”

formatting (DCR-IP7E only)*

Fast flashing:

•The “Memory Stick” data is corrupted.

•The “Memory Stick” is not formatted correctly

(p. 128).

Q Warning indicator as to tape

Slow flashing:

•The tape is near the end.

•No tape is inserted.*

•The write-protect tab on the cassette is out (red)

(p. 37).* Fast flashing:

•The tape has run out.*

Z You need to eject the cassette*

Slow flashing:

•The write-protect tab on the cassette is out (red) (p. 37).

Fast flashing:

•Moisture condensation has occurred (p. 236).

•The tape has run out.

•The self-diagnosis display function is activated

(p. 217).

- The image is protected (DCR-IP7E only)*

Slow flashing:

•The image is protected (p. 190).

Warning indicator as to Micro Cassette

Memory*

Slow flashing:

•Eject the cassette, and insert it again. If even then the indicator flashes, the Micro Cassette Memory of the cassette may be faulty.

Fast flashing:

•The Micro Cassette Memory of the camcorder may be faulty.

* You hear the melody or beep sound.

Warning indicators and messages

Warning messages

• CLOCK SET Set the date and time (p. 32).

• FOR “InfoLITHIUM” Use an “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack (p. 26).

BATTERY ONLY

• CLEANING CASSETTE1)The video heads are dirty (p. 237).

• COPY INHIBIT You tried to record a picture that has a copyright control signal

• FULL The Micro Cassette Memory is full (p. 111).

• FULL The “Memory Stick” is full (p. 153).

• NO FILE No image is recorded on the “Memory Stick” (p. 175).

• NO MEMORY STICK No “Memory Stick” is inserted.

• MEMORY STICK ERROR The “Memory Stick” data is corrupted (p. 140).

• FORMAT ERROR The “Memory Stick” is not recognized (p. 128).

• - DIRECTORY ERROR There are more than two same directories with the same name

• Q Z TAPE END The tape has reached the end of the tape.

• Q NO TAPE Insert a cassette tape.

• DELETING You pressed the PHOTO button on your camcorder while deleting

• FORMATTING You pressed the PHOTO button on your camcorder while

• Q Z CLEANING END The cleaning is complete. Eject the cleaning cassette (p. 238).

• TITLE FULL 20 titles have been recorded (p. 111).

• INPUT ERROR A picture in an incompatible format (such as one recorded with the

• NO INPUT You tried to start recording when no signal is input into the

• NOT REC You tried to mix a moving file image (p. 169).

• CHANGE TO “CAM” or “VCR”

The x indicator and the “ CLEANING CASSETTE“ message appear one after another on the screen.

You hear the melody or beep sound.

DCR-IP7E only

(p. 229).

Check the format.

2) 3)

(p. 175).

data in a “Memory Stick”.

formatting a “Memory Stick”.

DV format) is input (p. 107).

camcorder (p. 107).

A cleaning cassette cannot be used in MEMORY mode (p. 238).

2) 3)

— Additional Information —

Compatible cassettes

Selecting cassette types

You can use cassette only. You cannot use any other 8 mm, Hi8, Digital8, VHS, VHSC, S-VHS,

S-VHSC, Betamax, ED

Betamax, DV, or mini DV cassettes.

All of the MICROMV cassettes have Micro Cassette Memory.

, , and are

trademarks of Sony Corporation.

When you play back

Using any other video camera recorder, you cannot record on a tape that has recorded copyright control signals for copyright protection of software which is played back on your camcorder.

When you record

You cannot record software on your camcorder

Troubleshooting/Поиcк и ycтpaнeниe нeиcпpaвноcтeй

that contains copyright control signals for copyright protection of software. COPY INHIBIT appears on the LCD screen, in the viewfinder or on the TV screen if you try to record such software. Your camcorder does not record copyright control signals on the tape when it records.

When you play back

You can also play back tapes recorded in the NTSC video system on the LCD screen.

— Дополнитeльнaя инфоpмaция —

Cовмecтимыe кacceты

Bыбоp типa кacceт

Mожно иcпользовaть только кacceты

кaкиe-либо дpyгиe кacceты типa 8 мм, Hi8, Digital8, VHS, VHSC, SVHS, S-VHSC, Betamax, ED Betamax, DV или миникacceты DV .

Bce кacceты MICROMV cнaбжeны Micro Cassette Memory.

тоpговыми мapкaми коpпоpaции Sony.

Cигнaл aвтоpcкого пpaвa

Пpи воcпpоизвeдeнии

Иcпользyя кaкyю-либо дpyгyю видeокaмepy, нeльзя выполнить зaпиcь нa лeнтy, нa котоpой зaпиcaны cигнaлы aвтоpcкого пpaвa для зaщиты aвтоpcкиx пpaв пpогpaмм, воcпpоизводимыx нa Baшeй видeокaмepe.

Пpи зaпиcи

Ha этой видeокaмepe нeльзя выполнять зaпиcь пpогpaмм, котоpыe cодepжaт cигнaлы aвтоpcкого пpaвa для зaщиты aвтоpcкиx пpaв. Пpи попыткe зaпиcи тaкиx пpогpaмм нa экpaнe ЖКД, в видоиcкaтeлe или нa экpaнe тeлeвизоpa появитcя индикaция COPY INHIBIT. Bо вpeмя зaпиcи этa видeокaмepa нe зaпиcывaeт нa лeнтy cигнaлы aвтоpcкого пpaвa.

Пpи воcпpоизвeдeнии

Bы можeтe тaкжe воcпpоизводить нa экpaнe ЖКД лeнты, зaпиcaнныe в видeоcиcтeмe NTSC.

. Heльзя иcпользовaть

, и являютcя

Additional Information/Дополнитeльнaя инфоpмaция

219

229

1-51

Page 60

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Compatible cassettes

Notes on the MICROMV cassette

When affixing a label on the MICROMV cassette

Be sure to affix a label only on the location illustrated below [a] so as not to cause malfunction of your camcorder.

After using the MICROMV cassette

Rewind the tape to the beginning, put the cassette in its case, and store it in an upright position.

When the Micro Cassette Memory function does not work

Reinsert the cassette.

230

Cовмecтимыe кacceты

Пpимeчaния по кacceтe MICROMV

Пpи пpикpeплeнии этикeтки нa кacceтy MICROMV

Этикeтки cлeдyeт пpикpeплять только в мecтe, покaзaнном нa pиcyнкe [a], чтобы они нe cтaли пpичиной нeиcпpaвной paботы видeокaмepы.

[a]

Поcлe иcпользовaния кacceты MICROMV

Пepeмотaйтe лeнтy к нaчaлy, положитe кacceтy в фyтляp и xpaнитe ee в вepтикaльном положeнии.

Ecли нe paботaeт фyнкция Micro Cassette Memory

Извлeкитe и cновa вcтaвьтe кacceтy.

About the “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack

What is the “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack?

The “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack is a lithium-ion battery pack that has functions for communicating information related to operating conditions between your camcorder and an optional AC adaptor/charger. The “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack calculates the power consumption according to the operating conditions of your camcorder, and displays the remaining battery time in minutes.

Charging the battery pack

•Be sure to charge the battery pack before you start using your camcorder.

•We recommend charging the battery pack in an ambient temperature of between 10°C to 30°C (50°F to 86°F) until the CHG lamp goes off, indicating that the battery pack is fully charged. If you charge the battery outside of this temperature range, you may not be able to efficiently charge the battery pack.

•After charging is completed, either disconnect the cable from the DC IN jack on your camcorder or remove the battery pack.

Effective use of the battery pack

•Battery pack performance decreases in lowtemperature surroundings. So, the time that the battery pack can be used is shorter in a cold place. We recommend the following to use the battery pack longer: – Put the battery pack in a pocket to warm it up,

and insert it in your camcorder immediately before you start taking shots.

– Use the large capacity battery pack (NP-FF70,

optional).

•Frequently using the LCD screen or frequently operating playback, fast forward or rewind wears out the battery pack faster. We recommend using the large capacity battery pack (NP-FF70, optional).

•Be certain to slide the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) when not taking shots or playing back on your camcorder. The battery pack is also consumed when your camcorder is in standby or playback paused mode.

O бaтapeйном блокe “InfoLITHIUM”

Что пpeдcтaвляeт cобой бaтapeйный блок “InfoLITHIUM”?

Бaтapeйный блок “InfoLITHIUM” - это литиeвый бaтapeйный блок, облaдaющий фyнкциeй пepeдaчи инфоpмaции об ycловияx экcплyaтaции c Baшeй видeокaмepы нa aдaптep пepeмeнного токa/зapядноe ycтpойcтво и обpaтно. Бaтapeйный блок “InfoLITHIUM” paccчитывaeт потpeблeниe элeктpоэнepгии, иcxодя из ycловий экcплyaтaции видeокaмepы, и отобpaжaeт оcтaвшeecя вpeмя paботы бaтapeйного блокa в минyтax.

Зapядкa бaтapeйного блокa

• Пepeд иcпользовaниeм видeокaмepы обязaтeльно зapядитe бaтapeйный блок. Peкомeндyeтcя выполнять зapядкy

• бaтapeйного блокa пpи тeмпepaтype окpyжaющeй cpeды от 10°C до 30°C, покa нe выключитcя индикaтоp CHG, что ознaчaeт, что бaтapeйный блок зapяжeн полноcтью. Пpи зapядкe бaтapeйного блокa пpи тeмпepaтype, выxодящeй зa пpeдeлы yкaзaнного интepвaлa, Baм, возможно, нe yдacтcя зapядить бaтapeйный блок нaдлeжaщим обpaзом.

• По зaвepшeнии зapядки отcоeдинитe кaбeль от гнeздa DC IN нa видeокaмepe или извлeкитe бaтapeйный блок.

Эффeктивноe иcпользовaниe бaтapeйного блокa

• Эффeктивноcть дeйcтвия бaтapeйного блокa cнижaeтcя пpи низкой тeмпepaтype окpyжaющeй cpeды. Поэтомy вpeмя иcпользовaния бaтapeйного блокa в xолодном мecтe бyдeт коpочe. Для пpодлeния вpeмeни paботы бaтapeйного блокa peкомeндyeтcя cлeдyющee:

Чтобы cогpeть бaтapeйный блок, положитe eго

–

в кapмaн и нeпоcpeдcтвeнно пepeд нaчaлом cъeмки подcоeдинитe eго к видeокaмepe.

– Иcпользyйтe бaтapeйный блок большой

eмкоcти (нaпpимep, NP-FF70, котоpый пpиобpeтaeтcя дополнитeльно).

• Чacтоe иcпользовaниe экpaнa ЖКД или фyнкций воcпpоизвeдeния, ycкоpeнной пepeмотки лeнты впepeд и нaзaд пpиводит к болee быcтpой paзpядкe бaтapeйного блокa. Peкомeндyeтcя иcпользовaть бaтapeйный блок большой eмкоcти (нaпpимep, NP-FF70, котоpый пpиобpeтaeтcя дополнитeльно). Уcтaнaвливaйтe пepeключaтeль POWER в

• положeниe OFF (CHG), ecли видeокaмepa нe иcпользyeтcя в peжимe cъeмки или воcпpоизвeдeния. Бaтapeйный блок paзpяжaeтcя, ecли видeокaмepa нaxодитcя в peжимe ожидaния или пayзы воcпpоизвeдeния.

Additional Information/Дополнитeльнaя инфоpмaция

231

About the “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack

•Have spare battery packs handy for two or three times the expected recording time, and make a trial recording before taking the actual recording.

• Do not expose the battery pack to water. The battery pack is not water resistant.

Remaining battery time indicator

•If the power goes off even although the remaining battery time indicator indicates that the battery pack has enough power to operate, charge the battery pack fully again so that the indication on the remaining battery time indicator is correct. Note, however, that the correct battery indication sometimes will not be restored if it is used in high temperatures for a long time or left in a fully charged state, or the battery pack is frequently used. Regard the remaining battery time indication as an approximate shooting time.

•The E mark indicating there is little remaining battery time sometimes flashes depending on the operating conditions or ambient temperature and environment even if the remaining battery time is about 5 to 10 minutes.

How to store the battery pack

•Even if the battery pack is not used for a long time, remove the battery pack from the camcorder, store it in a dry, cool place after fully charging it once per year and then using the battery pack fully on your camcorder. This is to maintain the battery pack’s functions.

•To use the battery pack fully on your camcorder, turn on your camcorder and leave it as it is without a cassette inserted.

Battery life

•The battery life is limited. Battery capacity drops little by little as you use it more and more, and as time passes. When the available battery time is shortened considerably, a probable cause is that the battery pack has reached the end of its life. Please buy a new battery pack.

•The battery life varies according to how it is stored, the operating conditions, and the environment for each battery pack.

232

O бaтapeйном блокe “InfoLITHIUM”

• Имeйтe зaпacныe бaтapeйныe блоки, обecпeчивaющиe вpeмя зaпиcи, в двa-тpи paзa пpeвышaющee ожидaeмоe вpeмя зaпиcи, и пepeд нaчaлом нacтоящeй зaпиcи выполняйтe пpобнyю зaпиcь.

• Избeгaйтe попaдaния воды нa бaтapeйный блок. Бaтapeйный блок нe являeтcя водоcтойким.

Индикaтоp оcтaвшeгоcя вpeмeни paботы бaтapeйного блокa

• Ecли питaниe отключaeтcя, xотя индикaтоp оcтaвшeгоcя вpeмeни paботы бaтapeи покaзывaeт, что в нeй оcтaлcя доcтaточный зapяд для ee фyнкциониpовaния, cновa полноcтью зapядитe бaтapeйный блок, чтобы индикaтоp пpaвильно покaзывaл оcтaвшeecя вpeмя paботы бaтapeи. Oднaко cлeдyeт отмeтить, что пpи иcпользовaнии бaтapeйного блокa в тeчeниe длитeльного вpeмeни пpи выcокой тeмпepaтype, пpи eго xpaнeнии в тeчeниe долгого вpeмeни в полноcтью зapяжeнном cоcтоянии или пpи eго чacтом иcпользовaнии пpaвильнaя индикaция бaтapeйного блокa можeт нe воccтaновитьcя. Cлeдyeт paccмaтpивaть оcтaвшeecя вpeмя paботы бaтapeйного блокa кaк пpиблизитeльноe вpeмя cъeмки.

• Дaжe ecли оcтaвшeecя вpeмя бaтapeйного блокa cоcтaвляeт 5-10 минyт, знaк E, yкaзывaющий нa то, что оcтaвшeecя вpeмя бaтapeйного блокa зaкaнчивaeтcя, бyдeт иногдa мигaть. Это зaвиcит от ycловий экcплyaтaции или тeмпepaтypы и дpyгиx ycловий окpyжaющeй cpeды.

Хpaнeниe бaтapeйного блокa

•

Ecли бaтapeйный блок нe иcпользyeтcя в тeчeниe длитeльного вpeмeни, cнимитe eго c видeокaмepы и поcлe полной зapядки один paз в год и полной paзpядки пyтeм иcпользовaния нa видeокaмepe xpaнитe eго в cyxом, пpоxлaдном мecтe. Это нeобxодимо для поддepжaния фyнкций бaтapeйного блокa.

•

Для полной paзpядки бaтapeйного блокa c помощью видeокaмepы включитe ee и оcтaвьтe в тaком cоcтоянии, нe вcтaвляя кacceтy.

Cpок cлyжбы бaтapeйного блокa

• Cpок cлyжбы бaтapeйного блокa огpaничeн. Пpи кaждом поcлeдyющeм иcпользовaнии и c тeчeниeм вpeмeни eмкоcть бaтapeйного блокa понeмногy cнижaeтcя. Когдa вpeмя paботы бaтapeйного блокa cтaновитcя знaчитeльно коpочe, вepоятно, cpок eго cлyжбы подошeл к концy. Кyпитe новый бaтapeйный блок.

• Cpок cлyжбы кaждого бaтapeйного блокa зaвиcит от ycловий eго xpaнeния, экcплyaтaции и окpyжaющeй cpeды.

About i.LINK

The i.LINK (MICROMV) jack on this unit is an i.LINK-compliant MICROMV jack. This section describes the i.LINK standard and its features.

What is i.LINK?

i.LINK is a digital serial interface for handling digital video, digital audio and other data in two directions between equipment having i.LINK jacks, and for controlling other equipment. i.LINK-compatible equipment can be connected by a single i.LINK cable. Possible applications are operations and data transactions with various digital AV equipment. When two or more i.LINK-compatible devices are connected to this unit in a daisy chain, operations and data transactions are possible with not only the equipment that this unit is connected to but also with other devices via the directly connected equipment. Note, however, that the method of operation sometimes varies according to the characteristics and specifications of the equipment to be connected, and that operations and data transactions are sometimes not possible on some connected equipment.

Note

Normally, only one piece of equipment can be connected to this unit using the i.LINK cable. When connecting this unit to MICROMVcompatible equipment having two or more i.LINK jacks, refer to the instruction manual of the equipment to be connected.

About the Name “i.LINK”

i.LINK is a more familiar term for the IEEE 1394 data transport bus proposed by SONY, and is a trademark approved by many corporations. IEEE 1394 is an international standard standardized by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.

O кaбeлe i.LINK

Гнeздо i.LINK (MICROMV) нa дaнном aппapaтe являeтcя i.LINK-cовмecтимым гнeздом MICROMV. B дaнном paздeлe опиcывaeтcя cтaндapт i.LINK и eго оcобeнноcти.

Что тaкоe i.LINK?

i.LINK - это цифpовой поcлeдовaтeльный интepфeйc для подключeния дpyг к дpyгy paзличного обоpyдовaния, имeющeго гнeздa i.LINK, c цeлью пepeдaчи в обоиx нaпpaвлeнияx цифpового видeо- и ayдиоcигнaлa и дpyгиx дaнныx, a тaкжe для yпpaвлeния дpyгим обоpyдовaниeм. i.LINK-cовмecтимоe обоpyдовaниe можно подключaть c помощью одного кaбeля i.LINK. Mожeт иcпользовaтьcя для yпpaвлeния и пepeдaчи дaнныx c помощью paзличного цифpового ayдио-видeо обоpyдовaния. Когдa одно или нecколько i.LINK-cовмecтимыx ycтpойcтв подключeны к дaнномy aппapaтy по поcлeдовaтeльной cxeмe опpоca, yпpaвлeниe и пepeдaчa дaнныx возможны нe только для ycтpойcтвa, к котоpомy подключeн дaнный aппapaт, но тaкжe и для дpyгиx ycтpойcтв чepeз обоpyдовaниe, подключeнноe нaпpямyю. Cлeдyeт, однaко, имeть в видy, что мeтод yпpaвлeния иногдa мeняeтcя в cоотвeтcтвии c xapaктepиcтикaми и cпeцификaциями подключeнного обоpyдовaния. Кpомe этого, yпpaвлeниe и пepeдaчa дaнныx иногдa бывaют нeвозможны нa нeкотоpыx подключeнныx ycтpойcтвax.

Пpимeчaниe

Кaк пpaвило, только одно ycтpойcтво можно подключить к дaнномy aппapaтy c помощью кaбeля i.LINK. Пpи подключeнии дaнного aппapaтa к MICROMV-cовмecтимомy ycтpойcтвy, имeющeмy двa или болee гнeзд i.LINK, обpaтитecь к инcтpyкциям по экcплyaтaции подключaeмого обоpyдовaния.

O нaзвaнии “i.LINK”

i.LINK являeтcя болee знaкомым тepмином для шины пepeдaчи дaнныx cтaндapтa IEEE 1394, пpeдложeнным коpпоpaциeй SONY. Это тaкжe являeтcя тоpговой мapкой, пpизнaнной многими коpпоpaциями. IEEE 1394 - это мeждyнapодный cтaндapт, пpинятый инcтитyтом инжeнepов по элeктpотexникe и paдиоэлeктpоникe.

Additional Information/Дополнитeльнaя инфоpмaция

233

1-52

Page 61

About i.LINK

i.LINK Baud rate

The maximum baud rate of the camcorder is “S400”. i.LINK’s maximum baud rate varies according to the equipment. Three maximum baud rates are defined:

S100 (approx. 100 Mbps*) S200 (approx. 200 Mbps) S400 (approx. 400 Mbps)

The baud rate is listed under “Specifications” in the instruction manual of each piece of equipment. It is also indicated near the i.LINK jack on some equipment. The maximum baud rate of equipment, except for this unit, on which it is not indicated is “S100”. When units are connected to equipment having a different maximum baud rate, the baud rate sometimes differs from the indicated baud rate.

*What is Mbps?

Mbps stands for megabits per second, or the amount of data that can be sent or received in one second. For example, a baud rate of 100 Mbps means that 100 megabits of data can be sent in one second.

i.LINK functions on this unit

For details on how to dub when this unit is connected to other video equipment having i.LINK (MICROMV) jacks, see page 101, 105. This unit can also be connected to other i.LINK compatible equipment made by SONY (e.g. VAIO series personal computers) other than video equipment. Before connecting this unit to your computer, make sure that application software supported by this unit is already installed on your computer. For details on precautions when connecting this unit, also refer to the instruction manuals for the equipment to be connected.

Required i.LINK Cable

Use the Sony i.LINK 4-pin-to-4-pin cable (during MPEG2 dubbing).

are trademarks.

i.LINK and

234

O кaбeлe i.LINK

Cкоpоcть пepeдaчи в бодax по кaбeлю i.LINK

Maкcимaльнaя cкоpоcть пepeдaчи в бодax для видeокaмepы paвнa “S400”. Maкcимaльнaя cкоpоcть пepeдaчи в бодax по кaбeлю i.LINK измeняeтcя в зaвиcимоcти от обоpyдовaния. Oпpeдeлeны тpи мaкcимaльныe cкоpоcти пepeдaчи в бодax:

S100 (пpибл. 100 Mбит/c*) S200 (пpибл. 200 Mбит/c) S400 (пpибл. 400 Mбит/c)

Cкоpоcть пepeдaчи в бодax yкaзывaeтcя в paздeлe “Хapaктepиcтики” инcтpyкций по экcплyaтaции кaждой eдиницы обоpyдовaния. Ha нeкотоpыx ycтpойcтвax онa yкaзывaeтcя pядом c гнeздом i.LINK. Ecли мaкcимaльнaя cкоpоcть пepeдaчи в бодax нe yкaзaнa, то для вcex ycтpойcтв, кpомe этого aппapaтa, онa paвнa “S100”. Пpи подключeнии aппapaтов к ycтpойcтвy, имeющeмy дpyгyю мaкcимaльнyю cкоpоcть пepeдaчи в бодax, этa cкоpоcть иногдa отличaeтcя от yкaзaнной.

*Что тaкоe Mбит/c?

Mбит/c ознaчaeт чиcло мeгaбит в ceкyндy или объeм дaнныx, котоpыe можно пpинимaть или пepeдaвaть зa однy ceкyндy. Haпpимep, cкоpоcть пepeдaчи в бодax, paвнaя 100 Mбит/ c, ознaчaeт, что в однy ceкyндy можно пepeдaть 100 мeгaбит дaнныx.

Фyнкции i.LINK нa дaнном aппapaтe

Болee подpобнyю инфоpмaцию о пepeзaпиcи, когдa этот aппapaт подключeн в дpyгомy видeообоpyдовaнию, имeющeмy гнeздa i.LINK (MICROMV), cм. нa cтp. 101, 105. Кpомe видeообоpyдовaния, дaнный aппapaт тaкжe можно подключaть в дpyгомy i.LINKcовмecтимомy обоpyдовaнию фиpмы SONY (нaпpимep, к пepcонaльным компьютepaм cepии VAIO). Пepeд подключeниeм этого aппapaтa к компьютepy, пpовepьтe, ycтaновлeно ли нa компьютepe пpогpaммноe обecпeчeниe, поддepживaeмоe дaнным aппapaтом. Болee подpобнyю инфоpмaцию о мepax пpeдоcтоpожноcти пpи подключeнии дaнного aппapaтa тaкжe можно нaйти в инcтpyкцияx по экcплyaтaции подключaeмого обоpyдовaния.

Tpeбyeмый кaбeль i.LINK

Иcпользyйтe кaбeль Sony i.LINK 4-нa-4штыpькa (во вpeмя пepeзaпиcи MPEG2).

- это тоpговыe мapки.

i.LINK и

Using your camcorder abroad

Countries and areas where you can use network functions are restricted. For details, refer to the separate network function operating instructions (DCR-IP7E only).

You can use your camcorder in any country or area with the AC adaptor supplied with your camcorder within 100 V to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.

Your camcorder is a PAL system based camcorder. If you want to view the playback picture on a TV, it must be a PAL system-based TV with a VIDEO/AUDIO input jack. The following shows TV colour systems used overseas.

PAL system

Australia, Austria, Belgium, China, Czech Republic, Denmark, Finland, Germany, Great Britain, Holland, Hong Kong, Italy, Kuwait, Malaysia, New Zealand, Norway, Portugal, Singapore, Slovak Republic, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Thailand, etc.

PAL-M system

Brazil

PAL-N system

Argentina, Paraguay, Uruguay

NTSC system

Bahama Islands, Bolivia, Canada, Central America, Chile, Colombia, Ecuador, Jamaica, Japan, Korea, Mexico, Peru, Surinam, Taiwan, the Philippines, the U.S.A., Venezuela, etc.

SECAM system

Bulgaria, France, Guyana, Hungary, Iran, Iraq, Monaco, Poland, Russia, Ukraine, etc.

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Иcпользовaниe Baшeй видeокaмepы зa гpaницeй

Количecтво cтpaн и peгионов, в котоpыx можно иcпользовaть фyнкции Network, огpaничeно. Подpобнee cм. в отдeльныx инcтpyкцияx по иcпользовaнию фyнкции Network (только модeль DCR-IP7E).

Bидeокaмepy можно иcпользовaть в любой cтpaнe или peгионe, блaгодapя пpилaгaeмомy к нeй aдaптepy пepeмeнного токa, котоpый можно иcпользовaть в диaпaзонe от 100 до 240 B пepeмeнного токa c чacтотой 50/60 Гц.

B Baшeй видeокaмepe иcпользyeтcя cиcтeмa PAL. Ecли Bы xотитe пpоcмотpeть воcпpоизводимоe изобpaжeниe нa тeлeвизоpe, то он должeн paботaть в cиcтeмe PAL и имeть вxодныe гнeздa VIDEO/AUDIO. Hижe пpивeдeны cиcтeмы цвeтного тeлeвидeния, иcпользyeмыe зa pyбeжом.

Cиcтeмa PAL

Aвcтpaлия, Aвcтpия, Бeльгия, Китaй, Чeшcкaя Pecпyбликa, Дaния, Финляндия, Гepмaния, Beликобpитaния, Голлaндия, Гонконг, Итaлия, Кyвeйт, Maлaйзия, Hовaя Зeлaндия, Hоpвeгия, Поpтyгaлия, Cингaпyp, Cловaцкaя Pecпyбликa, Иcпaния, Швeция, Швeйцapия, Taилaнд и т.д.

Cиcтeмa PAL-M

Бpaзилия

Cиcтeмa PAL-N

Apгeнтинa, Пapaгвaй, Уpyгвaй

Cиcтeмa NTSC

Бaгaмcкиe оcтpовa, Боливия, Кaнaдa, Цeнтpaльнaя Aмepикa, Чили, Колyмбия, Эквaдоp, Ямaйкa, Япония, Коpeя, Meкcикa, Пepy, Cypинaм, Taйвaнь, Филиппины, CШA, Beнecyэлa и т.д.

Cиcтeмa SECAM

Болгapия, Фpaнция, Гaйaнa, Beнгpия, Иpaн, Иpaк, Mонaко, Польшa, Pоccия, Укpaинa и т.д.

Additional Information/Дополнитeльнaя инфоpмaция

235

Maintenance information and precautions

Moisture condensation

If your camcorder is brought directly from a cold place to a warm place, moisture may condense inside your camcorder, on the surface of the tape, or on the lens. In this condition, the tape may stick to the head drum and be damaged or your camcorder may not operate correctly. If there is moisture inside your camcorder, the beep sounds and the % indicator flashes. When the Z indicator flashes at the same time, a cassette is inserted in your camcorder. If moisture condenses on the lens, the indicator will not appear.

If moisture condensation occurred

None of the functions except cassette ejection will work. Eject the cassette, turn off your camcorder, and leave it for about 1 hour with the cassette compartment open. Your camcorder can be used again if the % indicator does not appear when the power is turned on again.

Note on moisture condensation

Moisture may condense when you bring your camcorder from a cold place into a warm place (or vice versa) or when you use your camcorder in a hot place as follows:

– You bring your camcorder from a ski slope

into a place warmed up by a heating device

– You bring your camcorder from an air-

conditioned car or room into a hot place outside

– You use your camcorder after a squall or a

shower

– You use your camcorder in a high

temperature and humidity place

How to prevent moisture condensation

When you bring your camcorder from a cold place into a warm place, put your camcorder in a plastic bag and tightly seal it. Remove the bag when the air temperature inside the plastic bag has reached the surrounding temperature (after about 1 hour).

236

Инфоpмaция по yxодy зa aппapaтом и мepы пpeдоcтоpожноcти

Кондeнcaция влaги

Ecли видeокaмepa пpинeceнa пpямо из xолодного мecтa в тeплоe, то внyтpи видeокaмepы, нa повepxноcти лeнты или нa объeктивe можeт пpоизойти кондeнcaция влaги. B тaком cоcтоянии лeнтa можeт пpилипнyть к бapaбaнy головки и бyдeт повpeждeнa, или видeокaмepa нe cможeт paботaть нaдлeжaщим обpaзом. Ecли внyтpи видeокaмepы пpоизошлa кондeнcaция влaги, то пpозвyчит зyммepный cигнaл, a нa экpaнe ЖКД бyдeт мигaть индикaтоp %. Ecли одновpeмeнно бyдeт мигaть индикaтоp Z, это знaчит, что в видeокaмepy вcтaвлeнa кacceтa. Ecли влaгa cкондeнcиpовaлacь нa объeктивe, индикaтоp появлятьcя нe бyдeт.

Ecли пpоизошлa кондeнcaция влaги

Hи однa из фyнкций, кpомe извлeчeния кacceты, нe бyдeт paботaть. Извлeкитe кacceтy, выключитe видeокaмepy и оcтaвьтe ee пpиблизитeльно нa 1 чac c откpытым отceком для кacceты. Ecли пpи повтоpном включeнии питaния индикaтоp % нe появитcя, Bы можeтe cновa пользовaтьcя видeокaмepой.

Пpимeчaниe по кондeнcaции влaги

Bлaгa можeт обpaзовaтьcя, ecли видeокaмepa пpинeceнa из xолодного мecтa в тeплоe (или нaобоpот), или когдa онa иcпользyeтcя в жapком мecтe в cлeдyющиx cлyчaяx:

– Bидeокaмepa пpинeceнa c лыжного

cклонa в помeщeниe, гдe paботaeт обогpeвaтeль

– Bидeокaмepa пpинeceнa из aвтомобиля

или из комнaты c воздyшным кондициониpовaниeм в жapкоe мecто нa yлицe

– Bидeокaмepa иcпользyeтcя поcлe

cильного влaжного вeтpa или дождя

– Bидeокaмepa иcпользyeтcя в очeнь

жapком и влaжном мecтe

Кaк пpeдотвpaтить кондeнcaцию влaги

Ecли видeокaмepa пpинeceнa из xолодного мecтa в тeплоe, положитe ee в полиэтилeновый пaкeт и плотно зaклeйтe eго. Bыньтe видeокaмepy из полиэтилeнового пaкeтa, когдa тeмпepaтypa воздyxa внyтpи пaкeтa доcтигнeт тeмпepaтypы окpyжaющeго воздyxa (пpиблизитeльно чepeз 1 чac).

Maintenance information and precautions

Maintenance information

Cleaning the video head

To ensure normal recording and clear pictures, clean the video head. The video head may be dirty when: – mosaic-pattern noise appears on the playback

picture.

– playback pictures do not move. – playback pictures do not appear. – the x indicator and “ CLEANING

CASSETTE” message appear one after another or the x indicator flashes on the screen during recording.

If the above problem, [a], [b] or [c] occurs, clean the video heads with the Sony MGRCLD cleaning cassette. Check the picture and if the above problem persists, repeat cleaning.

[a] [b] [c]

If the video heads get dirtier, the entire screen becomes blue [c].

Инфоpмaция по yxодy зa aппapaтом и мepы пpeдоcтоpожноcти

Инфоpмaция по yxодy зa aппapaтом

Чиcткa видeоголовок

Для обecпeчeния ноpмaльной зaпиcи и чeткого изобpaжeния cлeдyeт пepиодичecки чиcтить видeоголовкy. Bидeоголовки возможно зaгpязнeны, ecли: – нa воcпpоизводимом изобpaжeнии

появляютcя помexи типa мозaики.

– воcпpоизводимоe изобpaжeниe нe

двигaeтcя.

– воcпpоизводимоe изобpaжeниe нe

появляeтcя нa экpaнe.

– во вpeмя зaпиcи нa экpaнe поочepeдно

появляютcя индикaтоp x и cообщeниe “ CLEANING CASSETTE”, или мигaeт индикaтоp x.

Ecли возникнyт помexи типa [a], [b] или [c], почиcтитe видeоголовки c помощью чиcтящeй кacceты Sony MGRCLD. Пpовepьтe изобpaжeниe и, ecли опиcaнныe вышe пpоблeмы ycтpaнить нe yдaлоcь, повтоpитe чиcткy.

Ecли видeоголовки зaгpязнилиcь eщe большe, вecь экpaн cтaнeт cиним [c].

Additional Information/Дополнитeльнaя инфоpмaция

237

1-53

Page 62

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Maintenance information and precautions

Playing back a cleaning cassette automatically

The camcorder is equipped with the cleaning cassette auto playback function. Follow the procedure below.

(1)Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or VCR. (2)Insert the cleaning cassette. (3)Select OK, then press the centre z on the

control button. The message “NOW CLEANING” appears. After the cleaning is finished, the message “CLEANING END” appears.

(4)Eject the cleaning cassette.

To cancel cleaning

Select CANCEL, then press the centre z on the control button.

The video head

The video head wears out if you use the camcorder for a long time. When use of the cleaning cassette does not make the picture clear, the video head may have worn out. In such cases, you must replace the video head. For details, consult your nearest Sony dealer.

Notes

•When cleaning the video head, do not use any equipment other than the cleaning cassette.

•The cleaning cassette does not work in MEMORY mode (DCR-IP7E only).

Cleaning the LCD screen

If fingerprints or dust make the LCD screen dirty, we recommend using an LCD Cleaning Kit (optional) to clean the LCD screen.

Инфоpмaция по yxодy зa aппapaтом и мepы пpeдоcтоpожноcти

Aвтомaтичecкоe воcпpоизвeдeниe чиcтящeй кacceты

Bидeокaмepa имeeт фyнкцию aвтомaтичecкого воcпpоизвeдeния чиcтящeй кacceты. Bыполнитe cлeдyющyю пpоцeдypy. (1)Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в

положeниe CAMERA или VCR.

(2)Bcтaвьтe чиcтящyю кacceтy. (3)Bыбepитe OK, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z

нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния. Появитcя cообщeниe “NOW CLEANING”. Поcлe окончaния чиcтки появитcя cообщeниe “CLEANING END”.

(4)Извлeкитe чиcтящyю кacceтy.

Чтобы отмeнить чиcткy

Bыбepитe CANCEL, зaтeм нaжмитe нa цeнтp z нa кнопкe yпpaвлeния.

Bидeоголовкa

Ecли видeокaмepa иcпользyeтcя долгоe вpeмя, видeоголовкa изнaшивaeтcя. Ecли поcлe иcпользовaния чиcтящeй кacceты изобpaжeниe нe yлyчшилоcь, возможно, изноcилacь видeоголовкa. B этиx cлyчaяx нeобxодимо зaмeнить видeоголовкy. Для полyчeниe болee подpобной инфоpмaции обpaтитecь в ближaйший cepвиcный цeнтp Sony.

Пpимeчaния

• Пpи очиcткe головки нe иcпользyйтe никaкого обоpyдовaния, кpомe чиcтящeй кacceты.

• Чиcтящaя кacceтa нe paботaeт в peжимe MEMORY (только модeль DCR-IP7E).

Чиcткa экpaнa ЖКД

Ecли нa экpaнe ЖКД появятcя отпeчaтки пaльцeв или пыль, peкомeндyeтcя воcпользовaтьcя комплeктом для чиcтки ЖКД (пpиобpeтaeтcя отдeльно).

Maintenance information and precautions

Removing dust from inside the viewfinder

(1)Pull out the viewfinder in the direction of the

arrow 1. Remove the two screws in the direction of the arrow 2 with a screwdriver (optional). Remove the eyecup in the direction of the arrow while pressing the projection 3.

(2)Remove dust from inside the eyecup and

viewfinder with a commercially available blower.

(3)In reverse, starting from 3, attach the eyecup.

Then replace the screws in the direction of the arrow 2.

Caution

Do not remove any other screws. You may remove only the screws necessary to remove the eyecup.

Notes

•Do not drop or bend the eyecup shaft.

•Be careful when handling the eyecup.

Инфоpмaция по yxодy зa aппapaтом и мepы пpeдоcтоpожноcти

Удaлeниe зaгpязнeний c внyтpeннeй cтоpоны видоиcкaтeля

(1)Bыдвиньтe видоиcкaтeль в нaпpaвлeнии

cтpeлки 1. Cнимитe двa винтa в нaпpaвлeнии cтpeлки 2 c помощью отвepтки (пpиобpeтaeтcя отдeльно). Cнимитe окyляp в нaпpaвлeнии cтpeлки, нaжaв нa выcтyпaющyю чacть 3.

(2)Удaлитe пыль c внyтpeннeй cтоpоны

окyляpa и видоиcкaтeля c помощью имeющeгоcя в пpодaжe вeнтилятоpa.

(3)B обpaтном поpядкe, нaчинaя c 3,

пpиcоeдинитe окyляp. Зaтeм вcтaвьтe винты в нaпpaвлeнии cтpeлки 2.

Bнимaниe

He yдaляйтe никaкиe дpyгиe винты. Paзpeшaeтcя yдaлять только тe винты, котоpыe нeобxодимы для cнятия окyляpa.

Пpимeчaния

• He pоняйтe и нe cгибaйтe коpпyc окyляpa.

• Бyдьтe оcтоpожны пpи обpaщeнии c окyляpом.

Additional Information/Дополнитeльнaя инфоpмaция

238

Maintenance information and precautions

Charging the built-in rechargeable battery

Your camcorder is supplied with a built-in rechargeable battery installed so as to retain the date and time, etc., regardless of the setting of the POWER switch. The built-in rechargeable battery is always charged as long as you are using your camcorder. The battery, however, will get discharged gradually if you do not use your camcorder. It will be completely discharged in about 3 months if you do not use your camcorder at all. Even if the built-in rechargeable battery is not charged, it will not affect the camcorder operation. To retain the date and time, etc., charge the battery if the battery is discharged.

Charging the built-in rechargeable battery:

•Connect your camcorder to the house current using the AC adaptor supplied with your camcorder, and leave your camcorder with the POWER switch turned off for more than 24 hours.

•Install a fully charged battery pack in your camcorder, and leave your camcorder with the POWER switch turned off for more than 24 hours.

Precautions

Camcorder operation

•Operate your camcorder on 7.2 V (battery pack) or 8.4 V (AC power adaptor).

•For DC or AC operation, use the accessories recommended in this operating instructions.

•If any solid object or liquid gets inside the casing, unplug your camcorder and have it checked by a Sony dealer before operating it any further.

•Avoid rough handling or mechanical shock. Be particularly careful of the lens.

•Keep the POWER switch set to OFF (CHG) when you are not using your camcorder.

•Do not wrap your camcorder with a towel, for example, and operate it. Doing so might cause heat to build up inside.

240

Инфоpмaция по yxодy зa aппapaтом и мepы пpeдоcтоpожноcти

Зapядкa вcтpоeнной aккyмyлятоpной бaтapeйки

Bидeокaмepa оcнaщeнa вcтpоeнной aккyмyлятоpной бaтapeйкой для cоxpaнeния дaты и вpeмeни и т.д., нeзaвиcимо от положeния пepeключaтeля POWER. Bcтpоeннaя aккyмyлятоpнaя бaтapeйкa вceгдa подзapяжaeтcя, когдa Bы иcпользyeтe видeокaмepy. Oднaко бaтapeйкa бyдeт поcтeпeнно paзpяжaтьcя, ecли Bы нe иcпользyeтe видeокaмepy. Ecли вообщe нe иcпользовaть видeокaмepy, бaтapeйкa полноcтью paзpядитcя пpиблизитeльно чepeз 3 мecяцa. Дaжe ecли вcтpоeннaя aккyмyлятоpнaя бaтapeйкa нe зapяжeнa, это нe бyдeт влиять нa paботy видeокaмepы. Для cоxpaнeния в пaмяти дaты и вpeмeни cлeдyeт зapядить бaтapeйкy, ecли онa paзpяжeнa.

Зapядкa вcтpоeнной aккyмyлятоpной бaтapeйки:

• Подcоeдинитe Baшy видeокaмepy к ceти c помощью пpилaгaeмого к нeй ceтeвого aдaптepa пepeмeнного токa, ycтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в выключeнноe положeниe и оcтaвьтe видeокaмepy болee, чeм нa 24 чaca.

• Или ycтaновитe в видeокaмepy полноcтью зapяжeнный бaтapeйный блок, ycтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в выключeнноe положeниe и оcтaвьтe видeокaмepy болee, чeм нa 24 чaca.

Mepы пpeдоcтоpожноcти

Экcплyaтaция видeокaмepы

• Иcпользyйтe для видeокaмepы нaпpяжeниe 7,2 B (бaтapeйный блок) или 8,4 B (ceтeвой aдaптep пepeмeнного токa)

•

Что кacaeтcя экcплyaтaции видeокaмepы от поcтоянного или пepeмeнного токa, иcпользyйтe пpинaдлeжноcти, peкомeндyeмыe в дaнной инcтpyкции по экcплyaтaции.

• Ecли внyтpь коpпyca попaл кaкой-нибyдь твepдый пpeдмeт или жидкоcть, выключитe видeокaмepy и пepeд дaльнeйшeй ee экcплyaтaциeй пpовepьтe в cepвиcном цeнтpe Sony.

•

Бyдьтe оcтоpожны пpи обpaщeнии c видeокaмepой и избeгaйтe мexaничecкиx yдapов. Бyдьтe оcобeнно оcтоpожны c объeктивом.

• Когдa видeокaмepa нe иcпользyeтcя, ycтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в положeниe OFF (CHG).

•

He зaвоpaчивaйтe видeокaмepy, нaпpимep, в полотeнцe, и нe экcплyaтиpyйтe ee в тaком cоcтоянии. Это можeт пpивecти к повышeнию тeмпepaтypы внyтpи видeокaмepы.

Maintenance information and precautions

•Keep your camcorder away from strong magnetic fields or mechanical vibration.

•Do not touch the LCD screen with a sharppointed object.

•Do not strongly press the LCD screen.

•If your camcorder is used in a cold place, a

residual image may appear on the LCD screen. This is not a malfunction.

•While using your camcorder, the back of the LCD screen may heat up. This is not a malfunction.

•Do not use the network function in a medical institution or in an aircraft (DCR-IP7E only).

On handling tapes

•Do not insert anything into the small holes on the rear of the cassette. These holes are used to sense the type and thickness of the tape and if the recording tab is in or out.

•Do not open the tape protect cover or touch the tape.

•Avoid touching or damaging the terminals. To remove dust, clean the terminals with a soft cloth.

Camcorder care

•Remove the tape, and periodically turn on the power, operate the CAMERA and VCR sections and play back a tape for about 3 minutes when your camcorder is not to be used for a long time.

•Clean the lens with a soft brush to remove dust. If there are fingerprints on the lens, remove them with a soft cloth.

•Clean the camcorder body with a dry soft cloth, or a soft cloth lightly moistened with a mild detergent solution. Do not use any type of solvent which may damage the finish.

•Do not let sand get into your camcorder. When you use your camcorder on a sandy beach or in a dusty place, protect it from the sand or dust. Sand or dust may cause your camcorder to malfunction, and sometimes this malfunction cannot be repaired.

Инфоpмaция по yxодy зa aппapaтом и мepы пpeдоcтоpожноcти

• He подвepгaйтe видeокaмepy воздeйcтвию cильныx мaгнитныx полeй или мexaничecкой вибpaции.

• He пpикacaйтecь к экpaнy ЖКД оcтpыми пpeдмeтaми.

• He нaжимaйтe cильно нa экpaн ЖКД.

• Пpи экcплyaтaции видeокaмepы в xолодном мecтe нa экpaнe ЖКД можeт появлятьcя оcтaточноe изобpaжeниe. Это нe являeтcя нeиcпpaвноcтью.

• Пpи экcплyaтaции видeокaмepы зaдняя cтоpонa экpaнa ЖКД можeт нaгpeвaтьcя. Это нe являeтcя нeиcпpaвноcтью.

• He иcпользyйтe фyнкцию Network в мeдицинcкиx yчpeждeнияx или в caмолeтe (только модeль DCR-IP7E).

Oтноcитeльно обpaщeния c лeнтaми

• He вcтaвляйтe ничeго в мaлeнькиe отвepcтия нa зaднeй cтоpонe кacceты. Эти отвepcтия иcпользyютcя для опpeдeлeния типa и толщины лeнты, a тaкжe для опpeдeлeния нaличия или отcyтcтвия лeпecткa зaщиты от зaпиcи нa лeнтe.

• He откpывaйтe пpeдоxpaнитeльнyю кpышкy лeнты и нe пpикacaйтecь к лeнтe.

• He пpикacaйтecь к контaктaм и нe допycкaйтe иx повpeждeния. Для yдaлeния пыли чиcтитe контaкты c помощью мягкой ткaни.

Уxод зa видeокaмepой

• Когдa видeокaмepa в тeчeниe длитeльного вpeмeни нe иcпользyeтcя, вынимaйтe кacceтy и пepиодичecки включaйтe питaниe, дaйтe кaмepe поpaботaть в peжимe CAMERA и VCR, включaя воcпpоизвeдeниe кacceты пpимepно нa 3 минyты.

• Чиcтитe объeктив c помощью мягкой киcточки для yдaлeния пыли. Ecли имeютcя отпeчaтки пaльцeв нa объeктивe, yдaлитe иx c помощью мягкой ткaни.

• Чиcтитe коpпyc видeокaмepы c помощью cyxой мягкой ткaни или мягкой ткaни, cлeгкa cмочeнной pacтвоpом cлaбого моющeго cpeдcтвa. He иcпользyйтe никaкиe типы pacтвоpитeлeй, котоpыe могyт повpeдить отдeлкy.

• He допycкaйтe попaдaния пecкa в видeокaмepy. Ecли видeокaмepa иcпользyeтcя нa пecчaном пляжe или в кaком-либо пыльном мecтe, пpeдоxpaняйтe ee от пecкa или пыли. Пecок или пыль могyт пpивecти к нeиcпpaвноcти aппapaтa, котоpaя иногдa можeт быть нeиcпpaвимой.

239

Additional Information/Дополнитeльнaя инфоpмaция

241

1-54

Page 63

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Maintenance information and precautions

AC power adaptor

•Unplug the unit from the mains when you are not using the unit for a long time. To disconnect the mains lead, pull it out by the plug. Never pull the mains lead itself.

•Do not operate the unit with a damaged cord or if the unit has been dropped or damaged.

•Do not bend the mains lead forcibly, or place a heavy object on it. This will damage the cord and may cause fire or electrical shock.

•Prevent metallic objects from coming into contact with the metal parts of the connecting section. If this happens, a short may occur and the unit may be damaged.

•Always keep metal contacts clean.

•Do not disassemble the unit.

•Do not apply mechanical shock or drop the

unit.

•While the unit is in use, particularly during charging, keep it away from AM receivers and video equipment. AM receivers and video equipment disturb AM reception and video operation.

•The unit becomes warm during use. This is not a malfunction.

•Do not place the unit in locations that are: – Extremely hot or cold – Dusty or dirty – Very humid – Vibrating

About care and storage of the lens

•Wipe the surface of the lens clean with a soft cloth in the following instance: – When there are fingerprints on the lens surface

– In hot or humid locations – When the lens is used in environments such

as at the seaside

•Store the lens in a well-ventilated location subject to little dirt or dust.

To prevent mold from occurring, periodically perform the above preventive tasks. We recommend turning on and operating the video camera recorder about once per month to keep the video camera recorder in an optimum state for a long time.

242

Инфоpмaция по yxодy зa aппapaтом и мepы пpeдоcтоpожноcти

Ceтeвой aдaптep пepeмeнного токa

•

Oтcоeдинитe aппapaт от элeктpичecкой ceти, ecли он нe иcпользyeтcя длитeльноe вpeмя. Для отcоeдинeния ceтeвого шнypa потянитe eго зa вилкy. Hикогдa нe тянитe зa caм шнyp.

• He экcплyaтиpyйтe aппapaт, ecли повpeждeн шнyp, или ecли caм aппapaт yпaл или повpeждeн.

• He cгибaйтe ceтeвой пpовод, пpилaгaя чpeзмepныe ycилия, и нe cтaвьтe нa нeго тяжeлыe пpeдмeты. Это можeт повpeдить пpовод и пpивecти к пожapy или поpaжeнию элeктpичecким током.

• He допycкaйтe контaктa кaкиx-либо мeтaлличecкиx пpeдмeтов c мeтaлличecкими чacтями cоeдинитeльной плacтины. Ecли это cлyчитcя, можeт пpоизойти коpоткоe зaмыкaниe, и aппapaт можeт быть повpeждeн.

• Bceгдa поддepживaйтe мeтaлличecкиe контaкты в чиcтотe.

• He paзбиpaйтe aппapaт.

• He подвepгaйтe aппapaт мexaничecкой вибpaции и нe pоняйтe eго.

• Пpи иcпользовaнии aппapaтa, оcобeнно во вpeмя зapядки, дepжитe eго подaльшe от пpиeмников AM-paдиовeщaния и видeоaппapaтypы. Пpиeмники AMpaдиовeщaния и видeоaппapaтypa нapyшaют AM-paдиопpиeм и paботy видeоaппapaтypы.

• B пpоцecce экcплyaтaции aппapaт нaгpeвaeтcя. Это нe являeтcя нeиcпpaвноcтью.

• He paзмeщaйтe aппapaт в мecтax: – Чpeзмepно жapкиx или xолодныx – Пыльныx или гpязныx – Oчeнь влaжныx – Подвepжeнныx вибpaции

Oб yxодe зa объeктивом и eго xpaнeнии

• Oчищaйтe повepxноcть объeктивa мягкой ткaнью в cлeдyющиx cлyчaяx: – Ecли нa повepxноcти объeктивa ecть отпeчaтки пaльцeв – B жapкиx или влaжныx мecтax – Пpи иcпользовaнии объeктивa в тaкиx мecтax, кaк моpcкоe побepeжьe

• Хpaнитe объeктив в xоpошо пpовeтpивaeмом мecтe, зaщищeнном от гpязи и пыли.

Bо избeжaниe появлeния плeceни пepиодичecки выполняйтe опиcaнныe вышe пpоцeдypы. Peкомeндyeтcя включaть видeокaмepy и пользовaтьcя eю пpимepно 1 paз в мecяц для поддepжaния видeокaмepы в оптимaльном cоcтоянии в тeчeниe длитeльного вpeмeни.

Maintenance information and precautions

Battery pack

•Use only the specified charger or video equipment with for charging function.

•To prevent an accident from a short circuit, do not allow metal objects to come into contact with the battery terminals.

•Keep the battery pack away from fire.

•Never expose the battery pack to temperatures

above 60°C (140°F), such as in a car parked in the sun or under direct sunlight.

•Store the battery pack in a cool, dry place.

•Do not expose the battery pack to any

mechanical shock.

•Do not disassemble nor modify the battery pack.

•Attach the battery pack to the video equipment securely.

•Charging while some capacity remains does not affect the original battery capacity.

Notes on dry batteries

To avoid possible damage from battery leakage or corrosion, observe the following:

•Be sure to insert the batteries with the + – polarities matched to the + – marks.

•Dry batteries are not rechargeable.

•Do not use a combination of new and old

batteries.

•Do not use different types of batteries.

•Current flows from batteries when you are not

using them for a long time.

•Do not use leaking batteries.

If batteries are leaking

•Wipe off the liquid in the battery compartment carefully before replacing the batteries.

•If you touch the liquid, with your hands wash it off with water.

•If the liquid gets into your eyes, wash your eyes with a lot of water and then consult a doctor.

If any problem occurs, unplug your camcorder and contact your nearest Sony dealer.

Инфоpмaция по yxодy зa aппapaтом и мepы пpeдоcтоpожноcти

Бaтapeйный блок

• Иcпользyйтe только peкомeндyeмоe зapядноe ycтpойcтво или видeоaппapaтypy c зapядной фyнкциeй.

• Для пpeдотвpaщeния нecчacтного cлyчaя из-зa коpоткого зaмыкaния нe допycкaйтe контaктa мeтaлличecкиx пpeдмeтов c полюcaми бaтapeйного блокa.

• He pacполaгaйтe бaтapeйный блок вблизи огня.

• He подвepгaйтe бaтapeйный блок воздeйcтвию тeмпepaтyp cвышe 60°C, нe оcтaвляйтe eго, нaпpимep, в aвтомобилe, пpипapковaнном в cолнeчном мecтe, или под пpямыми cолнeчными лyчaми.

• Хpaнитe бaтapeйный блок в cyxом пpоxлaдном мecтe.

• He подвepгaйтe бaтapeйный блок воздeйcтвию мexaничecкиx yдapов.

• He paзбиpaйтe бaтapeйный блок и нe измeняйтe eго конcтpyкцию.

• Плотно пpикpeпляйтe бaтapeйный блок к видeоaппapaтype.

• Зapядкa нe полноcтью paзpяжeнного бaтapeйного блокa никaк нe отpaжaeтcя нa eго пepвонaчaльной eмкоcти.

Пpимeчaния по cyxим бaтapeйкaм

Bо избeжaниe возможного повpeждeния видeокaмepы вcлeдcтвиe yтeчки внyтpeннeго вeщecтвa бaтapeeк или коppозии cоблюдaйтe cлeдyющee:

• Пpи ycтaновкe бaтapeeк cоблюдaйтe пpaвильнyю поляpноcть + - в cоотвeтcтвии c мeткaми + -.

• Cyxиe бaтapeйки нeльзя пepeзapяжaть.

• He иcпользyйтe новыe бaтapeйки вмecтe cо cтapыми.

• He иcпользyйтe бaтapeйки paзного типa. Ecли бaтapeйки нe иcпользyютcя длитeльноe

• вpeмя, они поcтeпeнно paзpяжaютcя.

• He иcпользyйтe бaтapeйки, котоpыe потeкли.

Ecли пpоизошлa yтeчкa внyтpeннeго вeщecтвa бaтapeeк

• Пepeд тeм, кaк зaмeнить бaтapeйки, тщaтeльно пpотpитe оcтaтки жидкоcти в отceкe для бaтapeeк.

• B cлyчae попaдaния жидкоcти нa pyки, cмойтe ee водой.

• B cлyчae попaдaния жидкоcти в глaзa, пpомойтe иx большим количecтвом воды, поcлe чeго обpaтитecь к вpaчy.

B cлyчae возникновeния кaкиx-либо пpоблeм, отключитe видeокaмepy от иcточникa питaния и обpaтитecь в ближaйший cepвиcный цeнтp Sony.

Additional Information/Дополнитeльнaя инфоpмaция

243

— Quick Reference —

Identifying the parts and controls

Camcorder

1 OPEN button (p. 38) 2 BROWSER MENU button (p. 209)

(DCR-IP7E only)

3 LCD screen (p. 40) 4 Viewfinder lens adjustment lever

(p. 43)

5 OPEN/ZEJECT lever (p. 36) 6 LCD BACKLIGHT switch (p. 43) 7 Lens cap (p. 38) 8 Speaker 9 POWER switch (p. 8) 0 Cassette lid (p. 36)

This mark indicates that this product is a genuine accessory for Sony video products. When purchasing Sony video products, Sony recommends that you purchase accessories with this “GENUINE VIDEO ACCESSORIES” mark.

248

— Oпepaтивный cпpaвочник —

Oбознaчeниe чacтeй и peгyлятоpов

Bидeокaмepa

1 Кнопкa OPEN (cтp. 38)

2 Кнопкa BROWSER MENU (cтp. 209)

(только модeль DCR-IP7E)

3 Экpaн ЖКД (cтp. 40)

4 Pычaг peгyлиpовки объeктивa

видоиcкaтeля (cтp. 43)

5 Pычaг OPEN/ZEJECT (cтp. 36)

6 Пepeключaтeль LCD BACKLIGHT (cтp.

43)

7 Кpышкa объeктивa (cтp. 38)

8 Динaмик

9 Пepeключaтeль POWER (cтp. 8)

0 Кpышкa кacceтного отceкa (cтp. 36)

Дaнный знaк ознaчaeт, что это издeлиe являeтcя подлинной пpинaдлeжноcтью видeоaппapaтypы Sony. Пpи покyпкe видeоaппapaтypы Sony peкомeндyeтcя пpиобpeтaть для нee пpинaдлeжноcти Sony cо знaком "GENUINE VIDEO ACCESSORIES".

Identifying the parts and controls

qa DISPLAY button (p. 54) qs Control button (v/V/b/B/z) (p. 9) qd CAMERA lamp qf MEMORY/NETWORK lamp

(DCR-IP7E only)

qg VCR lamp qh BACK LIGHT button (p. 47) qj Built-in Microphone (p. 38) qk Viewfinder (p. 43) ql Eyecup

Oбознaчeниe чacтeй и peгyлятоpов

qa Кнопкa DISPLAY (cтp. 54)

qs Кнопкa yпpaвлeния (v/V/b/B/z) (cтp. 9)

qd Индикaтоp CAMERA

qf Индикaтоp MEMORY/NETWORK (только

модeль DCR-IP7E)

qg Индикaтоp VCR

qh Кнопкa BACK LIGHT (cтp. 47)

qj Bcтpоeнный микpофон (cтp. 38)

qk Bидоиcкaтeль (cтp. 43)

ql Oкyляp

Quick Reference/Oпepaтивный cпpaвочник

249

1-55

Page 64

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Identifying the parts and controls

w; ZOOM button (p. 44) wa PHOTO button (p. 61, 149) ws DC IN jack (p. 27)

USB jack (p. 203)

(DCR-IP7E only)

wf Hook for wrist strap wg START/STOP button (p. 38) wh Lens wj Camera recording lamp (p. 38)

(Bluetooth) lamp (p. 209)

wk wl Remote sensor e; A/V jack (p. 59, 100, 104, 158, 164)

i.LINK (MICROMV) jack (p. 101, 105, 159,

165)

i.LINK (MICROMV) jack is i.LINK

The compatible.

Oбознaчeниe чacтeй и peгyлятоpов

w; Кнопкa ZOOM (cтp. 44)

wa Кнопкa PHOTO (cтp. 61, 149)

ws Гнeздо DC IN (cтp. 27)

USB (cтp. 203)

wd Гнeздо

(только модeль DCR-IP7E)

wf Кpючок для кpeплeния peмeшкa

зaxвaтa

wg Кнопкa START/STOP (cтp. 38)

wh Oбъeктив

wj Индикaтоp зaпиcи видeокaмepой

(cтp. 38)

wk Индикaтоp

wl Дaтчик диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния

e; Гнeздо A/V (cтp. 59, 100, 104, 158, 164)

ea Гнeздо

159, 165) Гнeздо cовмecтимым c i.LINK.

(Bluetooth) (cтp. 209)

i.LINK (MICROMV) (cтp. 101, 105,

i.LINK (MICROMV) являeтcя

Identifying the parts and controls

Note on the Carl Zeiss lens

Your camcorder is equipped with a Carl Zeiss lens which can reproduce a fine image. The lens for your camcorder was developed jointly by Carl Zeiss, in Germany, and Sony Corporation. It adopts the MTF* measurement system for video cameras and offers a quality as the Carl Zeiss lens.

* MTF is an abbreviation of Modulation

Transfer Function. The value number indicates the amount of light of a subject penetrating into the lens.

Oбознaчeниe чacтeй и peгyлятоpов

Пpимeчaниe отноcитeльно объeктивa Кapл Цeйcc

B Baшeй видeокaмepe ycтaновлeн объeктив Кapл Цeйcc, котоpый позволяeт воcпpоизводить выcококaчecтвeнныe изобpaжeния. Oбъeктив для этой видeокaмepы был paзpaботaн компaниeй Кapл Цeйcc (Гepмaния) cовмecтно c коpпоpaциeй Sony. B eго оcновe лeжит cиcтeмa измepeния MTF* для видeокaмep, и он обecпeчивaeт кaчecтво, xapaктepноe для объeктивов фиpмы Кapл Цeйcc.

* MTF являeтcя cокpaщeниeм от

Modulation Transfer Function, что в пepeводe ознaчaeт фyнкция пepeдaчи модyляции. Чиcловоe знaчeниe yкaзывaeт, кaкоe количecтво cвeтa от объeктa попaдaeт нa объeктив.

Quick Reference/Oпepaтивный cпpaвочник

250

Identifying the parts and controls

es MEMORY EJECT lever (p. 139)

(DCR-IP7E only)

ed Access lamp (p. 139)

(DCR-IP7E only)

ef “Memory Stick” slot (p. 139)

(DCR-IP7E only)

eg CHG lamp (p. 27) eh Reset button (p. 216) ej Battery/Battery terminal cover (p. 25) ek Jack cover el VBATT (battery) release lever (p. 25) r; Tripod receptacle

Make sure that the length of the tripod screw is less than 5.5 mm (7/32 inch). Otherwise, you cannot attach the tripod securely and the screw may damage your camcorder.

Oбознaчeниe чacтeй и peгyлятоpов

es Pычaжок MEMORY EJECT (cтp. 139)

(только модeль DCR-IP7E)

ed Индикaтоp обpaщeния (cтp. 139)

(только модeль DCR-IP7E)

ef Гнeздо для "Memory Stick" (cтp. 139)

(только модeль DCR-IP7E)

eg Индикaтоp CHG (cтp. 27)

eh Кнопкa cбpоca (cтp. 225)

ej Бaтapeя/кpышкa бaтapeйныx контaктов

(cтp. 25)

ek Кpышкa гнeздa

el Pычaжок оcвобождeния VBATT

(бaтapeйного блокa) (cтp. 25)

r; Гнeздо для тpeноги

Убeдитecь, что длинa винтa тpeноги нe пpeвышaeт 5,5 мм. B пpотивном cлyчae Bы нe cможeтe нaдeжно пpикpeпить тpeногy, a винт можeт повpeдить видeокaмepy.

Identifying the parts and controls

Remote Commander

The buttons that have the same name on the Remote Commander as on your camcorder function identically to the buttons on your camcorder.

2 3

4 5

1 PHOTO button (p. 61, 149) 2 DISPLAY button (p. 54) 3 MEMORY control buttons

(DCR-IP7E only)

4 SEARCH MODE button (p. 93 to 97) 5 MULTI SRCH button (p. 89) 6 Transmitter

Point toward the remote sensor to control your camcorder after turning on your camcorder.

7 DATA CODE button (p. 54) 8 START/STOP button (p. 38) 9 Power zoom button (p. 44) 0 Video control buttons (p. 52) qa X/x/C/c/EXECUTE buttons These buttons

function the same as the control button on the camcorder.

Oбознaчeниe чacтeй и peгyлятоpов

Пyльт диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния

Кнопки пyльтa диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния, котоpыe имeют одинaковыe нaимeновaния c кнопкaми нa видeокaмepe, фyнкциониpyют идeнтично.

6 7

9 0 qa

1 Кнопкa PHOTO (cтp. 61, 149)

2 Кнопкa DISPLAY (cтp. 54)

3 Кнопки yпpaвлeния для MEMORY

(только модeль DCR-IP7E)

4 Кнопкa SEARCH MODE (cтp. 93 - 97)

5 Кнопкa MULTI SRCH (cтp. 89)

6 Пepeдaтчик

Для yпpaвлeния видeокaмepой нaпpaвьтe пyльт нa дaтчик диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния поcлe ee включeния.

7 Кнопкa DATA CODE (cтp. 54)

8 Кнопкa START/STOP (cтp. 38)

9 Кнопкa пpиводного вapиообъeктивa

(cтp. 44)

0 Кнопки видeоконтpоля (cтp. 52)

qa Кнопки X/x/C/c/EXECUTE Эти кнопки

paботaют aнaлогично кнопкe yпpaвлeния нa видeокaмepe.

251

Quick Reference/Oпepaтивный cпpaвочник

252

253

1-56

Page 65

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Identifying the parts and controls

To prepare the Remote Commander

Insert two R6 (size AA) batteries by matching the + and – polarities on the batteries to the + – marks inside the battery compartment.

Notes on the Remote Commander

•Point the remote sensor away from strong light sources such as direct sunlight or overhead lighting. Otherwise, the Remote Commander may not function properly.

•Your camcorder works in commander mode VTR 2. Commander modes 1, 2 and 3 are used to distinguish your camcorder from other Sony VCRs to avoid remote control misoperation. If you use another Sony VCR in Commander mode VTR 2, we recommend changing the commander mode or covering the sensor of the VCR with black paper.

254

Oбознaчeниe чacтeй и peгyлятоpов

Для подготовки пyльтa диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния

Bcтaвьтe двe бaтapeйки R6 (paзмepa AA), cоблюдaя нaдлeжaщyю поляpноcть + и – нa бaтapeйкax cо знaкaми + – внyтpи отceкa для бaтapeeк.

Пpимeчaния к пyльтy диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния

• Дepжитe дaтчик диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния подaльшe от cильныx иcточников cвeтa, кaк нaпpимep, пpямыe cолнeчныe лyчи или иллюминaция. B пpотивном cлyчae диcтaнционноe yпpaвлeниe можeт нe дeйcтвовaть.

• Этa видeокaмepa paботaeт в peжимe пyльтa диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния VTR 2. Peжимы пyльтa диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния 1, 2 и 3 иcпользyютcя для отличия дaнной видeокaмepы от дpyгиx видeомaгнитофонов фиpмы Sony во избeжaниe нeпpaвильной paботы. Ecли Bы иcпользyeтe дpyгой видeомaгнитофон фиpмы Sony, paботaющий в peжимe VTR 2, peкомeндyeтcя измeнить peжим пyльтa диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния или зaкpыть дaтчик диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния видeомaгнитофонa чepной бyмaгой.

Identifying the parts and controls

Operation indicators

LCD screen and viewfinder

1 2

3 4 5 6

7 8

120min STBY 0:12:34 – + ST IL L 16: 9WIDE NEG. ART END

AUTO

5 0 AWB MPEG I N F11 9db

9 0 qa qs

1 Micro Cassette Memory indicator (p. 229) 2 Remaining battery time indicator (p. 46) 3 Zoom indicator (p. 44)/Data file name

indicator (p. 136) (DCR-IP7E only)

4 Digital effect indicator (p. 71)/MEMORY

MIX indicator (p. 166) (DCR-IP7E only)/ FADER indicator (p. 66)

5 16:9WIDE indicator (p. 64) 6 Picture effect indicator (p. 69) 7 Data code indicator (p. 54) 8 Date indicator 9 PROGRAM AE indicator (p. 75) 0 Backlight indicator (p. 47) qa SteadyShot off indicator (p. 127) qs Manual focus/Infinity indicator (p. 82)

Oбознaчeниe чacтeй и peгyлятоpов

Paбочиe индикaтоpы

Экpaн ЖКД и видоиcкaтeль

qd qf qg

12min

qh qj

100– 0001

1 Индикaтоp Micro Cassette Memory

(cтp. 229)

2 Индикaтоp оcтaвшeгоcя вpeмeни

paботы бaтapeйного блокa (cтp. 46)

3 Индикaтоp вapиообъeктивa (cтp. 44)/

Индикaтоp имeни фaйлa дaнныx

(cтp. 136) (только модeль DCR-IP7E)

4 Индикaтоp цифpового эффeктa (cтp. 71)/

индикaтоp MEMORY MIX (cтp. 166) (только модeль DCR-IP7E)/Индикaтоp FADER (cтp. 66)

5 Индикaтоp peжимa 16:9WIDE (cтp. 64)

6 Индикaтоp эффeктa изобpaжeния

(cтp. 69)

7 Индикaтоp кодa дaнныx (cтp. 54)

8 Индикaтоp дaты

9 Индикaтоp PROGRAM AE (cтp. 75)

0 Индикaтоp зaднeй подcвeтки (cтp. 47)

qa Индикaтоp выключeнной ycтойчивой

cъeмки (cтp. 132)

qs Индикaтоp pyчной фокycиpовки/

бecконeчноcти (cтp. 82)

Quick Reference/Oпepaтивный cпpaвочник

255

Identifying the parts and controls

qd Self-timer indicator (p. 48, 63, 153) qf STBY/REC indicator (p. 46)/Video control

mode indicator (p. 56)/Movie mode indicator (p. 146) (DCR-IP7E only)/Image quality mode indicator (p. 143) (DCR-IP7E

only)

qg Warning indicators (p. 218) qh Tape counter indicator (p. 46)/Self-

diagnosis indicator (p. 217)/Photo mode indicator (p. 61, 149)/Image number indicator (p. 149) (DCR-IP7E only)

qj Remaining tape indicator (p. 46)/Memory

playback indicator (p. 176)

qk END SEARCH indicator (p. 50) ql MPEG IN indicator (p. 105) w; Data file name indicator (p. 166) (DCR-IP7E

only) This indicator appears when the MEMORY MIX functions work. /Time indicator

wa Multi screen mode indicator (p. 151)

Oбознaчeниe чacтeй и peгyлятоpов

qd Индикaтоp тaймepa caмозaпycкa (cтp.

48, 63, 153)

qf Индикaтоp STBY/REC (cтp. 46)/

индикaтоp peжимa видeоконтpоля

(cтp. 56)/Индикaтоp peжимa кино (cтp. 146) (только модeль DCR-IP7E)/

индикaтоp peжимa кaчecтвa изобpaжeния (cтp. 143) (только модeль

DCR-IP7E)

qg Пpeдyпpeждaющиe индикaтоpы (cтp.

227)

qh Индикaтоp cчeтчикa лeнты (cтp. 46)/

индикaтоp фyнкции caмодиaгноcтики

(cтp. 226)/индикaтоp фотоpeжимa (cтp. 61, 149)/индикaтоp номepa изобpaжeния (cтp. 149) (только модeль DCR-IP7E)

qj Индикaтоp оcтaвшeйcя лeнты (cтp. 46)/

индикaтоp воcпpоизвeдeния из пaмяти

(cтp. 176)

qk Индикaтоp END SEARCH (cтp. 50)

ql Индикaтоp MPEG IN (cтp. 105)

w; Индикaтоp имeни фaйлa дaнныx (cтp.

166) (только модeль DCR-IP7E) Этот индикaтоp появляeтcя во вpeмя paботы фyнкций MEMORY MIX. /

Индикaтоp вpeмeни

wa Индикaтоp многоэкpaнного peжимa

(cтp. 151)

256

1-57E

Page 66

SECTION 2

DISASSEMBLY

The following flow chart shows the disassembly procedure.

2-1. LCD section (PD-142 board) PD-142 board service position

2-2. Cabinet (R) section

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

2-3. Lens section (LD-105 board)

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

2-5. Mechanism deck

LD-105 board service position

2-6. EVF section (VF-149 board)

VF-149 board service position

2-7. Control switch block (CF-1900), Speaker2-4. VC-263 board

Service position to check the camera section

Service position to check the VTR-1 section

Service position to check the VTR-2 section (VC-263, JK-209 boards)

2-10. BT-003 board (IP7BT/IP7E), Cabinet (L) assembly

2-11. Grip cabinet assembly, Control switch block (FK-1900)

2-8. JK-209 board

2-9. Parts unit (Hinge)

JK-209 board service position

2-1

Page 67

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

NOTE: F ollo w the disassembly procedure in the numerical order given.

2-1. LCD SECTION (PD-142 BOARD)

REMOVING THE PD-142 BOARD

3 Remove the panel cabinet (R) assembly in the direction of the arrow.

1 T wo screws (M1.4 × 2.5), lock ace

PD-142

2 T wo screws (M1.4 × 2.5), lock ace

4 T ape (F)

8 PD-142

board

5 Screw (M1.4 × 2.5), lock ace

9 Back light

Cold cathode fluorescent tube, BL shield sheet (N)

6 Liquid crystal indicator module

qa LED SW base

7 Screw

(M1.4 × 2.5), lock ace

PD-142

0 T wo screws (M1.4 × 2.5), lock ace

qs LED SW knob

[PD-142 BOARD SERVICE POSITION]

PD-142 board

Back light

Cold cathode fluorescent tube, BL shield sheet (N)

PD-142

Liquid crystal indicator module

DC IN

Multi cable for service (J-6082-535-A)

AC POWER ADAPTOR

A/V

CPC jig for LCD panel (J-6082-529-A)

2-2

AC IN

Adjustment remote commander (RM-95)

Page 68

2-2. CABINET (R) SECTION

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

(IP7BT/IP7E)

BT cable connector

When removing the BT cable from the BT-003 board, be sure to hold the connector of the BT cable and remove it.

BT cable

3 Screw (M1.4 × 2.5), lock ace

5 Open the grip cabinet assembly.

VC-263

2 Screw (M1.4 × 2.5), lock ace

8 FP-366 flexible board (40P)

(IP7BT/IP7E)

7 Antenna

1 Two screws (M1.4 × 2.5),

lock ace

When installing cabinet (L) section insert it in the groove.

6 Screw (M1.4 × 2.5), lock ace

9 Cabinet (R) section

4 Screw (M1.4 × 2.5),

lock ace

[CONNECTION OF THE EQUIPMENT]

DC IN

A/V

AC IN

Adjustment remote commander (RM-95)

AC POWER ADAPTOR

Multi cable for service (J-6082-535-A)

VC-263

CPC

FP-366 flexible board (40P)

Cabinet (R) section

2-3

Page 69

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

2-3. LENS SECTION (LD-105 BOARD)

2 Remove the microphone unit in the direction of the arrow A.

Microphone unit

(4P)

Control switch block

(CF-1900) (14P)

When installing cabinet (L) section insert it in the groove.

VC-263

1 T apping screw (M1.7 × 3.5)

4 Screw (M1.4 × 2.5), lock ace

5 VF fixed plate assembly

VF-149

VC-263

6 EVF section

3 Two screws (M1.4 × 2.5),

lock ace

2 FP-367 flexible board (15P) (IP7BT/IP7E)

6 Remove the lens-EVF section in the direction of the arrow B.

LD-105

VF-149

LD-105 board

(51P)

5 Screw (M1.4 × 2.5), lock ace

EVF section, VF-149 board (33P)

LD-105

2 Lens section

1 Three claws

3 Lens section

LD-105

2 Filter ring assembly

1 T wo tapping

screws (B1.4 × 4)

2-4

3 Remove the LD-105 board in the direction of the arrow C.

2 Two tapping screws (B1.7 × 6)

LD-105

6 Remove the solderings

7 CCD section

(CCD imager)

5 Seal rubber (S)

4 Optical filter block

Page 70

[LD-105 BOARD SERVICE POSITION]

)

Note: Screen will become all white.

Lens section

LD-105 board

CCD section (CCD imager)

-105

LD-105 board (51P)

VC-263

DC IN

A/V

Multi cable for service (J-6082-535-A)

AC POWER ADAPTOR

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Adjustment remote commander (RM-95

AC IN

2-5

Page 71

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

2-4. VC-263 BOARD

REMOVING THE VC-263 BOARD

1 Screw (M1.4 × 2.5), lock ace

VC-263

2 Screw (M1.4 × 2.5), lock ace

2 Flexible board (from sensor) (31P)

3 Flexible board (from video head) (11P)

4 Flexible board (from drum motor) (11P)

3 Open the VC-263 board, MS holder assembly (IP7BT/IP7E)/ VC PC board holder (IP5/IP5E) in the direction of the arrow.

1 JK-209 board CN5504 (60P)

5 Flexible board (from capstan motor) (19P)

MS holder

assembly (IP7BT/IP7E)

holder (IP5/IP5E)

VC-263

6 T apping screw (M1.7 × 3.5)

VC PC board

8 VC-263 board

[SERVICE POSITION TO CHECK THE CAMERA SECTION]

LD-105 board (51P)

DC IN

A/V

Adjustment remote commander (RM-95)

AC IN

AC POWER ADAPTOR

Multi cable for service (J-6082-535-A)

LD-105

VC-263

Lens section

VC-263 board, MS holder assembly (IP7BT/IP7E)/ VC PC board holder (IP5/IP5E)

2-6

Page 72

[SERVICE POSITION TO CHECK THE VTR-1 SECTION]

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

Adjustment remote commander (RM-95)

AC IN

AC POWER ADAPTOR

Multi cable for service (J-6082-535-A)

DC IN

A/V

VC-263

VC-263 board, MS holder assembly (IP7BT/IP7E)/ VC PC board holder (IP5/IP5E)

2-7

Page 73

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

2-5. MECHANISM DECK

1 Open the grip cabinet assembly

Three dowels

6 Remove the grip cabinet assembly in the direction of the arrow A.

NOTE: HANDLING MECHANISM DECK

Use the adjustable wrist strap (J-2501-162-A) as the preventive measure for static electricity when the removing and installing the drum assembly because the drum assembly of this mechanism beck is easily affected by the static electricity.

(J-2501-162-A)

0 VC heat sink assembly

qa T wo screws (M1.4 × 2.5), lock ace

9 Screw (M1.4 × 2.5), lock ace

2 T wo screws (M1.4 × 2.5), lock ace

3 Screw (M1.4 × 2.5), lock ace

qf Mechanism

deck

qd Screw

(M1.4 × 2),

ace

qs T wo screws (M1.4 × 2.5), lock ace

4 T wo screws (M1.4 × 2.5), lock ace

5 Control switch block

(FK-1900) (31P) 7 Two screws (M1.4 × 2.5),

lock ace

8 Remove the JK-209 board in the direction of the arrow B.

[SERVICE POSITION TO CHECK THE VTR-2 SECTION (VC-263, JK-209 BOARDS)]

VTR to the “Forced VTR power ON” mode. Operate the VTR function using the adjustment remote commander (with the HOLD switch set in the OFF position).

Setting the “Forced VTR Power ON” mode

1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.

2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 02 and press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander.

(When you want to eject a cassette, connect the control switch block. (FK-1900))

Flexible board (from drum motor) (11P)

5 Flexible board (from capstan motor) (19P)

AC IN

AC POWER ADAPTOR

Exiting the “Forced VTR Power ON” mode

1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.

2) Select page: D, address: 10, data: 00, and press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander.

3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.

Flexible board (from video head) (11P)

DC IN

Flexible board (from sensor) (31P)

Mechanism deck

VC-263 board, MS holder assembly

(IP7BT/IP7E)/ VC PC board holder (IP5/IP5E)

Two dowels

Adjustment remote commander (RM-95)

Multi cable for service (J-6082-535-A)

A/V

VC-263

JK-209 board

JK-209

2-8

Page 74

2-6. EVF SECTION (VF-149 BOARD)

)

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

3 VF lens assembly

4 VF sleeve

VF-149 board

F-149

1 T apping screw (M1.7 × 3.5)

5 LCD cushion (1) (Shining side must face to the VF sleeve guide assembly.)

VF-149

4 VF-149 board block

2 Push the VF sleeve guide assembly in the direction of the arrow.

3 Two claws

6 VF sleeve guide

assembly

2 T apping screw (M1.7 × 5)

0 Light guide plate block, BL retainer sheet metal

VF-149

qa VF-149 board

5 VF ring assembly,

VF guard sheet

1 T apping screw (M1.7 × 5)

8 LCD cushion (2) (Shining side must face to the BL holder.

7 LCD

BL holder

qs BL cushion (Shining side must face to the BL holder.

(LCX033AN-J

9 T wo claws

[VF-149 BOARD SERVICE POSITION]

When you want to check the EVF, establish the “Forced EVF Power on” mode.

Setting the “Forced EVF Power ON” mode

1) Select page: 3, address: 00, and set data: 01 and press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander.

2) Select page: 3, address: 02, set data: 02.

DC IN

A/V

Adjustment remote commander (RM-95)

AC IN

AC POWER ADAPTOR

Multi cable for service (J-6082-535-A)

Exiting the “Forced EVF Power ON” mode

1) Select page: 3, address: 00, and set data: 00 and press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander.

2) Select page: 3, address: 02, set data: 00.

VC-263

Light guide plate block, BL retainer sheet metal

VF-149

VF-149 board

LCD (LCX033AN-J)

2-9

Page 75

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

2-7. CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (CF-1900), SPEAKER

4 Control switch block (CF-1900), Speaker

1 T wo screws (M1.4 × 2.5), lock ace

5 Remove the control switch block (CF-1900), speaker in the direction of the arrow.

VC-263

2 SP retainer

3 T wo screws

(M1.4 × 2.5), lock ace

8 Speaker

7 SP cushion

6 Remove soldering

from the two points

9 Control switch block (CF-1900)

2-10

Page 76

2-8. JK-209 BOARD

VC-263

2 Jack cover

4 Connector CN5504 (60P)

5 T wo screws (M1.4 × 2.5), lock ace

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

REMOVING THE JK-209 BOARD

3 JK flexible protection sheet 2

2 JK flexible protection sheet

JK-209

1 JK PC board protection sheet

JK-209

3 JC retainer plate

JK bracket assembly

JC retainer plate

Four claws

1 Screw (M1.4 × 2.5), lock ace

Jack cover

[JK-209 BOARD SERVICE POSITION]

JK-209 board

JK-209

5 T ally light interception sheet

4 Screw (M1.4 × 2), lock ace

6 T wo screws (M1.4 × 2), ace

JK-209

8 JK-209 board

7 JK bracket assembly

AC IN

Adjustment remote commander (RM-95)

AC POWER ADAPTOR

Multi cable for service (J-6082-535-A)

DC IN

A/V

VC-263

JK-209

JK-209 board

2-11

Page 77

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

2-9. PARTS UNIT (HINGE)

4 T wo screws (M1.4 × 2.5), lock ace

1 Waterproof sheet

2 T wo screws

(M1.4 × 2.5), lock ace

1 Open the LCD unit in the direction of the arrow A.

6 Menu sheet metal

5 Screw (M1.4 × 2.5),

lock ace

FP-366 flexible board

3 Harness (from LCD section) (17P)

3 R button

2 Muffle sheet (B)

1 Three screws (M1.4 × 2.5),

lock ace FP-366 flexible board

FP-366 flexible board

Harness (17P)

4 Lens cabinet (R) assembly

Dowel

3 Screw (M1.4 × 3)

6 Screw (M1.4 × 2), ace

7 FP-366 flexible board

5 Remove the LCD unit,

parts unit (Hinge) in the direction of the arrow B.

4 Screw (M1.4 × 2.5), lock ace

Three dowels

2 Screw (M1.4 × 2.5), lock ace

Start the removal work afar the LCD section (PD-142 board) has been removed referring section 2-1.

4 Panel cabinet (R) assembly

Liquid crystal indicator module

PD-142 board

Back light

Cold cathode fluorescent tube, BL shield sheet (N)

2 Harness (15P)

1 T ape F

3 T wo screws

(M1.4 × 2.5), lock ace

PD-142

5 Parts unit (Hinge)

2-12

Page 78

2-10.BT-003 BOARD (IP7BT/IP7E), CABINET (L) ASSEMBLY

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

7 BT-003 board

6 T wo screws (M1.4 × 2), ace

(IP7BT/IP7E)

4 MS release knob

3 Compression spring

2 MS knob retainer

assembly

BT-003

5 FP-367 flexible board (15P)

1 Screw (M1.4 × 2.5), lock ace

3 Lens cabinet (L) section

2 Screw (M1.4 × 2.5), lock ace

1 Screw (M1.4 × 2.5), lock ace

0 Cabinet (L) assembly

6 Jack cover

8 List strap

7 Screw (M2 × 3)

Note: This screw (M2 × 3) is MEC-processed. If the screw is are removed once, it cannot be re-used. When re-assembling, use the new MEC screw.

5 JC retainer plate

9 Strap bracket

4 Screw

(M1.4 × 2.5), lock ace

2-11.GRIP CABINET ASSEMBLY, CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (FK-1900)

3 T wo screws (M1.4 × 2.5), lock ace

2 Screw (M1.4 × 2), lock ace

6 Screw (M1.4 × 2.5), lock ace

Control switch block (FK-1900)

5 T wo screws (M1.4 × 2.5), lock ace

4 Screw (M1.4 × 2.5), lock ace

1 Screw (M1.4 × 2.5), lock ace

Dowel

7 T apping screw (M1.7 × 3.5)

8 Grip arm assembly, Cabinet (L) joint

2 Grip cabinet assembly

1 Control switch block (FK-1900),

Battery terminal board

2-13

Page 79

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

2-12.CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION

BT-003 (BLUETOOTH) (IP7BT/IP7E)

LD-105 (CCD IMAGER)

JK-209 (JACK)

PD-142 (RGB DRIVE, TIMING GENERATOR)

VF-149 (B/W EVF)

VC-263 CAMERA, DSC, VIDEO, AUDIO, SERVO

HI/MECHA CONTROL, DC/DC CONVERTER

2-14

Page 80

2-13.FLEXIBLE BOARDS LOCATION

The flexible boards contained in the mechanism deck are not shown.

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (FK-1900)

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

FP-367 (IP7BT/IP7E)

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (CF-1900)

FP-366

2-15E

Page 81

SECTION 3

BLOCK DIAGRAMS

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/5)

LENS ASSY

IRIS

(SHUTTER)

IRIS METER

ND METER

FOCUS MOTOR

ZOOM MOTOR

FILTER

MIC901

MIC UNIT

SP901 SPEAKER

MIC

CN5501

A/V

LD-105 BOARD

IC701

CCD

IMAGER

1-4 9-14

X780

IRIS HALL

X781

ND HALL

JK-209 BOARD(1/4)

1 6

(SEE PAGE 4-65)

VIDEO

Y10

L,R

VF-149 BOARD(1/3)

(SEE PAGE 4-59)

CN2206

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (CF-1900)

(SEE PAGE 4-9)

(4-8)

IC725 IC726

IRIS HALL AMP

IC727

FOCUS MOTOR

IRIS DRIVE

ND HALL

AMP

ND FILTER

PRE DRIVE

ND FILTER

DRIVE

SHUTTER

DRIVE

ZOOM MOTOR

DRIVE

IC724

(4-7)

(4-8)

CN2205

CCD OUT

V1-V4 SUB,RG,H1,H2

IRIS PWM

I HALL AD

ND HALL AD

SHUTTER ON

( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.

VC-263 BOARD(1/5)

ND PWM

PWM0 EN0

PWM1 EN1

F MR A,B

Z MR A,B

CN5504

CN2021

149

148

CAMERA CONTROL

IC1207

EVR

CDS, AGC

A/D CONV

IC1901

TIMING

GENERATOR

74 71 73

(4-39)

IC1203

(1/2)

(4-40)

(4-36)

IC101

VIDEO

I/O

L,R

SP +,-

L,R

(4-45)

IC201

AUDIO

I/O

CN2024

CN2023

(4-15)

CAM SO,SI,SCK

L,R

AD1-AD10

CLP1

TGCK

X1901

48MHz

ID PBLK

HD,VD,FLD

TO OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (5/5)

(SEE PAGE 3-9)

RH SO,SI,SCK

(4-46)

IC202

AUDIO A/D CONV D/A CONV

SHUTTER ON

AUCKFS AUCK256FS

AUCK64FS

LINE OUT V LINE IN V

DRUM SWP

BS IN

BS OUT

PWM0 EN0

PWM1 EN1

F MR A,B

Z MR A,B

EVF R EVF G EVF B

LCD R LCD G LCD B

HD VD

AD IN

DA OUT

141618

10 - 612

190

132

130

122

148

137

134

199

176

154

152

206

178

204

225

219

224

212

233

171

196

(4-17)

IC401

CAMERA PROCESS

BASE BAND PROCESS

(4-25)

IC601

MPEG VIDEO ENCODER RECODER

192410 232814

262227 393631

127 149123

(4-29)

IC501

MPEG AUDIO ENCODER RECODER

DCR-IPBT/IP7E

3218

3035

310

TO OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/5)

(SEE PAGE 3-3)

248

263201 243239205

BY IO (0)-(7)

244235

240221249 241232229

BC IO (0)-(7)

234236

272

CODEC HD,VD,FD

271

238

268255264 259267254

BY IN (0)-(7)

258270

261242256

BC IN (0)-(7)

246265247

260250

261

DEC HD,FD

252

PLL27MCK

193

F27MCK

194

SG OUT SG OUT

231

ARECD

223

APBD

218

AUCKFS

225

AUCK64FS

224

F135MCK

188 97

COL 0-3

181214 185211

HD,VD

210

212

AUCKFS

AUCK64FS

F135MCK

301

YMO (0)-(7)

308305

300209

CMO (0)-(7)

304302

266

H,V,FLD

273

262

284281280

YMI (0)-(7)

290288286

294291

269

278274

CMI (0)-(7)

283282

293

H,V,FLD

285

279

ASI

217

ASO

220

200

MIC SI,SO,SCK MIC SI,SO,SCK

174

203

COL 0-3

HD,VD

F135MCK

120

135

108

112

113

116

118

120

121

313

327

286

296

81 95

BS IO (0)-(7)

D0-D7

HADR (0)-(10)

HDAT (0)-(7)

AENCD AEDE

ADECD ADDE

4238

ABCK

4948

4436

AFS

5453

1862

HADR (0)-(7)

4639

HDAT (0)-(7)

124

(4-20)

1718 1416

IC402

CHARACTER GENERATOR

BCK

PLL27MCK

F27MCK

AENCD AEDE

ADECD ADDE

ABCK

AFS

CODEC FD

DEC FD

F27MCK

F135MCK

LINE OUT V LINE IN V

DRUM SWP

BS IN BS OUT

RH SO,SI,SCK

HI EVER SO,SCK

TO OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/5)

(SEE PAGE 3-3)

TO OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/5)

(SEE PAGE 3-5)

TO OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (4/5)

(SEE PAGE 3-8)

3-1 3-2

Page 82

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

3-2. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2)

VC-263 BOARD (2/5)

225

234

236

149

151

136

158

157

161

160

159

162

TO OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/5)

(SEE PAGE 3-2)

BS (0)-(7)

BCK

D0-D7

CODEC FD

DEC FD

F27MCK

PLL27MCK

SG OUT

AENCD AEDE

ADECD ADDE

ABCK

AFS

( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.

(4-27)

51- 64

139

136

SG OUT

SWP

REF SWP

XREC ACT P, M

SWP SO, SCK

HADR(0)-(11)

HDAT(0)-(7)

RH SO, SI, SCK

(4-31)

IC801

Q PROCESS

MUX/DMUX

ECC&PTG

CHANEL CO DING

REC DT RED CK

PB DT

ENV OUT

REC P, M

155

156

110

120

104

DIADT(0)-(7)

PLL 27 MCK

X701

24.576MHz

(AGC, EQ, ENV DET)

149

150

IC902

REC /PB AMP

(4-33)

65 - 74

IC701

i LINK I/F

TO OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/5)

(SEE PAGE 3-5)

IC951

PB POWER TRANS

(4-37)

SWP

XM, YM

XP, YP

PB IN

FOR ADJUSTMENTS

CN2028

DRUM

PW+

PW-

CN2010

JK-209 BOARD(2/4)

CN2024

14 14

1111

(SEE PAGE 4-65)

TPA, NTPA TPB, NTPB

IC001

MR HEAD AMP

IC002

MR HEAD AMP

IC003

SWP POWER

CN5502

i LINK (MICRO MV)

MCH REC HEAD

PCH REC HEAD

MCH PB HEAD (MR HEAD)

PCH PB HEAD (MR HEAD)

CPC ENV OUT

RF MON OUT

26 - 34

22 - 25

A0-A2

159

160

158

114

101

140

121

154

155

RH SO, SI, SCK

A1-A12

D0-D15

29 - 45

1 - 10

16 - 25

(4-22) (4-22)

IC1802

32Mbit

FLASH MEMORY

2 - 13

42 - 53

IC1803

64Mbit

SDRAM

20 - 26 29 - 35

X1601

25.8048MHz

CLK

155

156

162

(4-23)

IC1606

DIGITAL STILL CONTROL

143

140

171

164

169

168

174

129

187

186

185

4 5

HI SO, SI, SCK

TXD BT

RXD BT

IC1605

BS, DIO, SCLK

IC1602

USB I/F

(4-23)

XTAL OSC

(4-24)

TO OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM(4/5)

(SEE PAGE 3-8)

X1602 48MHz

CN2026

CN5504

61110

CN101

(The BT-003 board cannot be repaired nor adjusted. )

CN2027

MEMORY

STICK

USB D+ USB D-

BT-003 BOARD

CN5503

USB

ANT901

CN102

DCR-IP7BT/IP7E

33-30

91-86

165

15 14 13

164

162

163

(4-21)

IC1801

STILL PICTURE

PROCESS

F135MCK

YMO(0)-(7)

CMO(0)-(7)

H,V, FLD

TO OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM

(1/5)

(SEE PAGE 3-2)

YMI(0)-(7)

CMI (0)-(7)

H,V, FLD

ASI

ASO

AUCKFS

AUCK64FS

3-3 3-4

Page 83

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

3-3. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/5)

VC-263 BOARD(3/5)

TO OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (5/5)

(SEE PAGE 3-10)

TO OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (4/5)

(SEE PAGE 3-8)

TO OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/5)

(SEE PAGE 3-4)

TO OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/5)

(SEE PAGE 3-2)

TO OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (5/5)

(SEE PAGE 3-9)

DVC PWM

HI SO,SI,SCK

XCC DOWN

SWP

REF SWP

XREC ACT P XREC ACT M

RH SO,SI,SCK

SWP SO,SCK

HADR (0)-(11)

HDAT (0)-(7)

RH SO,SI,SCK

HADR (0)-(11)

HDAT (0)-(7)

DRUM SWP

CODEC FD DEC FD

LINE IN V LINE OUT V

F27MCK

F135MCK

BSD IN, BSD OUT

RH SO,SCK

145

139

140

141

173

166

168

129

130

136

135

137

174

121

( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.

(4-41)

IC1103

MECHA

CONTROL

133

EEP SO,SI,SCK

132

134

ACFG1,2

CAP FG

CAP ON,CAP FWD

154

155

CAP PWM

148

DRUM PWM

147

DRUM ON,DRUM FWD,DRUM START

DRUM FG

DRUM PG

LOAD,UNLOAD

116

115

TREEL FG

SREEL FG

TAPE END

118

TAPE TOP

119

DEW DET

108

TAPE LED ON

162

REC PROOF SW

157

161

MODE SW A - MODE SW D

159

IC1102

EEPROM

(4-44)

IC1001

(RABI)

LPF

(4-41)

(2/2)

IC404

1.6

CAP ERROR

DRUM ERROR

CAR+, CAR-

7.5

(4-19)

(4-49)

IC1401

PWM

DRIVE

(2/2)

(4-33)

V MECHA DECK

(SEE PAGE 4-51)

IC902

CAPSTAN

(2/2)

(1/2)

2,21

31,33,29

20,22,24

28,30

42,43

45,46

MIC1-3

XCC DOWN

CN2008

CN2007

CN2009

1 |

CAPSTAN

M901

DRUM FG

DRUM PG

DEW

SENSOR

T REEL

SENSOR

S REEL

SENSOR

Q002

TAPE END SENSOR

Q001

TAPE TOP SENSOR

D001

TAPE LED

REC PROOF

MIC

ANTENNA

C IN

MODE

SWITCH

S901

M902

CAPSTAN

MOTOR

DRUM

MOTOR

M903

MOTOR

H001

H002

S001

S002

FG AMP

(ANALOG)

3,4

Q1608

SWITCHING

CAP VS

28.32

CAPSTAN

FG AMP

(DIGITAL)

IC1002

CAPSTAN

MOTOR

DRIVE

(4-44)

Q1609

SWITCHING

DRUM VS

IC1001

(RABI) DRUM

MOTOR

DRIVE

(4-44)

16,6,3

DRUM FG AMP

26,25

IC952

MIC

DRIVE

DRUM PG AMP

LOADING MOTOR

TAPE END DETECT

TAPE TOP DETECT

(4-37)

DRIVE

REEL FG AMP

MIC:Memory In Cassette

3-5 3-6

Page 84

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

3-4. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (4/5)

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (CF-1900)

(SEE PAGE 4-9)

R001-004

ZOOM SW

(DISTORTION ELEMENT)

S103

ZOOM TOUCH

S100

START/STOP

S102

S3102

LCD BACK LIGHT

OFF

PANEL REVERSE

PHOTO FREEZE

S101

PHOTO REC

PANEL NORMAL CLOSE

PHOTO

PD-142 BOARD(1/2)

(SEE PAGE 4-73)

S105

CONTROL

BUTTON

FP-366 FLEXIBLE

(SEE PAGE 4-69)

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (FK-1900) (1/2)

(SEE PAGE 4-54)

BT001

LITHIUM BATTERY

S003

RESET

S004

OPEN/ EJECT

S001,002

POWER

OFF (CHG)

ON → MODE

CAMERA

MEMORY

NETWORK

VCR

ZOOM SENS OUT 1,2

S3101

BROWSER MENU

DCR-IP7BT/IP7E

S104

S103

PANEL OPEN/CLOSE

CN001

28 28

29 29

31 31

VF-149 BOARD (2/3)

CN2205

CN3102

S102

DISPLAY

CN5500

( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.

VC-263 BOARD(4/5)

(4-61,62)

IC2201 IC2202 IC2203

AMP

CN101

S101

BACK LIGHT

19 19

25 25

24 24

26 26

CN301 CN2023

CN102

40 40

878

39 39

29 29

4646

44 44

50 50

CN2022

LI 3V

BATT UNREG

ACV UNREG

D1206

D1201

D2.8V

Q9002, 9004

(4-39)

V OUT

SWITCH

IC1201

RESET

SAVED E2.8V

R IC V OUT

X1201 20MHz

153

132

127

128

130

131

129

126

151

ZOOM SW AD

ZOOM PWM

KEY AD6

XS/S SW

XPHOTO FREEZE

KEY AD1

KEY AD2

KEY AD4

KEY AD5

KEY AD3

KEY AD0

VDD

XRESET

XEJECT SW

XPOWER SW

XMODE SW

(4-39)

IC1203

HI CONTROL

(2/2)

BATT/XEXT SW

FAST CHARGE

VTR DD ON

CAM DD ON

HI EVER SO

HI EVER SI

HI EVER SCK

MIC SO

MIC SI

MIC SCK

HI SCK

XCC DOWN

MIC EEP SO

MIC EEP SI

MIC EEP SCK

IB SO

HI SO

HI SI

IB SI

IC1202

HI EVER SO, SI,SCK

Q1202

171

I/F

IC1205

MIC EEPROM

(4-40)

BATT SIG

BATT/XEXT SW

FAST CHARGE

VTR DD ON

CAM DD ON

HI EVER SO,SCK

MIC SO, SI,SCK

HI SO,SI,SCK

HI SO, SI,SCK

XCC DOWN

EEPROM

(4-39)

TO OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM

(SEE PAGE 3-9)

TO OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM

(SEE PAGE 3-2)

TO OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM

(SEE PAGE 3-4)

TO OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM

(SEE PAGE 3-5)

(5/5)

(1/5)

(2/5)

(3/5)

CN5501

A/V

LANC SIG

JK-209 BOARD(3/4)

IC5500

REMOTE COMMANDER

RECEIVER

XSIRCS IN

(4-65)

IC5501

LANC I/O

(4-66)

CN5504

586058

CN2024

X1202

32.768KHz

IC1206

TIMER

LANC IN

LANC OUT

174

RTC SIO

175

RTC SCK

32KHz

(4-40)

3-7 3-8

Page 85

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

3-5. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (5/5)

VC-263 BOARD(5/5)

TO OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM(1/5)

(SEE PAGE 3-1)

TO OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM(3/5)

(SEE PAGE 3-5)

TO OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM(4/5)

(SEE PAGE 3-8)

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (FK-1900)

(SEE PAGE 4-54)

BT901

BATTERY TERMINAL

J5500

DC IN

CN001

1010

919

CN5500

Q5501

JK-209 BOARD (4/4)

(SEE PAGE 4-65)

CN2024CN5504

4040

171917

( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.

LCD R,G,B

EVF R,G,B

HD,VD

HI EVER SO,SCK

BATT SIG

BATT/EXT SW

FAST CHARGE

VTR DD ON

CAM DD ON

BATT SIG

BATT/EXT SW

FAST CHARGE

(4-49)

IC1401

DC/DC

CONVERTER

(4-50)

IC1404 IC1406 IC1408

RFG

(2/2)

BATT UNREG

VTR UNREG

VTR DD ON

CAM DD ON

HI EVER SO,SCK

1.8V

D 1.5V

3.1V

A 2.8V

LCD 2.8V

AU 2.8V

D 2.8V

CAM -7.5V

CAM 15V

MT 5V

7.5V

15V

-8V

EVF 13.5V

RP 4.6V

A 4.6V

AU 4.6V

LCD 4.6V

BL CONT

BL -15V

DVC

R1454

R1455

BATT UNREG

VTR UNREG

A_2.8V

DVC PWM

TO OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM(3/5)

(SEE PAGE 3-5)

CN2022

CN2023

FP-366 (FLEXIBLE)

(SEE PAGE 4-69)

LCD R,G,B

RH SO,SCKRH SO,SCK

12 13

BL CONT

CN102

CN301

RH SO,SCK

VF-149 BOARD (3/3)

EVF R,G,B

(2/2)

CN101

PD-142 BOARD(2/2)

HDO

PSIG

CN3104

COM

IC3101

BACK LIGHT

CONTROL

HD OUT

LED

XHD OUT

Q3109,3110,3118,3119

CN3102

(4-59)

IC301

RGB DRIVE

(4-59)

IC302

TIMING GENERATOR

RGB

DRIVE

(4-73)

IC3102

TIMING

GENERATOR

BL ON

VR,VG,VB

COM

PSIG

PANEL 15.5V

R,G,B

COM

Q2201,2205

BACK LIGHT

DRIVE

BL -15V

XHD OUT

LED DA

CN3101

CN3103

LED902

D2201,2202

LIGHT UNIT

CN2202

BACK

CPC

BL ANODE

THERM B

BL CATHODE

CN2205

ADJUSTMENTS

LCD901

FOR

LCD UNIT

LCD902

LCD UNIT

LED901

BACK

LIGHT

3-9 3-10

Page 86

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

3-6. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/3)

CN001

191119

JK-209 BOARD

BATT UNREG

BATT SIG

BATT GND

CN5500

BATT/XEXT

ACV UNREG

ACV GND

LF5500

LANC DC

Q5500,5501

Q5502,5503

CHARGE SWITCH

IC5501

LANC I/O

(4-66)

BT901

BATTERY TERMINAL

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (FK-1900)(1/2)

(SEE PAGE 4-54)

J5500

DC IN

CN5501

A/V

( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.

VC-263 BOARD (1/2)

CN2024

Q1414

28 28

34 34

SWITCHING

XLANC ON

EVER 3.0V

L1402

SWITCHING

Q1421

EVER 3.0V

VTR DD ON

DD XCS HI EVER SO HI EVER SCK

VTR UNREG 1

VTR UNREG 2

VTR UNREG

MT 5V

VCC(0)-1

VCC(0)-3

VDD(0)-2

OUT6-P

OUT6-N

V-IN6

VDD

CTL

IC1401

DC/DC CONVERTER

OUT2-P

OUT2-N

OUT3-P

OUT3-N

OUT4-P

OUT4-N

OUT1-P

OUT1-N

OUT9-N

-IN(S)9

OUT10-P

-IN(A)10

OUT(A)10

-IN(S)10

OUT5-P

OUT5-N

VDD (0)

OUT7-P

OUT7-N

OUT8-P

OUT8-N

(4-49)

+IN2

-IN2

V-IN3

V-IN4

V-IN1

-IN9

-IN 10

V-IN5

+IN7

+IN8

INIT CHARGE ON

FAST CHARGE

BATT SIG

BATT/XEXT

CN5504

F5500

F5502

F5501

F5503

Q5507

SWITCH

Q1401

Q1412

SWITCHING

Q1413

SWITCHING

DD XCS HI EVER SO HI EVER SCK

BATT UNREG

VTR UNREG 1

VTR UNREG

MT 5V

Q1403

SWITCHING

Q1404

SWITCHING

Q1405

SWITCHING

Q1402

SWITCHING

Q1420

L1403

SWITCHING

Q1425

SWITCHING

Q1406

SWITCHING

RECT

L1409

SWITCHING

L1410

Q1419

SWITCHING

L1404

Q1418

L1412

Q1415

SWITCHING

L1407

Q1416

SWITCHING

L1408

Q1417

SWITCHING

L1405

Q1408

SWITCHING

RECT

L1401

Q1407

SWITCHING

CAP ERRON

DRUM VS

DRUM ERROR

CAP VS

L1412 DVC

L1413 1.8V 1.8V

L1417 A 2.8V

AU 2.8V

L1419

L1418

D 2.8V

LCD 2.8V

L1420

1.5V

L1411

IC1404

L1414

L1416

15.5V RECT

D1415

-8V

RECT

D1412

L1425

L1426

L1423 A 4.6V

L1424 AU 4.6V

IC1408

13.5V REG

-7.5V REG

6V REG

(4-50)

15V REG

7.5 V 7.5 V

15.5V

-8V

EVF 13.5V

CAM 15V

CAM -7.5V

BL -15V

LCD 4.6V

RP 4.6V

IC1406

3.1V REG

(4-50)

3.1V

DVC PWMDVC PWM

XLANC ON

BATT SIG

INIT CHARGE ON

VTR DD ON

CAM DD ON

FAST CHARGE

BATT/XEXT SW

BATT UNREG

MT 5V

VTR UNREG 1

VTR UNREG

VCC (IC951)

DVC

BL CONT

A 2.8V

AU 2.8V

D 2.8V

LCD2.8V

1.5V

6V(IC902)

(IC951)

LCD 15.5V

-8V(IC951)

EVF 13.5V

CAM 15V

CAM -7.5V

BL -15V

LCD 4.6V

RP 4.6V

A 4.6V

AU 4.6V

CAP VS

CAP ERROR

DRUM VS

DRUM ERROR

3.1V

TO POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/3)

(SEE PAGE 3-13)

BL CONT

CAM DD ON

3-11 3-12

EVER 3.0V

Page 87

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

3-7. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/3)

VC-263 BOARD(2/2)

DD XCS

HI EVER SO

HI EVER SCK

DVC PWM

XLANC ON

BATT SIG

INIT CHARGE ON

VTR DD ON

CAM DD ON

FAST CHARGE

BATT/XEXT SW

BATT UNREG

MT 5V

VTR UNREG

VTR UNREG1

LCD 2.8V

LCD 15.5V

EVF 13.5V

BL -15V

LCD 4.6V

BL CONT

EVER 3V

POWER BLOCK

DIAGRAM

(SEE PAGE 3-12)

(1/3)

AU 4.6V

AU 2.8V

A 2.8V

D 2.8V

1.8V

1.5V

DVC

A 4.6V

6V(IC902) 6V(IC902)

RP 4.6V

-8V(IC951)

7.5V(IC951)

VCC(IC951)

CAP VS

CAP ERROR

DRUM VS

DRUM ERROR

CAM 15V

CAM -7.5V

3.1V

D 2.8V

A 2.8V

1.8V

A 2.8V

D 2.8V

1.8V

MT 5V

D 2.8V

A 4.6V

A 2.8V

RP 4.6V

D1206

D1201

Q211

REG

IC201 IC202

AUDIO I/O

(4-45) (4-46)

EMPEG

VIDEO

PROCESS

(4-25) (4-29) (4-27) (4-31) (4-19) (4-17)

(4-37) (4-36) (4-37) (4-33)

IC951 IC101 IC952

PB POWER

TRANS

PW+, -

IC1602 IC1801 IC1802 IC1803 IC1605 IC1606

USB

I/F

(4-23) (4-21) (4-22) (4-22) (4-24) (4-23)

( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.

IC1203

VTR DD ON

(4-39)

IC1208

CHARGER

D 2.8V

VTR UNREG1

D1207

REG

IC1205

AUDIO

ADC&DAC

EEPROM

MIC

IC501IC601 IC701 IC801 IC404 IC401

VIDEO

MPEG AUDIO

PROCESS

I/O

STILL

PICTURE

PROCESS

DRIVE

MIC

i. LINK

I/F

32Mbit FLASH

MEMORY

L904

IC1201

IC402

CHARACTER GENERATER

IC902

REC/PB

AMP

(4-39)

BATTER IN DETECT

IC1206

TIMER

(4-20)(4-40)

PROCESS

64Mbit SDRAM

RESET

(4-40)

LI 3V

L1601

IC1207

EVR

INVERTER

XTAL OSC

Q9002,9004

(4-40)

EEPROM

112

113

17 71 73

98 151

114

IC1202

EEPROM

(4-41)

CAMERA

PROCESS

BASE BAND

PROCESS

HI CONTROL

CAMERA CONTROL

BATT SENS

ACV SENS

XRESET XRESET

VDD

BATT IN

VTR DD SENS

LANC ON

INIT CHARGE ON

VTR DD ON

CAM DD ON

FAST CHARGE

BATT/XEXT

XPOWER SW

XMODE SW

HI EVER SO

HI EVER SCK

(4-39)

MECHA

CONTROL

145

156

IC1103IC1102

(4-41)

FB1101

L401

LCD 4.6V

IC1601

3.1V

REG

DIGITAL

STILL

CONTROL

MS VCC ON

Q1606,1605

(4-39)

IB SO

IB SI

DD XCS

DVC PWM

XREEL HALL ON

IC403

COMPARATOR

(4-24)

VCC

171

158

(4-19)

LENS MR A 2.8V

IC701

CCD IMAGER

A 4.6V

A 2.8V

MT 5V

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (FK-1900)

(SEE PAGE 4-54)

CN001

DRUM ERROR

CAP ERROR

DRUM VS

(4-8)

(4-7)

S003

RESET

BT001 LITHIUM BATTERY

S001,002

POWER

OFF (CHG)

ON → MODE

CAMERA

NETWORK

MEMORY

VCR

(4-44)

IC1001

DRUM

MOTOR DRIVE

DRUM FG,PG AMP

MOTOR DRIVE

REEL FG AMP

TAPE TOP,END DET

DRUM,CAP ERROR AMP

F950

IC725 IC726

IRIS DRIVE

I HALL AMP

IC724

FOCUS/ZOOM

MOTOR DRIVE

ND FILTERDRIVE

V MECHA DECK

(SEE PAGE 4-51)

SENSOR VCC

TAPE LED A

MIC3

MR VCC

PW+, -

FOCUS/

ZOOM

SENSOR

CN2009

CN2008

CN2010

S REEL

SENSOR

T REEL SENSOR

TAPE LED

MIC ANTENNA

CAPSTAN MOTOR

PB HEAD

AMP

Q1003

R1002

IC727

ND PRE DRIVE ND HALL AMP

(4-7)

(4-8)

JK-209 BOARD(2/2)

Q1202

BATT SIG

I/F

CAM DD ON

CAM 15V

CAM -7.5V

3.1V

IC1901

D2.8V

A2.8V

IC1902 IC1903

GENERATOR

TIMING

CDS.

A/D CONV

(4-15,16)

CN2024

A4.6V

LI 3V LI 3V

CN5504

CN2026

LCD 4.6V

DCR-IP7BT/IP7E

LCD 2.8V

EVF 13.5V

LCD 4.6V

3.1V

CN2023

LCD 2.8V

LCD 15.5V

BL CONT

BL -15V

CN2022

EVER 3V

CPC

D 2.8V

CN2028

Q1901,1902

CAP_VS

D 2.8V

VTR UNREG1

MT 5V

ADJUSTMENTS

EVF 13.5V

XPOWER SW

XMODE SW

FOR

IC5500

REMOTE

COMMANDER

RECEIVER

(4-44)

IC1002

CAPSTAN MOTOR

DRIVE,

CAP FG AMP

(4-65)

TO POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/3)

(SEE PAGE 3-16)

CN2021

CN5500

LD-105 BOARD

DCR-IP7BT/IP7E

CN2027

MEMORY

STICK

3-13 3-14

Page 88

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

3-8. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/3)

BT-003 BOARD

LCD 4.6V

CN101

L302

CN301

VF-149 BOARD

DCR-IP7BT/IP7E

(4-59)

IC301

RGB

DRIVE

(The BT-003 board cannot be repaired nor adjusted. )

TO POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/3)

(SEE PAGE 3-14)

LCD 4.6V

LCD 2.8V

EVF 13.5V

LCD 4.6V

3.1V

( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on

the schematic diagram.

(4-59)

IC302

TIMING

GENERATOR

IC2201 IC2202 IC2203

(4-61,62)

ZOOM SW A/D CONV.

D2201,2202

EVF

BACK LIGHT

CN2202

CN2205

VDD

CN100

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (CF-1900)

(SEE PAGE 4-9)

LCD902

LCD UNIT

ZOOM SW

FP-366 (FLEXIBLE)

(SEE PAGE 4-69)

910

CN102

LCD 2.8V

LCD 15.5V

BL CONT

BL -15V

CN101

PD-142 BOARD

PANEL 2.8V

PANEL 15.5V

CN3102

IC3103

13.5V REG

(4-73)

L3105

IC3101

RGB

DRIVE

(4-73)

IC3102

TIMING

GENERATOR

BACK LIGHT

CONTROL

Q3109,3110,3118,3119

Q3103,3102

P OFF

R3153

CN3101

CN3103

VDD

BL ANODE

THERM B

BL CATHODE

LCD901

LCD

UNIT

LED901

BACK

LIGHT

3-16E

Page 89

SECTION 4

PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/2)

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

(DCR-IP7BT/IP7E)

BT-003 BOARD

ANT901

(The BT-003 board cannot be repaired nor adjusted.)

15PCN101

BT_XRST

BT_BMCTEST1

BT_WAKEUP

LCD_4.6V

BT_XSLEEP

BT_BMCTEST0

BT_CTS

BT_RXDT

BT_TXDT

BT_RTS

BT_RSSI

10 1413

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(CF-1900)

F_MR_A

A_2.8V

Z_MR_A

Z_MR_B

SP901

SPEAKER

MIC 901

L ch

R ch

GND

33P

CN301

33P

CN2023

CN2206

GND

MIC_L

GND

MIC_R

1 GND

2 EVF_R

3 EVF_G

4 EVF_B

5 GND

6 LCD_2.8V

7 LCD_2.8V

8 PHD

1GND

2EVF_R

3EVF_G

4EVF_B

9 PVD

5GND

6LCD_2.8V

7LCD_2.8V

8PHD

9PVD

LD-105 BOARD

CCD IMAGER

123456789

GND

VSHT

MSUB

51P

CN2021

GND

FLEXIBLE

FP-367

GND

BT_XRST

BT_BMCTEST1

BT_WAKEUP

LCD_4.6V

BT_XSLEEP

BT_BMCTEST0

BT_CTS

BT_RXDT

BT_TXDT

BT_RTS

BT_RSSI

GND

15PCN2026

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132333435363738394041424344454647484950

GND

CCD_OUT

(The LD-105 board cannot be repaired nor adjusted.)

GND

CAM_15V

CAM_-7.5V

GND

I_HALL_GAIN

I_HALL_OFFSET

VC-263 BOARD(1/2)

1/18 CH BLOCK 2/18 B BLOCK 3/18 CG BLOCK 4/18 MS2 BLOCK 5/18 MS1 BLOCK 6/18 VIDEO1 BLOCK 7/18 VIDEO2 BLOCK 8/18 AU1 BLOCK 9/18 Q BLOCK

GND

IRIS_PWM

A_4.5V

I_HALL_AD

2.8V

GND

SHUTTER_ON

10/18 AD BLOCK 11/18 I/O BLOCK 12/18 MIC BLOCK 13/18 TW BLOCK 14/18 MC BLOCK 15/18 MD BLOCK 16/18 AU BLOCK 17/18 CN BLOCK 18/18 DD BLOCK

PWM1

EN1

PWM0

EN0

MT_4.8V

MT_GND

HALL_REF

CAM_DD_ON

GND

ND_HALL_AD

GND

ND_HALL_GAIN

ND_HALL_OFFSET

IRIS_COM

ND_PWM

TEMPGND

TEMP

F_MR_B

12 163 17

S100-103

START/STOP, ZOOM, PHOTO(FREEZE), PHOTO(REC)

SP-

SP+

ZOOM_SENS_OUT2

123456789

N.C.

14P

CN2205

KEY_AD1

GND

X_PHOTO_FREEZE

LED_DA

1011121314

XHD_OUT

KEY_AD6

X_START_STOP

ZOOM_SENS_OUT1

3.1V

VF-149 BOARD(1/2)

XCS_EVFTG

10 RH_SO

12 RH_SCK

13 XSYS_RST

14 EVF_13.5V

15 EVF_13.5V

16 GND

17 G

18 GND

19 KEY_AD6

20 LCD_4.6V

21 LCD_4.6V

22 3.1V

23 ZOOM_SW_AD

24 XPHOTO_FREEZE

25 XS/S_SW

26 KEY_AD1

27 ZOOM_PWM

28 SP+

29 SP-

30 N.C

31 MIC_L

32 GND

10RH_SO

12RH_SCK

XCS_EVFTG

13XSYS_RST

14EVF_13.5V

15EVF_13.5V

16GND

17G

18GND

19KEY_AD6

20LCD_4.6V

21LCD_4.6V

223.1V

23ZOOM_SW_AD

24XPHOTO_FREEZE

25XS/S_SW

26KEY_AD1

27ZOOM_PWM

28SP+

33 MIC_R

29SP-

30N.C

31MIC_L

32GND

33MIC_R

155

VF-149 BOARD (2/2)

1/2 TG BLOCK 2/2 BL BLOCK

16PCN2202

TO VC-263 BOARD(2/2) FH(2/2)

1COM

5BLK

LCD902

6HCK1

7HCK2

EVF LCD UNIT

8HST

9RGT

10DWN

12STB

13VCK

14VST

VSS

VDD

LED902 BACKLIGHT UNIT

(DCR-IP7BT/IP7E)

31P

LM_+

LM_-

LM_+

CN2009

123456789

LM_+

DEW-

LM_-

DEW+

LM_+

LM_-

DEW+

LM_-

DEW-

MIC1

MIC2

MIC1

MIC2

MIC3

TAPE_END_C

S_REEL_S+

GND

101112131415161718192021222324252627282930

FP-140

MIC2

FLEXIBLE

101112131415161718192021222324252627282930

GND

MIC1

MIC3

MIC1

S_REEL_S+

TAPE_END_C

S_REEL_S-

S_REEL_H+

S_REEL_S-

TAPE_LED_A

S_REEL_H-

TAPE_LED_A

TAPE_LED_K

T_REEL_T+

TAPE_LED_K

T_REEL_H+

T_REEL_T-

T_REEL_H+

T_REEL_H-

GND

REC_PROOF_SW

TAPE_TOP_C

REC_PROOF_SW

XCC_DOWN

GND

XCC_DOWN

MSW_C

MSW_B

MSW_A

11P

CN2010

2 CAP_W

2CAP_W

1 CAP_W

1CAP_W

10P

CN2027

GND

VCC

SCLK

MEMORY STICK

INS

N.C.

CONNECTOR

DIO

VCC

N.C.

GND

9876543

11P

DRUM_PG_SENS

FP_PG_COM

GND

DRUM_FG_SENS

FP_PG_COM

DRUM_PG_SENS

DRUM_COM

GND

DRUM_COM

DRUM_FG_SENS

CN2007

1 PW+

2PW-

3 GND

4 GND

5 REC_M/E X_M

6 REC_M/S Y_M

7 GND

8 REC_P/E Y_P

9 REC_P/S X_P

10 PB_IN

11 GND

1PW+

2PW-

3GND

4GND

5REC_M/E X_M

6REC_M/S Y_M

7GND

8REC_P/E Y_P

9REC_P/S X_P

10PB_IN

11GND

DRUM_W

DRUM_V

DRUM_U

123456789

DRUM_U

CN2008 19P

18 CAP_V

19 CAP_V

18CAP_V

19CAP_V

17 CAP_U

17CAP_U

16 CAP_U

16CAP_U

15 G_GND

15G_GND

13 MR_GND

14 CFG2

13MR_GND

14CFG2

8 WHE+

9 WHE-

10 HE_GND

11 MR_VCC

12 CFG1

8WHE+

9WHE-

10HE_GND

11MR_VCC

12CFG1

3 HE_VCC

4 UHE+

5 UHE-

6 VHE+

7 VHE-

3HE_VCC

4UHE+

5UHE-

6VHE+

7VHE-

M903

MOTOR

FP-228

FLEXIBLE

DEW

SENSOR

DH-037 BOARD

MIC (ANTENNA)

D001

TAPE LED

Q001,Q002

TOP/END

SENSOR

S001

REC PROOF

H001,H002

S/T REEL SENSOR

FP-141

FLEXIBLE

S902

C.C DOWN

S901

MODE SW

VIDEO

HEAD

EVENODD

M901

DRUM MOTOR

M902

CAPSTAN MOTOR

MECHANISM DECK

FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/2)

4-1 4-2

Page 90

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (2/2)

TO VC-263 BOARD(1/2) FH(1/2)

40P

PANEL_2.8V

PANEL_15.5V

XCS_PANEL

KEY_AD2

KEY_AD0

PANEL_B

REG_GND

PANEL_G

PANEL_R

REG_GND

BL_CONT

XHI_SCK

REG_GND

BL_-15V

KEY_AD4

REG_GND

KEY_AD3

KEY_AD5

REG_GND

HI_SO

XVD

XHD

CN2022

VC-263 BOARD(2/2)

13579

CN2024

XSIRCS_IN

60P

11131517192123252729313335373941434547495153555759

A4.6V

USB_VBUS

XFTALLY_LED

TPA

GND

NTPA

BATT_UNREG

S_Y_I/O

VIDEO_I/O

S_C_I/O

GND

CAM_LED

VTR_LED

GND

XCHARGE_LED

MEM_LED

L_IO

R_IO

VTR_UNREG

VTR_UNREG2

VTR_UNREG1

B TO B

CN102

KEY_AD2

KEY_AD0

PANEL_B

REG_GND

PANEL_G

PANEL_R

REG_GND

PANEL_2.8V

PANEL_15.5V

BL_CONT

XHI_SCK

XCS_PANEL

HI_SO

REG_GND

XVD

XHD

BL_-15V

KEY_AD4

REG_GND

KEY_AD3

KEY_AD5

REG_GND

40P

10 1413

FP-366

BACK LIGHT, DISPLAY

(PANEL OPEN,REV.DET.SW)

S101,102

S105

(CONTROL)

S103,104

FLEXIBLE

CN101

17P

KEY_AD2

PANEL_B

PANEL_G

PANEL_R

REG_GND

PANEL_2.8V

PANEL_15.5V

BL_CONT

XHI_SCK

XCS_PANEL

REG_GND

BL_-15V

PANEL_REVERSE

REG_GND

HI_SO

12 163

PD-142 BOARD

15P

CN3102

HARNESS

XVD

XHD

HARNESS

15 BL_-15V

14 XHD

13 XVD

12 REG_GND

11 HI_SO

10 XCS_PANEL

9 XHI_SCK

8 BL_CONT

7 PANEL_15.5V

6 PANEL_2.8V

5 REG_GND

4 PANEL_R

3 PANEL_G

2 PANEL_B

1 KEY_AD2

S3101

BROWSER MENU

(DCR-IP7BT/IP7E)

LCD BACK LIGHT

ON OFF

S3102

155

CN3101

24P

→

CN3103

CN3104

1TEST2

2RGT

6PSIG

7HCK1

8HCK2

9CRext

10TEST

11REF

12HST

13WIDE

14CS

15VSSG

16VDDG

17VSS/GND

18VDD

19DWN

20EN

21VCK

22VST

23COM

24TEST1

6BL_CATHODE

5N.C.

4THERM_G

3THERM_B

2N.C.

1BL_ANODE

PSIG

EXT_BL

HD0

GND

COM

CPC

(FOR CHECK)

LCD901

2.5 INCH COLOR LCD UNIT

LED901

GND

XLANC_ON

GND

JACK_AD

XLANC_POWER_ON

JK-209 BOARD

D5507

(TALLY)

TPB

GND

NTPB

USB_D-

USB_D+

LI_3V

CN5501

AUDIO L

LANC_SIG

S_GND

LANC_DC

A/V

i LINK

(MICRO MV)

(USB)

DCR-IP7BT/IP7E

J5500

DC IN

110

3 NTPA

2 TPB

1 NTPB

S-C

AUDIO_R

JACK_AD

AUDIO_GND

VIDEO_IN/OUT

S-Y

CN5502

TPA

CN5503

VCC1

D-2

D+3

ID4

GND5

CN5504

10P

GND

246

10121416182022242628303234363840424446485052545658

EVER_3V

D_2.8V

DCR-IP7BT/IP7E

FAST_CHARGE

INIT_CHARGE_ON

D5514

(BLUETOOTH)

XBT_LED

XEJECT_SW

XPOWER_SW

XRESET_SW

BATT/XEXT

XMODE_SW

BATT_SIG

LANC_IN

LANC_OUT VTR_UNREG1

CN5500 31P

31XEJECT_SW

31 XEJECT_SW

30GND

30 GND

29XRESET_SW

29 XRESET_SW

28LI_3V

28 LI_3V

27VTR_UNREG

27 VTR_UNREG

26XCHARGE_LED

26 XCHARGE_LED

25XMODE_SW

25 XMODE_SW

24XPOWER_SW

24 XPOWER_SW

23XCAM_LED

23 XCAM_LED

22D_2.8V

22 D_2.8V

21XMEM_LED

21 XMEM_LED

20XVTR_LED

20 XVTR_LED

19BATT +

19 BATT +

18BATT +

18 BATT +

17BATT +

17 BATT +

16BATT +

16 BATT +

15BATT +

15 BATT +

14BATT +

14 BATT +

13BATT +

13 BATT +

12BATT +

12 BATT +

11BATT +

11 BATT +

10BATT_SIG

10 BATT_SIG

9BATT -

9 BATT -

8BATT -

8 BATT -

7 BATT -

7BATT -

6 BATT -

6BATT -

5 BATT -

5BATT -

4 BATT -

4BATT -

3 BATT -

3BATT -

2 BATT -

2BATT -

1 BATT -

1BATT -

CN001

31P

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(FK-1900)

BT001

POWER

OFF (CHG)

ON → MODE

CAMERA

MEMORY / NETWORK

VCR

RESET, OPEN/ EJECT

D001-004

VIDEO CAMERA MEMORY/NETWORK CHARGE

(DCR-IP7BT/IP7E)

S001,002

S003,004

LITHIUM BATTERY

(PANEL REVERSE)

BT901

BATTERY

TERMINAL

FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (2/2)

4-3 4-4

Page 91

4-2. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

THIS NOTE IS COMMON FOR WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS (In addition to this, the necessary note is printed in each block)

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

(For printed wiring boards)

• b: Pattern from the side which enables seeing. (The other layers' patterns are not indicated.)

• Through hole is omitted.

• Circled numbers refer to waveforms.

• There are few cases that the part printed on diagram isn’t

mounted in this model.

• Chip parts.

Transistor

21321321

Diode

(For schematic diagrams)

• All capacitors are in µF unless otherwise noted. p: pF.

50V or less are not indicated except for electrolytics and tantalums.

• Chip resistors are 1/10W unless otherwise noted.

kΩ=1000Ω, MΩ=1000kΩ.

• Caution when replacing chip parts.

New parts must be attached after removal of chip. Be careful not to heat the minus side of tantalum capacitor, Because it is damaged by the heat.

• Some chip part will be indicated as follows.

Example C541 L452

22U 10UH TA A 2520

Kinds of capacitor

Temperature characteristics

External dimensions (mm)

• Constants of resistors, capacitors, ICs and etc with XX indicate

that they are not used. In such cases, the unused circuits may be indicated.

• All variable and adjustable resistors hav e characteristic curve B,

unless otherwise noted.

• Signal name

XEDIT→ EDIT PB/XREC → PB/REC

• 2 : non flammable resistor

• 1 : fusible resistor

• C : panel designation

• A : B+ Line *

• B : B– Line *

• J : IN/OUT direction of (+,–) B LINE. *

• C : adjustment for repair. *

• Circled numbers refer to waveforms. *

*Indicated by the color red.

Note :

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

Note :

Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.

(Measuring conditions voltage and waveform)

• Voltages and waveforms are measured between the measurement points and ground when camera shoots color bar chart of pattern box. They are reference values and reference waveforms. * (VOM of DC 10 MΩ input impedance is used.).

• Voltage v alues change depending upon input impedance of V OM used.) *

1. Connection

2. Adjust the distance so that the output waveform of Fig. a and

the Fig. b can be obtain.

Fig. a (Video output terminal output waveform)

Pattern box

Front of the lens

Yellow

Cyan

White

Magenta

Green

AABBA=B

Red

Cyan

White

Green

Yellow

Blue

Magenta

Fig.b (Picture on monitor TV)

1.5 m

Red

Blue

Electron beam scanned frame

CRT picture frame

When indicating parts by reference number, please include the board name.

4-5

Page 92

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-75 for waveforms.

LND795

IRIS_DRIVE+

IRIS METER

LND792

IRIS_DRIVE-

LND791

LND790

ND FILTER METER

LND785

LND784

LND783

LND782

LND781

LND780

LND770

LND777

LND775

LND776

LND774

LND773

LND771

LND772

ND_DRIVE+

ND_GND

ND_DRIVE-

FOCUS(-)

FOCUS(+)

Z_MR_VCC

F_MR_B

F_MR_A

F_MR_GND

F_MR_VCC

Z_MR_A

Z_MR_B

Z_MR_GND

ZOOM-

ZOOM+

LD-105 BOARD is replaced as a block. So that this PRINTED WIRING BOARD is omitted.

IRIS_BIAS+

X780

IRIS_HALL-

HT-120C

IRIS_BIAS-

IRIS_HALL+

ND_BIAS+

X781

ND_HALL-

HT-120C

ND_BIAS-

ND_HALL+

TEMPGND

TEMPOUT

TH780

LD-105 BOARD

CCD IMAGER

XX MARK:NO MOUNT

NO MARK:REC/PB MODE R :REC MODE P :PB MODE

:The Semiconductors shown by the Mark. Cannot be measured of their voltage and wavefroms due to machines mechanical stracture.

LENS UNIT

FOCUS MOTOR

ZOOM MOTOR

LND796

L721

10uH

470k R763

R760 10k

Q723

EC3201C-PM-TL

DRIVER

R761

47k

R762

22k

TEMP

F_MR_B

F_MR_A

Z_MR_A

Z_MR_B

SHUTTER_ON

PWM1

EN1

PWM0

EN0

CAM_DD_ON

VSHT

MSUB

GND

CCD_OUT

GND

CAM_15V

GND

CAM_-7.5V

GND

I_HALL_GAIN

I_HALL_OFFSET

IRIS_PWM

GND

I_HALL_AD

A_4.5V

2.8V

GND

SHUTTER_ON

PWM1

EN1

PWM0

EN0

MT_4.8V

MT_GND

CAM_DD_ON

HALL_REF

ND_HALL_AD

GND

ND_HALL_OFFSET

ND_HALL_GAIN

GND

IRIS_COM

ND_PWM

TEMPGND

TEMP

F_MR_B

F_MR_A

A_2.8V

Z_MR_A

Z_MR_B

GND

20 21

51P

TO VC-263 BOARD(17/18) CN2021

(SEE PAGE 4-47)

Q721

EC3201C-PM-TL

DRIVER

22k

R730

330

R731

C727

0.1u B

R733

R732 1200

C725

FB720

0.1u 0uH

L720 10uH

R744

C_OUT

R726

GND

C_IN+

C_IN-

R764

12k

R727 4700

R728

47k

10k

C749

IC724

FOCUS/ZOOM

MOTOR CONTROL,

ND DRIVE,

SHUTTER DRIVE,

SHUTTER_ON

CAM_DD_ON

1/10W

OUT4B

C722

3300p

R722

2012

EN4

PWM0

R724

100k

IRIS DRIVE

IC725

WTGA-NJM12902C

B_IN+

R723

C721

0.022u B

IN3

IN4

EN3

EN0

PWM1

EN1

C726

0.033u 1608

D_IN+

D_IN-14D_OUT

B_IN-

B_OUT

R725 100k

C723

0.1u B

1608

C724

1608

C728

0.1u B

C729

47u

6.3V TA BB

R720

22k

CL011

CL008

CL007

CL002

CL001

TEMP

C780

C781

10u

6.3V

1608

L780 10uH

F_MR_B

F_MR_A

Z_MR_A

Z_MR_B

0.5%

R721

10k

0.5%

D720

MA4L11100AS0

VDD

OUT1B

VM12OUT1A3PGND4OUT2A5OUT3A6PGND7OUT4A8VM49IN110EN111IN212EN2

C720

0.1u B

D721

1SS401(TE85L)

PGND

WTGA-UPD16877W

OUT2B

EC3201C-PM-TL

DRIVER

OUT3B

VM2_3

IC724

A_OUT

A_IN-

A_IN+

Vcc

Q720

PGND

10 14 1913

C734

0.47u 1608

C731

0.01u

R734

180k

A_OUT

A_IN-

A_IN+

Vcc

R736

180k

C730

0.01u B

1608

IC726IC725

WTGA-NJM12902C

C735

0.01u B

C732

6.3V B

1608

IRIS DRIVE

B_IN+

D_IN-14D_OUT

IC726

B_IN-

C733

0.01u

22k

R737

R738

18k

R735

39k

D_IN+

GND

C_IN+

C_IN-

C_OUT

B_OUT

R739

10k

12 163 17

R11.8

IC701

CCD IMAGER

CCD_OUT

VDD9RG10SUB11VL12H113H214RCSUB

R14.9P0R14.1

CL705

C737

0.022u 1608

C739 470p

B R750 470k

C738

0.01u B

0.001u

R740 5600

R742 180k

R741 180k

C736

Q722

EC3201C-PM-TL

DRIVER

R765

R743 180k

R746

R747

15k

R745

R748

10k

R749

155

V1V2V3

R-0.3

GND6GND

R9.8

R1.7P0R1.3P0R9.2

R-7.6

A_OUT

A_IN-

A_IN+

Vcc

R751

22k

C740

R-.03P0R-7.1P0R-7.1

R702

CL700

R753

C741

0.001u B

WTGA-NJM12902C

R752

10k

1V42V33V24V15

R11.8

C700

C706

0.1u B

2012

IC727

ND DRIVE

IC727

B_IN+

:(DCR-IP5/IP7BT)

:(DCR-IP5E/IP7E)

ICX280DKF-13

ICX281DKF-13

IC701

C701

R710

R754

D_IN+

D_IN-14D_OUT

B_IN-

B_OUT

C742

0.1u B

R11.1

R755 220k

R4.2/P0

R711

2SC4250(T5LSONY1)

R14.9/P0

R707

R706 3300

C705

10u 10V

TA AA

GND

C_IN+

C_IN-

C_OUT

XXR756

BUFFER

R708

Q701

UN9213J-(K8).SO

INVERTER

R709

L700

C702

Q700

FB700

0uH

C743

0.1u

100uH

C704

C703

10u

0.1u 20V

1608

R712

C745

47u

6.3V BB

C748

0.1u B

R758

R759

330

C746

0.001u B

C744

0.01u B

R757

22k

C747

0.47u B

1608

CCD IMAGER

LD-105

SIGNAL PATH

VIDEO SIGNAL

CHROMA

REC

Precautions Upon Replacing CCD imager

The LD-105 board mounted as a repair part is not equipped

•

with a CCD imager.

Y Y/CHROMA

When replacing this board, remove the CCD imager from the

old one and mount it onto the new one.

•

If the CCD imager has been replaced, carry out all the

adjustments for the camera section.

As the CCD imager may be damaged by static electricity from

•

its structure, handle it carefully like for the MOS IC.

In addition, ensure that the receiver is not covered with dusts

nor exposed to strong light.

4-7 4-8

Page 93

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(CF-1900)

R003

R004

R001

R002

START/STOP

ZOOM

PHOTO

S100

S103

S102

(FREEZE)

S101

(REC)

SOL100

SP901 SPEAKER

N.C.

SP+

SP-

ZOOM_SENS_OUT2

3.1V

ZOOM_SENS_OUT1

X_START_STOP

KEY_AD6

XHD_OUT

LED_DA

X_PHOTO_FREEZE

GND

KEY_AD1

TO VF-149 BOARD(2/2) CN2205

(SEE PAGE 4-62)

Schematic diagram and printed wiring board of the VC-263 board are not shown. Pages from 4-11 to 4-50 are not shown.

SIGNAL PATH

REC

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(CF-1900)is replaced as a block. So that this PRINTED WIRING BOARD are omitted.

AUDIO

SIGNAL

4-9

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK

CF-1900

Page 94

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

FP-140 (TAPE TOP/END SENSOR), FP-141 (MODE SWITCH), FP-228 (DEW SENSOR) FLEXIBLE BOARDS AND DH-037 (MIC) BOARD

FP-140, FP-141, FP-228 and DH-037 are replaced as a block.

LM+

TO MECHA CONTROL BLOCK

(SEE PAGE 4-43 of Level 3)

TAPE_END_C

TAPE_LED_A

TAPE_LED_B

TAPE_TOP_C

REC_PROOF_SW

XCC_DOWN

LM+

LM-

DEW+

DEW-

MIC2

MIC3

MIC1 MIC1

GND

S_REEL_S+

S_REEL_H+

S_REEL_S-

S_REEL_H-

T_REEL_T+

T_REEL_H+

T_REEL_T-

T_REEL_H-

GND

MSW_C MSW_B

MSW_A

1 2

3 4

11 12

14 15 16

21 22

27 28

29 30 31

FP-141 FLEXIBLE (CONDUCTOR SIDE)

FP-228 FLEXIBLE

DEW SENSOR

M903

LOADING MOTOR

HW-105A-CDE-T

S REEL SENSOR

HW-105A-CDE-T

T REEL SENSOR

H002

H001

REC PROOF

S902

C.C. DOWN

S001

DH-037 BOARD (MIC)

Q002 PN166.SO TAPE END

D001

GL100MN1MP1

TAPE LED

Q001 PN166.SO TAPE TOP

FP-140 FLEXIBLE

S902

(C.C. DOWN)

S901

(MODE SWITCH)

FP-140 FLEXIBLE (COMPONENT SIDE)

1-682-008-

S001

(REC PROOF)

Q001

(TAPE TOP)

H001

(T REEL SENSOR)

D001

(TAPE LED)

H002

(S REEL SENSOR)

T APE TOP/END SENSOR

FP-140

MODE SWITCH

FP-141

CODE A

S901

CODE B

CODE C

FP-141 FLEXIBLE

DEW SENSOR

FP-228

MIC

DH-037

M903

(LOADING MOTOR)

FP-228 FLEXIBLE

DEW

SENSOR

1-677-049-

DH-037 BOARD (MIC)

1-682-006-

4-52

1-682-007-

Q002

(TAPE END)

Page 95

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (FK-1900) PRINTED WIRING BOARD

MA8120-TX

D005

30P

CN001

1 BATT -

2 BATT -

3 BATT -

4 BATT -

BATT -

6 BATT -

7 BATT -

8 BATT -

9 BATT -

10 BATT_SIG

11 BATT +

BATT +

13 BATT +

14 BATT +

15 BATT +

16 BATT +

17 BATT +

18 BATT +

19 BATT +

XVTR_LED

XMEM_LED

22 D_2.8V

23 XCAM_LED

XPOWER_SW

XMODE_SW

26 XCHARGE_LED

VTR_UNREG

28 LI_3V

XRESET_SW

30 GND

XEJECT_SW

R004

470

S004

LND003

LND002

D003

TLGU1008(T05,SOY)

1608

R005

MA8120-TX

D007

D002

TLGU1008(T05,SOY)

D001

TLGU1008(T05,SOY)

BT001

R002

470

S002

LND004

CHASSIS GND

D004

TLAU1008(T05,SOY)

LND001

MA8120-TX

D006

S003

VDR001

VDR002

LND005

CHASSIS GND

S001

BT901

BATT_SIG

BATT +

BATT -

LITHIUM BATTERY

(SEE PAGE 4-65)

TO JK-209 BOARD CN5500

BATTERY TERMINAL

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(FK-1900)

645

893

(MEMORY/NETWORK)

(VCR)

(CAMERA)

(CHARGE)

→

OPEN/

EJECT

RESET

POWER

OFF(CHG)

ON MODE

CAMERA

MEMORY/ NETWORK

VCR

(DCR-IP7BT/IP7E)

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (FK-1900)

BT001

(LITHIUM BATTERY)

S001

OFF(CHG)

MODE

CAMERA

MEMORY/ NETWORK

VCR

POWER

S002

S003

RESET

1-476-812-

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (FK-1900)

FP-367 (IP7BT/IP7E)

4-53 4-54

S004

(EJECT)

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK

FK-1900

Page 96

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

VF-149 (B/W EVF) PRINTED WIRING BOARD

— Ref. No. VF-149 Board; 10,000 Series —

B/W EVF

VF-149

For printed wiring board

• Refer to page 4-79 for parts location.

• This board consists of multiple layers. However, only

the sides (layers) A and B are shown.

• Chip parts Transistor Diode

There are a few cases that the part printed on this diagram isn’t mounted in this model.

4-55 4-56

VF-149 (B/W EVF)

VC-263 CAMERA, DSC, VIDEO, AUDIO, SERVO HI/MECHA CONTROL, DC/DC CONVERTER

Page 97

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

4-584-57

VF-149

B/W EVF

Page 98

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-55 for printed wiring board.

• Refer to page 4-75 for waveforms.

VF-149 BOARD(1/2)

RGB DRIVE,TIMING GEN.(TG BLOCK)

-REF.NO.:10,000 SERIESXX MARK:NO MOUNT

NO MARK:REC/PB MODE

TO VC-263 BOARD(17/18) CN2023

(SEE PAGE 4-47)

33PCN301

1GND

2EVF_R

3EVF_G

4EVF_B

5GND

6LCD_2.8V

7LCD_2.8V

8PHD

9PVD

10RH_SO

11XCS_EVFTG

12RH_SCK

13XSYS_RST

14EVF_13.5V

15EVF_13.5V

16GND

17G

18GND

19KEY_AD6

20LCD_4.6V

21LCD_4.6V

223.1V

23ZOOM_SW_AD

24XPHOTO_FREEZE

25XS/S_SW

26KEY_AD1

27ZOOM_PWM

28SP+

29SP-

30N.C

31MIC_L

32GND

33MIC_R

SIGNAL PATH

CHROMA Y/CHROMA

REC

XCS_EVFTG

VIDEO SIGNAL

RH_SO

RH_SCK

L302 10uH 1610

BLACK

BLACK_IN

FRP

1.4

FRP

PRG

BGP

2.7

N.C

BGP

IC301

RGB DRIVE

IC301

RB5P004AL1

0.9

2.8

SHB

SHG

1.4

0.9

R305 2700

SHA

R306

47k

R308

22k

SHR

SHG

0.9

0.902.82.6

SHG35SHR

XCLR

C309

C_BG

XC.SAVE

XSCK

XCS

Vcc1

TRAP_ADJ

LPF_ADJ

XP.SAVE

B_IN

G_IN

R_IN

0.1u B

R304

15k

1.5

0.7

EXT_DA

R_INJECT

XSH.SAVE2SH_R3SH_G4SH_B5SH_A6N.C7BIAS8OP_IN+9OP_IN-10OP_OUT11VCO12COM_DC

2.8

0.9

SHR

2.7

XCLP

TEST

SBLK

1.4

FRP

TEST

2.6

XSCK

2.8

VDD

2.8

XCS

2.1

1.8

VDO

2.8

XVD

C305

0.1u B

R320

C304

C303

R321

0.1u

XC_SAVE

XHI_SCK

XCS_EVF

XTG_SO

HI_SO

XVD

XTG_SO

XCS_EVF

XP_SAVE

BGP

BLACK

FRP

R302

R303

33k

± 0.5%

C306

0.01u B

C307

0.01u

C308

0.01u

R301

C301

470k

10u

6.3V

L301 10uH 1610

C302

C321

0.1u

10u

6.3V

PHD

PVD

GND

KEY_AD6

LCD_4.6V

3.1V

ZOOM_SW_AD

XPHOTO_FREEZE

XS/S_SW

KEY_AD1

ZOOM_PWM

SP+

SP-

MIC_L

A_GND

MIC_R

AUDIO

SIGNAL

TO(2/2)

FB301

1.2

2.8

2.6

2.5

2.8

1.2

2.8

1.8

0uH

10 1413

C312

3.3u 20V

13.6

27VP28

PFRP

XVP.SAVE

Vcc2

P_DC_DET

B_DC_DET

G_DC_DET

R_DC_DET

COM_OUT

1.4

1.2

3.4

6.5

C311

R311

0.1u 100k

R307

68k

SHB

2.8

R310

L303

C310 560p

1608

SHA

0.9

SHA33SHB

3.3uH

R309

± 5%

68k

2520

2.8

1.4

RPD

GND

TEST

IC302

TIMING GENERATOR

IC302

CXD3501AR-T4

COM_IN

XC_SAVE

XCSAVE

GND2

GND1

VREF

Vcc3

C314

0.01u

1.4

OSCI

1SV290(TPL3)

C313

0.001u

1.4

OSCO

R312

100

6.8

1.7

R313

100

6.8

1.7

R314

100

6.8

1.7

D301

C323

6.7

13.6

R330

13.1

6.5

R327

C316 100p

XP_SAVE

2.8

XSTBY

BLK

HCK1

HCK2

HST

RGT

VDD

DCG/CLR

STB

VCK

VST

N.C

12 163 17

C317

2.2u B

2012

C318

2.2u B

2012

C319

2.2u B

2012

R317 100k

1.4

2.8

2.3

2.8

1.4

R319 100k

R318

100k

C320

4.7u B

3216

R323

R322

R325

R324

R328

R329

33k

± 0.5%

R316

100k

TG24

TG23

TG22

TG21

TG20

TG18

TG17

TG16

TG15

TG14

C324

C322

2012

TG24

TG23

TG22

TG21

TG20

TG18

TG17

TG16

TG15

TG14

C2204

2.2u

2012 F

155

16PCN2202

LED_DA

LED_ON/OFF

XHD_OUT

1COM

5BLK

LCD902

6HCK1

EVF LCD UNIT

7HCK2

8HST

9RGT

10DWN

12STB

13VCK

14VST

VSS

VDD

TO(2/2)

HD2HDO3XWRT4CMPO5DETIN6GND7TESTI8LED9PWM10-IN11+IN12TEST

0.3

XHD

2.8

B/W EVF

VF-149 (1/2)

4-59 4-60

Page 99

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-55 for printed wiring board.

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

VF-149 BOARD(2/2)

BACK LIGHT(BL BLOCK)

-REF.NO.:10,000 SERIESXX MARK:NO MOUNT

NO MARK:REC/PB MODE

TO(1/2)

LED_DA

LED_ON/OFF

XHD_OUT

GND

D2203

MA8120-TX

C2201

UN9213J-(K8).SO

LED DRIVE

Q2202

4.6

Q2201

4.6

UN9113J-(K8).SO

LED DRIVE

4.6

1.7

R2205

56k

Q2204

2SC4738F-Y/GR(TPL3)

LED DRIVE

1.1

R2206

1800

1.1

C2202

0.1u

Q2203

2SB1462J-QR(K8).SO

LED DRIVE

R2201

22k

0.5%

2.8

R2202

56k

0.5%

R2218

1.1

R2219

1.7

C2203

0.01u

TH2201

22k

R2203

8200

R2204

1800

R2207

D2201

1.6

0.4

D2201,2202

NSCW215-T39

1.6

XP6501-(TX).SO

0.4

R2208

8754

D2202

1.1

Q2205

LED DRIVE

LED902

(BACKLIGHT UNIT)

IC2202

R2210

18k

R2217

47k

01ZA8.2(TPL3)

D2204

C2216

0.47u 1608

R2216

12k

IC2203

BUFFER

IC2203

TA75S01F(TE85R)

1.0

IN+

123

VSS

3.4

IN-

VCC

OUT

4.6

3.4

R2209

1800

C2206

0.1u

1608

R2211

150k

C2205

0.22u

2012

IC2202

TA75S01F(TE85R)

2.8

IN+

123

VCC

VSS

2.8

IN-

R2214

6800

2.8

3.3

OUT

IN+

123

VCC

VSS

IN-

OUT

IC2201

TA75S01F(TE85R)

BUFFER

4.6

2.8

4.6

0.1

IC2201

AMP

SIGNAL PATH

AUDIO

SIGNAL

REC

CL001

ZOOM_SW_AD

SP+

SP-

LCD_4.6V

3.1V

ZOOM_PWM

TO(1/2)

XS/S_SW

KEY_AD6

XPHOTO_FREEZE

KEY_AD1

MIC_L

A_GND

MIC_R

R2215

R2220

0.1u

(Note)

LND001

GND

14P

CN2205

N.C.

SP+

SP-

ZOOM_SENS_OUT2

3.1V

ZOOM_SENS_OUT1

X_START_STOP

KEY_AD6

XHD_OUT

LED_DA

X_PHOTO_FREEZE

GND

KEY_AD1

CN2206

GND

MIC_L

GND

MIC_R

TO CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (CF-1900)

(SEE PAGE 4-9)

MIC UNIT MIC901

L ch

R ch

Note :

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

Note:Capacitor is mounted to the location

where R2220 are printed.

Note :

Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.

4-61 4-62

BACK LIGHT

VF-149 (2/2)

Page 100

DCR-IP5/IP5E/IP7BT/IP7E

JK-209 (JACK) PRINTED WIRING BOARD

— Ref. No. JK-209 Board; 10,000 Series —

A/V

For printed wiring board

• Refer to page 4-79 for parts location.

• This board consists of multiple layers. However, only

the sides (layers) A and B are shown.

• Chip parts Transistor Diode

LD-105 (CCD IMAGER)

BT-003 (BLUETOOTH) (IP7BT/IP7E)

PD-142 (RGB DRIVE, TIMING GENERATOR)

JACK

JK-209

JK-209 (JACK)

There are a few cases that the part printed on this diagram isn’t mounted in this model.

4-63 4-64

Sony DCR-IP5, DCR-IP5E, DCR-IP7BT, DCR-IP7E Service manual

Specifications and Main Features

Frequently Asked Questions

User Manual

SERVICE NOTE

SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION

GENERAL

DISASSEMBLY

2-1. LCD SECTION (PD-142 BOARD)

2-2. CABINET (R) SECTION

2-3. LENS SECTION (LD-105 BOARD)

2-4. VC-263 BOARD

2-5. MECHANISM DECK

2-6. EVF SECTION (VF-149 BOARD)

2-7. CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (CF-1900), SPEAKER

2-8. JK-209 BOARD

2-9. PARTS UNIT (HINGE)

2-10.BT-003 BOARD (IP7BT/IP7E), CABINET (L) ASSEMBLY

2-11.GRIP CABINET ASSEMBLY, CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (FK-1900)

2-12.CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION

2-13.FLEXIBLE BOARDS LOCATION

BLOCK DIAGRAMS

3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/5)

3-2. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2)

3-3. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/5)

3-4. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (4/5)

3-5. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (5/5)

3-6. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/3)

3-7. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/3)

3-8. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/3)

PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/2)

FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (2/2)

4-2. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

LD-105

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(CF-1900)

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(FK-1900)

VF-149

JK-209